JP2024072668A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve performance of a game machine.SOLUTION: The number of game tokens displayed on a game token number display device is added up and displayed in an increment display when a lending switch is operated and a lending point of 50 is added to the game token number display device, and time until the number of game tokens displayed on the game token number display device is added by 50 points as the lending point completely is generally within 300 ms as a communication period of game machine information notification.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 60

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, slot machines (reel type gaming machines) are known as one type of gaming machine. One type of slot machine known is a point-type slot machine that allows players to play using points stored on a card without using medals (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-56055 A

The problem this invention aims to solve is to improve the performance of the gaming machine.

The present invention relates to
A total score indicator;
A total score storage area;
The gaming machine and the rental unit can communicate with each other at a predetermined cycle.
The total score display is capable of displaying the total score stored in the total score storage area;
When a rental switch provided in the rental unit is operated, a predetermined number of rental points can be added to the total points stored in the total points storage area;
a predetermined sound can be output when the lending switch is operated to add a predetermined number of lending points to the total score stored in the total score storage area;
When the lending switch is operated to add and display a predetermined number of lending points on the total score display, the total score display can display the lending points in increments, the time required for the total score display to add the predetermined number of lending points is approximately within a predetermined period, and the output period of the predetermined sound when the number of game medals displayed on the game medal number display device is displayed in increments exceeds 300 ms.
In this game machine, the output time of the predetermined sound that can be output when the lending switch is operated to add and display a predetermined number of lending points on a total score display exceeds a predetermined time.

This invention can improve the performance of the gaming machine.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the front door of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the reel arrangement of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a condition device of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the objects of the internal lottery of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the result of an internal lottery in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the result of an internal lottery in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the contents of messages used for communication between the gaming machine and the rental unit of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the contents of a gaming machine information notification, which is one of the messages output from the gaming machine of the present embodiment to the rental unit. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the gaming machine type included in the gaming machine information notification output by the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a message when gaming machine performance information is set, among the gaming machine information notifications output by the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a message when gaming machine installation information is set, among the gaming machine information notifications output by the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a message when hall control/fraud monitoring information is set, among gaming machine information notifications output by the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a basic communication sequence between the gaming machine and the rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the start-up sequence of the gaming machine and rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the start-up sequence of the gaming machine and rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the counting notification sequence between the gaming machine and the rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a lending notification sequence between the gaming machine and the lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a recovery sequence from a communication abnormality between the gaming machine and the rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a sequence when a communication error occurs during counting between the gaming machine and the rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a sequence when a communication abnormality occurs during rental between the gaming machine and the rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart relating to counting control of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the score awarding process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart relating to the gaming machine information management of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a transmission pattern of a gaming machine information notification after the initial startup of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a second transmission pattern of hall control/fraud monitoring information among the gaming machine information notifications of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a pattern in which the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the gaming machine installation information, among the gaming machine information notifications of the gaming machine according to this embodiment, coincides. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a pattern in which the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, among the gaming machine information notifications of the gaming machine according to this embodiment, coincides. Figure 35 is a comparative example to explain the action and effect of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and shows an undesirable example in which the number of balls inserted signal ON and the BB status signal ON are transmitted at the same time as the hall control/fraud monitoring information. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a preferred example in which the input number signal ON and the BB state signal ON are transmitted with hole control/fraud monitoring information at different times in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 37 is a comparative example to explain the action and effect of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and shows an undesirable example in which the payout number signal ON and the BB status signal ON are transmitted at different times in the hall control/fraud monitoring information. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a preferred example in which the payout number signal ON and the BB state signal ON are transmitted with the hall control/fraud monitoring information at the same timing in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the counting execution flag setting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the game progress main processing of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 45 is a diagram showing the advantageous zone end processing of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 46 is a diagram showing <Pattern 1> of advantageous zone clear counter management of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 47 is a diagram showing <Pattern 2> of advantageous zone clear counter management of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 48 is a diagram showing <Pattern 3> of advantageous zone clear counter management of the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart regarding receiving a rental notification for a gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the interrupt process of the game media count control means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart relating to the game medal count check process in the interrupt process of the game media count control means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart relating to the count button check process in the count control process of the game media count control means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart relating to the communication abnormality 2 to 6 check process in the lending notification receiving process of the game media count control means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation of the operation advance notification state and the end of game notification state of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 55 is a flowchart regarding advantageous zone clear counter management (advantageous zone difference counter) of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 56 is a flowchart regarding advantageous zone clear counter management (advantageous zone difference counter) of the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 57 is a time chart regarding the complete signal of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart relating to the generation of gaming machine performance information for a gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the change in the display state of the game media number display unit due to counting in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the change in the display state of the game media number display unit due to the rental of a gaming machine according to this embodiment.

<Terminology>
"Medals (number of medals)", "game media (number of game media)", "game value", and "points (points or points)" are synonymous, and may be referred to as medals as a concept even if there are no actual medals. "Bet", "BET", and "insertion" regarding game media are synonymous, and all are acts of betting game media. "Performance selection switch P8W" and "Performance decision switch P8E" may be collectively referred to as "sub-switches". When expressing a hexadecimal number, it is written as "0x00" or "00h", and if there is no special notation before or after the number, it is expressed in decimal. "Reel" may be referred to as "rotor", all of which are synonymous. "Storage means" may be referred to as "RWM", "RAM", or "storage area", all of which are synonymous. "Grant" used in "grant of game media" or "grant of points" may be referred to as "payout", all of which are synonymous. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" depending on its function, but in both cases they refer to the same switch. The "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may each be provided as different switches. "Pattern", "piece", and "piece" are synonymous, and all refer to the pattern area drawn on the reel. "Playable" refers to a state in which the gaming machine and the rental unit are connected and both are powered on, or, within that state, a state in which play cannot proceed on the gaming machine alone and is not in "initial setting when powered on", "settings being changed", "settings being confirmed", or "error state".

The following describes (outline) the features of the gaming machine P according to this embodiment. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

<Description of the Appearance of the Gaming Machine P>
First, the basic structure of the gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1. In the gaming machine P, a front door P2 (also called a front mask, a front door, a front panel, a door, or a door) and a cabinet P1 (also called a rear box or a housing) are locked by a hinge structure. The hinge structure is provided on the left side when the gaming machine P is viewed from the front, and is configured so that the front door P2 can be opened with the left side as an axis. In order to open the front door P2, a door opening key is inserted into a cylinder provided on the right side when the gaming machine P is viewed from the front (provided on the right side of the front door P2) when the gaming machine P is viewed from the front, and the door opening key is rotated to the right, thereby making it possible to change from a locked state to an unlocked state (an unlocked state). In addition, it may be possible to cancel a door opening error by rotating the door opening key to the left while it is inserted into the cylinder of the front door P2. In addition, the reversible errors are not limited to door opening errors, but may include all or some of the following types of errors that can be recovered from by operating a reset switch (specifically, insertion request communication errors, settlement request communication errors, payout request communication errors, game media number control reception abnormalities, main control reception abnormalities, total score upper limit abnormalities, total score threshold reached state, lending device connection abnormalities, lending serial number abnormalities, lending device communication abnormality 1 (also referred to as "communication error 1"), lending device communication abnormality 2 (also referred to as "communication error 2"), lending device communication abnormality 3 (also referred to as "communication error 3"), lending device communication abnormality 4 (also referred to as "communication error 4"), lending device communication abnormality 5 (also referred to as "communication error 5"), lending device communication abnormality 6 (also referred to as "communication error 6"), etc.).

A door switch is provided near the cylinder on the back side of the front door P2, and it is possible to determine whether the front door P2 is open or closed by detecting whether the door switch is on or off.

The door switch can move back and forth using an elastic member such as a spring, and when the front door P2 is closed, the tip of the door switch comes into contact with the door switch receiving portion provided on the cabinet P1, causing the door switch to be pushed in. When the door switch is pushed in, an optical sensor provided on the door switch is blocked from light, detecting that the door switch is ON and determining that the door is closed.

In addition, when the front door P2 is open, the tip of the door switch is not in contact with the door switch receiving portion provided on the cabinet P1, and the door switch is in a protruding state due to the biasing force of an elastic member such as a spring. When the door switch is in a protruding state, the optical sensor provided on the door switch detects that the door switch is OFF because light is not blocked, and it is determined that the door is open.

The process of determining whether the door is open or not is performed for each interrupt process by the main control board P15. In the input port reading process within the interrupt process by the main control board P15, the input port corresponding to the door switch is checked to determine whether the door is open or not based on whether the door switch is ON or OFF.

The above-mentioned process for determining whether the door is open is not limited to this, and the correspondence between the detection result of the door switch being ON or OFF and the determination of whether the door is open may be reversed. For example, the door may be determined to be open by detecting that the door switch is ON, and the door may be determined to be closed by detecting that the door switch is OFF. In addition, the door switch may also be one that detects whether the door is open or closed using various sensors such as a proximity sensor, or the door may be opened by detecting that the door open key has been turned to the right.

On the front side of the front door P2, there are provided a start switch P3, a left stop switch P4L, a center stop switch P4C, a right stop switch P4R (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "stop switches P4"), a MAX bet switch P5M, a 1 bet switch P5O (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "bet switches P5"), a settlement switch P6, a counting switch P7 (sometimes referred to as "counting button"), a performance selection switch P8W, a performance decision switch P8E, and the like. In addition, as display units for notifying information related to the game, a game media number display unit P9 (also referred to as a "total score display" or "total score display unit") and a number of awards display unit (not shown) are provided. In addition, there are provided a display window P10 for making the reels visible, and an image display unit (image display unit P11M, image display unit P11S) for increasing interest in the game.

In addition, there is a rental unit as an external device that can communicate with the gaming machine P. When the gaming machine P is turned on and the rental unit is turned on, the VL signal turns ON (also called "VL=ON" or "VL=1"), enabling communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit.

The VL signal may be ON for only a moment (10 ms) due to chattering when the gaming machine P or the rental unit is powered on, so the VL signal may be input to the CPU of the main control means or the gaming medal count control means, and when it is determined that the VL signal has been ON for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 ms), it may be determined that the VL signal has been ON.

(Start switch P3)
It is a lever-shaped switch that is activated when any specified number of gaming media is bet (for example, a number of gaming media selected by the player from among 1 to 3 insertion points is bet), and when operated, starts the rotation of the reels. Furthermore, when operation of the start switch P3 is acceptable, the color of the lamp (the color of the LED, or the on/off state of the LED) of the operating part of the start switch P3 or its surroundings is changed or lit, indicating that operation of the start switch P3 is acceptable. For example, when operation of the start switch P3 is acceptable, the lamp is lit in red, and when operation of the start switch P3 is not acceptable, the lamp is turned off. The LED may be in a mode in which the main control board P15 manages whether it is turned on or off, or the sub-control board P12 manages whether it is turned on or off.

(Stop switch P4)
In this embodiment, the left reel P18L corresponds to the left stop switch P4L, the center reel P18C corresponds to the center stop switch P4C, and the right reel P18R corresponds to the right stop switch P4R. When the operation of the stop switch P4 is acceptable, the color of the lamp (the color of the LED or the LED on/off state) of the operation part of the stop switch P4 or its surroundings is changed or turned on to indicate that the operation of the stop switch P4 is acceptable. For example, when the operation of the stop switch P4 is acceptable, the lamp is turned on in blue, and when the operation of the stop switch P4 is not acceptable, the lamp is turned on in red. The LED may be turned on or off by the main control board P15, or the sub-control board P12.

(Bet switch P5 (MAX bet switch P5M, 1 bet switch P5O))
When the information stored in the gaming medium number storage means (also referred to as the total score storage area) which is provided in the gaming machine P (more specifically, the gaming medium number control board P16) and stores the number of gaming media (also referred to as the total score) owned by the player is not 0 (when the information displayed on the gaming medium number display unit P9 is not 0), the operation of the bet switch P5 is accepted and a bet number setting process is performed. When the information stored in the gaming medium number storage means is 0, the operation of the bet switch P5 is not accepted, or the bet process is not executed even if the operation of the bet switch P5 is accepted. In addition, it is composed of a MAX bet switch P5M which allows the maximum number set for each gaming machine P to bet, and a 1 bet switch P5O which allows the bet of "1", and the 1 bet switch P5O is configured to be able to bet the same number of coins as the number of operations within the range of the maximum bet number by operating it multiple times. In addition, when the operation of the MAX bet switch P5M is acceptable, the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamp color (LED lighting color, or LED lighting or extinguishing state) is changed or turned on to indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch P5M is acceptable. For example, when the operation of the MAX bet switch P5M is acceptable, the lamp color is turned on in red, and when the operation of the MAX bet switch P5M is not acceptable, the lamp color is turned off. Although the 1 bet switch P5O does not have an LED, an LED may be arranged on the operation part of the 1 bet switch P5O or its periphery, and the lamp color may be changed or turned on to indicate that the operation of the 1 bet switch P5O is acceptable. The LED may be turned on or off by the main control board P15, or the sub-control board P12 may be turned on or off.

(Settlement switch P6)
When the settlement switch P6 is operated in a situation where a value of "1" or more is stored in the bet number storage means (also referred to as the "bet number storage area") provided in the gaming machine P (when the bet number is a value of "1" or more), the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means is added to the game medium number storage means. For example, when the settlement switch P6 is operated in a situation where "2" is stored in the bet number storage means and "100" is stored in the game medium number storage means, "0" is stored in the bet number storage means and "102" is stored in the game medium number storage means. The period during which the settlement process can be executed when the operation of the settlement switch P6 is accepted is from when the game medium is inserted until the start switch P3 is operated. In other words, even if the operation of the settlement switch P6 is accepted from when the start switch P3 is operated until the end of the game, the settlement process is not executed. Alternatively, the adjustment switch P6 may be operated during the period from when the game medium is inserted until the start switch P3 is operated, but may not be operated during the period from when the start switch P3 is operated until the game ends. Although the adjustment switch P6 is not provided with an LED, an LED may be arranged on or around the operation part of the adjustment switch P6, and the LED may be changed in color or turned on to indicate that the operation of the adjustment switch P6 is acceptable. The LED may be turned on or off by the main control board P15, or may be turned on or off by the sub-control board P12.

Also, the 1 bet switch P5O and the settlement switch P6 may be configured as one switch (1 bet switch/settlement switch). For example, the function may be switched depending on the long press time of the 1 bet switch/settlement switch, and when the pressing time is less than 1000 ms (when the operation of the 1 bet switch/settlement switch is no longer accepted before 1000 ms has elapsed since the operation of the 1 bet switch/settlement switch is accepted), the function of the 1 bet switch P5O may be executed, and when the pressing time is 1000 ms or more (when 1000 ms has elapsed since the operation of the 1 bet switch/settlement switch is accepted), the function of the settlement switch P6 may be executed. Note that, in order to execute the function of the settlement switch P6 when 1000 ms have elapsed since the operation of the 1 bet switch/settlement switch is accepted, it is not necessary for the operation of the 1 bet switch/settlement switch to be no longer accepted, and the function of the settlement switch P6 is executed even if the operation of the 1 bet switch/settlement switch is accepted 1000 ms after the operation of the 1 bet switch/settlement switch is accepted.

(Counting switch P7)
By operating the counting switch P7, the information stored in the game medium number storage means can be transmitted to a rental unit (also called a "dedicated unit") outside the game machine P via a game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board (described later) provided in the game machine P. For example, in a situation where "50" is stored in the game medium number storage means, by operating the counting switch P7, information "50" is transmitted as a count value (also called "counting points" or "counted medal number") to the game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board, and then information "50" can be transmitted as a count value to the rental unit. Note that the counting switch P7 is operated and "0" is stored in the game medium number storage means after transmitting the count value. In addition, although the counting switch P7 does not have an LED, an LED may be arranged on or around the operation part of the counting switch P7, and the LED may be changed in color or turned on to indicate that the operation of the counting switch P7 is acceptable. The LED may be configured so that the main control board P15 manages whether it is turned on or off, or the sub-control board P12 may manage whether it is turned on or off.

(Performance selection switch P8W)
The effect selection switch P8W is a so-called "cross key" and is composed of an up switch, a right switch, a down switch, and a left switch. For example, by operating the up switch of the effect selection switch P8W, it is possible to move a cursor or the like displayed on the image display device P11M or the image display device P11S upward. In addition, during game standby (also called game standby state), the game may be configured such that operating the up switch increases the volume, operating the down switch decreases the volume, operating the right switch increases the light intensity of the lamp, and operating the left switch decreases the light intensity of the lamp.

(Performance decision switch P8E)
The effect determination switch P8E plays the role of a determination button when determining an effect, or a chance button when executing an effect that suggests to the player that a situation advantageous to the player will occur. For example, when the cursor is pointed to an item displayed on the image display device P11M or the image display device P11S, the item indicated by the cursor can be determined by operating the effect determination switch P8E. Also, when an effect such as "Press the chance button!" is displayed on the image display device P11M or the image display device P11S during a game, the effect determination switch P8E is operated so that the next effect can be executed. Note that the effect determination switch P8E may be provided with a drive source (solenoid, motor, etc.) to execute an effect in which the operation part of the effect determination switch P8E vibrates up and down.

(Total score clear switch)
The total score clear switch (also referred to as the "game medal number clear switch") is a switch for initializing the total score stored in the total score storage means, and is configured so that if the total score clear switch is ON when the power is turned on, the total score can be initialized. Note that the operation of the total score clear switch for initializing the total score is not limited to this, and the total score may be cleared by operating the total score clear switch once when the power of the gaming machine P is turned on, or the total score may be cleared by operating the total score clear switch twice in succession when the power of the gaming machine P is turned on. If the total score is cleared by operating the total score clear switch once when the power of the gaming machine P is turned on, the total score clear switch may be covered with a cover or placed in a recessed position so as not to be easily operated, in order to prevent erroneous operation of the total score clear switch during play.

(Number of gaming media display section P9)
This is a display device for displaying information on the number of gaming media (also referred to as "total points" or "total number of gaming medals") stored in a gaming media number storage means, and can display numerical information of up to five digits. The display section for each digit constituting the gaming media number display section P9 is a horizontal row of five segment display sections, and information on the number of gaming media can be notified by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the seven segments constituting the segment display section. The five segments may include decimal points (sometimes referred to as DP points), and a display mode using decimal points is also acceptable. Each segment is configured so that the display mode changes when the LED is turned on or off.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of gaming media that can be displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 is "16383", and when "1" is displayed, "□□□□1" (four □ indicate blanks (four of the five segment display units are not lit)) is displayed right-justified. Also, when the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means is "0", "□□□□0" is displayed. If the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number storage means is "0", and "□□□□□" is displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9, there is a possibility that the gaming media number display unit P9 may be mistakenly recognized as malfunctioning even when it is not malfunctioning. For this reason, by displaying "□□□□0" on the gaming media number display unit P9, it is possible to know that the gaming media number display unit P9 is not malfunctioning.

In addition, when an error occurs, the game media number display unit P9 may display error information corresponding to the error that occurred instead of notifying the game media number information. In this case, the game media number display unit P9 may display the game media number information and the error information alternately. For example, the game media number information may be displayed repeatedly in the following manner: display the game media number information for 3 seconds → display the error information for 3 seconds → display the game media number information for 3 seconds → ... In addition, when an error is displayed on the game media number display unit P9, "Pxx□□" (two □ indicate a space, and two x indicate a number, symbol, or alphabet (the type of error can be understood by displaying "xx", which is error identification information corresponding to various errors)) is displayed left-justified. In other words, the game media number information is displayed right-justified, such as the above-mentioned "1", and the minimum digit (the rightmost segment display unit) displays any of the numerical information "0" to "9". On the other hand, error information is displayed left-justified as in the above-mentioned "Pxx□□", and the lowest digit is hidden, so no numerical information is displayed (the rightmost segment display unit is not lit). By configuring it in this way, it is easy to determine whether the currently displayed information is numerical information or error information based on whether the lowest digit of the game medium number display unit P9 is displayed (whether at least a part of the rightmost segment display unit is lit).

Furthermore, by checking whether the second segment display section from the right of the gaming medium count display section P9 is similarly lit or unlit, it is easy to determine whether the currently displayed information is numerical information or error information.

In addition, when controlling a gaming machine using a main control chip and a gaming media number chip as in this embodiment, errors detected by the main control chip are expressed as "Pxx□□" and errors detected by the gaming media number chip are expressed as "Hxx□□", making it easier to determine where an error has occurred. For example, since an input request communication error is detected by the main control chip, it can be displayed as "P01□□", "PE1□□", etc., and since a rental device communication abnormality 1 is detected by the gaming media number chip, it can be displayed as "H01□□", "HE1□□", etc. In this way, by simultaneously displaying identification information such as "P" and "H" corresponding to the chip that detected the error (location of abnormality), and error identification information such as "E1" and "01" corresponding to the above "xx", it is possible to display the location of the abnormality and the abnormality type (type of error) without changing the number of digits even if there are more than 100 types of abnormalities.

In addition, while an example has been described in which the identification information is changed depending on which chip detected the error, this is not limiting, and the identification information may be changed depending on the type of error. For example, a recoverable error may be expressed as "Pxx□□", and an unrecoverable error may be expressed as "Hxx□□". With this configuration, it becomes easier to determine the importance of the error.

In addition, when an error is displayed on the game media number display unit P9, if an error occurs that allows counting processing, and the counting switch P7 is operated while the error is being displayed to perform counting processing, the game media number display unit P9 may be configured to alternate between displaying information on the number of game media and information on the error, even during counting processing. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to check the error information even during counting processing.

In addition, when an error is displayed on the game media number display unit P9, if an error occurs that allows the lending process to be performed, and the lending switch is operated while the error is displayed to perform the lending process, the game media number display unit P9 may be configured to alternate between displaying information on the number of game media and information on the error, even during the lending process. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to check the error information even during the lending process.

In addition, when an error is displayed on the game medium number display unit P9, if the power is turned off while an error is displayed on the game medium number display unit P9, and the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is operated, the total score will be initialized but the error will not be cleared, so the game medium number display unit P9 may be configured to alternate between displaying information indicating "0" and error information. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to check the error information even if the total score clear switch is operated and the total score is initialized.

(Status indicator lamps 1 to 5)
The status indicator lamps 1 to 5 are composed of five LEDs, one LED disposed at a position corresponding to each segment of the game media number display unit P9 (not shown). The lighting of the status indicator lamps is controlled by the game media number control board P16, and lights up when there is a change in the status managed by the game media number control board P16. The status indicator lamps may be disposed in any location as long as they are visible to the player. The various abnormalities indicated by the status indicator lamps 1 to 5 will be described later.

The status indicator lamp 1 is configured to light up when there is an abnormality in the rental device connection (VL abnormality flag = FFh) and to turn off in other cases (VL abnormality flag = 00h).

The status indicator lamp 2 is configured to light up if there is an abnormality in the rental serial number and to turn off in other cases.

The status indicator lamp 3 is configured to light up when a rental device communication abnormality 1 to 6 occurs and to turn off in other cases.

The status indicator lamp 4 is configured to light up when the total score is 15,000 or more, and to turn off in other cases.

The status indicator lamp 5 is configured to light up if the count point is other than 0 (a value of 1 or greater) when the counting notification is sent, and to turn off if the count point is 0 when the counting notification is sent. Note that when the status indicator lamp 5 is turned on, it is determined whether the counting flag (described below) is set or not; when the counting flag is set (counting flag = FFh), the status indicator lamp 5 is turned on, and when the counting flag is not set (counting flag = 0), the status indicator lamp 5 is turned off.

The counting flag is cleared (counting flag = 0) at each count notification timing, and is set at the count notification timing when the count execution flag (described later) = 1 or more (when the count switch P7 is pressed short or long). If the VL abnormal flag ≠ 0, the total score is 0, or the count execution flag = 0 at any subsequent count notification timing, the counting flag is no longer set. In other words, when the count value is "1" or more, the counting flag = FFh for at least 300 ms, which is the output interval of the count notification. In other words, when the status indicator lamp 5 is lit, it will be lit for at least 300 ms. The counting flag that is set when the count execution flag = 1 or more is cleared at the count notification timing, but is reset within the same interrupt processing, so the status indicator lamp 5 will remain lit and not turned off.

By configuring it in this way, even if the counting switch P7 is pressed briefly just before the count notification timing, the status indicator lamp 5 can be lit for 300 ms, and the time during which the status indicator lamp 5 can be seen can be guaranteed. Also, when the counting switch P7 is pressed for a long time spanning n (multiple) count notification timings, the lit state can be maintained for a period of n x 300 ms.

In addition, the status indicator lamp 5 will be lit for 300 ms whether the count switch P7 is pressed briefly to count only "1" as the count value or whether the count switch P7 is pressed long to count only "50" as the count value. Therefore, there is no need to separate the processing for short presses and long presses, and the status indicator lamp 5 can be lit by a common processing, which eliminates program complexity and reduces the program capacity.

(Number of awards display section)
When game media (scores) are awarded as a result of a game, the display device is for displaying the number of awarded game media, and can display numerical information up to two digits. The display unit for each digit constituting the awarded number display unit is composed of a plurality of segments, and the information on the number of game media can be notified by lighting the segments. In addition, when error information corresponding to an error that has occurred is not displayed on the game media number display unit P9, the error information corresponding to the error that has occurred may be displayed on the awarded number display unit. In this case, the awarded number display unit may display the error information after the information on the number of awarded game media. For example, when the number of game media to be awarded as a result of a game is set to "7", the awarded number display unit may display "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", and "7", and then "E1" (error code). The awarded number display unit is not shown, but it is considered to be located to the left of the settlement switch P6 and the 1 bet switch P5O when viewed from the front.

(Display window P10)
With the front door P2 closed, the symbols on the reel tape attached to each of the left reel P18L, the center reel P18C, and the right reel P18R (see FIG. 3), which are provided so as to be freely rotatable in the vertical direction, can be seen through the display window P10. Specifically, when the reels are stopped, three symbols that are consecutive along the rotation direction of the left reel P18L, the center reel P18C, and the right reel P18R, among the 21 symbols (20, 16, etc.), can be seen through the display window P10. That is, a total of nine symbols (3 [symbols] x 3 [reels]) can be seen through the display window P10. Here, among the stop display positions where the left reel P18L, the center reel P18C, and the right reel P18R each display three symbols, the uppermost stop display position is called the upper row, the central stop display position is called the middle row, and the lowermost stop display position is called the lower row.

(Image display device)
The image display device displays various presentation images, as well as game instruction images that instruct the order in which to press the stop switch P4 during play, error images when an error occurs, etc. In this embodiment, two image display devices, an image display device P11M and an image display device P11S, are provided as the image display device. Note that, depending on the model, there may be only one image display device, three or more image display devices, or none at all. As the image display device, various types of display devices can be used, such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, a dot display, a projector, etc., as long as they are display devices that allow the player to view images.

In addition, an operation mode display device (also called an instruction monitor) that notifies the operation mode of the stop switch P4 may be provided. The operation mode of the stop switch P4 may be notified to the number of awards display unit (or may serve as both). When the operation mode of the stop switch P4 is notified to the number of awards display unit, the number of awards display unit may be called an instruction monitor. In addition, a 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, or 3 bet lamp for notifying the number of bets, a replay indicator lamp indicating that a replay (also called a replay) is possible, a game executable lamp indicating that a game can be played by operating the start switch P3, and a game medium insert possible lamp indicating that a game medium can be inserted by operating the bet switch P5 may be provided.

The 1 bet lamp can be lit when the number of bets is set to 1, the 2 bet lamp can be lit when the number of bets is set to 2, and the 3 bet lamp can be lit when the number of bets is set to 3. In other words, when the number of bets is set to 1, the 1 bet lamp can be lit, when the number of bets is set to 2, the 1 bet lamp and the 2 bet lamp can be lit, and when the number of bets is set to 3, the 1 bet lamp, the 2 bet lamp, and the 3 bet lamp can be lit.

The above-mentioned 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, replay indicator lamp, play executable lamp, and gaming medium insert lamp are controlled to be turned on or off by the main control board P15, but may also be controlled to be turned on or off by the sub-control board P12.

<Explanation of the main parts located on the back of the front door P2 of the gaming machine P>

Next, the rear structure of the front door P2 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 2.

(Sub-control board P12)
The sub-control board P12 (also referred to as sub-control means, sub-control board (means), or performance control board (means)) is housed in the case of the sub-control board P12. The sub-control board P12 is equipped with a sub-control CPU, a sub-control ROM, and a sub-control RAM (the sub-control CPU, the sub-control ROM, and the sub-control RAM may be built into one chip). The sub-control CPU, the sub-control ROM, and the sub-control RAM are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The sub-control board P12 determines the data to be output to the performance lamps, speakers, and image display devices (image display device P11M, image display device P11S) based on information (also referred to as commands) from the main control board P15 described later. In other words, the sub-control board P12 mainly executes control related to performance. Note that the sub-control board P12 cannot transmit information to the main control board P15 (one-way communication). In addition, data input by operating the performance selection switch P8W or the performance decision switch P8E is obtained, and data to be output to the performance lamps, speakers, and image display devices (image display device P11M, image display device P11S) is determined based on the data input by operating the performance selection switch P8W or the performance decision switch P8E.

(Game Media Number Display Board P13)
The game medium number display board P13 is a board that displays the game medium number display unit P9. Specifically, it is a board on which the game medium number display unit P9 is installed.
(Speaker)
There are four speakers: an upper right speaker P14UR and an upper left speaker (not shown) at the top of the front door, and a lower right speaker P14DR and a lower left speaker P14DL at the bottom of the front door.The speakers output sound effects that match the performance, as well as error sounds and warning sounds to notify users that an error has occurred.

<Explanation of the main parts located in cabinet P1 of gaming machine P>

Next, the internal structure of the cabinet P1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

(Main control board P15)
The main control board P15 (also referred to as the main control means, the first main control board (means), the main control board (means), or the game control board (means)) is housed in a main control board case. The main control board P15 is protected by the main control board case, and the main control board case is sealed with a crimp (also referred to as a sealing member) so that it is difficult to open the main control board case.

The main control board P15 is equipped with a first main control CPU, a first main control ROM, and a first main control RAM (the first main control CPU, the first main control ROM, and the first main control RAM are built into a single chip and are referred to as the main control chip). The first main control CPU, the first main control ROM, and the first main control RAM are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The main control board P15 performs internal lottery drawing, reel control such as driving and stopping the reels, prize determination control based on the stopped symbol combination when all reels are stopped, and game state transition control between various game states such as the bonus game state (also simply referred to as the bonus) and the RT state.

A RAM clear switch is connected to the main control board P15, and the advantageous zone information stored in the main control board P15 can be cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. When the RAM clear switch is operated during an advantageous zone, the advantageous zone ends and the normal zone is set. The information cleared by operating the RAM clear switch is information about the advantageous zone, and the set value, total score, number of bets, RT state, and information about the role ratio monitor are not cleared. In addition, the method of operating the RAM clear switch to clear the advantageous zone may be to press it once, or to detect that it has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (so-called long press), or to turn on the power while it is pressed. The RAM clear switch is located in a position that cannot be operated by the player (user) (for example, the main control board P15 that is not exposed unless the front door P2 is opened, inside the cabinet, the back of the front door, etc.). In addition, the RAM clear switch may also be used as a reset switch. Details will be provided later, but the advantageous zone is a play zone in which the instruction monitor may notify advantageous stop switch operation modes (including operation sequence and operation position), and the normal zone is a play zone in which the instruction monitor does not notify advantageous stop switch operation modes.

A setting key switch (also called a setting switch) is connected to the main control board P15, and the setting change mode can be started by inserting a setting key (key) into the setting key switch, rotating it approximately 45 degrees to the right, and powering on the gaming machine P. Note that the setting key switch is not limited to one that is operated with a setting key, and a push-type switch or pull-type switch may also be used. In any case, there is no problem as long as it is possible to detect whether the switch is ON or OFF when the power is turned on.

In addition, when waiting for play after one game has ended and no bet has been set (number of bets is 0), the setting confirmation mode can be started by inserting the setting key (key) into the setting key switch and rotating it approximately 45 degrees to the right. Note that the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode do not have to include the fact that no bet has been set, and the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode are referred to as the transition conditions for the setting confirmation mode.

The built-in ROM of the main control chip mounted on the main control board P15 has a storage capacity of "16 KB or less", and has a usage area (also called the first program) of "7.5 KB or less" and the rest outside the usage area (also called the second program). The usage area has a control area (also called the first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which the programs executed by the main control board P15 are stored, and a data area (also called the first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which only information other than programs is stored or will be stored. The outside the usage area has a control area (also called the second control area) and a data area (also called the second data area) similar to the usage area. The usage area stores programs related to the progress of the game, and the outside the usage area stores programs related to anti-fraud measures and programs used for gaming machine testing.

(Game Media Number Control Board P16)
The gaming media number control board P16 (also referred to as the gaming media number control means, second main control board (means), payout control board (means), gaming medal number control board (means), gaming medal number display control board (means), or gaming media number display control board (means)) is housed in a gaming media number control board case. The gaming media number control board P16 is protected by the gaming media number control board case, and the gaming media number control board case is sealed with a crimp (also referred to as a sealing member) so that it is difficult to open the gaming media number control board case.

The game media number control board P16 is equipped with a second main control CPU, a second main control ROM, and a second main control RAM (the second main control CPU, the second main control ROM, and the second main control RAM are built into one chip and are referred to as the game media number chip). The second main control CPU, the second main control ROM, and the second main control RAM are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The game media number control board P16 can control the display of the game media number display unit P9, send information (commands) to the rental unit via the game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board described below, receive information (commands) from the rental unit via the game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board, send information (commands) to the main control board P15, and receive information (commands) from the main control board P15.

The game media count control board P16 also has a game media count storage means for storing the number of game media acquired, and stores the number of game media currently owned by the user by adding the number of game media awarded, which is the number of game media awarded as a result of winning, and subtracting the number of game media inserted, which is the number of game media used to start playing.

The upper limit of the number of game media that can be stored in the game media number storage means is "16383," and it is not possible to store values beyond "16384."

When the value stored in the game media number storage means is between "15000" and "16368", the game media number control board P16 detects the total score threshold reached state. When the value stored in the game media number storage means is between "16369" and "16383", the game media number control board P16 detects the total score upper limit abnormality. Any value between "16369" and "16383" stored in the game media number storage means is referred to as the upper limit warning value. In other words, the upper limit warning value is a concept that includes the upper limit value. Also, the value "15000" (the value that results in the total score threshold reached state) stored in the game media number storage means may be referred to as the first threshold, and the value "16369" (the value that results in the total score upper limit abnormality) stored in the game media number storage means may be referred to as the second threshold.

A total score clear switch is connected to the game media number control board P16, and the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 can be cleared by turning on the power (detecting the operation of the total score clear switch during the power-on process) while the total score clear switch is being operated (pressed) when the power is off. The information that is cleared by operating the total score clear switch is the total score only; other information (e.g., bet number information, etc.) is not cleared. The total score clear switch can be operated by pressing it once, or by detecting that it has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (so-called long press). The total score clear switch is located in a position that cannot be operated by the user (e.g., on the game media number control board P16, inside the cabinet, or on the back of the front door).

If the total score is cleared by turning on the power while the total score clear switch is operated, the total score clear status is turned ON (a "1" is stored in the total score clear status memory area of the RWM), the total score clear status is maintained ON until play becomes possible, the total score clear status is maintained ON until 3 seconds have elapsed since play becomes possible, and the total score clear status is turned OFF 3 seconds after play becomes possible (a "0" is stored in the total score clear status memory area of the RWM). The total score clear status information may be sent to the rental unit, and if the rental unit receives information that the total score clear status is ON, it will clear the total score information stored in the rental unit. In addition, if the total score clear status is ON before three seconds have passed since game play becomes possible on gaming machine P, and loan points (also called "number of loaned medals") are granted from the loan unit, the total score clear status will remain ON and the loan points will be added as new total points, and even if three seconds have passed since game play becomes possible and the total score clear status turns OFF, the total score to which the new loan points have been added will not be cleared.

If the power is turned off during play (while the reels are spinning, during a payout process (also called a score awarding process), etc.), and the power is turned on again while the total score clear switch is operated, the total score will not be cleared and the total score clear status will remain OFF. If the power is turned off after play ends and the power is turned on again while the total score clear switch is operated, the total score will be cleared and the total score clear status will be turned ON. In this case, the game media number control board P16 determines whether or not play is in progress based on the game start information and game end information sent from the main control board P15, and prevents the total score from being cleared by operating the total score clear switch when play is in progress.

In addition, if the total score clear switch is operated during play, play ends with the total score clear switch operated, the power is turned off with the total score clear switch operated and play ends, and the power is turned on with the total score clear switch operated, the total scores will be cleared and the total score clear status will be turned ON.

In addition, if the power is turned off while the total score clear status is ON, and then the power is turned back on without the total score clear switch being pressed, the total score clear status will remain ON. In other words, the total score clear status will not be initialized by turning the power ON and OFF.

In addition, if the power is turned off while the total score clear status is ON, and then the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is not pressed and the setting key switch is ON, the setting change mode will start, but the total score clear status will remain ON. In other words, the total score clear status will not be initialized when the power is turned ON or OFF, or by the initialization process that occurs when the setting change mode is started.

In addition, if the power is turned off while the total score clear status is ON, and then turned on while the total score clear switch is pressed, the total score is cleared and the total score clear status is turned ON again. However, even in this case, although the total score is initialized, the total score clear status is not initialized to ON, so the total score clear status will remain ON. In other words, the total score clear status is not initialized by the initialization process that occurs when the power is turned ON or OFF, or when the total score clear switch is turned ON.

The total score clear switch may also be set to clear the total score and turn the total score clear status ON when the power is turned off during play and then turned on while the total score clear switch is being operated. In this case, the total score clear status is turned OFF from ON 3 seconds after play becomes possible after power is turned on. In this case, the total score clear status is ON even during play, and the amount paid out after play ends is added to the total score, and the total score added after play ends is not cleared.

Although the total score clear switch is not cleared by simply pressing it, the total score is detected, and a monitor lamp is lit to allow the amusement center manager to visually check whether there are any abnormalities in the switches managed by the game media count control board P16. On the other hand, instead of the monitor lamp being lit when the total score clear switch is detected, the monitor lamp may be configured to be turned off when the total score clear switch is detected and to be lit when the total score clear switch is not detected. The monitor lamp is a lamp that is lit when it detects the operation of various switches mounted on the main control board P15 and/or the game media count control board P16, but may be mounted on another board.

In addition, if the power is turned off during or after play has ended, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, the main control board P15 determines whether the setting key switch is ON, and the game media count control board P16 determines whether the total score clear switch is ON.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, the setting change mode is activated and the setting value can be selected after initializing a specific range of the memory area of the first main control RAM. On the other hand, in the game media number control board P16, the memory area of a specific range of the second main control RAM is initialized based on the power being turned on, and then the total score is cleared by initializing the memory area of the second main control RAM that stores the total score based on the total score clear switch being ON. This configuration allows the setting to be changed and the total score to be cleared simultaneously with a single power-on, preventing the game center manager from having to perform cumbersome operations.

Here, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, the main control board P15 starts the setting change mode and initializes the memory area of a predetermined range of the first main control RAM. Then, when the setting change mode termination condition is met (after the start switch P3 is operated to confirm the setting value, the setting key switch is turned OFF), the setting change mode is terminated. After that, when the bet button is operated, the bet processing using the total score is executed (waiting for play). In other words, if the initialization of the memory area storing the total score is not completed by the time the setting change mode ends, there is a possibility that the bet processing based on the total score that has not been cleared will be performed. In order to eliminate such a defect, it is preferable that when the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, the timing at which the initialization of the memory area storing the total score of the second main control RAM starts is earlier than the timing at which the initialization of the memory area of the predetermined range of the first main control RAM starts. As another method, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, it is preferable to configure the timing at which initialization of the memory area storing the total score in the second main control RAM is completed earlier than the timing at which initialization of a predetermined range of memory areas in the first main control RAM is completed.

In addition, if the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, it is possible to switch to the setting change mode but not clear the total score. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the total score from being cleared even if the total score clear switch is accidentally operated during the process of switching to the setting change mode. The total score is important information, and if it is important that it is not easily cleared, this type of control system may be used.

It is also possible that when the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, the total score is cleared without switching to the setting change mode. With this configuration, even if the setting key switch is accidentally operated while clearing the total score, it is possible to prevent switching to the setting change mode. The setting value is important information for controlling profits in an arcade, and if it is important to prevent unauthorized changes, this type of control system may be used.

When the setting change mode is entered, the LCD will display "Setting change mode in progress", the frame lamp will light up in red, and the speaker will output background music for the setting change mode and the voice "Settings being changed", respectively, until the setting change mode is terminated. When the total score is cleared, the frame lamp will light up in orange, and the speaker will output the voice "Total score cleared" for a short period of time or once. For this reason, even if the setting change mode is entered and the total score is cleared at the same time, the notification regarding the total score being cleared, which is output for a short period of time or once, is given priority in order to make it easier to recognize all situations. To prioritize, for example, if the audio channel for the setting change mode and the audio regarding the total score clearing are the same, the audio regarding the total score clearing can be output later so that the audio regarding the total score clearing can be recognized first, or even if the audio channel for the setting change mode and the audio regarding the total score clearing are different, the volume of the audio regarding the setting change mode can be lowered or muted while the audio regarding the total score clearing is being output. By configuring it this way, it becomes easier to recognize the situation even if the setting change mode is switched and the total score is cleared at the same time.

The built-in ROM of the game media number control chip mounted on the game media number control board P16 has a storage capacity of "16 KB or less", and has a usage area (also called the first program) of "7.5 KB or less" and the rest outside the usage area (also called the second program). The usage area has a control area (also called the first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which the program executed by the game media number control board P16 is stored, and a data area (also called the first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which only information other than the program is stored or will be stored. The outside of the usage area has a control area (also called the second control area) and a data area (also called the second data area) similar to the usage area. The usage area stores programs related to the progress of the game, and the outside of the usage area stores programs related to fraud prevention and programs used for the role ratio monitor.

The game media count control board P16 is also equipped with a role ratio monitor (also called a performance display monitor) and is configured to be able to perform calculation and display processes to display the stay ratios of various states.

The role ratio monitor is a display device that switches between displaying the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated role ratio (selectable according to the specifications of the gaming machine), consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. status ratio every 4800 ms, and is capable of displaying a four-digit number by using four seven-segment LEDs (with DP). The top two digits of the four-digit number displayed by the four seven-segment LEDs are called the identification segment, and the bottom two digits are called the ratio segment.

In the role ratio, "role" refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), the second type special role (so-called CB), and the normal role (so-called SB), and the "role ratio" is the ratio calculated by payout during role operation ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during operation of the first type special role continuous operation device (so-called BB) and the second type special role continuous operation device (so-called MB) are also included in "payouts during role operation", but payouts during general play during BB and general play during MB are not included in "payouts during role operation".

In the continuous feature ratio, "continuous feature" refers to the first type special feature (so-called RB), and the "continuous feature ratio" is the ratio calculated by: payout during operation of the first type special feature ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during operation of the first type special feature continuous operation device (so-called BB) are also included in "payouts during feature operation", but payouts during general play during BB are not included in "payouts during feature operation".

The "instruction-included role" in the instruction-included role ratio includes the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated (so-called AT) in addition to the "role" described above, and the "instruction-included role ratio" is a ratio calculated by (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation) ÷ total payout × 100. Here, (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation) does not refer to the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated and the role is activated, but refers to the sum of the payout number in the game in which the instruction function is activated and the payout number in the game in which the role is activated. If the game in which the instruction function is activated is a game in which the role is activated, the two payout numbers are not added together, but the payout number for that game is (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation). Note that if a player makes a mistake in the operation of the stop switch in a game in which the AT is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained, but in this case the calculation is based on the actual payout.

The information displayed in the identification segment among the information displayed on the role ratio monitor is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed among the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, cumulative instructed role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games, role ratio for the latest 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. state ratio, and is displayed as "7U.", "7P.", "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", and "5H.", respectively. For example, when "7U." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, and when "6Y." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games.

Of the information displayed on the winning ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment is intended to allow the calculation results of various ratios to be visually confirmed, and is displayed as a two-digit number using two seven-segment LEDs. For example, if the calculation result is 70, "70" is displayed in the ratio segment. The calculated result is rounded down to the nearest whole number. If the calculation result is 100, "99" is displayed. If the cumulative number of games played is less than 400, the ratio segment displays "00."

If the cumulative number of games is less than the reference number of games, the identification segment is displayed in a blinking manner. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, and is 175,000 games for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 175,000 games for the cumulative instructed role ratio, 6,000 games for the consecutive role ratio among the latest 6,000 games, 6,000 games for the role ratio among the latest 6,000 games, 17,500 games for the cumulative consecutive role ratio, 17,500 games for the cumulative role ratio, and 175,000 games for the cumulative role etc. state ratio.

The ratio segment is displayed in a blinking manner if the displayed value is equal to or greater than the threshold value. The threshold value is determined according to various ratios, and is 70 for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 70 for the cumulative indicated feature ratio, 60 for the consecutive feature ratio among the latest 6000 games, 70 for the feature ratio among the latest 6000 games, 60 for the cumulative consecutive feature ratio, 70 for the cumulative feature ratio, and 50 for the cumulative feature etc. state ratio. Note that if the cumulative number of games is less than 400 games and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold value but the ratio segment displays "00", the ratio segment is displayed in a lit manner.

In addition, among the information displayed in the identification segment of the winning ratio monitor, only one of "7U." and "7P." is displayed according to the specifications of the gaming machine. "7U." is an identification display that indicates the advantageous zone ratio, and the value (number of plays in the advantageous zone ÷ total number of plays × 100) is displayed in the ratio segment. "7P." is an identification display that indicates the instruction-included role ratio, and the value (number of instruction-included role payouts (number of role payouts + number of payouts when instruction function is activated) ÷ total number of payouts × 100) is displayed in the ratio segment. In addition, gaming machines that do not have an instruction function (gaming machines that do not notify the player of the operation mode stop switch that is advantageous to the player on the instruction monitor) display "7U." as the information to be displayed in the identification segment of the winning ratio monitor, and display "--" in the ratio segment (hereinafter, the specification in which "7U.--" is displayed on the instruction monitor is referred to as the 7U type (without instruction function)).

In addition, since the specification to be adopted, "7U." or "7P.", may be changed during development, it is desirable for the gaming machine P to be configured to store information for both. In order to configure it in this way, when the power is turned on, role ratio monitor type information ("0" for 7U type (no instruction function), "1" for 7U type (with instruction function), "2" for 7P type) stored in a certain memory area or program of the main control board P15 is transmitted to the gaming media number control board P16, and the gaming media number control board P16 stores the role ratio monitor type information transmitted from the main control board P15 in a certain memory area. Furthermore, the game media number control board P16, whether it is the 7U type or 7P type, stores information that is only used in either the "number of plays in the favorable zone" or the "number of instructed feature payouts" in a predetermined memory area, and is configured to display the necessary information based on the role ratio monitor type information sent from the main control board P15 when displaying the favorable zone ratio or the instructed feature ratio in the identification segment and ratio segment of the role ratio monitor.

The game media number control board P16 transmits necessary information based on the role ratio monitor type information transmitted from the main control board P15 not only when displaying on the role ratio monitor, but also when transmitting game machine performance information to the lending unit. For example, when transmitting game machine performance information when the game machine P is a 7U type (without instruction function), FFh is transmitted as information regarding the instruction-included role ratio, and FFh is transmitted as information regarding the favorable zone ratio. For example, when transmitting game machine performance information when the game machine P is a 7U type (with instruction function), FFh is transmitted as information regarding the instruction-included role ratio, and a value corresponding to the result of (number of games played in the favorable zone ÷ total number of games × 100) is transmitted as information regarding the favorable zone ratio. For example, when transmitting game machine performance information when the game machine P is a 7P type, a value corresponding to the result of (number of game payouts with instruction ÷ total payouts × 100) is transmitted as information regarding the instruction-included role ratio, and FFh is transmitted as information regarding the favorable zone ratio.

In addition, since the initial value of the role ratio monitor type information storage area of the game media number control board P16 is 0, if the main control board P15 does not transmit role ratio monitor type information due to poor communication between the main control board P15 and the game media number control board P16 when the power is turned on, the role ratio monitor type information will be 0 even if the specifications of the gaming machine P are 7P type. Also, if the first type special role is not installed at this time, the ratio segments for "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", and "5H." will all be displayed as "--".

In this way, even if a communication failure occurs between the main control board P15 and the game media count control board P16 when the power is turned on, the role ratio monitor display will show "--" instead of numbers in the ratio segment, making it possible to immediately recognize that something is not normal.

To check whether the role ratio monitor is operating normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the interrupt process is started. The test pattern is displayed in a blinking manner by all segments (including DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs that make up the role ratio monitor. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition to being displayed immediately after power is turned on, the test pattern may also be displayed when settings are being changed, settings are being confirmed, or an RWM abnormal error occurs.

In the cases where the cumulative number of games in the identification segment does not reach the reference number of games, where the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold value, and where a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment, the segments are displayed in a blinking mode. Specifically, the blinking mode is displayed by switching between lighting and off every 300 ms, such as lighting 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → off 300 ms → .... Also, when various ratio information is switched, it starts with lighting, so that the display time of various ratio information does not become longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and blinking.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. status ratio displayed on the role ratio monitor are configured to switch display contents every 4800 ms, but by setting this 4800 ms to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking, it is possible to configure it so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit, even if the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor are displayed in a blinking mode when they are switched.

By configuring it this way, the light starts off on even when various ratio information is switched, so it is possible to display the display continuously without any sense of incongruity caused by a shift in the blinking cycle.

In addition, the display period of the test pattern after the power is turned on as mentioned above is also set to 4800 ms, so when the test pattern has finished being displayed for 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED goes out, and the next interrupt process turns on and makes it possible to display information regarding the cumulative favorable zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio.

Next, we will explain how to control the blinking display on the role ratio monitor.

To blink the display mode of the role ratio monitor, it has a memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is a 2-byte memory area, and executes a process of adding 1 for each interrupt process. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and thereafter cycles through the values 0 to 299 each time an interrupt process is executed. In other words, the value following 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "0", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "1". At this time, the carry flag becomes 1 (the carry flag becomes 1 because a carry occurs as a result of calculating "0-299").
Example 2) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "298", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "299". At this time, the carry flag becomes 1 (the carry flag becomes 1 because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "298-299").
Example 3) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "299", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "0". At this time, the carry flag becomes 0 (the carry flag becomes 0 as a result of calculating "299-299" because no carry occurs).

As mentioned above, if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is any value between 0 and 298, the carry flag will be 1, and if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is 299, the carry flag will be 0. In other words, the carry flag will be 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag = 0, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is configured to be updated. The blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stores 0) when the power is turned on, and when 0 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, and when 1 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag = 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, it is possible for the display mode of the role ratio monitor to be displayed (blinking display) alternately between the on mode and the off mode every 300 ms.

The display of the ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode when the cumulative number of games in the identification segment does not reach the reference number of games, when the display value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold, or when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment. In other cases, the display is made in a lit mode without referring to the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, since the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between on and off regardless of whether the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referenced or not is updated for each interrupt process, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is also updated from time to time, and even when the state is switched from not referring to the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) to referring to it, it is possible to display the display without any deviation in the timing of turning on and off and the timing of switching the various ratio displays.

(Terminal board for connecting game ball rental device)
The game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board (also referred to as the connection terminal board) serves as a relay board for two-way communication between the game machine P and the lending unit. The game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board is housed in a game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board case. The game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board is protected by the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board case, and is configured to be difficult to open by sealing the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board case with a crimp (also referred to as a sealing member).

The game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board has a connector (D-sub 9 pins) for two-way communication with the lending unit, and two-way communication is possible via a harness (approximately 1.5m to 2.0m long) connected to the connector from an opening on the back side of the housing of the gaming machine P. The game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board is also equipped with a capacitor to stabilize communication with the lending unit. The lending unit is provided with a lending switch, and when the lending switch is operated, a lending notification is sent from the lending unit, and the lending notification is input to the gaming media number control board P16 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board. The connector for connecting the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board and the lending unit is equipped with a spring lock, and is configured to prevent the harness from easily coming loose.

The main control board P15, the gaming media number control board P16, and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board are each stored in a board case, but this is not limited to this, and the main control board P15 and the gaming media number control board P16 may be stored together in a single board case, or the main control board P15, the gaming media number control board P16, and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board may be stored together in a single board case. In addition, the board case is configured so that the back side can be easily confirmed even when it is installed in the gaming machine P.

In conventional gaming machines that use medals, the main control board P15 and the reel device board are connected by a harness, and by unplugging the harness, the power supply from the capacitor mounted on the reel device board to the main control chip mounted on the main control board P15 is cut off, and the data stored in the RAM of the main control chip can be initialized. This makes it possible to reliably initialize the RAM even if invalid data is stored in it by unplugging the harness. In addition, since the board case of the main control board P15 is sealed, if a capacitor is mounted on the main control board, as described above, in order to cut off the power supply from the capacitor, it is necessary to destroy the board case of the main control board and then remove the main control chip from the main control board P15. In this way, in order to cut off the power supply from the capacitor without destroying the board case, it is desirable to mount the capacitor on a board other than the main control board.

On the other hand, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board described in this embodiment uses a photocoupler to communicate at high speed with the lending unit, so it is prone to power shortages, and it is desirable to mount a capacitor to quickly supply power. Therefore, by mounting a capacitor on the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board, connecting this game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board to the game media number control board P16 with a harness, and further connecting the game media number control board P16 to the main control board P15 with a harness, the capacitor mounted on the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board serves as a backup power source for the main control chip mounted on the main control board P15.

The main control board P15, the gaming media count control board P16, and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board are each sealed in a board case, and the gaming media count control board P16 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board, and the main control board P15 and the gaming media count control board P16 are each connected by a harness, so the data stored in the RAM of the main control chip can be initialized by unplugging the harness. Also, since the gaming media count control chip of the gaming media count control board is sealed in a board case, it is difficult to remove and insert it, but it is configured so that the total score can be initialized by operating the initialization operation of the total score clear switch.

The main control board P15 and the game media number control board P16 are connected via a 32-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 12V, pin 2 is DC 12V, pin 3 is DC 5V, pin 4 is DC 5V, pin 5 is the main control data signal, pin 6 is control status signal 1, pin 7 is control status signal 2, pin 8 is control status signal 3, pin 9 is control status signal 4, pin 10 is control status signal 5, pin 11 is game media number control data signal 1, pin 12 is game media number control data signal 2, pin 13 is game media number control data signal 3, pin 14 is game media number control data signal 4, pin 15 is game media number control data signal 5, pin 16 is game media number control data signal 6, pin 17 is game media number control data signal 7, pin 18 is game media number control data signal 8, pin 19 is game media number control data signal 10, pin 20 is game media number control data signal 21, pin 22 is game media number control data signal 22, pin 23 is game media number control data signal 23, pin 24 is game media number control data signal 24, pin 25 is game media number control data signal 25, pin 26 is game media number control data signal 26, pin 27 is game media number control data signal 27, pin 28 is game media number control data signal 28, pin 29 is game media number control data signal 29, pin 30 is game media number control data signal 30, pin 31 is game media number control data signal 31, pin 32 is game media number control data signal 32, pin 33 is game media number control data signal 33, pin 34 is game media number control data signal 34, pin 35 is game media number control data signal 35, pin 36 is game media number control data signal 36, pin 37 is game media number control data signal 37, pin The pin 15 is a game medium number control data signal 8, the pin 19 is a game medium number control data signal 9, the pin 20 is a game medium number control data signal 10, the pin 21 is a game medium number control data signal 11, the pin 22 is a game medium number control data signal 12, the pin 23 is a game medium number control data signal 13, the pin 24 is a game medium number control data signal 14, the pin 25 is a game medium number control data signal 15, the pin 26 is a game medium number control data signal 16, the pin 27 is a game medium number control data strobe signal, the pin 28 is a power interruption detection signal 1, the pin 29 is a backup power supply, the pin 30 is a GND signal, the pin 31 is a GND signal, and the pin 32 is a GND signal. The main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The game media number control board P16 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board are connected via a 5-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is a VL signal, pin 3 is a transmission signal, pin 4 is a reception signal, and pin 5 is a GND signal. The game media number control board P16 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The game media number control board P16 and the game media number display board P13 are connected via a 14-pin connector. Pin 1 is an LED digit A signal, pin 2 is an LED digit B signal, pin 3 is an LED digit C signal, pin 4 is an LED digit D signal, pin 5 is an LED digit E signal, pin 6 is a game media number display segment A signal, pin 7 is a game media number display segment B signal, pin 8 is a game media number display segment C signal, pin 9 is a game media number display segment D signal, pin 10 is a game media number display segment E signal, pin 11 is a game media number display segment F signal, pin 12 is a game media number display segment G signal, pin 13 is a game media number display segment P signal, and pin 14 is a game media number display segment P signal. Additionally, signals related to pins 1 to 14 are signals sent from the gaming media count control board P16 to the gaming media count display board P13. Note that the gaming media count control board P16 and the gaming media count display board P13 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The game media number control board P16 and the counting switch P7 are connected via a two-pin connector. Pin 1 is the counting switch P7 signal, and is used to send a signal related to the operation input of the counting switch P7 to the game media number control board P16 when the counting switch P7 is operated. When the counting switch P7 signal is input, some or all of the total score information managed by the game media number control board P16 is sent to the lending unit. Pin 2 is a GND signal, and is used as GND. The game media number control board P16 and the counting switch P7 may be directly connected by a harness, or indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board and the lending unit are connected via a 9-pin connector. Pin 1 is the LG signal, pin 2 is the TXD- signal, pin 3 is the RXD- signal, pin 4 is the PSI signal, pin 5 is the LG signal, pin 6 is the TXD+ signal, pin 7 is the RXD+ signal, pin 8 is the VL signal, and pin 9 is the VL signal. The TXD+ signal and TXD- signal are used to send information from the game machine P (game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board) to the lending unit. The RXD+ signal and RXD- signal are used by the game machine P (game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board) to receive information from the lending unit. The PSI signal is used as a signal connection confirmation signal to confirm the connection between the game machine P and the lending unit. The VL signal is used as an isolated DC 5V power supply. In addition, the harness connecting pins 2 and 6 is twisted. In addition, the harness connecting pins 3 and 7 is twisted. The game ball/etc. rental device connection terminal board and the rental unit may be directly connected by the harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The main control board P15 and the door relay board are connected via a 40-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is DC 5V, pin 3 is DC 5V, pin 4 is DC 5V, pin 5 is a GND signal, pin 6 is an LED digit 1 signal, pin 7 is an LED digit 2 signal, pin 8 is an LED digit 3 signal, pin 9 is an LED digit 4 signal, pin 10 is an LED digit 5 signal, pin 11 is an LED segment 1A signal, pin 12 is an LED segment 1B signal, pin 13 is an LED segment 1C signal, pin 14 is an LED segment 1D signal, pin 15 is an LED segment 1E signal, pin 16 is an LED segment 1F signal, pin 17 is an LED segment 1G signal, pin 18 is an LED segment 1P signal, pin 19 is a GND signal, and pin 20 is a GND signal. Pin 21 is a GND signal, pin 22 is a GND signal, pin 23 is a GND signal, pin 24 is a GND signal, pin 25 is a start switch sensor signal, pin 26 is a GND signal, pin 27 is an adjustment switch signal, pin 28 is a one-sheet insertion switch signal, pin 29 is a three-sheet insertion sensor signal, pin 30 is a GND signal, pin 31 is a left stop switch P4L sensor signal, pin 32 is a GND signal, pin 33 is a middle stop switch P4C sensor signal, pin 34 is a GND signal, pin 35 is a GND signal, pin 36 is a right stop switch P4R sensor signal, pin 37 is a GND signal, pin 38 is a GND signal, pin 39 is a GND signal, and pin 40 is a connector connection monitor signal. The main control board P15 and the reel device board P17 may be directly connected by a harness, or indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The main control board P15 and the reel device board P17 are connected via a 26-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 12V, pin 2 is DC 12V, pin 3 is DC 5V, pin 4 is DC 5V, pin 5 is the backup power supply, pin 6 is the left reel P18L motor Φ0 signal, pin 7 is the left reel P18L motor Φ1 signal, pin 8 is the left reel P18L motor Φ2 signal, pin 9 is the left reel P18L motor Φ3 signal, pin 10 is the center reel P18C motor Φ0 signal, pin 11 is the center reel P18C motor Φ1 signal, pin 12 is the center reel P18C motor Φ2 signal, and pin 13 is the center reel P18C motor Φ3 signal. 14th pin is the right reel P18R motor Φ0 signal, 15th pin is the right reel P18R motor Φ1 signal, 16th pin is the right reel P18R motor Φ2 signal, 17th pin is the right reel P18R motor Φ3 signal, 18th pin is the left reel P18L sensor signal, 19th pin is the center reel P18C sensor signal, 20th pin is the right reel P18R sensor signal, 21st pin is the door switch signal, 22nd pin is a GND signal, 23rd pin is a GND signal, 24th pin is a GND signal, 25th pin is a GND signal, and 26th pin is a GND signal. Note that the main control board P15 and the reel device board P17 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The main control board P15 and the setting/reset switch are connected via a 5-pin connector. In this embodiment, the setting change switch that changes the setting value during setting change mode and the reset switch that clears an error during an error are the same switch, but they may also be provided as different switches.

The main control board P15 and the sub-control board are connected via a 30-pin connector.

The reel device board P17 and the power supply board are connected via an 8-pin connector.

The reel device board P17 and the left reel P18L motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The reel device board P17 and the left reel P18L motor may be directly connected by a harness, or indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the left reel P18L sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is the left reel P18L sensor signal, and pin 3 is the GND signal. Note that the reel device board P17 and the left reel P18L sensor may be directly connected by a harness, or indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the middle reel P18C motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The reel device board P17 and the middle reel P18C motor may be directly connected by a harness, or indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the middle reel P18C sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is the middle reel P18C sensor signal, and pin 3 is the GND signal. Note that the reel device board P17 and the middle reel P18C sensor may be directly connected by a harness, or indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the right reel P18R motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The reel device board P17 and the right reel P18R motor may be directly connected by a harness, or indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the right reel P18R sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is the right reel P18R sensor signal, and pin 3 is the GND signal. Note that the reel device board P17 and the right reel P18R sensor may be directly connected by a harness, or indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the door switch are connected via a three-pin connector. Pin 1 is the door switch signal, pin 2 is the GND signal, and pin 3 is the GND signal. Note that the reel device board P17 and the door switch may be directly connected by a harness, or indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The door relay board and the display board are connected via a 14-pin connector.

The door relay board and the Maxbed are connected via a 6-pin connector.

The door relay board and start switch P3 are connected via a 3-pin connector.

The door relay board and stop switch P4 are connected via a 9-pin connector.

<Settings change mode>
The setting change mode is a mode in which the setting value can be selected (in other words, a setting value setting mode in which the setting value can be set), and in this embodiment, any of information "0" to "5" can be selected as the setting value information and stored in the setting value information storage means. Here, a setting value display (not shown) for displaying the setting value is provided, and in the setting change mode, the hall staff can determine the setting value information based on the information displayed on the setting value display. The setting value displayed on the setting value display is any of information "1" to "6," and the degree of advantage of the game (machine odds, payout rate, AT winning probability, etc.) changes depending on the setting value.

When the power switch is off (OFF) and the setting key switch is turned on (ON), the setting change mode is started (setting changes are started) by turning the power switch on.

The conditions for starting the setting change mode may be that the setting key switch is ON when the power is turned on, and that the game state when the power is turned on is not in progress (the state is from when all reels have stopped and game end processing has been performed until the start switch for the next game is operated). In any case, the conditions under which the setting change mode can be started may be referred to as the setting change mode start conditions or predetermined start conditions.

After starting the setting change mode (starting setting changes), it becomes possible to select the setting value information by operating the setting change switch. For example, if the setting change switch is operated when the setting value display shows "2", the setting value display will show "3". Also, if the setting change switch is operated when the setting value display shows "6", the setting value display will show "1". When the setting change mode is started, a specified range of memory area in the first main control RAM is initialized. This initialization process initializes the game state, such as recoverable errors and advantageous zones, but does not initialize the total score. To initialize the total score, it is necessary to operate the total score clear switch separately.

After starting the setting change mode (starting the setting change), a setting value is selected by operating the setting change switch, the setting value is confirmed by operating the start switch P3, and then the setting change mode can be ended (setting change is ended) by turning off the setting key switch. After ending the setting change mode (setting change is ended), it becomes possible to bet on investment points, and if operation of the start switch P3 is accepted after investment points have been bet, play can be executed.

If the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "1", "0" is stored as the setting value information, if the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "2", "1" is stored as the setting value information, if the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "3", "2" is stored as the setting value information, if the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "4", "3" is stored as the setting value information, if the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "5", "4" is stored as the setting value information, if the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "6", "5" is stored as the setting value information.

Here, even in the setting change mode, communication between the lending unit and the gaming machine P is taking place. In other words, even in the setting change mode, it is possible to receive a lending notification, which will be described later, and add points to the gaming machine P. Also, even in the setting change mode, it is possible to send a counting notification, which will be described later, and count the points of the gaming machine P.

It is also possible to configure the game machine P so that communication between the rental unit and the game machine P does not occur even in the setting change mode. In other words, even if the rental switch of the rental unit is operated during the setting change mode, the game machine P does not receive a rental notification, so points cannot be added to the game machine P. Also, in this case, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during the setting change mode, a counting notification is not sent, so the points of the game machine P cannot be counted.

In addition, during the setting change mode, the reel spin process by operating the start switch, the bet number setting process by operating the bet switch, the settlement process by operating the settlement switch, and the reel stop process by operating the stop switch are disabled, so game progress cannot be made.

<Settings confirmation mode>
The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the setting values can be confirmed, and the current setting values can be displayed on the setting value display.

When the power switch is on, the setting check mode can be started (setting check begins) when the setting key switch is turned on. Note that in the setting check mode, unlike the setting change mode, the setting value cannot be selected or changed. Also, when one or more points have been bet and the power switch is on, the setting check mode can be prevented from starting if the setting key switch is turned on. In other words, when no bets have been made (including automatic bets due to replay), the setting check mode starts when the setting key switch is turned on.

After starting the setting check mode (starting the setting check), you can exit the setting check mode (end the setting check) by turning off the setting key switch.

Here, even in the setting confirmation mode, communication between the lending unit and the gaming machine P is taking place. In other words, even in the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to receive a lending notification, which will be described later, and add points to the gaming machine P. Also, even in the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to send a counting notification, which will be described later, and count the points of the gaming machine P.

It is also possible to configure the system so that communication between the rental unit and the gaming machine P does not take place even in the setting confirmation mode. In other words, in the setting confirmation mode, even if the rental switch of the rental unit is operated, the gaming machine P does not receive a rental notification, so points cannot be added to the gaming machine P. Also, in this case, even if the counting switch P7 is operated in the setting confirmation mode, a counting notification is not sent, so the points of the gaming machine P cannot be counted.

In addition, during setting confirmation mode, the reel spinning process by operating the start switch, the bet number setting process by operating the bet switch, the settlement process by operating the settlement switch, and the reel stopping process by operating the stop switch are disabled, making it impossible to progress in the game.

<Rental unit>
In this embodiment, the gaming machine P is capable of communicating with the lending unit. The lending unit is provided with a lending switch, a replay (medal play) switch, a card return switch, a card insertion slot, a bill insertion slot, and the like. The lending switch and the replay switch may be a common switch. The card in the card return switch or card insertion slot refers to a member card (issued for each store) owned by the user or a visitor card used by a user who is not a member, and may be simply referred to as a card or an information recording medium.

When a user inserts a bill into the bill slot and operates the loan switch, a loan notification is sent to the gaming machine P. The loan unit is equipped with an SC board that receives information from the gaming machine P, and is configured so that the SC board receives information sent by the gaming media count control board P16 in the gaming machine P.

In addition, since there may be a delay from when the VL signal is turned ON until the SC board can stably receive information from the gaming machine P, the gaming machine P may set a timer that counts 100 ms from when the VL signal is turned ON, and transmit the gaming machine information notification after counting 100 ms. This configuration can prevent the SC board from being unable to receive gaming machine information due to the gaming machine P transmitting the gaming machine information notification to the rental unit immediately after the VL signal is turned ON. In other words, the gaming machine P can make it easier for the SC board to receive the gaming machine information notification by waiting until the SC board is stable and able to receive information from the gaming machine P before transmitting the gaming machine information notification to the rental unit.

The delay time of the SC board is exemplified as 100 ms, which is the sum of the time from when the VL signal is turned ON until the output of the VL signal stabilizes (e.g., 50 ms) and the time from when the output of the VL signal stabilizes until the PSI signal is detected (e.g., 50 ms).

The period of the timer that the gaming machine P sets after the VL signal turns ON is not limited to 100 ms, and may be less than 100 ms or more than 100 ms. However, it is desirable that the value be within 300 ms, which is the notification interval for gaming machine information notifications. This is because 300 ms corresponds to the period during which the gaming machine P can send two gaming machine information notifications after the VL signal turns ON, and during this period, even if cheating is committed while the timer is counting after the VL signal turns ON, no traces will be left, so it is desirable that the value be within 300 ms in order to leave traces of cheating.

In addition, it is desirable that the period of the timer set by the gaming machine P after the VL signal is turned ON is a value within 500 ms, which is the period for determining whether the counting switch P7 has been pressed and held down. By configuring it in this way, a gaming machine information notification can be sent from the time the VL signal is turned ON, when the counting switch P7 is pressed, until the gaming machine P determines that the press has been held down and the press continues (long press), and the number of medals counted corresponding to the long press of the counting switch P7 can then be counted without delay.

If medal information is stored on the card, operating the replay switch will send a predetermined number of gaming medals from the medal information stored on the card to gaming machine P as a loan notification.

When the card return switch is operated, the card inserted through the card slot is returned to the user.

<Hall computer>
When the SC board provided in the lending unit receives information from the gaming machine P, some of the information is transmitted from the lending unit to the hall computer. Here, examples of information transmitted from the lending unit to the hall computer include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the main control state, and fraud information. When the hall computer receives information from the lending unit, it executes a process for displaying the information on a data display device outside the gaming machine. Since the hall computer may also simultaneously manage information from gaming machines using gaming medals as conventional objects, the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out are managed by receiving a pulse number corresponding to the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out. In other words, the gaming machine P transmits the values of the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out as they are, but since the hall computer, which is the final receiving medium, receives them as pulses, a time lag occurs before the hall computer completely receives the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out.

<Description of power-on process controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to this embodiment>
When the gaming machine is powered on, it determines whether the power cut detection signal is ON or not, and if the power cut detection signal is not ON (if it is OFF), it sets the functions of the main control chip, and if the power cut detection signal is ON, it loops to determine whether the power cut detection signal is ON or not (the following power-on process is not executed).

The main control chip's function settings perform the initial settings of the built-in registers.

Next, the checksum of the RWM area is calculated and the power-off processing completion flag is checked to generate power-off recovery data.

Next, it determines whether the door switch signal and the setting key switch signal are ON or not. If the door switch signal is ON (front door is open) and the setting key switch signal is ON, it executes the setting change device process, and if either switch is OFF, it determines whether the power interruption recovery data is normal or not.

Next, if the power failure recovery data is not normal, an error is displayed and the error state is looped until the initialization process is performed. If the power failure recovery data is normal, the stack pointer is restored based on the data saved when the power was lost.

Next, read the input port.

Next, the interrupt startup process is executed. In the interrupt startup process, the settings related to the four channels, channels 0 to 3, of the serial communication port are executed. Of these, channel 0 can be set to transmit and receive, channel 1 can be set to transmit only, channel 2 can be set to transmit only, and channel 3 can be set to transmit only.

To set channel 0 to allow reception, bit 7 in the setting area (part of the built-in register) corresponding to channel 0 is set to "1". Also, by setting bit 6 in the setting area (part of the built-in register) corresponding to channel 0 to "1", channel 0 can be set to allow transmission. In this embodiment, channel 0 is set to receive only, so bit 7 is set to "1" and bit 6 is left at "0". By allowing channel 0 to receive only, the main control board can receive commands from the game media count control board. In this embodiment, when sending commands from the main control board to the game media count control board, the serial communication port is not used because parallel communication is used, but when sending commands from the main control board to the game media count control board via serial communication, any of channels 1 to 3 of the serial communication port may be used for transmission. Even in this case, by setting channel 0 to allow reception only, communication between the two can be performed without performing complicated processing such as adjusting the timing of the commands related to transmission and the commands related to reception.

In the interrupt startup process, the receive setting for channel 0 is set in the usage area, and the transmit setting for channel 2 is set outside the usage area. Channel 2 executes the transmit setting to execute the process for outputting a test signal from the main control board to the test IF board.

In the interrupt startup process, after channel 0 is set to allow reception and channel 0 is not allowed to transmit, a serial communication setting program outside the area of use is called and channel 2 is allowed to transmit. In this way, by setting channel 0 to allow reception before channel 2 to transmit, it is possible to quickly prepare for the transmission of commands from the game media count control board.

After executing the interrupt startup process, the system will return to the interrupt processing that occurred when the power was turned off.

<Description of the main game progress process controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to this embodiment>
The processing related to games on the gaming machine P is broadly divided into interval interrupt processing (hereinafter, simply referred to as "interrupt processing" or "timer interrupt processing") that is executed periodically (every 2.235 ms in this embodiment), and game progress main processing that is executed from the end of the interval interrupt processing to the start timing of the next interval interrupt processing.

The outline of the main game progress processing of the main control board P15 in this embodiment is explained using Figure 44.

<Power-on processing>
When the power is turned on, the power-on process is executed. In the power-on process, it is judged whether there is an abnormality in the first main control RAM (a checksum is calculated). If the first main control RAM is abnormal and the setting key switch is not on (off), it will be considered a "case where power-off recovery cannot be performed normally" and an irrecoverable error will occur. If an irrecoverable error occurs, the subsequent game progress main process will not be executed. If an irrecoverable error occurs, it is possible to recover by turning the power off once, and then turning the power on with the setting key switch on (initializing a specified area of the first main control RAM by changing the settings).

When the power is turned on, if the first main control RAM is normal and the setting key switch is not on (off), the game start setting is performed.

When the first main control RAM is normal and the setting key switch is on during power-on processing, a specific area of the first main control RAM is initialized, and then the device transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting values can be changed. When the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met, the device is set to start playing.

When the first main control RAM is abnormal (an unrecoverable error) during power-on processing and the setting key switch is on, the system initializes a predetermined area that includes at least a specific area of the first main control RAM, and then transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting values can be changed. When the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met, the system sets the game to start.

In addition, the condition for switching to the setting change mode was described as being when the setting key switch is on, but the setting change mode may also be switched to when the setting key switch is on and the setting changeable state is set in the first main control RAM. The setting changeable state will be described later.

<Start game set>
First, a setting changeable state in which settings can be changed is set in the first main control RAM. When the setting changeable state is set, if the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the device transitions to setting change mode. When the setting changeable state is not set (when the setting unchangeable state is set), the device does not transition to setting change mode even if the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on.

Next, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, gaming medium insertion possible lamp, game execution possible lamp, and replay indication lamp are turned off. Specifically, the turn-off data is set in the memory area of the first main control RAM that manages the lighting and turning-off of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, gaming medium insertion possible lamp, game execution possible lamp, and replay indication lamp.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the previous game is a replay.

If it is determined that the previous game is a replay, the replay indicator lamp is turned on. Specifically, lighting data is set in a memory area of the first main control RAM that manages the on/off of the replay indicator lamp. After that, an automatic bet is placed on the number of bets placed on the previous game. For example, if the number of bets placed on the previous game was "3", the number of bets will be set to "3" by the automatic bet. After that, gaming media is accepted.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the previous game is not a replay, the replay indicator lamp will not light up and no automatic bet will be placed, and gaming media will be accepted.

<Gaming media acceptance>
The reception of game media is a control process in a situation where betting processing using the total points and settlement processing of the number of bets can be executed (while waiting to play).

When game media is accepted, first it is determined whether the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode are met. Specifically, it is first confirmed whether the number of bets is 0 or not. If the number of bets is 0, the setting confirmation process is executed (transition to the setting confirmation mode) when the door is open and the setting key switch is on (it may also be the case that the setting key switch signal is judged to be rising). If the number of bets is not 0 (for example, when the number of bets is 1), the setting confirmation process is not executed (the mode does not transition to the setting confirmation mode) even if the door is open and the setting key switch is on.

If the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode are not met (if the mode does not transition to the setting confirmation mode), it will then determine whether there is a VL abnormality or an abnormality in the total score upper limit, which will be described later.

In the case of a VL abnormality or a total score upper limit abnormality, regardless of the lighting status of the gaming medium insertion possible lamp and the game execution possible lamp, the gaming medium insertion possible lamp and the game execution possible lamp are turned off, and subsequent processing (betting processing, settlement processing, etc.) is not executed. Here, turning off the gaming medium insertion possible lamp and the game execution possible lamp means storing the turning off data in the memory area of the first main control RAM that manages the lighting and turning off of the gaming medium insertion possible lamp and the game execution possible lamp. At this time, the lighting status of the first bet lamp, the second bet lamp, and the third bet lamp is maintained. For example, if a VL abnormality occurs in a situation where the first bet lamp is on, the second bet lamp is on, and the third bet lamp is off, the first bet lamp will remain on, the second bet lamp will remain on, and the third bet lamp will remain off. By making the lamps in this manner, it is possible to notify the player of the current number of bets even if a VL abnormality or a total score upper limit abnormality occurs. Meanwhile, the game medium insertion possible lamp and game execution possible lamp are turned off. By turning off the game execution possible lamp, it is possible to inform the player that the game will not proceed even if the start switch is operated, even if, for example, the number of bets is 0 and the total score is greater than the specified number, the player will not be able to make a bet even if the bet switch is operated when a bet has been made, even if, for example, the number of bets is 0 and the total score is greater than the specified number.

Even if a VL abnormality or a total score upper limit abnormality occurs during game media reception, the system determines whether the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode are met. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can check the setting value if the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode are met, even if a VL abnormality or a total score upper limit abnormality occurs.

If there is no VL abnormality or total score upper limit abnormality, settlement processing and insertion processing will be performed.

In the settlement process, if it is determined that the settlement switch P6 has been operated, the settlement process for the points bet is executed.

In the insert process, if it is determined that the MAX bet switch has been operated, it executes a process to insert 3 points, and if it is determined that the 1 bet switch has been operated, it executes a process to insert 1 point.

Here, we will explain the insertion process (hereinafter also referred to as the bet process) executed by the main control board P15.

When the main control board P15 receives operation of the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch (when it determines that there is rising data for the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch), if the result of subtracting the maximum number of insertions (also called the specified number) of "3" from the current number of insertions (also called the current number of bets, the number of bets placed, or the number of insertions placed) is "0" (if the zero flag = 1), it terminates the insertion process, and if the result of subtracting the maximum number of insertions (also called "3" from the current number of insertions is not "0" (if the zero flag = 1), it sets the requested number of insertions (also called the requested number of bets).

In the process of setting the number of requested bets, if the operation of the 1 bet switch is accepted, the requested bet number is set to "1", and if the operation of the MAX bet switch is accepted, the number of possible bets (if the current number of bets is "0", the number is "3", if the current number of bets is "1", the number is "2", and if the current number of bets is "2", the number is "1") is set as the requested bet number.

The set number of requested inputs is sent to the number of gaming media control board P16 as an input request command (also called a bet request command). The command sent from the main control board P15 to the number of gaming media control board P16 is composed of a first control command (1 byte) and a second control command (1 byte), with the first control command indicating the type of command and the second control command indicating data. For example, in the case of an input request command, the first control command is "20h" and the second control command is any value between "01h" and "03h". In other words, when the number of gaming media control board P16 receives a command from the main control board P15, it can confirm from the first control command that it is an input request command, and can confirm the number of requested inputs from the second control command.

After the main control board P15 sends a request command to insert, if a command for the number of game media to be inserted is sent from the game media count control board P16, the main control board P15 adds one point to the number of bets according to the requested number of inserts. In addition, each time one point is added to the number of bets, the 1 to 3 bet lamps are turned on in sequence.

In addition, if the main control board P15 transmits an insertion request command and then transmits a non-acceptance command from the game media number control board P16, the insertion process is terminated. Here, the game media number control board P16 transmits a non-acceptance command to the main control board P15 when the value stored in the total score memory area, which is the RAM area of the game media number control board P16 (also called the total score) is less than the number of insertion requests. For example, when the number of insertion requests is "3" and the value stored in the total score memory area is less than "3", the game media number control board P16 transmits a non-acceptance command to the main control board P15. When the number of insertion requests is "2" and the value stored in the total score memory area is less than "2", the game media number control board P16 transmits a non-acceptance command to the main control board P15. In addition, when the number of insertion requests is "1" and the value stored in the total score memory area is less than "1", the game media number control board P16 transmits a non-acceptance command to the main control board P15.

Here, we will explain the settlement process executed by the main control board P15.

When the main control board P15 receives the operation of the settlement switch P6 (when it determines that there is rising data for the settlement switch P6), it reads the number of bets and determines whether the number of bets is "0" or not. If the number of bets is "0", it ends the settlement process. If the number of bets is not "0", it turns off the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, replay indicator lamp, play executable lamp, and gaming media insertable lamp. Note that since the settlement process cannot be executed during a replay, the settlement process will not be executed even if the settlement switch P6 is operated during a replay. In other words, even if the settlement switch P6 is operated during a replay, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, play executable lamp, and gaming media insertable lamp, including the replay indicator lamp, will not be turned off.

After turning off the various lamps, a settlement request command is set. The value of the second control command of the settlement request command uses the register value stored when reading the number of bets (also called the settlement request number) at the time the settlement process is executed. In other words, the settlement request number will be one of the values "01h" to "03h".

Next, the set settlement request command is sent to the gaming media count control board P16.

If a settlement request command is sent from the game media count control board P16 after the main control board P15 has sent a settlement request command, the main control board P15 will send a command to start the settlement process to the sub-control board P12, clear the number of bets, turn off the lit 1-3 bet lamps, and send a command to end the settlement process to the sub-control board P12. Note that when a command to start the settlement process is sent from the main control board P15, the sub-control board P12 outputs a settlement sound from the speaker, and when a command to end the settlement process is sent from the main control board P15, the sub-control board P12 ends the output of the settlement sound from the speaker.

In addition, if the total score stored in the game media number storage means is equal to or greater than the upper limit warning value of "16369", the game media number control board P16 detects an abnormality in the total score upper limit and notifies the main control board P15 of an abnormality in the total score upper limit via command communication from the game media number control board P16, and if the main control board P15 receives a command indicating an abnormality in the total score upper limit from the game media number control board P16, the main control board P15 sets an abnormality in the total score upper limit.

In the case of an abnormality in the total score upper limit, the main control board P15 can prevent the total score stored in the game media number storage means from exceeding the upper limit value of "16383" by setting the game media number storage means to a state where play is not possible (a state where the start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 are not accepted). For example, in a situation where the game media number storage means stores "16368", which is the value immediately before the upper limit caution value, and the maximum number of bets "3" has been bet, the value stored in the game media number storage means is "16371" even after the settlement switch P6 is operated, which is less than the upper limit value of "16383". Therefore, even if the number of game media is added to the game media number storage means in the settlement process by operating the settlement switch P6, the upper limit value will not be exceeded, and it is possible to prevent the game media that exceed the upper limit value from disappearing. In this case, after the value stored in the game media number storage means reaches "16371", an abnormality in the total score upper limit is detected, and subsequent operations of the settlement switch P6 are not accepted, making it impossible to perform the settlement process. If the counting switch P7 is then operated and the value stored in the game media number storage means becomes equal to or less than 16,368, the total points upper limit error is automatically cleared and the game becomes playable (start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 are ready to be operated).

Note that if there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit, play is disabled and the start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 cannot be accepted. However, under normal circumstances, even if only the bet switch P5 is disabled, play is disabled and it is not necessary to disable the start switch P3 and settlement switch P6, but in consideration of the possibility of an illegal total score upper limit abnormality occurring, the start switch P3 and settlement switch P6 are also disabled. Also, in consideration of the possibility of an illegal total score upper limit abnormality occurring during play, payout processing may be disabled.

<Start lever accepted?>
Next, if a playable insertion point has been inserted, the start lever acceptance is judged. In the start lever acceptance, it is confirmed whether the start switch P3 has been operated (confirmed whether a rising signal of the start switch P3 has been detected). If a playable insertion point has not been inserted, the process returns to the process of judging whether the transition condition to the setting confirmation mode for game medium acceptance has been satisfied, and the game standby state is looped.

Next, when a playable insertion point is inserted, and the start lever is accepted to check whether the start switch P3 has been operated, if it is determined that the start switch P3 has been operated (start lever accepted? is YES), a setting change disabled state is set, and if it is determined that the start switch P3 has not been operated (start lever accepted? is NO), the process returns to determining whether the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode have been met, and the game will loop while waiting to be played.

<Internal lottery>
Next, after the setting unchangeable state is set, an internal lottery process is executed. In the internal lottery process, a small winning combination, a replay (also called a replay), a BB, a RB, a loss, and the like are determined by lottery.

<Reel rotation processing>
Next, it is determined whether the minimum play time (the time required to ensure that the time from the start of the reel rotation of one game to the start of the reel rotation of the next game is 4.1 seconds or more) has elapsed, and if it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, a reel rotation start process is executed, and if it is determined that the minimum play time has not elapsed, the minimum play time determination process is looped until the minimum play time has elapsed.

Next, in the reel rotation start process, the process to rotate all reels is executed, and the creation of the offset frame number data begins before the operation of the stop switch can be accepted.

<Reel stop processing>
Next, the reel stop process is executed. In the reel stop process, it is determined whether or not the operation of the stop switch is acceptable, and if the operation of the stop switch is acceptable, it is confirmed whether or not the stop switch has been operated (confirm whether or not the rising signal of the stop switch has been detected). If the operation of the stop switch is not acceptable, the process returns to the creation of the shift frame number data.

Next, it is checked whether the stop switch has been operated. If it is determined that the stop switch has been operated, the stop position is determined from the stop acceptance position and the number of frames shifted. If it is determined that the stop switch has not been operated, the process returns to creating the number of frames shifted data.

Next, when the stopping position has been determined, it is determined whether all reels (three reels in this embodiment) have stopped, and if it is determined that all reels have stopped, processing according to the game state is executed. If it is determined that all reels have not stopped, the process returns to creating the shift frame number data.

<Processing by Game Status>
The processing by game state executes processing according to the main game state described later. For example, if the current game is an AT (game in an advantageous zone), and an arbitrary end condition of the advantageous zone (for example, AT300 games executed) is satisfied in the current game, and the next game is a game in a normal zone, the advantageous zone end processing is executed. The control processing for ending the advantageous zone under an arbitrary end condition will be described later.

<Payment process>
Next, after the game state-specific processing is executed, a payout processing is executed.

In the payout process, it is determined whether the replay activation symbol has stopped, and if it is determined that the replay activation symbol has stopped, the number of coins inserted at the start of play is stored as the automatic insertion number data, and if it is determined that the replay activation symbol has not stopped, it is determined whether the value of the score awarding timer is not "0" to determine whether the payout time has elapsed, and if the value of the score awarding timer is not "0", it waits until the value of the score awarding timer becomes "0", and if the value of the score awarding timer is "0", it stores the value "27" (equivalent to 60.35 ms), which indicates the payout time for one awarded point, in the value of the score awarding timer, and then sets a payout request command.

If a payout request command is sent from the game media count control board P16 after the main control board P15 has sent a payout request command, the main control board P15 increments the value of the acquisition number data indicating the number acquired (stored as "0" when payout starts) and decrements the score awarding data indicating the number to be paid out (stored as the payout number according to the winning symbol when payout starts). If the value of the score awarding data is not 0, the process of determining whether the value of the score awarding timer is not "0" is repeated again until the value of the score awarding data becomes 0. The acquisition number data is data for displaying the number acquired in the award number display section.

In addition, since the number of game media storage means stores "16368", which is the value immediately before the upper limit warning value, and even if the maximum number of game media to be awarded, "15", is awarded, the value stored in the number of game media storage means after the award is awarded is "16383", which is the upper limit value, and the upper limit value is not exceeded even if the number of game media is added to the number of game media storage means in the payout process, so that the game media that exceed the upper limit value are prevented from disappearing. In this case, after the value stored in the number of game media storage means reaches "16383", an abnormality in the total score upper limit is detected, and subsequent operations of the bet switch P5 and the start switch P3 cannot be accepted, so that bet processing and processing related to the start of play (such as the start of reel rotation processing) cannot be performed. If the counting switch P7 is subsequently operated and the value stored in the number of game media storage means becomes "16368" or less, the abnormality in the total score upper limit is automatically released, and the game becomes playable (the start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 are accepted).

<Advantageous Zone Clear Counter Management Processing>
Next, when the current game is a game in the advantageous zone, an update process is executed for the counters related to the end conditions of the advantageous zone (for example, a memory area that manages the number of games played in the advantageous zone and a memory area that manages MY in the advantageous zone). If it is determined that the end conditions of the advantageous zone are met by this update process, the next game is controlled to be a normal zone. If the advantageous zone is to be ended in the current game, various memory areas of the first main control RAM that were used in the game in the advantageous zone are initialized. On the other hand, if the current game is a game in the normal zone, the update process for the counters related to the end conditions of the advantageous zone is not executed. In other words, the advantageous zone clear counter management process determines whether the end conditions of the advantageous zone are met when the game is in the advantageous zone, and performs control to end the advantageous zone if the end conditions of the advantageous zone are met.

<Operation status management process>
Next, the operation status management process for the replay, the accessory, and the accessory continuous operation device is executed. By executing the operation status management process, one game ends, and the process returns to the game start set of the game progress main process.

When it is determined that the start switch has been operated, the setting is set to a state in which the settings cannot be changed, so that the settings cannot be changed in that state. However, it is also possible to configure the settings to be changed even during play (even after the start switch has been operated) without providing a state in which the settings cannot be changed.

<Description of interval interrupt processing controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to this embodiment>
In the interval interrupt process, first, a register save process is executed, in which register values are stored in a stack area so that the game progress main process that was being executed immediately before the interrupt process is completed.

Next, the interrupt flag clear process is executed, which clears (turns OFF) the interrupt flag to allow interrupt processing.

Next, the power-off process is executed. In the power-off process, if the power-off detection signal is ON, the power-off process described below is executed, and if the power-off detection signal is OFF, the power-off process is terminated.

Next, the interrupt counter update process is executed. In the interrupt counter update process, the counter is updated for each interrupt process.

Next, the main control command acquisition process is executed. In the main control command acquisition process, commands are received from the game media count control board P16 and stored in the main control command buffer.

Next, execute the input port read process. The input port read process reads the input port.

Next, the reel drive management process is executed. In the reel drive management process, drive processing is executed for all reels according to their status.

Next, the game media count control command output process is executed. In the game media count control command output process, the command is stored in the game media count command buffer in order to send the command to the game media count control board P16.

Next, execute the port output process, which sets data in the output port and outputs it.

Next, the timer measurement process is executed. In the timer measurement process, various timers are updated, such as the condition device output timer, payout count signal output timer, overflow test signal timer, reel stop acceptance waiting timer, minimum play time management timer, score award timer, setting change device operation start waiting timer, bonus operation start waiting timer, and bonus operation end waiting timer.

Next, the error management process is executed. In the error management process, setting value errors and built-in random number errors are checked. Note that the error management process is a process that calls a program outside the area of use, and the error check is executed in the program outside the area of use.

Next, the gaming machine information management process (main control) is executed. In the gaming machine information management process (main control), the information on gaming machine fraud 1 and gaming machine fraud 2 is updated.

Next, the sub-control command transmission process is executed. In the sub-control command transmission process, the command to be sent to the sub-control board P12 is set.

If the main control board P15 has no command to send to the sub-control board P12 (if no command is stored in the send command buffer), the main control board P15 may send a no-operation command to the sub-control board P12. The no-operation command includes information on the game status and error status, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the no-operation command, the status of the main control board P15 is known. For example, when the total score of the game media number control board P16 becomes a value that indicates a total score upper limit abnormality and the main control board P15 receives a total score upper limit abnormality signal, the sub-control board P12 may send a no-operation command to the sub-control board P12, so that the sub-control board P12 executes a notification to prompt the operation of the counting switch as a process for the total score upper limit abnormality. Note that, as examples of information included in the no-operation command, it is desirable to be able to know total score upper limit abnormality, total score threshold reached state, lending device communication abnormality 1 to 6, counting, VL abnormality, etc.

Next, the LED display process is executed. In the LED display process, the process of setting the 7-segment LED segment table to be displayed in the number of points displayed is executed.

Next, the sub-notification data output process is executed. In the sub-notification data output process, information such as whether the stop switch and max bed switch can be operated effectively and whether the door is open or closed is sent to the sub-control board.

Next, the gaming media count control notification process is executed. In the gaming media count control notification process, the gaming media count control notification information is updated.

Next, the register restore process is executed, which restores the information saved in the stack during the register save process.

Next, execute the interrupt permission process.

<Description of power-off processing controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to this embodiment>
When the power supply of the gaming machine P is turned off or the power supply interruption detection signal is turned ON due to an external factor such as a power outage, the power supply interruption process is executed. When the power supply interruption detection signal is not ON, the power supply interruption process is terminated. Note that, when the voltage falls below a predetermined value, the power supply interruption detection signal is input to a predetermined input port, and when the power supply interruption detection signal is input to a predetermined input port twice consecutively in the interruption process, it is determined that the power supply has been interrupted and the power supply interruption detection signal is turned ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power supply interruption detection signal may be turned ON when the voltage falls below the predetermined value even once.

If it determines that the power interruption detection signal is ON, it turns the output ports (0 to 6) OFF.

Next, execute the stack pointer save process.

Next, the power-off processing completion flag and RWM checksum data are set.

Next, execute the RWM write prohibition process.

Then it will wait for a reset signal and will loop in this state from then on.

<Description of the power-on process, main loop process, and power-off process controlled by the game media count control board P16 applicable to this embodiment>

The following describes the power-on process of the gaming media count control means when the gaming machine is powered on. Although details will be described later, when the gaming machine is powered on, the gaming media count control means is started (started up) first, and then the main control means is started (started up).

When the power to the gaming machine is turned on, the function of the gaming media count control chip is set. When setting the function of the gaming media count control chip, the initial settings of the built-in register are performed.

Next, the RWM initialization process is performed. In the RWM initialization process, the power status flag is checked and the RWM checksum data is calculated, and the RWM initialization start address is set according to whether the state is normal or abnormal to initialize the RWM. In addition, the RWM area outside the use area is also initialized by a program outside the use area. In other words, the initialization range of the RWM is different in the normal case and the abnormal case, and in the normal case, the total score stored in the total score memory area is not included in the initialization range, but in the abnormal case, the total score stored in the total score memory area is also included in the initialization range. Note that, for example, the initialization range in the normal and abnormal cases includes a memory area to be referenced when generating a gaming machine information notification. The memory area to be referenced when generating a gaming machine information notification is a memory area that stores the total number of inputs, the total number of awards, MY (gaming machine performance information), the total number of gimmicks awarded, the total number of consecutive gimmicks awarded, and the number of games played to generate the gaming machine performance information, and the gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, and gaming machine information to generate the gaming machine installation information. It goes without saying that the above memory areas are merely examples and other memory areas can also be initialized.

The power status flag is checked and the RWM checksum data is calculated (the power status flag check and the RWM checksum data calculation are sometimes collectively referred to as the RWM abnormality determination). If it is determined to be normal, the various memory areas storing the counting flag, gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, gaming machine information notification timer C, serial number, counting serial number, counting points, counting cumulative points, loan serial number, loan point receipt result, calculation MY counter, output MY counter, main control chip ID, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, etc. are initialized (for example, 0 is stored in the various memory areas). Note that the various memory areas are initialized regardless of whether the setting key switch is on or not. In addition, after the RWM initialization process, it is determined whether the total score clear switch is on or not, and if it is determined to be on, the total score is initialized, and if it is not determined to be on, the total score is not initialized. With this configuration, the decision to clear the total score can be made based on the operation of the total score clear switch, preventing the total score from being cleared inadvertently.

If the RWM abnormality judgment results in an abnormality, in addition to initializing the memory areas (counting flag, gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, gaming machine information notification timer C, serial number, counting serial number, counting points, accumulated counting points, loan serial number, loan point receipt result, calculation MY counter, output MY counter, main control chip ID, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, etc.) that were used when the RWM was judged to be normal, the memory areas that store information on the total points and role ratio monitor, etc. are also initialized (for example, 0 is stored in various memory areas). Note that initialization of various memory areas is performed regardless of whether the setting key switch is on or not.

If the RWM abnormality determination is determined to be normal, a determination is made as to whether the total score clear switch is ON or not, but if the RWM abnormality determination is determined to be abnormal, a determination is not made as to whether the total score clear switch is ON or not. This is because the total score is initialized by the initialization process that is executed when the result of checking the power status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data is determined to be abnormal. In other words, even if the total score clear switch is operated, the power status flag is checked and the RWM checksum data is calculated, and if an abnormality is determined, initialization based on the operation of the total score clear switch is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid performing initialization of the memory area that stores the total score twice, making it possible to shorten the processing time related to the initialization process.

Note that, in this embodiment, the RWM abnormality is determined by checking the power status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data, but either one of them may be used. Also, other check methods may be used to determine the RWM abnormality.

In addition, if an abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality determination, a determination may be made as to whether the total score clear switch is ON or not after performing RWM initialization processing at the time of power recovery abnormality (for example, initialization of the entire RWM area of the second main control RAM (including the memory area storing the total score)). Then, the system may be configured so that a determination as to whether the total score clear switch is ON or not is made after performing RWM initialization processing at the time of power recovery abnormality.

With this configuration, if the result of checking the power status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data is judged to be abnormal (if the result of checking the power status flag is judged to be abnormal, or if the result of calculating the RWM checksum data is judged to be abnormal), a determination is made as to whether the total score clear switch is ON or not after executing the RWM initialization process in the event of a power recovery abnormality. If the total score clear switch is ON, the memory area storing the total score will also be initialized again. Although there may be cases where the initialization ranges overlap, it is possible to reliably initialize the total score.

In addition, if the RWM is judged to be normal as a result of the abnormality determination and then the total score clear switch is determined to be ON, the total score is initialized and then total score clear timer 1 (also called medal count clear timer 1) is saved in a specified memory area in the RWM.

In addition, if an abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality judgment, the RWM area including the total score is initialized, and then total score clear timer 2 (also called medal count clear timer 2) is saved in a specified memory area in the RWM (a memory area different from total score clear timer 1).

Total score clear timer 1 is a timer for counting 60 seconds, and total score clear timer 2 is also a timer for counting 60 seconds. Total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 are decrement counters, and when the counter value becomes 0, it means that 60 seconds have been counted. Note that total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 may also be increment timers.

If a value for counting 60 seconds is stored as the value of total score clear timer 1, total score clear 1 information is sent to the main control means until the value of total score clear timer 1 becomes 0, and if a value for counting 60 seconds is stored as the value of total score clear timer 2, total score clear 2 information is sent to the main control means until the value of total score clear timer 2 becomes 0.

When the main control means receives total score clear 1 information, the main control means transmits to the sub-control means, as part of the no-operation command, predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 1 information, and when the main control means receives total score clear 2 information, the main control means transmits to the sub-control means, as part of the no-operation command, predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 2 information (information different from the predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 1 information).

When the sub-control means receives predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information, it executes a notification based on the predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information, and when the sub-control means receives predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information, it executes a notification based on the predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information. Examples of notifications based on predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information include displaying "Total score has been cleared" on the LCD or "Total score has been cleared successfully" or outputting special background music from the speaker. Examples of notifications based on predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information include displaying "Power recovery abnormality" on the LCD or "Total score has been cleared due to an abnormality" or outputting special background music from the speaker.

The alarm time when the sub-control means receives the specified information based on receiving total score clear 1 information or the specified information based on receiving total score clear 2 information may be until the value of total score clear timer 1 or the value of total score clear timer 2 becomes 0 (until 60 seconds have elapsed since the total score clear timer 1 or the total score clear timer 2 was set), or the sub-control means may manage and alarm for an arbitrary alarm time (for example, 180 seconds, etc.) after receiving the specified information based on receiving total score clear 1 information or the specified information based on receiving total score clear 2 information.

In this way, the game media number control means sets total score clear timer 1 or total score clear timer 2, so that the sub-control means can issue a notification based on predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information, or a notification based on predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information. This allows the administrator to know that the total score has been cleared and what triggered the total score to be cleared, making it possible to recognize the initialization of the total score due to a mistaken operation of the total score clear switch or the initialization of the total score due to fraud.

In addition, if the total score clear switch was pressed when the power was turned on, the total score is initialized, total score clear timer 1 is set, and then the total score clear status is set to 1 (total score clear status is turned ON).

The reason why the total score clear timer 1 and the total score clear timer 2 are 60 seconds is to ensure that the main control means can reliably send a command to the sub-control means. This is because when the power supply of the gaming machine P is turned on, the difference between the time it takes for the main control means to start and the time it takes for the sub-control means to start can be up to about 30 seconds (the sub-control means starts 30 seconds after the main control means starts), and even in that case, the sub-control means can execute a notification based on the predetermined information based on receiving the total score clear 1 information or a notification based on the predetermined information based on receiving the total score clear 2 information for 30 seconds. Note that when the power supply is turned on, the main control means starts after the game media number control means starts, but since the time difference between the game media number control means and the main control means when the power supply is turned on is relatively short (about 1 second), the explanation is based on the time difference between the main control means and the sub-control means when the power supply is turned on. However, if the time difference between the game media number control means and the main control means when the power supply is turned on is long, it is necessary to set the timer value taking that time difference into consideration.

Note that instead of managing the total score clear timer 1 and the total score clear timer 2 as timers, they can be managed as flags like total score clear flag 1 and total score clear flag 2. However, with flag management, an initialization process (a process of storing 0 in the memory area) is required after setting the flag (after storing 1 in the memory area), whereas with timer management, the timer value automatically becomes the initial value (0) over time, making it possible to reduce the program capacity.

The time counted by total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 is not limited to 60 seconds, and any time may be set as long as the sub-control means is capable of receiving information from total score clear timer 1 or total score clear timer 2.

If a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 1 is not 0 (total score clear timer 1 is counting), total score clear timer 1 is initialized in the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when power is restored. Total score clear timer 1 is also initialized in the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be abnormal when power is restored. In other words, if a power outage occurs while a notification based on total score clear 1 information is being executed and then power is restored, the secondary control means will not execute a notification based on specified information based on the receipt of total score clear 1 information.

<When the power is turned on by pressing the total score clear switch after the power is turned off during the total score clear timer count 1>
If a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 1 is not 0 (total score clear timer 1 is counting) and the power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, the total score clear timer 1 is initialized in the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when the power is restored, and then the total score clear switch is ON, so the total score clear timer 1 is saved after the total score initialization process is performed. In other words, the total score clear timer 1 is initialized when the power is restored after a power outage, but if the total score clear switch is ON, the total score clear timer 1 is set again.

By configuring it in this way, even if the total score clear timer 1 is initialized due to a power outage, the total score clear timer 1 can be saved again by turning the total score clear switch ON when the power is turned on, making it possible to have the sub-control means execute a notification based on specified information based on receiving the total score clear 1 information.

<When the power is turned on by pressing the total score clear switch after the power is turned off during the total score clear timer 1 count 2>
If a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 1 is not 0 (a situation in which total score clear timer 1 is counting), and power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and an abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality judgment when power is restored, the RWM area including total score clear timer 1 is initialized in the initialization process after the abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality judgment when power is restored, and then total score clear timer 2 is saved without judging whether the total score clear switch is ON or not, even if the total score clear switch is operated. In other words, total score clear timer 1 is initialized when power is restored after a power outage, and is configured so that total score clear timer 2 is set even if the total score clear switch is ON.

By configuring it in this way, if the total score clear switch is operated and an RWM abnormality is determined when power is restored, the total score clear timer 2 is saved, making it possible to have the sub-control means execute an alert based on specified information that is based on receiving the total score clear 2 information.

If a power outage occurs when the value of the total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (when the total score clear timer 2 is counting), the total score clear timer 2 is initialized and then reset in the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when the power is restored (a value for counting 60 seconds is stored as the value of the total score clear timer 2). Also, the total score clear timer 2 is initialized and the total score clear timer 2 is set in the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be abnormal when the power is restored. In other words, if a power outage occurs while a notification based on predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information is being executed and the power is restored, a notification based on predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information can be executed. Note that if a power outage occurs when the value of the total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (when the total score clear timer 2 is counting), the total score clear timer 2 may be reset without being initialized in the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when the power is restored.

<When the power is turned on by pressing the total score clear switch after the power is turned off during the total score clear timer 2 count 1>
If a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (a situation in which total score clear timer 2 is counting), and power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and an abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality judgment when power is restored, the RWM area including total score clear timer 2 is initialized in the initialization process after the abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality judgment when power is restored, and then total score clear timer 2 is saved without judging whether the total score clear switch is ON or not, even if the total score clear switch is operated. In other words, total score clear timer 2 is initialized when power is restored after a power outage, and is configured to be set even if the total score clear switch is ON.

By configuring it in this way, if the total score clear switch is operated and an RWM abnormality is determined when power is restored, the total score clear timer 2 is saved, making it possible to have the sub-control means execute an alert based on specified information that is based on receiving the total score clear 2 information.

<When the power is turned on by pressing the total score clear switch after the power is turned off during the total score clear timer 2 count 2>
If a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (a situation in which total score clear timer 2 is counting), and power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and the result of the RWM abnormality judgment when power is restored is judged to be normal, the RWM area including total score clear timer 2 is initialized in the initialization process after the result of the RWM abnormality judgment when power is restored is judged to be normal, and then, since the total score clear switch is ON, the total score clear timer 1 is saved and then the total score clear timer 2 is also saved. In other words, total score clear timer 2 is initialized when power is restored after a power outage, but total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 are configured to be set even if the total score clear switch is ON. In addition, when total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 are set, specified information based on receiving total score clear 1 information and specified information based on receiving total score clear 2 information are transmitted to the sub-control board, and when the sub-control board receives specified information based on receiving total score clear 1 information and specified information based on receiving total score clear 2 information, it prioritizes executing an alert based on the total score clear 2 information.

By configuring it in this way, if the RWM abnormality is judged to be normal when the power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 are saved, but it is possible to have the secondary control means execute an alert based on specified information that is based on receiving the total score clear 2 information.

In addition, if a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (a situation in which total score clear timer 2 is counting), power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and total score clear timer 2 is not initialized in the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when the power is restored, total score clear timer 1 may be saved and total score clear timer 2 may also be saved again after the total score initialization process is executed since the total score clear switch is ON, or if a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (a situation in which total score clear timer 2 is counting), power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when the power is restored, total score clear timer 1 may be saved and total score clear timer 2 may also be saved again. If the total score clear timer 2 is not initialized in the initialization process after the result is determined to be normal, the total score clear timer 2 may be saved again without determining whether the total score clear switch is ON even if the total score clear switch is operated. Alternatively, if a power outage occurs when the value of the total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (a situation in which the total score clear timer 2 is counting), and the power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and the total score clear timer 2 is initialized in the initialization process after the result of the RWM abnormality determination is determined to be normal when the power is restored, the total score clear timer 2 may be saved again without determining whether the total score clear switch is ON even if the total score clear switch is operated. In any case, it is possible to cause the secondary control means to execute a notification based on predetermined information based on the receipt of the total score clear 2 information.

In the above description, the main control means transmits to the sub-control means, as part of a no-operation command, predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information and predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information. However, the present invention is not limited to transmitting information as part of a no-operation command, and a command corresponding to predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information or a command corresponding to predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information may be directly transmitted. In other words, a command corresponding to predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information or a command corresponding to predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information may be generated and stored in a command buffer, and when the command transmission timing arrives, a command corresponding to predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information or a command corresponding to predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information may be transmitted.

Next, set the timer to wait for the main control means to start.

The main control means start waiting timer is a memory area for storing a timer value that repeats only a portion of the interrupt processing of the game media count control means (does not execute a certain portion of the interrupt processing) from when the game machine is powered on until the main control means starts up.

The main control means startup waiting timer is stored with a value equivalent to approximately 3 seconds ("3000" if the interrupt processing interval is 1 ms). This is longer than the sum of the time associated with the initial setting of the main control means, approximately 1 second, and the time it takes the main control means to finish sending all commands to the gaming media count control means, approximately 1.5 seconds. The value of the main control means startup waiting timer is not limited to a value equivalent to approximately 3 seconds, but may be any value longer than the time associated with the initial setting of the control means plus the time it takes the main control means to finish sending all commands to the gaming media count control means (for example, a value equivalent to 5 seconds or a value equivalent to 30 seconds).

Next, a program outside the usage area is called and the test pattern display flag is turned ON to display a test pattern on the role ratio monitor.

Then start the main loop.

In the main loop, first disable interrupts.

Next, the main control communication process is executed. The main control communication process is a process for communicating commands with the main control means.

After that, interrupts are enabled and the program returns to the first step of the main loop, which is to disable interrupts, and continues looping from then on.

<Description of the interval interrupt process controlled by the game media number control board P16 applicable to this embodiment>
The interval interrupt processing (also called timer interrupt processing or interrupt processing) controlled by the game media number control board P16 will be explained with reference to FIG.

The interval interrupt process controlled by the game media count control board P16 is executed every 1 ms.

In the interval interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process is executed to determine whether a power failure has been detected. If a power failure is detected in the power failure detection process, the power failure process is executed. In the power failure process, if the power is turned on normally, the power status flag is saved as normal, and if the power is turned on abnormally, the power status flag is saved as abnormal.

In the power interruption detection process, a power interruption detection signal is input to a specified input port, and if it is determined that the bit data is 1, the value of the power interruption check counter is incremented by 1. The value of the power interruption check counter is then checked, and if the value of the power interruption check counter is 7, it is determined that a power interruption has been detected, and 1 is stored in the power interruption detection flag (the power interruption detection flag is turned ON).

When the power supply of the gaming machine P is turned off or the voltage falls below a predetermined value due to an external factor such as a power outage, a power outage detection signal is input to a specified input port, and if the power outage detection signal is input to a specified input port seven consecutive times during interrupt processing, it is determined that there has been a power outage and the power outage detection signal is turned ON. However, this is not limited to this, and the system may be configured such that if the voltage falls below the predetermined value even once, an external interrupt is generated and the power outage detection signal is turned ON.

Then, after updating the value of the main control means startup waiting timer, it is determined whether the value of the main control means startup waiting timer is 0.

If the value of the main control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to the power interruption detection process. In other words, the process of detecting the power interruption and the process of updating the value of the main control means start waiting timer are repeated until it is determined that the value of the main control means start waiting timer is 0.

Next, after determining that the value of the main control means startup waiting timer is 0, the WDT (watchdog timer) clear & restart process is executed. In the WDT clear & restart process, "55h" is saved in the watchdog timer command register as the WDT clear & restart word.

Next, set the check data for the medal count check (also called total score check) described below. As the check data, 16h is stored in the B register and 04h is stored in the C register.

Here, 16h stored in the B register corresponds to the maximum payout (maximum awarded amount) of 15 points, and 04h stored in the C register corresponds to the maximum bet amount of 3 points.

Furthermore, 16h stored in the B register corresponding to the maximum payout amount is referred to as range check data 1, and 04h stored in the C register corresponding to the maximum bet amount is referred to as range check data 2.

If the maximum payout is 10 points, 11h will be stored in the B register as range check data 1, so the value of range check data 1 can be thought of as maximum payout + 01h. If the maximum bet is 5 points, 06h will be stored in the C register as range check data 2, so the value of range check data 2 can be thought of as maximum bet + 1h.

Next, the game medal count check process is executed. The game medal count check process will be explained with reference to Figure 51. The game medal count check process is executed twice within the interrupt process. For convenience, the game medal count check process executed at this timing is referred to as the first game medal count check process, and the game medal count check process executed at a different timing is referred to as the second game medal count check process. However, the first game medal count check process and the second game medal count check process are the same module, but have different check data and execution timing.

In the first medal count check process, the medal count (total score) is obtained. Specifically, the total score data stored in the total score storage means is saved in the HL register.

Next, in the confirmation data set process, the acquired number of game medals is stored in the IX register. Specifically, the value of the IX register is stored in the DE register, and then the value of the HL register is stored in the IX register. At this point, the total score data stored in the total score storage means is stored in the IX register. In other words, each time the game medal number check process is executed, the latest total score data is stored in the IX register. Note that the total score data stored in the total score storage area is stored in the IX register by the power-on process, so that it can be checked accurately even immediately after power-on.

Next, in the "Number of medals played ≧ Confirmation data?" process, the difference between the acquired number of medals played and the confirmation data is determined. Specifically, if the total score data stored in the IX register stored in the DE register is subtracted from the total score data stored in the total score storage means stored in the HL register and the result is non-carry (the bit corresponding to the carry flag in the flag register is 0) (if the value of the HL register is equal to or greater than the value of the DE register), the game medal number change value calculation process is executed, and if the total score data stored in the IX register stored in the DE register is subtracted from the total score data stored in the total score storage means stored in the HL register and the result is not non-carry (the bit corresponding to the carry flag in the flag register is 1) (if the value of the HL register is smaller than the value of the DE register), the value of the DE register and the value of the HL register are swapped, and then the range check data 2 is set (04h stored in the C register is stored in the B register) and the game medal number change value calculation process is executed.

In other words, this is a process that checks the difference between the total score data stored in the IX register during the second game medal count check process and the total score data stored in the total score storage means called up during the first game medal count check process.

Next, in the game medal number change value calculation process, the total score data stored in the IX register stored in the DE register is subtracted from the total score data stored in the total score storage means stored in the HL register, and the subtraction result is stored in the HL register.

Next, in the game medal count change value < range check data? process, range check data 1 or range check data 2 stored in the B register is subtracted from the subtraction result stored in the HL register and the subtraction result is stored in the HL register. If there is a carry as a result of the subtraction (the bit corresponding to the carry flag in the flag register is 1), the first game medal count check process is terminated, and if there is no carry as a result of the subtraction (the bit corresponding to the carry flag in the flag register is 0), 200 is stored as the timer value in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer memory area and the first game medal count check process is terminated.

In other words, if range check data 1 is stored in the B register (if 16h is stored), the total score data stored in the IX register during the second game medal count check process is smaller than or there is no difference between the total score data stored in the total score storage means called up during the first game medal count check process, so the number of game medals has increased or has not increased or decreased between the second game medal count check process and the first game medal count check process.

When the number of game medals increases between the second game medal count check process and the first game medal count check process, it is possible that the main control means has added the number of game medals (award points) to the game media count control means through a payout process.

When the number of game medals does not increase or decrease between the second game medal count check process and the first game medal count check process, it is possible that the main control means has not executed a process to increase the points by a payout process to the game media count control means, and the main control means has not executed a process to decrease the points by a bet process to the game media count control means.

For this reason, in a normal environment, the maximum value obtained by subtracting the total score saved in the second medal count check process from the total score saved in the first medal count check process is 15, which is the maximum payout number, and because 16 is set as range check data 1, there is no situation in which a carry occurs as a result of 16 - 15.

For this reason, in the "Game medal count change value < range check data?" process, if a carry occurs, it is possible that the total score has been increased due to fraudulent activity, so the timer value 200 is stored in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area.

If a timer value of 200 is stored in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area, an abnormality command is sent to the sub-control means via the main control means, and an abnormality alert is issued based on the abnormality command, making it possible to notify those around you of any unauthorized activity.

In addition, if range check data 2 is stored in the B register (04h is stored), the total score data stored in the IX register during the second game medal count check process is greater than the total score data stored in the total score storage means called up during the first game medal count check process, so the number of game medals has decreased between the second game medal count check process and the first game medal count check process.

When the number of game medals decreases between the second game medal count check process and the first game medal count check process, it may be that the main control means has transmitted the number of game medals (inserted points) to the game media count control means through bet processing.

Because the value of the DE register and the value of the HL register are swapped before setting range check data 2, the game medal count change value calculation process can be executed with the same command whether range check data 1 or 2 is set. In other words, when the game medal count change value calculation process subtracts the total score data stored in the IX register stored in the DE register from the total score data stored in the total score storage means stored in the HL register, the result is always a positive value.

For this reason, in a normal environment, the maximum value obtained by subtracting the total score saved in the second medal count check process from the total score saved in the first medal count check process is the maximum bet number of 3, and because 04h is set as range check data 2, there is no situation in which a carry occurs as a result of 4-3.

For this reason, in the "Game medal count change value < range check data?" process, if a carry occurs, it is possible that the total score has decreased due to fraudulent activity, so the timer value of 200 is stored in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area.

If a timer value of 200 is stored in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area, an abnormality command is sent to the sub-control means via the main control means, and an abnormality alert is issued based on the abnormality command, making it possible to notify those around you of any unauthorized activity.

Next, the input port read process is executed. In the input port read process, input port 3 is read.

The input ports of the game medium count control board P16 are configured so that game medium count control data signals 1 to 8 can be input to input port 1, game medium count control data signals 9 to 16 can be input to input port 2, and game medium count control data strobe signal, count button signal, VL signal, and medal count clear button signal can be input to input port 3.

Input ports 1 and 2 are input ports used for parallel communication between the main control board P15 and the game media count control board P16, and the input ports are read when commands are received from the main control board P15. A command indicating the type of information is input to input port 1, and a command indicating the information data is input to input port 2.

Input port 3 is an input port used for serial communication with various switches, the rental unit, and the main control board P15, and the input port is read by the game media count control command reception process.

In the input port reading process, rising data for input port 3 is created from the previous level data for input port 3 and the current level data for input port 3.

Next, the VL signal is checked to check for connection abnormalities with the lending unit. First, the VL abnormality flag is set to 0 (the VL abnormality flag is cleared). Then, if the bit data input to the VL signal of input port 3 is 0, FFh is stored in the VL abnormality flag (1 is subtracted from the value of the VL abnormality flag and stored). Note that if the bit data input to the VL signal of input port 3 is 1, this is normal, so the next process is executed.

Next, a gaming machine information management process (control of the number of gaming media) is executed. In the gaming machine information management process (control of the number of gaming media), a process such as updating gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, and/or gaming machine information notification timer C is executed. If, as a result of updating gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, and/or gaming machine information notification timer C, it becomes time to notify the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, or gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine information that has become the notification time is transmitted to the lending unit. Specific processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 30.

Next, the counting control process is executed. In the counting control process, the counting process is executed according to the operation status of the counting switch P7. The specific process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

Next, the rental notification reception process is executed. In the rental notification reception process, the rental process is executed according to the rental notification received based on the operation status of the rental switch of the rental unit. In addition, a program outside the usage area is called and flags for rental device communication abnormality 2 to 6 are set according to the communication status. The specific process will be described later with reference to Figure 49.

Next, set the check data for the second medal count check. Save 51h as the check data in register B and 51h in register C.

Here, 51h stored in the B register corresponds to the maximum number of medals that can be lent (maximum lent points), which is 50 points, and 51h stored in the C register corresponds to the maximum number of medals that can be counted (maximum count points), which is 50 points.

Next, a second game medal count check process (a game medal count check process executed at the second timing within the same interrupt process) is executed. The second game medal count check process differs only in the check data that is set, and is the same module as the first game medal count check process, and executes the same commands.

The first game medal count check process checks the increase or decrease in the total score between the second game medal count check process and the first game medal count check process, and the second game medal count check process checks the increase or decrease in the total score between the first game medal count check process and the second game medal count check process.

In other words, the first game medal count check process checks whether the increase or decrease is normal, taking into account the number of bets and the number of payouts based on the command received from the main control means, and the second game medal count check process checks whether the increase or decrease is normal, taking into account the number of counted medals based on the command sent to the lending unit and the number of lent medals received from the lending unit.

Next, the process for managing the pressing time of the counting switch P7 (hereinafter also referred to as the counting execution flag setting process) will be explained using FIG. 39.

The counting execution flag set process is a process that sets a flag indicating whether a short press operation or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7 when the player is operating (pressing) the counting switch P7 or when the player has released the counting switch P7 (not pressed). The counting execution flag set process, which employs processing related to the counting button state described below, is not required.

First, "Counting switch ON?" determines whether the counting switch P7 is being operated. As described above, the method of determining whether the counting switch P7 is being operated is to store the input data (ON or OFF) of the counting switch P7 input to the input port 3 by the interrupt processing of the game medium number control board P16 in a certain memory area (also called the input port 3 level data memory area) in the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 before executing the counting execution flag set processing, and to determine YES if the input data of the counting switch P7 stored in the memory area is a value indicating ON, and to determine NO if the input data of the counting switch P7 stored in the memory area is a value indicating OFF.

"Counting execution timer (also called "counting button timer") = 0?" determines whether the timer value measuring the time the counting switch P7 is operated is "0". As a method for measuring the time the counting switch P7 is operated, for example, the RWM area of the game medium count control board P16 has a counting execution timer memory area (_TM_CAL_ACT) that measures the time the counting switch P7 is operated, and if the value stored in this memory area is "0", it is determined to be YES, and if the value stored in this memory area is a value other than "0" (for example, "200" or "500"), it is determined to be NO. Note that the counting execution timer memory area is a memory area that can store 2 bytes of data (0 to 65535) so that values from "0" to "500" can be stored.

"Counting execution flag ≠ 0?" determines whether the counting execution flag is "0". Here, the counting execution flag is a flag that manages whether a short press operation or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. For example, a counting execution flag storage area (_FL_CAL_ACT) that manages the counting execution flag is provided, and when the counting execution flag storage area is "0" (when the counting execution flag is 0), it indicates a situation in which it has not yet been determined whether a short press operation or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7, when the counting execution flag storage area is "1" (when the counting execution flag is 1), it indicates a situation in which it has been determined that a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7, and when the counting execution flag storage area is "2" (when the counting execution flag is 2), it indicates a situation in which it has been determined that a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7.

Therefore, "Counting execution flag ≠ 0?" is judged as YES if a number other than "0" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area (specifically, "1" or "2" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area), and is judged as NO if "0" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area.

"Save counting execution flag = 1" is a process for saving "1" in the counting execution flag storage area. In other words, it is a process for determining that a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. For example, if there is no operation of the counting switch P7, the counting execution timer storage area is "200", and "0" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area, "1" is saved in the counting execution flag storage area.

"Counting execution timer clear" is a process that resets the counting execution timer storage area to an initial value (e.g., "0"). As is clear from FIG. 39, "counting execution timer clear" is executed when the counting switch P7 is not operated, and is executed not only when "1" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area, but also when "1" is not stored in the counting execution flag storage area (e.g., when "1" or "2" is already stored in the counting execution flag storage area). In other words, by resetting the counting execution timer storage area to its initial value when the counting switch P7 is not operated, the value of the counting execution timer storage area can be updated from the initial value when the counting switch P7 is operated again thereafter.

"Counting execution timer ≧ 500" determines whether the timer value measuring the time that the counting switch P7 is operated is "500" or more (the time that the counting switch P7 is operated is 500 ms or more). For example, if the value of the counting execution timer storage area is "500", it is determined as YES, and if the value of the counting execution timer storage area is less than "500" (specifically, if the value of the counting execution timer storage area is between "0" and "499"), it is determined as NO.

"Counting execution timer +1" is a process that adds "1" to the timer value that measures the time that the counting switch P7 is operated (updating the time that the counting switch P7 is operated). As is clear from FIG. 39, if "Counting execution timer ≧500" is YES, "Counting execution timer +1" is not executed. In other words, after the value of the counting execution timer memory area becomes "500", the value of the counting execution timer memory area remains "500", so the value of the counting execution timer memory area can be kept within the range of "0 to 500". In other words, the time that the counting switch P7 is operated is not longer than 500 ms (the value of the counting execution timer memory area is greater than 500), so the value stored in the counting execution timer memory area is configured not to overflow. By configuring it in this way, for example, when the value of the counting execution timer memory area is "65535", which is the maximum value that can be stored in the counting execution timer memory area, the "counting execution timer + 1" is executed, causing the value of the counting execution timer memory area to become "0", and as the counting switch P7 continues to be operated thereafter, the value of the counting execution timer memory area is updated, and if the counting switch P7 is released when the value of the counting execution timer memory area is less than "500", it is possible to prevent "1" from being stored in the counting execution flag memory area (which would result in it being determined that a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7).

"Counting execution timer save" is a process that saves the value updated by "Counting execution timer + 1" in the counting execution timer memory area. For example, if the value of the counting execution timer memory area is "0", the value of the counting execution timer memory area becomes "1", and if the value of the counting execution timer memory area is "499", the value of the counting execution timer memory area becomes "500".

"Counting execution flag = save 2" is a process for saving "2" in the counting execution flag storage area. In other words, it is a process for determining that a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. Specifically, if it is determined that the timer value measuring the time that the counting switch P7 is operated is "500" or more (the time that the counting switch P7 is operated is 500 ms or more), "2" is saved in the counting execution flag storage area.

As described above, the counting execution flag setting process determines whether the operation of the counting switch P7 is a short press operation or a long press operation, and measures the operation time of the counting switch P7.

Then, the process returns to the interrupt process and executes the game media count control command reception process. In the game media count control command reception process, the process executes the reception process of commands from the rental unit and the main control board P15. If a game machine fraud command is received from the rental unit, a program outside the usage area is called and the fraud information is accumulated and saved.

In addition, when a reel operation status command is received from the main control board P15, a program outside the usage area is called to save the operation status of the reels, etc.

In addition, when a ratio display command is received from the main control board P15, a program outside the usage area is called and the role ratio monitor type number is saved.

When a start lever reception command is received from the main control board P15, the program in the use area stores the input point information used in the game information of the hall control and fraud monitoring information in the data area (_WK_MDL_IN) of the use area, and stores the input point information for calling a program outside the use area and displaying it on the role ratio monitor in the data area outside the use area (_SN_MDL_IN). Note that the input point information used in the hall control and fraud monitoring information is stored as "3" (if the input points in the previous game were 3 points; if the input points in the previous game were 2 points, it will be "2") when replay is activated (if a replay was won in the previous game), and the input point information for displaying it on the role ratio monitor is stored as "0" when replay is activated (if a replay was won in the previous game).

In addition, when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15, the program in the usage area stores the bonus point information used in the game information of the hall control and fraud monitoring information in the data area (_WK_MDL_OUT) of the usage area, and stores the bonus point information for calling a program outside the usage area and displaying it on the role ratio monitor in the data area outside the usage area (_SN_MDL_OUT). Note that the bonus point information used in the hall control and fraud monitoring information is stored as "3" (if the bonus points for the previous game were 3 points; if the bonus points for the previous game were 2 points, it will be "2") when replay is activated (if a replay was won in the previous game), and the bonus point information for displaying it on the role ratio monitor is stored as "0" when replay is activated (if a replay was won in the previous game).

(_SN_MDL_OUT), which is a data area outside the area of use for displaying the award point information on the award ratio monitor, is information required for calculating the cumulative instruction-included feature ratio, the consecutive feature ratio for the most recent 6000 games, the feature ratio for the most recent 6000 games, the cumulative consecutive feature ratio, and the cumulative feature ratio. For example, by adding information stored in (_SN_MDL_OUT), which is the award point information for the game, to a memory area capable of storing the cumulative award number, a memory area capable of storing the cumulative consecutive feature activation award number, and a memory area capable of storing the cumulative feature activation award number, it is possible to update the memory area capable of storing the cumulative award number, the memory area capable of storing the cumulative consecutive feature activation award number, and the memory area capable of storing the cumulative feature activation award number.

In addition, if Bit 3 of Gaming Machine Illegal 2 is set to "1" when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15 (if the total score clear switch was operated when the power was turned on, the total score was cleared, and the total score clear status is ON), a program outside the usage area is called and Bit 3 of Gaming Machine Illegal 2 is set to "0" (cleared).

In addition, when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15, calculations are performed for game performance information and role ratio monitor.

In addition, when an input request command is received from the main control board P15, it is determined whether the value of the second control command is "0", and if it is determined that it is "0", it executes abnormal command reception processing, and if it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined whether it exceeds "3" ("4" or more). If it is determined that the value of the second control command exceeds "3", it executes abnormal command reception processing, and if it is determined that it does not exceed "3" ("3" or less), it is determined whether the VL abnormal flag is not "0". If it is determined that the VL abnormal flag is not "0", it executes unacceptable set processing, and if it is determined that the VL abnormal flag is "0", it determines whether the result of subtracting the number of input requests from the total score is a negative value (whether the carry flag = 1 or not). If it is determined that the result of subtracting the number of input requests from the total score is a negative value, it executes unacceptable set processing, and if it is determined that the result of subtracting the number of input requests from the total score is not a negative value, it stores the value obtained by subtracting the number of input requests from the total score as the total score. Then, after storing the number of input requests in the input point memory area for transmitting hole control and fraud monitoring information, it sets the command to be transmitted to the main control board P15. The unacceptable setting process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality as data for the second control command sent to the main control board P15 (for example, a process of setting the most significant bit of the data for the number of input requests received to "1"). The abnormal command reception process is a process of setting a value indicating a communication abnormality (for example, FFh) as the type of the first control command sent to the main control board P15, and a value indicating an abnormality (for example, FFh) as data for the second control command. After setting the commands, the commands are sent to the main control board P15 at any time.

In addition, when a settlement request command is received from the main control board P15, it is determined whether the value of the second control command is "0", and if it is determined that it is "0", it executes abnormal command reception processing, and if it is determined that it is not "0", it determines whether it exceeds "3" ("4" or more). If it is determined that the value of the second control command exceeds "3", it executes abnormal command reception processing, and if it is determined that it does not exceed "3" ("3" or less), it determines whether the VL abnormal flag is not "0". If it is determined that the VL abnormal flag is not "0", it executes unacceptable set processing, and if it is determined that the VL abnormal flag is "0", it determines whether the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score exceeds the upper limit of the total score (16383), and if it is determined that the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score exceeds the upper limit of the total score, it executes unacceptable set processing, and if it is determined that the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score does not exceed the upper limit of the total score, it stores the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score as the total score. Then, after storing the value obtained by subtracting the number of settlement requests from the value of the input point memory area for transmitting hall control and fraud monitoring information, the command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 is set. The unacceptable setting process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality as the data of the second control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 (for example, a process of setting the most significant bit of the data of the received number of settlement requests to "1"). The abnormal command reception process is a process of setting a value indicating a communication abnormality (for example, FFh) as the type of the first control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15, and a value indicating an abnormality (for example, FFh) as the data of the second control command. After setting the command, the command is transmitted to the main control board P15 at any time.

When it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is "0", it is determined whether the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score exceeds the upper limit of the total score (16383). However, if the total score reaches the upper limit warning value, the settlement switch P6 cannot be accepted. Since the total score will not exceed the upper limit due to the settlement process under normally expected circumstances, it is also possible to execute a process to store the value obtained by subtracting the settlement request number from the value of the input point memory area for sending hole control and fraud monitoring information, without determining whether the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score exceeds the upper limit of the total score (16383) after determining that the VL abnormality flag is "0".

In addition, when a payout request command is received from the main control board P15, it is determined whether the value of the second control command is not "1", and if it is determined that it is not "1", it executes the abnormal command reception process, and if it is determined that it is "1", it determines whether the VL abnormal flag is not "0". If it is determined that the VL abnormal flag is not "0", it executes the unacceptable set process, and if it is determined that the VL abnormal flag is "0", it determines whether the total score is the upper limit value. If it is determined that the total score is the upper limit value, it executes the unacceptable set process, and if it is determined that the total score is not the upper limit value, it stores the current total score plus "1" as the total score. Then, after updating the value of the granted point memory area for transmitting the hall control and fraud monitoring information, it sets the command to be transmitted to the main control board P15. The unacceptable set process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality as the data of the second control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 (for example, a process of setting the most significant bit of the data of the received payout request number to "1"). The abnormal command reception process is a process of setting a value indicating a communication abnormality (e.g., FFh) as the type of the first control command to be sent to the main control board P15, and a value indicating an abnormality (e.g., FFh) as the data for the second control command. After the commands are set, they are sent to the main control board P15 as needed.

When it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is "0", it is determined whether the total score is at the upper limit value or not. However, if the total score reaches the upper limit warning value, the start switch P3 and the bet switch cannot be accepted. Since the total score will not exceed the upper limit value due to the payout process under normal circumstances, it is also possible to execute a process in which, after it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is "0", it is not determined whether the total score is at the upper limit value or not, but the current total score plus "1" is added and stored as the total score.

The game media count control command reception process may be performed by reception interrupt process rather than by timer interrupt process. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the main control means transmits a command and the game media count control means receives the command, and is executed with priority over the timer interrupt.

Next, a state control process is executed. In the state control process, a process is executed to determine whether or not the VL abnormality flag, which is set when the VL signal is OFF, is ON (VL abnormality flag is "FFh"), and whether or not the serial number abnormality flag, which is set when the serial numbers are not consecutive, is ON. In other words, the VL abnormality flag is ON when the gaming machine P and the rental unit are not connected. When the gaming machine P and the rental unit are not connected, this corresponds to a situation in which the gaming machine P is powered on and started up but the rental unit is not powered on, or a situation in which an abnormality has occurred in the communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit.

If the value stored in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area is not 0, a control status signal is set and the main control means is made to execute a notification process regarding the out-of-range increase/decrease timer being exceeded.

Next, the LED display process is executed. In the LED display process, display control of the game media count display section P9 is executed.

Next, the ratio control process is executed. In the ratio control process, a program outside the usage area is called to execute the update process of various counters for calculating the display contents of the role ratio monitor, and the display process of the role ratio monitor.

Next, the timer management process is executed. In the timer management process, a program outside the usage area is called to update loan notification reception timer 1 and loan notification reception timer 2. Loan notification reception timer 1 and loan notification reception timer 2 are used to determine communication abnormalities.

Next, execute the interrupt permission process.

The interval interrupt process is configured to execute a gaming machine information management process (control of the number of gaming media) for sending a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit after updating the main control means start waiting timer and judging the main control means start waiting timer. With this configuration, after the gaming machine is powered on, the gaming machine information notification can be sent to the rental unit after the gaming media number control means receives a command sent from the main control means, so that the information sent from the main control means can be included in the gaming machine information notification sent to the rental unit first after the gaming machine is powered on. In particular, if the gaming machine information notification sent to the rental unit first after the gaming machine is powered on is gaming machine installation information, the main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, and main control chip product code included in the gaming machine installation information can be accurately sent to the rental unit.

If the first gaming machine information notification sent to the rental unit after the gaming machine is powered on is gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine installation information is sent in a situation where a command has not been received from the main control means, it is possible that information from before the gaming machine was powered on may be sent to the rental unit.

In this case, even if the main control chip is replaced due to a malfunction or the like, the main control chip ID number before replacement will be sent to the rental unit, resulting in the transmission of inaccurate information. Also, even if the business model involves replacing only the main control means, the main control chip ID number before replacement will be sent to the rental unit, resulting in the transmission of inaccurate information.

To prevent such a situation, accurate information can be sent to the rental unit by sending a gaming machine information notification after receiving a command from the main control means.

Note that VL=ON is required for the gaming machine to be able to send a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit. In order for VL=ON to be the case, the gaming machine's gaming media count control means and the SC board of the rental unit must be activated. For this reason, if the gaming machine is powered on before the rental unit, VL=OFF is set while waiting for the rental unit to be powered on, and the gaming machine information notification is not sent, so the gaming media count control means has enough time to receive commands from the main control means, and the likelihood of sending an inaccurate gaming machine information notification to the rental unit is low. However, it is also possible to operate the rental unit before the gaming machine in an amusement facility, and in this case, as soon as the gaming machine is powered on and the gaming media count control means is activated, VL=ON may be set and the gaming machine information notification may be sent. Therefore, by setting a timer (main control means activation waiting timer) to wait for the main control means to be activated and for the command to be sent, an accurate gaming machine information notification can be sent to the rental unit.

In addition, in the interval interrupt process, after the power interruption detection process is executed, the value of the main control means start-up waiting timer is updated, and the power interruption detection process and the process of updating the value of the main control means start-up waiting timer are repeated until it is determined that the value of the main control means start-up waiting timer is 0.

By looping the power-off detection process while waiting for the main control means to start up in this way, the power-off process can be executed normally even if the gaming machine's power is cut off while waiting for the main control means to start up, thereby reducing the likelihood of an abnormal value being stored in the RWM.

In this embodiment, the power interruption detection process and the process of updating the value of the main control means start-up waiting timer are repeated until it is determined that the value of the main control means start-up waiting timer is 0, but this is not limiting, and other processes (e.g., processes for detecting abnormalities or the state of the gaming machine, etc.) may be included before it is determined that the value of the main control means start-up waiting timer is 0. In other words, any configuration that can at least execute the power interruption detection process and the process of updating the value of the main control means start-up waiting timer until it is determined that the value of the main control means start-up waiting timer is 0 will suffice.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control means start waiting timer is set so that the main control means waits for start before sending the gaming machine information notification to the rental unit, but this is not limiting, and the gaming media number control means may be configured to determine whether data (a predetermined value) is stored in the memory area that stores the main control chip ID number of the RWM of the gaming media number control means before first sending the gaming machine information notification to the rental unit. As a method for determining whether data is stored, for example, it is possible to determine whether the value of the memory area that stores the main control chip ID number of the RWM of the gaming media number control means is 0. Note that the main control chip ID number is 4 bytes of information, so this is determined based on whether each of the 4 bytes of memory area is 0.

As another variation, the gaming media number control means may be configured to determine whether data (a predetermined value) is stored (or whether it is not 0) in the memory area storing the main control chip manufacturer code of the RWM of the gaming media number control means before the gaming media number control means first transmits a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit, or to determine whether data (a predetermined value) is stored (or whether it is not 0) in the memory area storing the main control chip product code of the RWM of the gaming media number control means before the gaming media number control means first transmits a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit. In such a configuration, the main control chip manufacturer code and the main control chip product code are information transmitted from the main control means, just like the main control chip ID number, so if the main control chip manufacturer code or the main control chip product code is stored in the gaming media number control means, it can be determined that the main control chip ID number is also stored. In this case, the main control chip manufacturer code or the main control chip product code is sent from the main control means after the main control chip ID number, so that the main control chip manufacturer code or the main control chip product code is stored in the gaming media count control means, which increases the probability that the main control chip ID number is also stored.

As another variation, a main control means startup waiting timer may be set, and after determining that the value of the main control means startup waiting timer is 0, it may be configured to determine whether the main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, or main control chip ID number is stored in the gaming media count control means. In this configuration, after waiting for the main control means to start up, the gaming media count control means further determines the value of the memory area of the gaming media count control means, making it possible for the gaming media count control means to perform a double check before sending a gaming machine information notification to the lending unit, further increasing the likelihood that the main control chip ID number can be accurately sent to the lending unit.

<Description of a method for coordinating each board when the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, which is applicable to this embodiment>
In the game described in this embodiment, when a power outage occurs, the main control board P15 judges whether the power has been cut off by two interrupts, and the game media number control board P16 judges whether the power has been cut off by seven interrupts. In other words, the main control board P15 judges the power has been cut off 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2) after the voltage falls below a predetermined value, and the game media number control board P16 judges the power has been cut off 7 ms (1 ms x 7) after the voltage falls below a predetermined value.

As a result, if a power outage occurs, the main control board P15 can execute the power outage processing before the gaming media count control board P16, so that even when a power outage occurs, the gaming media count control board P16 can receive commands from the main control board P15.

In addition, when the power is turned on, the main control board P15 activates the security mode for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2883.54 ms) and then activates the user mode, and the game media number control board P16 activates the user mode without activating the security mode. Alternatively, the game media number control board P16 activates the security mode for a period of time shorter than the predetermined period of time (e.g., 500 ms) and then activates the user mode. The user mode is a mode in which a program related to games is executed, and the main control board P15 and the game media number control board P16 first execute the power-on process.

As a result, when the power is turned on, the game media count control board P16 can start up before the main control board P15, so the game media count control board P16 can receive commands from the main control board P15.

Also, if the power-off process is configured to be executed by an external interrupt after a power outage is detected, the power-off process will be executed even in a situation where the voltage drops to a predetermined value only for an instant (a so-called momentary outage). In this case, the WDT (watchdog timer) set at the time of the power-off process is not cleared after the power-off process is executed, so a reset signal is output, and the main control board P15 executes the power-on process after activating the security mode for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2883.54 ms), and the game media count control board P16 executes the power-on process without activating the security mode. As a result, even if the power-off process is executed due to a momentary outage, the game media count control board P16 can start up before the main control board P15, so the game media count control board P16 can receive commands from the main control board P15.

For example, if the total score stored in the total score storage means is 100 points and a power outage occurs just before the gaming machine P executes the payout process of 15 points, causing the power outage process to be executed, and the gaming machine P is powered on while the total score clear switch is pressed, the gaming media number control board P16 will start up first, initializing the total score managed by the gaming media number control board P16 (setting it to 0 points), and then the main control board P15 will start up, adding 15 points to the total score.

In other words, the absolute value of the difference between the time from when the gaming machine P is powered on until the gaming media count control board P16 activates the user mode and the time from when the gaming machine P is powered on until the main control board P15 activates the user mode is configured to be longer than the execution time (the time from the start of the payout process to the end of the payout process) for the maximum payout number (15 points in this embodiment).

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the total score from being cleared in the middle of a payout process when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs just before the start of the payout process, and allows for accurate management of the number of gaming media.

The absolute value of the difference between the time from when the gaming machine P is powered on until the gaming media count control board P16 activates the user mode and the time from when the gaming machine P is powered on until the main control board P15 activates the user mode is configured to be longer than the time from when the final stop operation (the third stop operation in this embodiment) is accepted to when the maximum number of slides (in this embodiment, four slides (maximum slide time is 190 ms)) is moved until the end of the payout process for the maximum number of payouts (in this embodiment, 15 points).

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the total points from being cleared in the middle of the payout process when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs immediately after the final stop operation is accepted, and allows for accurate management of the number of gaming media.

<Explanation of gameplay using advantageous zones applicable to this embodiment>
In this embodiment, the prescribed number of coins required to start playing is only 3. In other words, the game cannot start with anything other than 3 coins, and even when a bonus is activated, the game can only start with 3 coins.

In this embodiment, the active line is one line consisting of the bottom row of the left reel P18L, the middle row of the center reel P18C, and the bottom row of the right reel P18R. Hereinafter, when a symbol combination stops on an active line, it will be simply referred to as a symbol combination stopping.

In this embodiment, there are 10 types of symbols. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay. Note that the names and types of symbols are merely examples, and there is no problem if they are changed.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 4. As shown in FIG. 4, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel P18L), a second reel (middle reel P18C), and a third reel (right reel P18R).

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in Figures 5 to 9. The "Winning symbol/Activation symbol/Pattern symbol name" item in the figure shows the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. Also, the "Specified number and game state" shows the bonus that is awarded when the symbol combination stops for each specified number. If "1 type BB" is written in the "Specified number and game state" item, it indicates that 1 type BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if it is written "Replay" it indicates that replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if a number is written, it indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combination stops, and if it is written "-" it indicates that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game state.

In this embodiment, the bonus is equipped with a Type 1 BB, and the end condition is the awarding of more than 11 game media. This Type 1 BB is a type in which the RB operates continuously, and the RB ends when either two wins or two games are met. When the end condition of the RB is met, the RB operates automatically until the end condition of the Type 1 BB (awarding of more than 11 game media) is met.

As shown in Figure 5, there are eight types of BB symbol combinations, and the rate at which symbols related to BB symbol combinations are drawn on each reel (probability that symbols related to the symbol combination will stop) is not 100%, so to display a BB symbol combination, it is necessary to carefully press each reel.

In this embodiment, the RT transition starts from non-RT (also referred to as not inside 1st type BB), and if the 1st type BB is won during non-RT and the 1st type BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of the game) transitions to RT1 (also referred to as inside 1st type BB). If the 1st type BB symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and the 1st type BB is activated (also referred to as during 1st type BB) from the next game, and when the activation of the 1st type BB ends, the next game transitions to non-RT. In addition, since the setting change starts from non-RT, if the setting change device is activated during RT1 or 1st type BB operation, non-RT is set when the operation of the setting change device ends. Note that in a power outage where the setting change device does not operate (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and the 1st type BB operation state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, it starts from the state before the power outage. Specifically, if a power outage occurs during type 1 BB and the power is subsequently restored, the type 1 BB operating state is type 1 BB, and if a power outage occurs while the state is RT1 and the power is subsequently restored, the RT state is configured to be RT1.

Here, RT is an abbreviation for replay time, and is a state in which the probability of winning a replay can be different for each of multiple RTs. For example, it is possible to make the probability of winning a replay in RT1 different from the probability of winning a replay in RT2. Also, making the probability of winning a replay different may mean that the probability of winning the replay as a whole is different, or that only the probability of winning a certain replay is different so that the probability of winning the replay as a whole is the same. The trigger for transitioning to an RT can be set to a predetermined symbol combination coming to a stop, a bonus being won (the bonus condition device being activated), a predetermined number of plays being played after the bonus has ended, or the like, and can be combined as appropriate.

The condition device in this embodiment is described in FIG. 10. In FIG. 10, the "Winning Replay" item has a number corresponding to the winning number. In addition, the "Condition Device" item has the condition device that will be activated. In addition, the "Common Name" item has a simple name of the condition device that will be activated. For example, the common name corresponding to the replay-H condition device is "Right Push: Strong-Battle Eye", which indicates that the Strong Battle Eye will stop when the right reel P18R is stopped for the first time, and the common name corresponding to the winning-A1 condition device is "Push Order Bell Group A 123", which indicates that the operation mode of the left reel P18L first stop, the center reel P18C second stop, and the right reel P18R third stop is the correct operation mode (in this case, the operation mode that stops the symbol combination of winning 52 (a winning with a larger payout number than winning 01-02, 09, 29-31)). In addition, the "Component" item shows the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device. For example, if the replay-A condition device is activated (a win), it is possible to display replay 01 or replay 02. Note that the "0" in the "Winning replay" section corresponds to a loss.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the non-type BB in this embodiment are explained using Figures 11 to 13. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the non-type BB are Type 1 BB, Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C (+1 type BB), Replay-D (+1 type BB), Replay-E (+1 type BB), Replay-F (+1 type BB), Replay-G (+1 type BB), Replay-H (+1 type BB), Replay-I (+1 type BB), Replay-J (+1 type BB), Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-A7, Winning-A8, Winning-A9, Winning-B10, Winning-B20, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-B7, Winning-B8, Winning-B9, Winning-B11, Winning-B12, Winning-B13, Winning-B14, Winning-B15, Winning-B16, Winning-B17, Winning-B18, Winning-B19, Winning-B20, Winning-B21, Winning-B22, Winning-B23, Winning-B24, Winning-B25, Winning-B26, Winning-B27, Winning-B28, Winning-B30, Winning-B31, Winning-B32, Winning-B33, Winning-B34, Winning-B35, Winning-B46, Winning-B47, Winning-B58, Winning-B59, Winning-B61, Winning-B62, Winning-B63, Winning-B64, Winning-B65 The possible results are -A6, Winner -B1, Winner -B2, Winner -B3, Winner -B4, Winner -B5, Winner -B6, Winner -C1, Winner -C2, Winner -C3, Winner -C4, Winner -C5, Winner -C6, Winner -D (+1 type BB), Winner -E (+1 type BB), Winner -F (+1 type BB), Winner -G (+1 type BB), Winner -H (+1 type BB), Winner -I (+1 type BB), Winner -J (+1 type BB), Winner -K (+1 type BB), and there are no losers.

The above-mentioned description of "Replay -C (+1 type BB)" indicates that Replay -C and 1 type BB are won at the same time, and corresponds to the fact that the names of both "Bonus Condition Device" and "Winning Replay" are written in Figures 11, 12, and 13. Also, the "Internal Lottery" item in Figures 11, 12, and 13 indicates whether or not the internal lottery is subject for each game state, with "○" indicating that the internal lottery is subject and "×" indicating that the internal lottery is not subject. Also, the "Advantageous Zone Transition" item in Figures 11, 12, and 13 indicates whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed and "×" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed. Note that in this embodiment, when the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, 100% of the time, the game is configured to transition to the advantageous zone. Additionally, the "R1" to "R6" items in Figures 11, 12, and 13 indicate settings 1 to 6, respectively, and indicate the number of winning positions for the internal lottery that correspond to the setting value, with 65,536 positions being allocated for each game state.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means within the Type 1 BB are any of the following: Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and there are no losing results.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during Type 1 BB are Winning -K, Winning -L, or Losing.

In this embodiment, the conditions for moving from the normal zone to the advantageous zone are winning any of Re-play-C, Re-play-D, Re-play-E, Re-play-F, Re-play-G, Re-play-H, Re-play-I, Re-play-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K; winning Re-play-A or Re-play-B does not move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, Win-K, you will be in the advantageous period from the next play.

In this embodiment, if any of the following is won during the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K, the player will always move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, Win-K, you will be in the advantageous period from the next play.

In this embodiment, in RT1 (inside the 1st type BB), there are no misses (either the replay role or the winning role will always win), so once you move to RT1, it is possible to stop the BB symbol combination with some of the operation modes when the push order bell group C (winning-C1 to C6) is won. The part when the push order bell group C is won is, for example, some of the eye-pushing positions of the middle reel P18C when winning-C1 is won, or the first stop of the right reel P18R. Also, when winning-C1 is won in the advantageous zone, the winning 38 stops and the BB symbol combination does not stop by announcing the correct push order (in this case, "1, 2, 3") on the image display device). With this configuration, the user can maintain RT1 by announcing an operation mode in which the BB symbol combination does not stop. Also, the number of losing symbols during RT1 may be set to 4 (because the minimum winning probability in the design is 1/17500 or more), and the BB symbol combination may not stop for other replay roles or winning roles, so that the BB symbol combination stops only when there is a loss. Note that the "1, 2, 3" displayed on the image display device indicates that "1" corresponds to the left stop switch P4L, "2" corresponds to the middle stop switch P4C, and "3" corresponds to the right stop switch P4R, and the "1, 2, 3" displayed on the image display device indicates that the correct pressing order is to stop the left stop switch P4L for the first time, the middle stop switch P4C for the second time, and the right stop switch P4R for the third time.

In this embodiment, the game state (also referred to as the main game state) managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone includes the advantageous zone general state (also referred to as the normal state), the chance zone (also referred to as the CZ), and the AT, and transitions are made from the advantageous zone general state to the CZ, from the CZ to the AT, and from the AT to the advantageous zone general state or the CZ, respectively. There are also cases where a transition is made from the advantageous zone general state (also referred to as the normal state), or the CZ, or the AT to the normal zone. In addition, the game state managed by the main control means in the normal zone is only the normal zone general state, and there is no transition of the game state until a transition is made to the advantageous zone. In addition, the flags related to the game state managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone general state and the normal zone general state may be the same or different.

The normal state is when the internal lottery result is any of WINNER-A1 through WINNER-C6, and the advantageous winning button sequence is not announced.

The CZ is the state you enter when you win any of the internal lottery results from WINNER-D to WINNER-H under normal circumstances, and during the CZ, the transition to the AT is determined by the results of the internal lottery during the CZ or the lottery at the start of the CZ.

The AT is the state you enter when you win the AT lottery during the CZ, and is the state that notifies you of the advantageous operation mode (winning button sequence) when you win any of WIN-A1 through WIN-C6.

In this embodiment, the conditions for always moving from the advantageous zone to the normal zone (forced end conditions of the advantageous zone) are when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3000 times), when MY (difference number, difference number of coins) in the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (e.g., 2400), when initialization processing based on a setting change is performed, and when the RAM clear switch is enabled, and the end conditions of the AT and the end conditions of the advantageous zone do not match. However, some of the end conditions of the AT (for example, in a specification where the end condition is that 300 plays have been played since entering the AT, when the number of plays reaches 300 times (in this case, an ending that is a performance that indicates the end of the AT is performed) or when the number of winning coins becomes a predetermined number (e.g., 2300 coins) or more) may be the end conditions of the advantageous zone. In addition, when the CZ is won in the advantageous zone, the zone may be moved to the normal zone. In this case, whether or not to end the advantageous zone is determined according to the situation of the advantageous zone when the CZ is won in the advantageous zone. The conditions for ending the advantageous zone do not have to include the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaching a predetermined number. In particular, in the gaming machine of this embodiment that does not have actual medals (sometimes referred to as a "medalless gaming machine"), the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaching a predetermined number is not a condition for ending the advantageous zone (the number of plays in the advantageous zone is unlimited).

In addition, when the AT ends, a message is displayed on the LCD or other display device saying, "Be careful not to get addicted. Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation" (a so-called addiction prevention message) to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

The medal-less gaming machine in this embodiment is also equipped with a function (hereinafter referred to as the "stop function") that stops play when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins (when the total difference exceeds 19,000). Note that the total score storage means has a maximum memory limit of 16,383, so this limit cannot be reached unless the total score is transferred to the lending unit via a counting process along the way.

The difference here is the cumulative value obtained by subtracting the number of coins inserted from the number of coins paid out (awarded) in all play sections (each play) from the time the power is turned on, and is intended to represent the number of coins won in one day of play.

For this reason, a favorable zone MY counter that counts only the difference number during the favorable zone, or a difference number counter (also called a "stop counter") that counts the difference number in all game zones in addition to the favorable zone difference number counter, is provided.

The difference counter is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on (including RWM abnormality and setting changes), and all information related to the calculation of the difference counter is initialized.

The cutoff process and difference counter will be explained in more detail later.

The method of calculating MY in the favorable zone will be explained. The main control board P15 is equipped with a favorable zone MY counter as a memory area. The memory area of the favorable zone MY counter is composed of a 2-byte memory area with consecutive addresses in the first main control RAM. Specifically, it is composed of a memory area that stores the value of the lower byte and a memory area that stores the value of the upper byte. In the following, the memory area of the favorable zone MY counter will be simply referred to as the favorable zone MY counter. Also, the favorable zone MY counter is set to an initial value of "0" when entering the favorable zone, and increases or decreases depending on the result of the game. When the value of the favorable zone MY counter exceeds 2400, the favorable zone ends.

The advantageous zone MY counter is an increment counter, and in a gaming machine where the value of the advantageous zone MY counter is "0", if the input points are "3" points and the awarded points are "10" points, the value of the advantageous zone MY counter will be "10-3", which is "7".

The advantageous zone MY counter counts the maximum increase during an advantageous zone, so in a game where the advantageous zone MY counter value is "0", if the investment points are "3" and the awarded points are "0", the advantageous zone MY counter value will be "0-3", but if the result of the calculation is a negative value, it will be corrected to "0" and will be "0". This is because the carry flag becomes "1" when a carry flag is carried over as a result of the calculation, and an instruction is used to set the carry flag to "0" when the carry flag is "1".

In addition, if a replay is won as a result of a game, the update process of the advantageous zone MY counter is not executed, so the value of the advantageous zone MY counter for the game in which the replay is won does not increase or decrease.

The CZ is determined by drawing lots when one of the winning combinations, Winning-D through Winning-H (hereafter also referred to as rare combinations), is won, and basically the less likely the internal drawing result is to win, the more likely it is to win the CZ. In this embodiment, the order of likelihood of winning the CZ is Winning-G > Winning-E > Winning-H > Winning-F > Winning-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ does not occur immediately after winning, but after winning the CZ, it transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone and then starts when it transitions back to the advantageous zone (i.e., the CZ always starts when transitioning to the advantageous zone in RT1 (transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone can also be said to be the condition for the CZ to occur), and if the CZ is won in the current advantageous zone, it will transition to the normal zone and start the next advantageous zone, causing the CZ to occur). This can solve the problem of not being able to put out balls when winning the AT from the CZ because there are few remaining games in the advantageous zone. This is particularly effective for specifications with a small net increase (expected number of coins to be won per game, also called the slope value). For example, in the case of a net increase of 2 coins, the maximum number of coins to be won in the advantageous zone is about 2400 coins, so 1200 games are required to win 2400 coins. However, the AT is not always performed in the favorable zone, and since various game states such as the normal state and CZ described above are transitioned, the number of remaining games in the favorable zone is often small (for example, 500 times) when the AT starts. In this case, even if 500 games are played, the net increase is 2, so the number of coins won ends up being about 1000 coins, making it difficult to meet the user's expectations of winning. Therefore, by ending the favorable zone once with a CZ win and starting the CZ when moving to a new favorable zone, even if the CZ has 100 games played, the favorable zone can be played 1400 times, creating the user's expectation of winning 2400 coins.

The probability of winning the CZ from the second time onwards within the same advantageous zone may also be varied depending on the number of coins won since the advantageous zone began (cumulative number of coins paid out - cumulative number of coins inserted). For example, if a CZ is started when moving to an advantageous zone and an AT is won, it is possible to vary the probability of winning the CZ in the remaining advantageous zone after the AT ends depending on whether 50 coins are won in the AT or 1000 coins are won. In this case, it is possible to make the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins higher or lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins.

If the probability of winning a CZ after winning 50 coins is made higher than the probability of winning a CZ after winning 1,000 coins, it will be easier to award the next CZ to users who have not won much in the AT, allowing them to play while maintaining a sense of anticipation.

If the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins is made lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins, since there is little remaining advantageous period after winning 1000 coins (as it is close to the end condition of the advantageous period, which is 3000 plays or winning 2400 coins), even if the CZ probability is made high, the ball payout design will not significantly increase gambling spirit, and a new sense of expectation can be created for the user.

When the CZ is won, a congratulatory performance is performed in which text such as "success" or "victory" is displayed when the game in which the CZ was won is played or when a predetermined number of games are played (which can be set arbitrarily depending on the specifications of the gaming machine P). This allows the user to understand that some kind of privilege has been granted, and allows the user to intuitively understand the progress of the game. Then, from the next game onwards, a display indicating "CZ preparation" is displayed by the image display device or the lighting state of the lamp, which creates a sense of expectation for the CZ in the user. When the CZ winning game is in an advantageous zone, the CZ preparation corresponds to the state from the end of the advantageous zone to the transition to the advantageous zone again in the subsequent normal zone. Since the "CZ preparation" is internally a normal zone, it is a disadvantageous state for users who do not perform any AT lottery or AT addition, but by lowering the ball output rate during the CZ preparation compared to the AT state, balls can be allocated to the AT, and a wave of balls can be created. In addition, during the preparation of the CZ, a sense of anticipation is created for the CZ, making it less likely that users will feel like they have lost out even if the payout rate is lowered.

In addition, the advantageous zone ends with the next play after the CZ wins, but a predetermined number of plays may be played from the play after the CZ wins until the advantageous zone ends. In this case, the CZ win is not announced in the play after the CZ win, and the winning or losing of the CZ is determined by the effects over a predetermined number of plays (so-called premonition effects or continuous effects). Then, a congratulatory effect is executed at the timing when the predetermined number of plays are played, and the CZ is in preparation from the next play. This is because the advantageous zone lamp is lit during the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone lamp is turned off when the advantageous zone ends, so that it is not possible to tell whether the CZ has been won or not from the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp between the CZ win play and the announcement of the CZ win. Note that the advantageous zone may be switched to the normal zone during CZ preparation, and in this case, since it has already been announced that the CZ is in preparation, the result is not known in advance by the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp during CZ preparation.

In addition, CZ preparation does not necessarily have to be a normal zone, and may be set to a favorable zone. Even in this case, the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a normal zone is relatively higher than the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a favorable zone, and the condition for executing CZ preparation in a favorable zone is that the number of remaining plays in the favorable zone is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times). By configuring in this way, CZ preparation is executed when there is a margin in the number of remaining plays in the favorable zone, so even if the CZ is executed after CZ preparation and the AT is executed as a result, a sufficient feeling of winning can be created. In addition, since the normal zone is not used during CZ preparation, it is also possible to create a surprise such as starting the AT immediately after CZ preparation (since information related to the AT is initialized at the end of the favorable zone, if the normal zone is used during CZ preparation, the CZ will be executed at the start of the favorable zone, and the AT cannot be started).

In addition, when executing CZ preparation during the above-mentioned advantageous zone, it may be determined by drawing lots whether or not to award an AT when any of WIN-D through WIN-H is won during CZ preparation. In this case, the order of rare roles that are likely to win the AT by AT drawing may be the same as the order that is likely to win the CZ, or may be slightly different, such as WIN-E > WIN-G > WIN-F > WIN-H > WIN-D. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the user expect to win a rare role even during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, in order to not discourage users who have won a rare role but not the AT from playing, a bonus different from the AT may be awarded. Such a bonus may, for example, be displayed as a two-dimensional code that can be read by the user's terminal, or a setting suggestion effect that allows the setting value to be determined. Such a bonus may be made easier to award the closer the number of plays in the advantageous zone is to the aforementioned predetermined number (e.g., 3000 plays), or when the number of CZ plays is a specific number (e.g., a multiple of 5).

The conditions for a transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone (conditions for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone) have been described as when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3000 plays), when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (e.g., 2400), when initialization processing is performed based on a setting change, and when the RAM clear switch is enabled. However, it is not necessary to define all conditions as conditions for a transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, and some conditions may be defined as conditions for a transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone. For example, it is not necessary to include when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3000 plays) as a condition for a transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.

Next, in a case where the condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone is not necessarily when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3000 plays), but is when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, this section describes a mode in which the advantageous zone can be terminated (transitioned to the normal zone) under any termination condition. Note that, although this is described as the condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone being when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, it should be noted that this is not limited to 2400 and can be set to any value (e.g., 4800, etc.).

Ending the advantageous zone under any end condition means that when MY in the advantageous zone is a value not exceeding 2400 (for example, MY in the advantageous zone is 1000), the end condition of the AT is met (for example, 300 plays have been played since entering the AT, or the number of coins won is equal to or exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2300 coins)), or a CZ has been won in the advantageous zone (whether or not to end the advantageous zone may be determined depending on the situation of the advantageous zone when a CZ has been won in the advantageous zone), etc.

When the advantageous zone is to be ended under an arbitrary ending condition, if the arbitrary ending condition of the advantageous zone is met, a flag indicating the ending of the advantageous zone is stored in a predetermined memory area (e.g., advantageous zone end memory area) in the first main control RAM by game state specific processing. Then, if it is determined that a flag indicating the ending of the advantageous zone is stored in the advantageous zone end memory area, it is possible to end the advantageous zone (perform initialization processing of information related to the AT stored in the first main control RAM).

When the advantageous zone is to be ended under an arbitrary ending condition, a flag indicating the ending of the advantageous zone is stored in a one-byte memory area (e.g., advantageous zone end memory area) in the first main control RAM when the arbitrary ending condition of the advantageous zone is met. After that, if it is determined that a flag indicating the ending of the advantageous zone is stored in the advantageous zone end memory area, it is possible to end the advantageous zone (perform an initialization process of the information related to the AT stored in the RAM of the first main control).

However, if a 1-byte advantageous period end storage area is provided in the first main control RAM, the storage area of the first main control RAM will become tight, so another method is to use an advantageous period MY counter to end the advantageous period under any end condition. Below, we will explain how to end the advantageous period under any end condition using an advantageous period MY counter.

<Method of ending a favorable period under any ending condition using the favorable period MY counter>
First, the storage area of the favorable section MY counter will be explained. The favorable section MY counter needs to store a value for determining whether the MY of the favorable section has exceeded 2400, so a storage area of 2 bytes is required. Below, an example will be given to explain what values are stored in the upper byte storage area and the lower byte storage area of the favorable section MY counter. In order to make it easier to distinguish between the value of the upper byte storage area and the value of the lower byte storage area, a "/" is written at the boundary between the value of the digit byte storage area and the value of the lower byte storage area, so that it looks like the value of the upper byte storage area/the value of the lower byte storage area. In addition, a b at the end of a number indicates that it is expressed in binary. Also, of the 8 bits (1 byte), the least significant bit is D0 bit, the bit next to D0 bit is D1 bit, the bit next to D1 bit is D2 bit, the bit next to D2 bit is D3 bit, the bit next to D3 bit is D4 bit, the bit next to D4 bit is D5 bit, the bit next to D5 bit is D6 bit, and the bit next to D6 bit is D7 bit. In other words, when referred to as the least significant bit, it corresponds to D0 bit, and when referred to as the most significant bit, it corresponds to D7 bit.

In addition, the D0 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the first digit, the D1 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the second digit, the D2 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the third digit, the D3 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the fourth digit, the D4 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the fifth digit, the D5 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the sixth digit, the D6 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the seventh digit, and the D7 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the eighth digit. In addition, the D0 bit of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the 9th digit, the D1 bit of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the 10th digit, the D2 bit of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the 11th digit, the D3 bit of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the 12th digit, the D4 bit of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the 13th digit, the D5 bit of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the 14th digit, the D6 bit of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the 15th digit, and the D7 bit of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the 16th digit.

(Example 1) When the value of the favorable zone MY counter is 10, 00000000b/00001010b (upper byte: 0, lower byte: 10)
(Example 2) When the value of the favorable zone MY counter is 255, it is 00000000b/11111111b (upper byte: 0, lower byte: 255)
(Example 3) When the value of the favorable zone MY counter is 256, it is 00000001b/00000000b (upper byte: 1, lower byte: 0)
(Example 4) When the value of the favorable zone MY counter is 1000, 00000011b/11101000b (upper byte: 3, lower byte: 232)
(Example 5) When the value of the favorable zone MY counter is 2400, it is 00001001b/01100000b (upper byte: 9, lower byte: 96)
(Example 6) When the value of the favorable zone MY counter is 2414, 00001001b/01101110b (upper byte: 9, lower byte: 110)

As described above, in a gaming machine in which 0 to 2414 can be stored as the MY of the favorable zone in the favorable zone MY counter, the D4, D5, D6, and D7 bits are not used in the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter. Note that, although an example of a gaming machine in which 0 to 2414 can be stored as the MY of the favorable zone in the favorable zone MY counter has been given, even if the upper limit value that can be stored as the MY of the favorable zone is not 2414 but any value between 2400 and 2413, the D4, D5, D6, and D7 bits are not used in the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter.

<<Processing at the end of the advantageous period>>
Next, a method of ending the advantageous zone under any ending condition using the advantageous zone MY counter will be described with reference to Fig. 45. The advantageous zone end processing is one of the processes included in the above-mentioned game state-specific processing, and is a control process executed when the advantageous zone is ended under any ending condition.

<<<Pattern 1>>>
In the <Pattern 1> of the favorable zone end processing in FIG. 45, when the favorable zone is ended under any end condition, a specific bit of the value stored in the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter is set to 1 (a 1 is stored in the specific bit). Specifically, a 1 is stored in the D7 bit (the most significant bit) of the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter. For example, when the value stored in the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter is 1 (00000001b), if the D7 bit of the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter is set to 1, the value stored in the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter becomes 129 (10000001b).

This configuration is possible because, as described above, no values are stored in the D4 to D7 bits of the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter. In other words, the D7 bit of the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter can be used for other purposes (here, as a flag indicating whether the end condition of the favorable zone has been met). Furthermore, setting the D7 bit of the value stored in the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter to 1 is synonymous with storing a value of at least 32768 (2 to the power of 15) or more as the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter. At this time, no process is performed to store a value in the storage area of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter, nor is a process of storing 1 in a certain bit. For example, when 1000 (00000011b/11101000b ("/" indicates the boundary between the value of the upper byte storage area and the value of the lower byte storage area)) is stored in the favorable zone MY counter, if the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the value stored in the upper byte storage area of the favorable zone MY counter is set to 1, 33768 (10000011b/11101000b) will be stored in the favorable zone MY counter. In this way, rather than performing a process of storing a value or setting a certain bit to 1 for both the lower byte storage area and the upper byte storage area (2 byte storage areas) that constitute the favorable zone MY counter, the program capacity can be reduced by performing a process of setting a specific bit to 1 for the upper byte storage area of the favorable zone MY counter (1 byte storage area). In addition, an example was given in which a 1 is stored in bit D7 of the upper byte storage area of the favorable section MY counter, but this is not limited to bit D7, and any bit from bit D4 to bit D7 may be stored.

<<<Pattern 2>>>
In <Pattern 2> of the processing at the end of the favorable zone in Figure 45, when the favorable zone is to be ended under any ending condition, a specific value (250 (11110000b)) is stored in the upper byte memory area of the favorable zone MY counter. For example, when the value stored in the upper byte memory area of the favorable zone MY counter is 1 (00000001b), storing 250 in the upper byte memory area of the favorable zone MY counter will result in the value stored in the upper byte memory area of the favorable zone MY counter being 250 (11110000b).

This configuration is possible because, as described above, the value stored as the MY of the favorable zone only uses bits D0 to D3 of the upper byte storage area of the favorable zone MY counter. Specifically, if the upper limit value of the value stored as the MY of the favorable zone is any value between 2400 and 2414, the upper byte storage area of the favorable zone MY counter can store a maximum of 9 (00001001b). In other words, since there is no case where a value of 10 or more is stored, the favorable zone MY counter can be set to a value at least greater than 2414 by storing a value of 10 or more in the upper byte storage area of the favorable zone MY counter. At this time, the lower byte storage area of the favorable zone MY counter does not perform a process of storing a value or a process of storing 1 in a certain bit. For example, if 1000 (00000011b/11101000b ("/" indicates the boundary between the value of the upper byte storage area and the value of the lower byte storage area) is stored in the favorable section MY counter, then if 250 is stored in the upper byte storage area of the favorable section MY counter, 61672 (11110000b/11101000b) will be stored in the favorable section MY counter. In this way, instead of storing values in both the lower byte storage area and the upper byte storage area (2-byte storage area) that make up the favorable section MY counter, or storing 1 in a certain bit, the program capacity can be reduced by executing a process to store a specific value in the upper byte storage area (1-byte storage area) of the favorable section MY counter. Note that, although an example of storing 250 in the upper byte storage area of the favorable section MY counter has been shown, the specific value is not limited to 250 and may be any value equal to or greater than 10.

<<Advantageous Zone Clear Counter Management Processing>>
Next, the advantageous zone clear counter management process in the case where the advantageous zone MY counter is used to end the advantageous zone under any end condition will be explained using Figures 46, 47, and 48. Here, since three patterns of the advantageous zone clear counter management process are considered, the explanation will be given with Figure 46 as <Pattern 1> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process, Figure 47 as <Pattern 2> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process, and Figure 48 as <Pattern 3> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Note that any of the patterns of the advantageous zone clear counter management process in Figures 46, 47, and 48 is executed by the game progress main process of the main control board P15 described in Figure 44.

<<<Pattern 1>>>
46 is a pattern 1 of the favorable zone clear counter management process. In the pattern 1 of the favorable zone clear counter management process, it is possible to determine at once whether the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter exceeds the upper limit value (e.g., 2400) of the favorable zone, and whether the forced end condition of the favorable zone is met and whether the arbitrary end condition of the favorable zone is met.

First, in "Playing in an advantageous zone?", it is determined whether the current game is in an advantageous zone. For example, whether the current game is in an advantageous zone can be determined using the main game state of the current game or a flag (advantageous zone flag) that is set to 1 if the current game is in an advantageous zone. If it is determined that the current game is not in an advantageous zone, the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated.

In "Get MY Counter", the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is stored in the HL register (a general-purpose register owned by the CPU, a pair of registers that can store a 2-byte value by combining the H and L registers; the same applies below). For example, if the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is 1000, 1000 is stored in the HL register. Note that 1000 is a 2-byte value, so the value of the upper byte is stored in the H register, and the value of the lower byte is stored in the L register. Therefore, storing 1000 in the HL register is synonymous with storing 00000011b in the H register and 11101000b in the L register.

In "When replay activation symbol is displayed?", it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been displayed in a stopped state in the current game. If it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been displayed in a stopped state in the current game (if YES), "Save MY counter". If it is not determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has not been displayed in a stopped state in the current game (if NO) in "When replay activation symbol is displayed?", it is determined that "Add number of bonuses".

In "add number of awarded" the number of game media awarded in the current game is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the addition is 1000, and the number of game media awarded in the current game is 1, then 1001 will be stored in the HL register after the addition.

In "Subtract number of bets," the number of gaming media betted in the current game (number of bets) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the subtraction is 1001, and the number of bets in the current game is 3, then 998 will be stored in the HL register after the subtraction.

"Subtraction result less than 0?" determines whether the "Bet number subtraction" executed prior to this process caused the value stored in the HL register to become less than 0 (a carryover occurred). For example, if a carryover occurred as a result of executing a "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 1), the answer is YES and "Set MY counter initial value" is executed. On the other hand, if a carryover did not occur as a result of executing a "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 0), the answer is NO and "Save MY counter" is executed.

In "Set MY counter initial value", the value stored in the HL register is set to 0. This allows 0 to be stored as the initial value of the favorable zone MY counter in the next "Save MY counter".

In "Save MY Counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. Note that even if the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone MY counter, the value stored in the HL register is maintained. For example, if 998 is stored in the HL register, 998 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 998. For example, if 0 is stored in the HL register, 0 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 0.

In "MY counter > MY counter upper limit value?", it is determined whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400. Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the favorable section MY counter. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 is synonymous with determining whether the value stored in the favorable section MY counter exceeds 2400. Also, although it is determined whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400, it may be determined whether the value stored in the favorable section MY counter exceeds 2400. However, the value stored in the favorable section MY counter is a value stored in RAM. Here, when comparing with a certain numerical value, it is possible to reduce the program capacity by comparing with the value stored in the register rather than comparing with the value stored in the RAM. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the ROM (program) capacity used by determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400.

In the following, an example will be given to explain how to determine whether "MY counter>MY counter upper limit value?" depending on the value stored in the HL register.
(Example 1) If 0 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 2) If 998 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 3) If 2404 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be YES and RAM initialization is performed at the end of the favorable period.
(Example 4) If 33768 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be YES and RAM initialization is performed at the end of the favorable period.
(Example 5) If 61672 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be YES and RAM initialization is performed at the end of the favorable period.
Here, when a value between 2400 and 2414 is stored as in (Example 3), this is when the condition for the forced end of the advantageous zone is met. On the other hand, when a value exceeding 2414 is stored as in (Example 4) or (Example 5), this is when any of the conditions for the end of the advantageous zone are met (when <Pattern 1> of the processing at the end of the advantageous zone, or <Pattern 2> of the processing at the end of the advantageous zone is executed). In this way, by using "MY counter > MY counter upper limit value?", it is possible to execute RAM initialization at the end of the advantageous zone (ending the advantageous zone in the current game) when the condition for the forced end of the advantageous zone is met and when any of the conditions for the end of the advantageous zone is met.

In "RAM initialization at the end of the advantageous zone", information about the AT is initialized. This process also initializes the advantageous zone MY counter and the main game state, and the advantageous zone ends with this game. Therefore, the next game can be a normal game.
<<<Pattern 2>>>
47 is a pattern 2 of the favorable zone clear counter management process. In the pattern 2 of the favorable zone clear counter management process, it is possible to determine whether a predetermined bit of the value stored in the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter is 1 or not, that the favorable zone ends (the favorable zone ends when an arbitrary end condition of the favorable zone is satisfied) and that the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter exceeds the upper limit value and the favorable zone ends (the favorable zone ends when a forced end condition of the favorable zone is satisfied).

First, in "Playing in an advantageous zone?", it is determined whether the current game is in an advantageous zone. For example, whether the current game is in an advantageous zone can be determined using the main game state of the current game or a flag (advantageous zone flag) that is set to 1 if the current game is in an advantageous zone. If it is determined that the current game is not in an advantageous zone, the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated.

In "Get MY counter", the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is 1000, 1000 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 1000 is a two-byte number, the value of the upper byte is stored in the H register, and the value of the lower byte is stored in the L register. Therefore, storing 1000 in the HL register is synonymous with storing 00000011b in the H register and 11101000b in the L register.

In "specific bit ON?", it is determined whether the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is "1". In other words, in this process, it is determined whether any end condition of the favorable zone has been met. For example, if a process is executed by <pattern 1> of the favorable zone end process to store 1 in the D7 bit of the memory area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter, the specific bit corresponds to the D7 bit. Also, if 250 (11110000) is stored in the memory area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter by <pattern 2> of the favorable zone end process, the specific bit corresponds to the D7 bit, or the D6 bit, or the D5 bit, or the D4 bit. In this way, when <pattern 1> of the favorable zone end process or <pattern 2> of the favorable zone end process is executed, the bit (specific bit) that becomes 1 is determined. When the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is 1, "RAM initialization at the end of the favorable zone" is executed. On the other hand, when the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is not 1 (when it is 0), "When replay activation symbol is displayed?" is executed. Note that when the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is 1, it means that the specific bit of the value stored in the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter is 1. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined whether the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is 1, but it may also be determined whether the specific bit of the value stored in the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter is 1.

In "When replay activation symbol is displayed?", it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been displayed in a stopped state in the current game. If it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been displayed in a stopped state in the current game (if YES), "Save MY counter". If it is not determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has not been displayed in a stopped state in the current game (if NO) in "When replay activation symbol is displayed?", it is determined that "Add number of bonuses".

In "add number of awarded" the number of game media awarded in the current game is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the addition is 1000, and the number of game media awarded in the current game is 1, then 1001 will be stored in the HL register after the addition.

In "Subtract number of bets," the number of gaming media betted in the current game (number of bets) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the subtraction is 1001, and the number of bets in the current game is 3, then 998 will be stored in the HL register after the subtraction.

"Subtraction result less than 0?" determines whether the "Bet number subtraction" executed prior to this process caused the value stored in the HL register to become less than 0 (a carryover occurred). For example, if a carryover occurred as a result of executing a "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 1), the answer is YES and "Set MY counter initial value" is executed. On the other hand, if a carryover did not occur as a result of executing a "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 0), the answer is NO and "Save MY counter" is executed.

In "Set MY counter initial value", the value stored in the HL register is set to 0. This allows 0 to be stored as the initial value of the favorable zone MY counter in the next "Save MY counter".

In "Save MY Counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter. Note that even if the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone MY counter, the value stored in the HL register is maintained. For example, if 998 is stored in the HL register, 998 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 998. For example, if 0 is stored in the HL register, 0 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 0.

In "MY counter > MY counter upper limit value?", it is determined whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400. Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the favorable section MY counter. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 is synonymous with determining whether the value stored in the favorable section MY counter exceeds 2400. Also, although it is determined whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400, it may be determined whether the value stored in the favorable section MY counter exceeds 2400. However, the value stored in the favorable section MY counter is a value stored in RAM. Here, when comparing with a certain numerical value, it is possible to reduce the program capacity by comparing with the value stored in the register rather than comparing with the value stored in the RAM. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the ROM (program) capacity used by determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400.

In the following, an example will be given to explain how to determine whether "MY counter>MY counter upper limit value?" depending on the value stored in the HL register.
(Example 1) If 0 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 2) If 998 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 3) If 2404 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be YES and RAM initialization is performed at the end of the favorable period.
Here, when a value between 2400 and 2414 is stored as in (Example 3), this is when the forced end condition of the favorable zone is met.

In "RAM initialization at the end of the favorable zone", information related to the AT is initialized. This process also initializes the favorable zone MY counter and main game state, and the favorable zone ends with this game. Therefore, the next game can be played in the normal zone.

<<<Pattern 3>>>
48 is a pattern 3 of the favorable zone clear counter management process. In the pattern 3 of the favorable zone clear counter management process, it is possible to determine whether the favorable zone ends when the value of the upper byte stored in the favorable zone MY counter is a specific value (the favorable zone ends when an arbitrary end condition of the favorable zone is satisfied) or whether the favorable zone ends when the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter exceeds the upper limit value (the favorable zone ends when a forced end condition of the favorable zone is satisfied).

First, in "Playing in an advantageous zone?", it is determined whether the current game is in an advantageous zone. For example, whether the current game is in an advantageous zone can be determined using the main game state of the current game or a flag (advantageous zone flag) that is set to 1 if the current game is in an advantageous zone. If it is determined that the current game is not in an advantageous zone, the process is terminated.

In "Get MY counter", the value stored in the favorable section MY counter is stored in the HL register (a general-purpose register owned by the CPU). For example, if the value stored in the favorable section MY counter is 1000, 1000 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 1000 is a two-byte number, the value of the upper byte is stored in the H register, and the value of the lower byte is stored in the L register. Therefore, storing 1000 in the HL register is synonymous with storing 00000011b in the H register and 11101000b in the L register.

In "Advantageous Zone End Data?", it is determined whether the value stored in the H register is a specific value. In other words, in this process, it is determined whether any end condition of the advantageous zone has been met. For example, if 250 (11110000b) is stored in the memory area of the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter by <Pattern 2> of the advantageous zone end process, the specific value corresponds to 250 (11110000b). In this way, it is determined whether it is the value stored when <Pattern 2> of the advantageous zone end process is executed. When the value stored in the H register is a specific value, "RAM initialization at the end of the advantageous zone" is executed. On the other hand, when the value stored in the H register is not a specific value, "Replay operation pattern display time?" is executed. Note that when the value stored in the H register is a specific value, a specific value is stored in the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter. Therefore, although it is determined whether the value stored in the H register is a specific value, it may be determined whether the value stored in the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter is a specific value.

In "When replay activation symbol is displayed?", it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been displayed in a stopped state in the current game. If it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been displayed in a stopped state in the current game (if YES), "Save MY counter". If it is not determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has not been displayed in a stopped state in the current game (if NO) in "When replay activation symbol is displayed?", it is determined that "Add number of bonuses".

In "add number of awarded" the number of game media awarded in the current game is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the addition is 1000, and the number of game media awarded in the current game is 1, then 1001 will be stored in the HL register after the addition.

In "Subtract number of bets," the number of gaming media betted in the current game (number of bets) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the subtraction is 1001, and the number of bets in the current game is 3, then 998 will be stored in the HL register after the subtraction.

"Subtraction result less than 0?" determines whether the "Bet number subtraction" executed prior to this process caused the value stored in the HL register to become less than 0 (there was a carryover). For example, if there was a carryover as a result of executing "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 1), the answer is YES and "Set MY counter initial value" is executed. On the other hand, if there was no carryover as a result of executing "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 0), the answer is NO and "Save MY counter" is executed.

In "Set MY counter initial value", the value stored in the HL register is set to 0. This allows 0 to be stored as the initial value of the favorable zone MY counter in the next "Save MY counter".

In "Save MY Counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. Note that even if the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone MY counter, the value stored in the HL register is maintained. For example, if 998 is stored in the HL register, 998 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 998. For example, if 0 is stored in the HL register, 0 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 0.

In "MY counter > MY counter upper limit value?", it is determined whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400. Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the favorable section MY counter. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 is synonymous with determining whether the value stored in the favorable section MY counter exceeds 2400. Also, although it is determined whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400, it may be determined whether the value stored in the favorable section MY counter exceeds 2400. However, the value stored in the favorable section MY counter is a value stored in RAM. Here, when comparing with a certain numerical value, it is possible to reduce the program capacity by comparing with the value stored in the register rather than comparing with the value stored in the RAM. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the ROM (program) capacity used by determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400.

In the following, an example will be given to explain how to determine whether "MY counter>MY counter upper limit value?" depending on the value stored in the HL register.
(Example 1) If 0 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 2) If 998 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 3) If 2404 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be YES and RAM initialization is performed at the end of the favorable period.
Here, when a value between 2400 and 2414 is stored as in (Example 3), this is when the forced end condition of the favorable zone is met.

In "RAM initialization at the end of the favorable zone", information related to the AT is initialized. This process also initializes the favorable zone MY counter and main game state, and the favorable zone ends with this game. Therefore, the next game can be played in the normal zone.

As described above, in a game that satisfies any of the conditions for ending the advantageous zone, the value stored in the memory area of the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter is updated by the advantageous zone end processing (the value stored in the memory area of the lower byte of the advantageous zone MY counter is not updated), and the advantageous zone clear counter management processing executed after the advantageous zone end processing allows the advantageous zone to end in a game that satisfies any of the conditions for ending the advantageous zone (the next game can be a game in the normal zone).

The process for changing settings in this embodiment is explained below.

When the setting change device is started, the RAM initialization process described above is performed at the timing when the setting change device is started or when the setting value is confirmed. If the game state immediately before this RAM initialization process is performed is RT1, the RT1 information is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process will be non-RT. Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in Type 1 BB, the information in Type 1 BB is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process will be non-RT. Note that the total score is not initialized in the RAM initialization process associated with a setting change (the input points are initialized).

In addition, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is a favorable zone, the information of the favorable zone is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes the normal zone. In other words, the game state during the favorable zone can be the normal state, CZ, or AT, but in any state, when the RAM initialization process is performed, it transitions to the normal zone.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, play will start in a non-RT and normal zone, but in this embodiment, the CZ is started when moving from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, so after the setting change, the game is in an advantageous state (a state in which the CZ can be started by moving to the advantageous zone without playing to win the CZ).

By configuring it this way, the settings are changed to a favorable state, which motivates customers to visit the store in the morning, thereby increasing the number of customers attracted.

In addition, if it is possible to set an overly favorable state after changing the settings (a state in which the machine transitions to the CZ after just a few plays), this could significantly stimulate gambling instincts (the so-called morning mode). For this reason, it is possible to change the contents of the CZ depending on the situation when the machine transitions to the favorable zone.

In this case, if the RT state of the next play that has been determined to transition to the favorable zone is RT1, a CZ will be started since this is the basic game flow, and if the RT state of the next play that has been determined to transition to the favorable zone is non-RT, a CZ will not be started as this is after a setting change. Games that have been determined to move into the favorable zone are those that have won any of the following: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, Winning-K.

In addition, since Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K overlap with Type 1 BB, the RT state of the next play after the winning will be RT1 and CZ will start, but Winning-A1, Winning Since Prize-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, and Winning-C6 do not overlap with Type 1 BB, the next play after the win is non-RT and CZ will not start.

This configuration allows for cases where a player transitions to a favorable zone during non-RT, and therefore suppresses morning-related specifications such as transitioning to a CZ after just a few plays after changing the settings, thereby reducing the risk of gambling.

It is also possible to reduce gambling by using a specification that changes the game state managed by the main control means in the favorable zone by referring to the RT state of the next game in which a transition to the favorable zone has been decided. In this case, the favorable zone that has transitioned to a non-RT (not inside the Type 1 BB) may not perform an AT, and the favorable zone that has transitioned to an RT1 (inside the Type 1 BB) may have the possibility of performing an AT. With this configuration, if a transition to the favorable zone occurs in a non-RT after the setting change, the AT will not be performed and no balls can be earned, thereby reducing gambling. The condition for ending the favorable zone at this time may be until the above-mentioned CZ is won, or may be that a predetermined number of games (e.g., 3000 games) have been played.

In addition, the transition of the CZ is controlled by referring to the RT state of the next game that has won the advantageous zone transition lottery, but this is not limited to this, and the transition of the CZ may be controlled by referring to the condition device in operation for the game that has won the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, when the prize-winning-A1 is won while inside a type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition devices for the type 1 BB and the prize-winning-A1 are in operation. In addition, when the prize-winning-A1 is won while not inside a type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled not to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition device for the prize-winning-A1 is in operation.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may be the subject of the lottery.

The messages used for communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit are explained using Figure 14.

The data structure of the messages used for communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit can be divided into the following five types.
(1) Message length (2) Command (3) Serial number (4) Data section (5) Checksum A group of data consisting of the above five items is called a message, and is sent in one transmission (it is not divided and sent).

The rental unit is configured to consider a single message if it does not receive the next start bit within 3.9 ms from the start of receiving the start bit, so it is designed to have a transmission interval of less than 3.9 ms when transmitting continuous data (1 byte data) as a single message. Some types of data to be transmitted have set transmission time limits: gaming machine information notifications are within 13.9 ms, counting notifications are within 5.5 ms, and rental receipt result responses are within 4.9 ms. For example, even if gaming machine information notifications are transmitted within 3.9 ms, if it takes more than 13.9 ms from transmitting the message length to transmitting the checksum, the rental unit will discard the data received up to that point, so the interval between data must be within 3.9 ms and the time until transmission is complete must be within 13.9 ms.

In addition, in this configuration, the transmission time for one byte of data (the time it takes to transmit from the start bit to the stop bit) is 0.158 ms, so the regulation of 3.9 ms between data bits is one that can be easily met without any special design effort if using a normal transmission method.

The data structure is explained below.

(1) Message Length This indicates the length of the data consisting of five items: message length, command, serial number, data section, and checksum, and is composed of 1 byte of data. For example, if the message length is 1 byte, the command is 1 byte, the serial number is 1 byte, the data section is 14 bytes, and the checksum is 1 byte, the message will be 18 bytes (1 byte + 1 byte + 1 byte + 14 bytes + 1 byte), and the message length will be the data corresponding to the 18 bytes (12h).

(2) Command The above message is used for one of the following messages: gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response. This command can be used to notify the type of message.
For example, the following is set as the command: 01h for gaming machine information notification, 02h for counting notification, 13h for loan notification, and 03h for loan receipt result response. The data length of the command is 1 byte.

(3) Serial Number The numbers contained in the gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, which will be described later, are referred to as serial numbers. The serial number contained in the gaming machine information notification is referred to as the serial number, the serial number contained in the counting notification is referred to as the counting serial number, the serial number contained in the loan notification is referred to as the loan serial number, and the serial number contained in the loan receipt result response is referred to as the loan serial number. These various serial numbers are numbers within the range of 0 to 255 and are composed of 1 byte of data. The various serial numbers will be described later.

(4) Data section The data section refers to data corresponding to the gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, which will be described later. The data included in the data section will be described later, but the data length varies depending on the notification content, such as 1 byte to 53 bytes.

(5) Checksum The five pieces of data, the message length, command, serial number, data section, and checksum, are added together, and the lowest byte of the total is used as the checksum. Using this checksum, the receiving side can grasp data corruption during communication, and for example, the gaming machine P or the rental unit can count the number of messages with checksums that do not match and check the communication malfunction status, etc. For example, in the gaming machine P, the number of messages with checksums that do not match may be displayed on an image display device or the like in a specified situation (during a setting confirmation mode in which the setting values can be confirmed or during a setting change mode in which the setting values can be changed).

Among the messages output from gaming machine P to the rental unit, the gaming machine information notification will be explained using Figure 15.

(1) Message Length This indicates the length of the data consisting of five items: message length, command, serial number, data section (including three items: gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, and gaming machine information), and checksum, and is composed of 1 byte of data. The message length changes depending on the type of gaming machine information, which will be described later.

(2) Command As described above, the command serves to notify any one of the gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response. The gaming machine information notification command corresponds to 01h (fixed value).

(3) Serial Number The serial number is a number between 0 and 255, and serves as a serial number for notifying gaming machine information. A specific example will be described below.
A) When the power is turned on, the serial number "00h (0)" is notified.
a) After the power is turned on, the serial number is updated (+1) every time a notification is sent.
c) The next value after the serial number "FFh (255)" is updated to "01h (1)" (+1 twice).
As described above, the first serial number after power recovery is 0, and thereafter, the serial number increases by 1 each time a gaming machine information notification is output. When the serial number of a gaming machine information notification reaches 255, the serial number of the next gaming machine information notification will be 1 (it will never become 0).

(4) Game Machine Type The game machine type is information constituting the data section, and is information for identifying the type of game machine P. This information will be described later with reference to Fig. 6, and is data for notifying the management medium, group classification, and game machine type.

(5) Gaming Machine Information Type The gaming machine information type is information constituting the data section, and is information for identifying whether the gaming machine information notification to be notified this time is gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or hall control/fraud monitoring information. The gaming machine information type is 00h when notifying gaming machine performance information, 01h when notifying gaming machine installation information, and 02h when notifying hall control/fraud monitoring information. The gaming machine performance information will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, the gaming machine installation information with reference to FIG. 18, and the hall control/fraud monitoring information with reference to FIG. 19.

(6) Gaming Machine Information Gaming machine information is information constituting the data section, and the gaming machine information notification to be notified this time is information notified according to any one of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information. Details of the gaming machine information will be described later.

(7) Checksum The five pieces of data for the gaming machine information notification being sent this time, namely, message length, command, serial number, data section (including three items: gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, and gaming machine information), and checksum, are added together, and the lowest byte of the total is used as the checksum.

The gaming machine type, which is one of the pieces of information included in the gaming machine information notification, will be explained with reference to Figure 16.

The gaming machine type is a 1-byte data, where Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the type of gaming machine, Bit 4 to Bit 6 indicate the classification of the organization to which the manufacturer belongs, and Bit 7 indicates information about the gaming medium, whether it is a gaming machine that uses traditional gaming balls or traditional gaming medals.

The types of gaming machines listed are those stipulated in the Act on the Control and Proper Management of Amusement and Amusement Businesses, etc.

Next, we will use the gaming machine type list in Figure 16 to explain the types of gaming machines by giving specific examples.

A) Pattern 1
Game machine type: Pachinko game machine P
Group category: Group A
Management medium: old gaming ball In this case, 01h is set as the gaming machine type.

B) Pattern 2
Machine type: Slot machine Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old gaming medal In this case, 82h is set as the gaming machine type.

C) Pattern 3
Machine type: Arrange ball machine Group classification: Group A
Managed medium: old gaming medal In this case, 83h is set as the gaming machine type.

D) Pattern 4
Game machine type: Jayan ball game machine Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old gaming medal In this case, 84h is set as the gaming machine type.

E) Pattern 5
Machine type: Slot machine Group classification: Group B
Management medium: old gaming medal In this case, 92h is set as the gaming machine type.

The gaming machine information included in the message when gaming machine performance information is set in the gaming machine information notification is explained using Figure 17.

A) Total number of coins inserted (total number of coins inserted)
The total number of insertions is information on the number of game media inserted that has accumulated since the power was turned on, and if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, 0 may be output as the information on the total number of insertions. For example, if the cumulative number of game media inserted is 2000 in a total of 1000 games, the total number of insertions will be 2000, and 2000 may be output as the information on the total number of insertions. If a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, 0 may be output as the information on the total number of insertions. Note that if a replay role (also called a replay role) is won by an internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of insertions of game media bet on the next game of that game is not included in the total number of insertions.

a) Total number of coins awarded (total number of coins awarded, total number of coins paid out, total number of coins paid out)
The total number of awards is information on the number of game media awarded accumulated since the power was turned on, and if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, 0 may be output as information on the total number of awards. For example, if the cumulative number of game media awarded is 2000 in a total of 1000 games, the total number of awards will be 2000, and 2000 may be output as information on the total number of awards. If a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, 0 may be output as information on the total number of awards. Note that if a replay role is won by an internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of game media awarded in that game is not included in the total number of awards.

C) MY
MY is information on the maximum difference that can be calculated from the number of game media given and the number of game media inserted since the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, 0 can be output as the information on MY. Specifically, the maximum difference is the increase in the number of game media from the reference (the total number of game media acquired minus the total number of game media inserted) based on the reference when the number of game media is the smallest when the game result is obtained. For example, in a total of 1000 games, the 100th game is the game in which the player has lost the most, and the number of game media that the player has lost at that time is -200, and from there an advantageous game begins, and the 800th game is the game in which the player has gained the most, and the number of game media acquired by the player at that time is 800, then 1000, which is the difference between -200 and 800, becomes MY, and 1000 can be output as MY. When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, 0 can be output as the information on MY.

To output this MY, the game media number control board uses a calculation MY counter and an output MY counter. Both the calculation MY counter and the output MY counter are initialized (set to 0) when the power is turned on, so the MY from when the power is turned on until it is turned off is output. In other words, since the power is usually turned off at the end of a day's business at an arcade, the MY for one day is output.

The calculation MY counter is configured to be updatable regardless of the game status or the specified number, and is configured to calculate the awarded points - the invested points in one game, and store the accumulated calculation results. For example, if a game is started when the calculation MY counter value is "0" and the invested points are "3" points and the awarded points are "10", the result of calculating "10 - 3", "7", is added to the calculation MY counter and the value of the calculation MY counter is stored as "7". Similarly, if the next game has the invested points as "3" points and the awarded points as "10", the result of calculating "10 - 3", "7", is added to the calculation MY counter and the value of the calculation MY counter is stored as "14".

For example, if a game is started when the value of the calculation MY counter is "0", and the put-in points are "3" and the awarded points are "0", the result of calculating "0-3" is "-3", but "0" is stored in the calculation MY counter. This is because the instruction is used to set the carry flag to "1" if a carry flag is "1" as a result of the calculation, and to set "0" if the carry flag is "1".

When the previous game was not a replay (in other words, when 3 points were actually bet), the calculation MY counter treats the investment points for the game in which the replay won as "3" and the awarded points as "0". Then, by setting the investment points to "0" in the next game (the game when the replay is activated), the actual MY can be corrected. For example, if the previous game was not a replay and a game (in which the replay won) started when the calculation MY counter value was "10" has an investment point of "3" and an awarded point of "0", then "-3", which is the result of calculating "0-3", is added to the calculation MY counter, and the calculation MY counter value is stored as "7". Furthermore, if a minor role that awards "10" points is won in the game following the game in which a replay was won, the investment points are "0" points and the awarded points are "10" points, and the result of calculating "10-0", "10", is added to the calculation MY counter, and the value of the calculation MY counter is stored as "17".

The output MY counter updates the value of the calculation MY counter to the value of the output MY counter when the value stored in the calculation MY counter is greater than the value stored in the output MY counter. For example, if a game is started when the calculation MY counter value is "10" and the output MY counter value is "12", and the input points are "3" points and the awarded points are "10", then "7", which is the result of calculating "10-3", is added and the value of the calculation MY counter is stored as "17". In addition, the calculation MY counter value of "17" is compared with the output MY counter value of "12", and since the calculation MY counter value is greater, the output MY counter value is updated to "17".

The game media count control board is configured to transmit the value of the output MY counter to the rental unit.

The calculation MY counter and output MY counter are initialized when the power is turned on, but the advantageous zone MY counter is not initialized when the power is turned on. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to appropriately protect the value of the advantageous zone MY counter, which may cause disadvantages to the player.

The calculation MY counter and output MY counter are configured to be updatable regardless of the game zone (normal zone, favorable zone), but the favorable zone MY counter is configured to be updatable in the favorable zone (but not to be updated in the normal zone).

The upper limit of both the calculation MY counter and the output MY counter is set to "917490". This configuration is much higher than the maximum MY normally achieved in a day, significantly reducing the possibility of reaching the upper limit. In addition, even if the calculation MY counter and the output MY counter are increased through fraudulent activity, the upper limit will not be reached immediately, making it difficult for the counter value to be restarted from "0".

D) Total number of bonus items (total number of bonus items given, total number of bonus items paid out, total number of bonus items paid out)
The total number of granted devices is information on the cumulative number of gaming media granted by the operation of the devices (single bonus (SB), regular bonus (RB), challenge bonus (CB)) since the power was turned on, and if a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as information on the total number of granted devices. For example, if the cumulative number of gaming media obtained by the operation of the devices is 100 in a total of 1,000 games, the total number of granted devices will be 100, and 100 may be output as information on the total number of granted devices. And if a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as information on the total number of granted devices.

E) Total number of consecutive roles given (total number of consecutive roles given, total number of consecutive roles paid out, total number of consecutive roles paid out)
The total number of consecutive game items given is information on the cumulative number of game items given by the operation of the first type special game item (regular bonus (RB)) since the power was turned on. If a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, 0 may be output as the information on the total number of consecutive game items given. For example, if the cumulative number of game items given by the operation of the first type special game item is 100 in a total of 1000 games, the total number of consecutive game items given will be 100, and 100 may be output as the information on the total number of consecutive game items given. If a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, 0 may be output as the information on the total number of consecutive game items given. The number of game items given by the operation of the first type special game item by the first type special game item continuous operation device (also referred to as the first type BB) is also accumulated.

F) Gadget ratio The gadget ratio is a ratio in which the cumulative number of awards is the denominator and the cumulative number of awards when the gadgets are activated is the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of games is a predetermined number (e.g., 17,500 games) or more, the cumulative number of awards is 20,000, and the cumulative number of awards when the gadgets are activated is 10,000, 50 may be output as the gadget ratio information. The cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of awards reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 65,535) or exceeds the upper limit when the cumulative number of awards is added to the current game, the cumulative number of awards and the cumulative number of awards when the gadgets are activated are not updated in subsequent games. In other words, the gadget ratio is configured not to change. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17,500), FFh is output as the bonus ratio information.

K) Successive feature ratio The consecutive feature ratio is a ratio in which the cumulative number of bonuses is the denominator and the cumulative number of bonuses when consecutive features are activated that are awarded by the activation of the consecutive feature (RB) is the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of games is a predetermined number (e.g., 17,500 games) or more, the cumulative number of bonuses is 20,000, and the cumulative number of bonuses when consecutive features are activated is 10,000, 50 may be output as the bonus feature ratio information. The cumulative number does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of bonuses reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 65,535) or (if the cumulative number of bonuses is added to the cumulative number of bonuses in the current game and the upper limit is exceeded), the cumulative number of bonuses and the cumulative number of bonuses when consecutive features are activated are not updated in subsequent games. In other words, the bonus feature ratio is configured not to change. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17,500), FFh is output as the continuous feature ratio information.

H) Advantageous Zone Ratio The advantageous zone ratio is a ratio with the cumulative number of plays as the denominator and the cumulative number of advantageous zone plays as the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of plays is 20,000 and the cumulative number of advantageous zone plays is 18,000, 90 may be output as the advantageous zone ratio information. Note that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all plays. For example, when the cumulative number of plays reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 65,535), the cumulative number of plays and the number of advantageous zone plays are not updated in subsequent plays. In other words, the advantageous zone ratio is configured not to change.
The cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, when the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 65,535) or (when the cumulative number of games is added to the number of games of the current game, the upper limit is exceeded), the cumulative number of games and the cumulative number of games in the advantageous zone are not updated in subsequent games. In other words, the advantageous zone ratio is not changed. When the cumulative number of games is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 17,500), FFh is output as the advantageous zone ratio. Also, FFh is output in gaming machines P that do not have advantageous zones.

I) Ratio of a device with instructions The ratio of a device with instructions is a ratio with the cumulative number of awards as the denominator and the sum of the cumulative number of awards when a device is activated given by the operation of the device (RB, CB, SB) and the cumulative number of instruction awards given by the operation of the instruction function (notification of the operation mode of the stop switch P4) as the numerator. The sum may be a value derived by calculation based on the number of awards when a device is activated and the number of instructions, or may be a single memory area to which the number of awards is added when a device is activated or when an instruction function is activated. For example, if the number of awards is 175,000 or more, the cumulative number of awards is 200,000, and the sum of the cumulative number of awards when a device is activated and the cumulative number of instruction awards is 100,000, 50 may be output as the information on the device ratio. The cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total for all games. For example, when the cumulative number of awards reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 1,677,215) or (when the cumulative number of games played plus the number of games played in the current game exceeds the upper limit), the cumulative number of awards and the sum of the cumulative number of awards when the device is activated and the cumulative number of awards by instructions are not updated in subsequent games. In other words, the advantageous zone ratio is not changed. Note that when the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 175,000 games), FFh is output as the device ratio information. Also, FFh is output even in gaming machines P that are not equipped with device or instruction functions.

J) Ratio of the state of the reels The ratio of the state of the reels is a ratio in which the cumulative number of times of play is the denominator and the cumulative specific number of times of play, which is the number of times of play in which the reels (RB, CB, SB) are in operation or the number of times of play in which the reels continuous operation device (1BB, 2BB) is in operation, is the numerator. For example, when the cumulative number of times of play is 20,000 and the cumulative specific number of times of play is 5,000, 25 can be output as the information of the ratio of the state of the reels. The cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, when the cumulative number of times of play reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 1,677,215), the cumulative number of times of play and the specific number of times of play are not updated in subsequent games. In other words, the ratio of the state of the reels is not changed. When the cumulative number of times of play is less than a predetermined number (for example, 175,000), FFh is output as the ratio of the state of the reels. In addition, even in a gaming machine P that is not equipped with a reel or a reel continuous operation device, the gaming machine P is configured to output FFh.

The number of games is the cumulative number of games played since the gaming machine was turned on. It is cleared when the gaming machine is turned on.

C) Spare A spare is a device that is prepared in advance for possible future use. When only the above-mentioned information A) to K) is to be output, 00h is output.

S) Reservation 1
Reservation 1 is not used by the gaming machine P itself alone. For example, after being sent from the gaming machine P to the rental unit, it is used when outputting from the rental unit to an external party such as group A or group B (for example, a gaming machine information center) using the 3-byte area reserved as a reservation on the unit side. An example of its use is adding the maximum MY calculated by the rental unit to the above-mentioned a) to cas), and outputting it to an external party (for example, a gaming machine information center).

C) Reservation 2
Reservation 2 is not used by the gaming machine P itself alone. For example, after being sent from the gaming machine P to the rental unit, it is used when outputting from the rental unit to an external party such as Group A or Group B (for example, a gaming machine information center) using the 2-byte area reserved as a reservation on the unit side. An example of its use is adding the number of plays calculated by the rental unit to the above-mentioned A) to C) and outputting it to an external party (for example, a gaming machine information center).

The total number of inserts, total number of awards, MY (game machine performance information), total number of bonus items awarded, total number of consecutive bonus items awarded, and number of games played are calculated each time a game is played.

Note that MY (gaming machine performance information) is the MY used in gaming machine performance information, and is counted in a separate memory area from the MY counted in the complete function and the MY counted in the advantageous zone. The memory area that counts MY (gaming machine performance information) is called the MY counter (gaming machine performance information). However, the MY counter (gaming machine performance information) may be common to either the MY counter for limiting play that counts MY in the complete function or the MY counter for the advantageous zone that counts MY in the advantageous zone.

The process of generating gaming machine performance information is described with reference to FIG. 58. The process of generating gaming machine performance information is a process that is performed by the gaming medal count control means at the end of one game (processing after all reels have stopped).

First, it is determined whether the number of plays is 65,535, and if the number of plays is 65,535, the gaming machine performance information generation process is terminated. Here, the information contained in the gaming machine performance information is information on a daily basis. For this reason, the RWM memory area that stores the total number of inputs, total number of awards, MY (gaming machine performance information), total number of bonuses awarded, total number of consecutive bonuses awarded, and number of plays included in the gaming machine performance information during the power-on process is initialized (cleared to 0). In such a situation, it is an abnormal value that cannot be expected for the number of plays to exceed 65,535, and if the number of plays is 65,535, the generation process for the total number of inputs, total number of awards, MY (gaming machine performance information), total number of bonuses awarded, total number of consecutive bonuses awarded, and number of plays is not executed.

The criterion for judgment may be whether the number of plays is 65,535 or more, or, if the initial value of the number of plays is set to 65,535 and the number of plays is counted by decrementing it, whether the number of plays is 0 or less (whether the carry flag is set or not).

Although the upper limit for play is set to 65,535, it is not limited to this and may be any value greater or less than 65,535. However, the theoretical upper limit for the number of play times in one day (when operating for 12 hours) is 10,536 times (12 (hours) x 60 (minutes) x 60 (seconds) / 4.1 (seconds)) because the minimum play time is 4.1 seconds, and it is desirable for the upper limit to be at least 10,536 times. Also, considering that there are areas where 40-hour operation is possible on special days, it is desirable for the upper limit for the number of play times to be set to 35,122 times or more.

With this configuration, in an amusement center operation method in which the power to gaming machines is not turned off for several days, it is possible to prevent abnormal values from being sent to the rental unit, and it is possible to prevent abnormal values from being sent from the rental unit to various locations, thereby increasing the accuracy of the information.

Next, it is determined whether the number of plays is 65,535 or not, and if the number of plays is not 65,535 (if it is less than 65,535), "1" is added to the number of plays.

Next, it is determined whether the replay activation symbol has stopped, and if the replay activation symbol has stopped, the gaming machine performance information generation process is terminated. This is because if the replay activation symbol has stopped, a replay is activated and the specified number for the next game is 0, or the number of awards for the game in which the replay activation symbol has stopped is 0, so no changes can occur in the total number of inputs, total number of awards, MY (gaming machine performance information), total number of bonus items awarded, or total number of consecutive bonus items awarded. For this reason, if the replay activation symbol has stopped, "1" is added to the number of games played, and the total number of inputs, total number of awards, MY (gaming machine performance information), total number of bonus items awarded, and total number of consecutive bonus items awarded are not updated.

Next, it is determined whether the replay activation symbol has stopped, and if the replay activation symbol has not stopped, a specified number (the number of coins inserted for that game) is added to the total number of coins inserted.

Next, the number of awards (the number of awards for that game) is added to the total number of awards. Note that if the result of the internal lottery is a loss, or if a small prize is won but not claimed, 0 is added.

Next, it is determined whether the reel is in operation. If the reel is in operation, the number of reels awarded is added to the total number of reels awarded. If the reel is not in operation, it is determined whether the value obtained by subtracting a specified number from the MY counter (gaming machine performance information) and adding the number of reels awarded is less than 0.

Next, after adding the number of awarded items to the total number of awarded items, it is determined whether or not a first-class special feature is in operation. If a first-class special feature is in operation, the number of awarded items is added to the total number of consecutive awarded items. Furthermore, if a first-class special feature is not in operation, it is determined whether or not the value obtained by subtracting a prescribed number from the MY counter (gaming machine performance information) and adding the number of awarded items is less than 0.

Next, after adding the number of awards to the total number of consecutive awards, after determining that the awards are not in operation, and after determining that the first type special awards are not in operation, it is determined whether the value obtained by subtracting a specified number from the MY counter (gaming machine performance information) and adding the number of awards is less than 0, and if it is determined that it is less than 0, the value of the MY counter (gaming machine performance information) is set to 0, and if it is determined that it is 0 or greater, the value obtained by subtracting a specified number from the MY counter (gaming machine performance information) and adding the number of awards is stored in the MY counter (gaming machine performance information).

The MY counter included in the gaming machine performance information starts counting from the state where the most gaming medals have been absorbed during one day of operation (the state where the cumulative value of the number of medals awarded minus the number of medals inserted is the smallest), so if the value obtained by subtracting the specified number from the MY counter (gaming machine performance information) and adding the number of medals awarded is less than 0, the value of the MY counter is corrected to 0.

Next, it is determined whether the updated MY counter (gaming machine performance information) value exceeds the stored maximum MY, and if it is determined that the updated MY counter (gaming machine performance information) value exceeds the stored maximum MY, the value of the maximum MY memory area is updated to the value of the updated MY counter (gaming machine performance information). If it is determined that the updated MY counter (gaming machine performance information) value does not exceed the stored maximum MY, the value of the maximum MY memory area is not updated and the gaming machine performance information generation process is terminated.

As described above, when the number of plays reaches 65535 in the process of generating the gaming machine performance information, the updating of the total number of inputs, total number of awards, MY (gaming machine performance information), total number of bonuses awarded, total number of consecutive bonuses awarded, and number of plays is stopped. However, even when the number of plays reaches 65535 and the updating of the total number of inputs, total number of awards, MY (gaming machine performance information), total number of bonuses awarded, total number of consecutive bonuses awarded, and number of plays is stopped, when it is time to send the gaming machine performance information to the rental unit, it is configured to send based on the stored total number of inputs, total number of awards, MY (gaming machine performance information), total number of bonuses awarded, total number of consecutive bonuses awarded, and number of plays.

For example, if the number of games played in the process of generating gaming machine performance information is 65,535 and all games are played with three coins, the total number of coins inserted will be 196,605. In this case, when the next game is started with three coins and all reels have stopped, the process of generating gaming machine performance information is executed, and the number of games played remains at 65,535, and the total number of coins inserted also remains at 196,605.

For example, if the number of games played is 65,535 in the process of generating gaming machine performance information, and 15 coins have been awarded as a result of each game, the total number of coins awarded will be 983,025. Here, in the process of generating gaming machine performance information that is executed after the next game has started, all the reels have stopped, and 15 coins have been awarded as a result of the game, the number of games played remains at 65,535, and the total number of coins awarded also remains at 983,025.

For example, if the number of games played is 65,535 in the process of generating gaming machine performance information, and all games are played with a single coin and 15 coins are awarded as a result of the games, then MY (gaming machine performance information) will be 917,490. Here, in the process of generating gaming machine performance information that is executed after the next game is started with a single coin, all reels come to a halt, and 15 coins are awarded as a result of the games, the number of games played remains at 65,535, and MY (gaming machine performance information) also remains at 917,490.

For example, if the number of games played is 65,535 in the process of generating the gaming machine performance information, and 15 coins are awarded as a result of all games while the reels are in operation, the total number of awarded reels will be 983,025. Here, in the process of generating the gaming machine performance information that is executed after the next game starts, all the reels stop, and 15 coins are awarded as a result of the game while the reels are in operation, the number of games played remains at 65,535, and the total number of awarded reels also remains at 983,025.

For example, if the number of games played is 65,535 in the process of generating the gaming machine performance information, and 15 coins are awarded as a result of all games while the first type special feature is in operation, the total number of consecutive features awarded will be 983,025. Here, in the process of generating the gaming machine performance information that is executed after the next game starts, all reels stop, and 15 coins are awarded as a result of games while the first type special feature is in operation, the number of games played remains at 65,535, and the total number of consecutive features awarded also remains at 983,025.

With this configuration, information about when updates have stopped can be sent to the rental unit even after the number of plays has reached the upper limit, eliminating the need for the rental unit to process abnormalities and preventing processing from becoming complicated.

The upper limit of the storage area for various information used to generate gaming machine performance information is the theoretical maximum value when the number of games is 65,535, the total number of inserts is 196,605, the total number of awards is 983,025, MY (gaming machine performance information) is 917,490, the total number of bonus items awarded is 983,025, and the total number of consecutive bonus items awarded is 983,025.

In addition, even if the number of plays reaches 65,535 in the gaming machine performance information generation process, the total points, input points, and awarded points are still updated in the hole control/fraud monitoring information generation process.

With this configuration, even if the number of games played as updated in the gaming machine performance information reaches 65,535 and updates to the total number of inputs, total number of awards, MY (gaming machine performance information), total number of bonus items awarded, total number of consecutive bonus items awarded, and number of games are stopped, the total score, input points, and award points at the time of generating the hole control/fraud monitoring information can be updated for each game, so the increase/decrease in the total score, input points, and award points according to the progress of the game can be transmitted to the rental unit. Therefore, even if the number of games played reaches 65,535 in the generation process of the gaming machine performance information, the increase/decrease in the total score, input points, and award points for each game can be transmitted accurately to the rental unit, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activities and keep a history of such activities.

In addition, even if the number of plays reaches 65,535 during the process of generating gaming machine performance information and the updating of MY (gaming machine performance information) stops, the updating of the MY counter for limiting the number of plays to activate the complete function is configured not to stop.

With this configuration, even if the number of plays in the gaming machine performance information reaches the upper limit and the update of MY (gaming machine performance information) stops, it is possible that the play stop condition of the complete function (MY 19,000 or more) has not yet been reached, so the complete function can be properly managed by continuing to update the MY counter for limiting. For this reason, the memory areas of MY (gaming machine performance information) and the MY counter for limiting are separate memory areas. In addition, the MY counter for limiting is set in a memory area outside the area used by the main control means, and MY (gaming machine performance information) is set in a memory area within the area used by the gaming medal count control means, so that similar information can be clearly separated into different memory areas.

However, this division is not limited to this. The MY counter for limiting may be set in a memory area outside the usage area of the main control means, and MY (gaming machine performance information) may be set in a memory area outside the usage area of the gaming medal count control means, or the MY counter for limiting may be set in a memory area within the usage area of the main control means, and MY (gaming machine performance information) may be set in a memory area within the usage area of the gaming medal count control means, or the MY counter for limiting may be set in a memory area within the usage area of the main control means, and MY (gaming machine performance information) may be set in a memory area outside the usage area of the gaming medal count control means.

The gaming machine information included in the message when gaming machine installation information is set in the gaming machine information notification is explained using Figure 18.

A) Main control chip ID number The main control chip ID number is information including a chip individual number for identifying the main control chip in which the CPU, RWM, and ROM are integrated, which is provided on the main control board P15, and is different information even for the same model. For example, when the chip individual number is 4 bytes of 12345678h and the main control chip is purchased from company A, the main control chip ID number 000000001234567821h (the lower byte 21h indicates that it is a main control chip of model number X purchased from company A) can be output to the rental unit. Also, for example, when the chip individual number is 4 bytes of 23456789h and the main control chip is purchased from company B, the main control chip ID number 000000002345678941h (the lower byte 41h indicates that it is a main control chip of model number Y purchased from company B) can be output to the rental unit.

a) Main control chip manufacturer code: Information indicating the gaming machine manufacturer stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.

(c) Main control chip product code: Information indicating the model name of the gaming machine P stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.

The main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, and main control chip product code described above are transmitted from the main control board P15 to the gaming media count control board P16 during the power-on process when the gaming machine P is powered on. The main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, and main control chip product code are each configured to be stored in the RWM area provided on the gaming media count control board P16.

e) Game media count control (game medal count control) chip ID number The game media count control chip ID number is information that includes an individual chip number for identifying the game media count control chip which is an integrated CPU, RWM, and ROM and is provided on the game media count control board P16, and is different information even for the same model.
For example, when the chip individual number is 4 bytes, 98765432h, and it is a game media count control chip purchased from company A, the game media count control chip ID number 000000009876543221h (the lowest byte 21h indicates that it is a game media count control chip of model number X purchased from company A) can be output to the rental unit.
For example, when the chip individual number is 4 bytes, 87654321h, and it is a gaming media count control chip purchased from Company B, the gaming media count control chip ID number 000000008765432141h (the lowest byte 41h indicates that it is a main control chip of model number Y purchased from Company B) can be output to the rental unit.

In the case of a gaming machine P that is not equipped with a gaming media count control board P16, it is possible to output 000000000000000000h as the gaming media count control chip ID number to the rental unit.

e) Game Media Number Control Chip Manufacturer Code: This is information indicating the game machine manufacturer stored in the built-in memory of the game media number control chip.
In addition, in the case of a gaming machine P that does not have a gaming media number control board P16 mounted thereon, it is possible to output 000000h as the gaming media number control chip manufacturer code to the lending unit.

(c) Game Media Number Control Chip Product Code: This is information indicating the model name of the game machine P stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.
In addition, in the case of a gaming machine P that does not have the gaming media number control board P16 mounted thereon, it is possible to output 0000000000000000h as the gaming media number control chip product code to the lending unit.

The gaming machine information included in the message when hall control and fraud monitoring information is set among the gaming machine information notifications will be explained using Figure 19.

A) Total Score The total score is the current number of gaming media stored in the gaming media number control board P16, and can increase or decrease depending on the gaming media insertion process and winning process. The current total score is displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 provided on the gaming machine P. Total score information is sent to the lending unit. For example, if a total score of 2000 points is stored, 0007D0h can be output to the lending unit. The upper limit of the total score that can be stored in the gaming media number control board P16 is 16383 points.

A) Inserted points Inserted points indicate the number of gaming media inserted. For example, when 3 points are bet, 03h can be output to the lending unit. Also, when 3 points are bet and 3 points are settled on the gaming media number control board P16 by operating the settlement switch P6 before starting the game (before the start switch P3 is operated), FDh can be output to the lending unit. In other words, information from -3 points (FDh) to +3 points (03h) can be output to the lending unit.

C) Award points Award points (also called winning points) indicate the number of game media awarded according to the pattern combination that stops (wins) on the pay line after all reels have stopped. For example, when 8 points are awarded, information of 08h can be output, and when 15 points are awarded, information of 0Fh can be output to the lending unit.

The gaming machine P transmits the above-mentioned "total score," "inserted points," and "awarded points" to the rental unit, making it possible to detect abnormalities in the total score using the total score information managed by the rental unit.

D) Main control state 1
The main control state 1 indicates a state related to the game state. Specifically, each bit of the 1-byte data is assigned to a game state. For example, when Bit 0 is 1, information indicating the RB state can be output to the lending unit. For example, when Bit 1 is 1, information indicating the BB state can be output to the lending unit. For example, when Bit 2 is 1, information indicating the AT state can be output to the lending unit. Bits 3 to 6 correspond to the game machine state signals 1 to 4. The game machine state signals 1 to 4 can be changed in use or not used depending on the type of game machine P. For example, a game machine state signal 1 can be output every time the score acquired in the AT game reaches 100 points. Bit 7 is configured to be unused and to be able to output 0 regardless of the type of game machine P. By configuring in this way, for example, when an AT state is to be notified, 00000100B can be output to the lending unit.

E) Main control state 2
The main control state 2 indicates a state related to the gaming state, similar to the main control state 1. Bits 0 to 2 correspond to the gaming machine state signals 5 to 7. The gaming machine state signals 5 to 7 can be used for different purposes or not used depending on the type of gaming machine P. For example, when a specific RT state (replay probability variable state) is entered, the gaming machine state signal 5 can be output. Bits 3 to 7 are left unused and configured to be able to output 0 regardless of the type of gaming machine P. By configuring in this way, for example, when a specific RT state is entered, 00000001B can be output to the lending unit.

(c) Gaming Machine Error State The gaming machine error state refers to an error state composed of information including an error code indicating an error occurring in the gaming machine P, etc.

Specifically, bits 0 to 5 indicate the error code. Bit 6 indicates whether there is an error in the game media count control board P16 (in this case, bit 6 is 0) or an error in the main control board P15 (in this case, bit 6 is 1). Bit 7 indicates whether the lending unit only notifies the error (in this case, bit 7 is 0) or whether the lending unit notifies the error and also notifies the hall computer (HC) of the error code via the lending unit (in this case, bit 7 is 1).

For example, suppose that the gaming machine P is capable of detecting random number anomalies and radio wave anomalies as types of errors. In this case, the error codes can be set to 00001B for random number anomalies and 00010B for radio wave anomalies, and information including these error codes can be output. Specifically, if the random number anomaly is an error in the main control board P15 and the lending unit only notifies the error, 01000001B can be output to the lending unit. Also, if the radio wave anomaly is an error in the game media count control board P16 and the lending unit notifies the error and notifies the hall computer of the error code, 10000010B can be output to the lending unit. Note that if no error has occurred or the gaming machine P does not have an error code, 00000000B can be output to the lending unit.

G) Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control)
Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) indicates information regarding the detection of fraud related to the main control board P15 and the state related to the main control board P15. The signal of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) is treated as a signal for the hall computer. In other words, each signal of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) output from the gaming machine P is output to the hall computer through the lending unit.

The signals that make up Gaming Machine Illegal 1 (Main Control) are described below.

Bit 0 is assigned the setting change signal. In other words, it indicates that the setting is being changed (in setting change mode) and that the setting has been changed. Bit 0 is set to 1 during the setting change until 3 seconds have elapsed after the setting change (from when play becomes possible). Bit 0 is set to 0 in any situation other than during the setting change until 3 seconds have elapsed after the setting change (from when play becomes possible). The setting change signal is output while the setting change status is ON (a "1" is stored in the setting change status storage area of the RWM). The setting change status is set to ON after the setting change mode is started, RAM initialization processing is performed, and the setting value is displayed. Then, 3 seconds after the setting is changed (from when play becomes possible), the setting change status is set to OFF (a "0" is stored in the setting change status storage area of the RWM) to stop outputting the setting change signal. The setting change signal may be configured so that Bit 0 is 1 from when the setting is being changed until one game ends after the setting is changed (for example, when all reels have stopped and the payout process has ended). In this case, Bit 0 is 0 in any situation other than when the setting is being changed until one game ends after the setting is changed. The setting change signal is output while the setting change status is ON (storing "1" in the setting change status storage area of the RWM). The setting change status is turned ON after the setting change mode is started, RAM initialization processing is performed, and the setting value is displayed. Then, at the end of one game after the setting is changed, the setting change status is turned OFF (storing "0" in the setting change status storage area of the RWM) to stop outputting the setting change signal.

In other words, the setting change signal is not output based on the gaming machine P turning the setting change status ON, but rather, when the timing for sending the hall control and fraud monitoring information comes after the gaming machine P turns the setting change status ON, the setting change signal is output based on the setting change status being ON (Bit 0 becomes 1). If the setting change status is turned OFF 3 seconds after the setting is changed (after play becomes possible), the output of the setting change signal is stopped based on the setting change status being OFF when the timing for sending the hall control and fraud monitoring information comes after the setting change status is turned OFF (Bit 0 becomes 0). Similarly, even if the setting change status is configured to be turned OFF when one game ends, the output of the setting change signal is stopped based on the setting change status being OFF when the timing for sending the hall control and fraud monitoring information comes after the setting change status is turned OFF (Bit 0 becomes 0).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to control the output information of the setting change signal included in the hole control/fraud monitoring information by managing the ON/OFF status of the setting change in progress.

The time when play is possible after the setting is changed means that betting can be processed by operating the bet switch, and once play is possible, betting can be processed by operating the bet switch, reel spinning can be processed or an internal lottery can be processed by operating the start switch, and reel stopping can be processed by operating the stop switch. In other words, play is possible even during the period from the time the setting is changed until 3 seconds have elapsed when the setting change signal is being output, and betting can be processed by operating the bet switch, reel spinning can be processed or an internal lottery can be processed by operating the start switch, and reel stopping can be processed by operating the stop switch.

Next, the setting confirmation signal is assigned to Bit 1. In other words, when the setting is being confirmed (in setting confirmation mode), Bit 1 is 1, and in any other situation, Bit 1 is 0.

Although an example has been shown in which the setting confirmation signal has a bit of 1 only during setting confirmation, the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that the bit is 1 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) from the start of the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control board P15 (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on in the game standby state), a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is sent to the game media number control board P16, and the bit of game machine fraud 1 sent from the game media number control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1, and the main control board P15 sets a setting confirmation timer, and when the main control board P15 measures the setting confirmation timer and determines that 5 seconds have elapsed (determines that the count value of the setting confirmation timer is "0"), a command regarding the setting confirmation mode having elapsed for 5 seconds is sent to the game media number control board P16, and since a command regarding the end of the setting confirmation mode has already been received from the main control board P15, even during the setting confirmation mode, the bit of game machine fraud 1 sent from the game media number control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 0. Note that the output time of the setting confirmation signal may be another time (for example, 3 seconds).

In this case, if five seconds have elapsed during the setting check mode, a command regarding the fact that five seconds have elapsed during the setting check mode may or may not be sent. Also, if five seconds have elapsed during the setting check mode, the gaming machine fraud 1 bit remains at 1 until the setting check mode ends. Even if the setting check mode ends in less than five seconds (for example, two seconds), the gaming machine fraud 1 bit indicating that the setting check mode is in progress remains at 1 for the remaining three seconds (a total of five seconds). By configuring in this way, even if the setting check mode ends in a very short time, sufficient time can be secured to send information that the setting check mode is in progress to the rental unit, making it possible to detect unauthorized operation of the setting key switch.

In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control board P15 (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on in a game standby state), a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is sent to the game media number control board P16, and the bit of game machine fraud 1 sent from the game media number control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1. At the same time, the main control board P15 sets a setting confirmation timer, and sends to the game media number control board P16 a command regarding the setting confirmation timer being set and a command regarding the setting confirmation timer being updated each time the main control board P15 updates the setting confirmation timer. Based on the value (count value) of the setting confirmation timer sent from the main control board, the game media number control board P16 determines that 5 seconds have elapsed in the setting confirmation mode (determines that the timer (count value) of the setting confirmation timer is 0), and thus the bit of game machine fraud 1 sent from the game media number control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 0.

In this case, if five seconds have passed during the setting check mode, the command regarding the setting check timer being updated will no longer be sent. Also, if five seconds have passed during the setting check mode, the gaming machine illegal 1 bit will remain at 1 until the setting check mode ends. Even if the setting check mode ends in less than five seconds (for example, two seconds), the gaming machine illegal 1 bit indicating that the setting check mode is in progress will remain at 1 for the remaining three seconds (a total of five seconds). By configuring in this way, even if the setting check mode ends in a very short time, it is possible to ensure sufficient time to send information that the setting check mode is in progress to the rental unit, making it possible to detect any unauthorized operation of the setting key switch.

In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board P15 (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on in a game standby state), a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is sent to the gaming media count control board P16, and the bit of gaming machine fraud 1 sent from the gaming media count control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1. At the same time, the gaming media count control board P16 sets a setting confirmation timer, and the gaming media count control board P16 determines that 5 seconds have elapsed in the setting confirmation mode based on the value (count value) of the setting confirmation timer (determines that the timer (count value) of the setting confirmation timer is 0), thereby setting the bit of gaming machine fraud 1 sent from the gaming media count control board P16 to the lending unit to 0.

In this case, if five seconds have elapsed during the setting check mode, the update of the setting check timer ends. Also, if five seconds have elapsed during the setting check mode, the gaming machine illegal 1 bit remains at 1 until the setting check mode ends. Even if the setting check mode ends in less than five seconds (for example, two seconds), the gaming machine illegal 1 bit, which indicates that the setting check mode is in progress, remains at 1 for the remaining three seconds (a total of five seconds). By configuring in this way, even if the setting check mode ends in a very short time, it is possible to ensure sufficient time to send information that the setting check mode is in progress to the rental unit, making it possible to detect any unauthorized operation of the setting key switch.

The timing for setting the setting confirmation timer may be after starting the setting confirmation mode and displaying the setting value. If either of the conditions "in setting confirmation mode" and "the setting confirmation timer is not 0" is met, the setting confirmation status is turned ON and the setting confirmation signal is output, and if neither of the conditions "in setting confirmation mode" and "the setting confirmation timer is not 0" is met, the setting confirmation status is turned OFF and the output of the setting confirmation signal is stopped.

Details on output control of the setting confirmation signal.

While the game progress main process is waiting for play, it determines whether the setting key switch has risen (determines whether the setting key switch has turned from OFF to ON), and if it determines that the setting key switch has risen, it sets a timer for 5 seconds (5004.165 ms to be exact) as the setting confirmation signal output period (the interval between interrupt processes is 2.235 ms, so the count value is set to "2239").

The timer for the setting confirmation signal output period is set (the count value is set to "2239"), and then the timer measurement process within the interrupt process is executed, which subtracts the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period (decreases the count value by "1"), and the gaming machine information management process within the same interrupt process determines whether 5 seconds have passed since the setting confirmation signal output period (determines whether the count value is "0" or not), and if 5 seconds have not passed (if it is determined that the count value is not "0" (the zero flag is not set)), the setting confirmation signal is set, and if 5 seconds have passed (if it is determined that the count value is "0" (the zero flag is set)), the setting confirmation signal is not set and processing moves to another process. Here, after the setting confirmation signal is set, when the timing for sending the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification arrives, the setting confirmation signal is output (sent to the lending unit side).

Whether 5 seconds have elapsed during the setting check signal output period is determined by whether the zero flag is set. If the timer for the setting check signal output period is 0 as a result of the subtraction by the timer measurement process, the zero flag is set and it is determined that 5 seconds have elapsed. If the timer for the setting check signal output period is not 0 as a result of the subtraction by the timer measurement process, the zero flag is not set and it is determined that 5 seconds have not elapsed. Note that after 5 seconds have elapsed after the setting check mode has ended and the output of the setting check signal has ended, the timer is set to 0, and when the timer is 0, the result of the subtraction by the timer measurement process also becomes 0 and the zero flag is set, so the setting check signal will not be set after 5 seconds have elapsed since the setting check mode ended unless the mode is switched back to setting check mode.

In addition, during game play standby in the game progress main process, it determines whether or not there is a rising edge of the setting key switch, and if it determines that there is a rising edge of the setting key switch, a 5-second timer is set as the setting confirmation signal output period. After that, the next process determines whether or not there is a falling edge of the setting key switch signal (a falling edge of the setting key switch) (determines whether the setting key switch has changed from ON to OFF), and if it determines that there is no falling edge, it again sets a 5-second timer as the setting confirmation signal output period and returns to the process of determining whether or not there is a falling edge of the setting key switch.

In this way, after it is determined that the setting key switch has risen, the timer continues to set a 5-second setting confirmation signal output period until it is determined that the setting key switch has fallen, so the setting confirmation signal is always sent during setting confirmation mode. Also, even if it is determined that the setting key switch has fallen and the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting confirmation signal is sent until the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period reaches 0, so even if the setting confirmation mode ends within 5 seconds, the setting confirmation signal can be sent for 5 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends, and the setting confirmation signal can be sent reliably to the rental unit.

In addition, even if someone commits fraud by switching to setting check mode and then instantly switching back to normal mode to sneak a peek at the settings, the setting check signal is transmitted for five seconds, making it possible to leave traces of the fraud.

In addition, since the process of setting the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period is executed using the loop process of the main game progress process, if the timer is set again in the loop process of the main game progress process after the timer measurement process in the interrupt process is executed to subtract the timer, the process of setting the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period can be executed multiple times, so that the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period can be reliably set to the initial value (5 seconds). In other words, in order to enable the process of setting the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period to be executed multiple times (at least twice), the time required to execute one execution of the timer setting process for the setting confirmation signal output period is configured to be shorter than 2.235 ms/2 (half the time of the interval between interrupt processes).

In addition, with this configuration, the output period of the setting confirmation signal can be controlled by a process that sets a timer, so that the output of the setting confirmation signal can be accurately controlled with a simple program. Note that the output period of the setting confirmation signal is an example, and the output period of the setting confirmation signal can be set to any period (e.g., 1 second, 3 seconds, or 10 seconds, etc.) so that the output of the setting confirmation signal is not stopped immediately after the setting confirmation mode ends, the output of the setting confirmation signal can be stopped immediately after the setting confirmation mode ends, or the output of the setting confirmation signal can be stopped a predetermined period of time after the start of the setting confirmation mode, regardless of whether the setting confirmation mode is in progress or not.

If it is determined that the setting key switch has risen during game play standby in the game progress main process, a sub-control command including at least a command based on the rising edge of the setting key switch is set. If it is determined that the setting key switch has fallen during the game progress main process, a sub-control command including at least a command based on the falling edge of the setting key switch is set. Then, in the sub-control command transmission process within the interrupt process, the set sub-control command is transmitted to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives a sub-control command, it analyzes the sub-control command and executes processing according to the analysis result. For example, when a command based on the rising edge of the setting key switch is received, a presentation corresponding to the setting confirmation mode is executed, and when a command based on the falling edge of the setting key switch is received, the setting confirmation mode is terminated and a presentation corresponding to the normal mode or the standby state is executed.

The effects corresponding to the setting check mode do not directly correspond to the output period of the setting check signal. For example, immediately after the setting check mode ends, the setting check signal continues to be output for 5 seconds, but a command based on the falling edge of the setting key switch is sent to the sub-control board P12, and when the command based on the falling edge of the setting key switch is received, the effects corresponding to the setting check mode are immediately terminated. If the effects corresponding to the setting check mode are executed even though the setting check mode has ended, the player may be given the mistaken impression that he or she cannot continue playing. However, by configuring in this way, it is possible to immediately switch the effect state when the setting check mode ends, and it is possible to prevent any hindrance to the player's progress in the game. Furthermore, since the setting check signal is output for 5 seconds even after the setting check mode ends, it is possible to reliably transmit the setting check signal to the lending unit.

Next, Bit 2 is assigned with fraud detection signal 1, Bit 3 with fraud detection signal 2, and Bit 4 with fraud detection signal 3. For example, in a gaming machine P in which random number anomalies are considered fraudulent, if detection of a random number anomaly is assigned to fraud detection signal 1, Bit 2 will be 1 if a random number anomaly is detected, and Bit 2 will be 0 if a random number anomaly is not detected.

When the gaming machine outputs any of the fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3, the game is stopped. When the lending unit receives any of the fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3, the insertion and return of a card through the card insertion slot is not possible. In other words, when the lending unit receives any of the fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3, the card is not returned even if the card return switch is operated, and a new card cannot be inserted through the card insertion slot in the lending unit. In addition, lending or replay is possible in the lending unit. It is also possible for the lending unit to receive count notifications. It is also possible to deposit money through the bill insertion slot.

In addition, even if the game progress is stopped when the gaming machine is outputting any one of the fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3, communication with the lending unit continues. Specifically, the lending unit and gaming machine information notification are sent every 300 ms, and when the counting switch of the gaming machine is operated, a counting notification is sent to the lending unit with a value other than 0 (for example, 50) for the counted medal number.

Next, a security signal is assigned to Bit 5. Specifically, Bit 5 is 1 when a fraud detection signal is being output (Bits 2 to 4 are 1), when a setting change signal is being output (Bit 0 is 1), when a setting confirmation signal is being output (Bit 1 is 1), or when a complete signal is being output (Bit 6 is 1) due to the execution of a stop process (when the safety device (complete function) is activated); in other circumstances Bit 5 is 0.

When the gaming machine is outputting a security signal, the game progress is stopped. When the lending unit is receiving a security signal, and any one of the fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3, the insertion and return of a card through the card insertion slot is not possible. In other words, when the lending unit is receiving a security signal, and any one of the fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3, the card is not returned even if the card return switch is operated, and a new card cannot be inserted through the card insertion slot in the lending unit. In addition, lending or replay is possible in the lending unit. It is also possible for the lending unit to receive counting notifications. It is also possible to deposit money through the bill insertion slot.

In addition, even if the game progress is stopped while the gaming machine is outputting a security signal, communication with the rental unit continues. Specifically, the rental unit and gaming machine information notification are sent every 300 ms, and when the counting switch of the gaming machine is operated, a counting notification is sent to the rental unit with a counted medal number other than 0 (for example, 50).

In addition, in a situation where the lending unit is receiving a security signal but is not receiving any of the fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3 (a situation where the lending unit is receiving a security signal and is receiving a setting change signal, a situation where the lending unit is receiving a security signal and is receiving a setting confirmation signal, or a situation where the lending unit is receiving a security signal and is receiving a complete signal), the card can be returned when the card return switch is operated. In addition, it is possible to insert a new card through the card insertion slot in the lending unit. In addition, lending or replay is possible in the lending unit. In addition, it is also possible to receive counting notifications in the lending unit. In addition, deposits are also possible through the bill insertion slot.

Next, a complete signal (also called a stop signal, a safety device activation signal, or a complete function activation signal) is assigned to Bit 6. For example, when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value (e.g., 19,000) and the stop process is being executed, Bit 6 becomes 1, and when the value of the difference counter is equal to or less than the predetermined value, Bit 6 becomes 0.

The complete signal is configured to continue outputting for 30 seconds after the completion function starts operating and stops playing, and to end outputting after 30 seconds have passed. Therefore, even if a predetermined end condition for the completion function to end is met, the complete signal can be output for 30 seconds. In other words, even if a predetermined end condition for the completion function to end is met within 30 seconds after the completion function is activated and stops playing, the complete signal can be output to the lending unit for 30 seconds after the completion function is activated and stops playing. The timing for starting output of the complete signal may be referred to as a predetermined timing after the completion function is activated. Also, even if the completion function is activated (play is stopped) when 30 seconds have passed since the completion function was activated and stopped playing, the output of the complete signal is stopped when 30 seconds have passed since the completion function was activated and stopped playing. In other words, even if the complete function is operating, the output of the complete signal will end after 30 seconds have elapsed, and the operation of the complete function will continue until a specific end condition is met that ends the operation of the complete function.

Also, like the setting confirmation signal described above, the counter that manages the output time of the complete signal may be essentially stopped from updating while the complete function is in operation (for example, the counter may be configured to always be set to an initial value while the complete function is in operation), so that the complete signal is output for 30 seconds after the completion of the operation of the complete function. With this configuration, the complete signal output period can be output for the time the complete function is in operation plus 30 seconds, so that the complete signal can be output to the lending unit for a longer period of time.

The predetermined termination condition for terminating the operation of the complete function is the initialization process by the setting change process, which will be described in detail later. Therefore, the complete function is activated and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing (the timing when the game is stopped), and then the gaming machine is turned off at the second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to turn on the gaming machine, the setting change mode is started and the setting change signal and the complete signal are output, and if the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is during the setting change, the output of the setting change signal is maintained, but the output of the complete signal is terminated. Note that the time (30 seconds) for outputting the complete signal may or may not include the time when the gaming machine is turned off. Note that the predetermined termination condition for terminating the operation of the complete function is not limited to the above, and may be any timing related to the setting change, such as when the setting change mode is activated or when the setting change mode is terminated.

Also, the complete function may be activated and start outputting a complete signal at a first timing (the timing when play stops), and then the gaming machine is powered off at a second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to power on the gaming machine, the setting change mode is started and a setting change signal is output, but the complete signal may be initialized by the initialization process associated with the setting change mode. In this case, the output time of the complete signal will be within 30 seconds, but the initialization program capacity can be reduced by making the addresses of the initialization range associated with the setting change process consecutive.

Furthermore, if the power to the gaming machine is cut off while the complete signal is being output, the output of the complete signal from the gaming machine will stop. Since the rental unit cannot receive the complete signal during this time, the rental unit may choose not to execute a specific process based on receiving the complete signal, or may execute it. Examples of the specific process executed by the rental unit based on receiving the complete signal include a process of sending information to the hall computer indicating that the complete function is in operation, or a process of disabling the acceptance of the rental button on the rental unit.

In addition, if the power supply to the rental unit is cut off while the complete signal is being output, the gaming machine will determine that there is a VL abnormality and will suspend the output of the complete signal. Suspending the output of the complete signal means that a "1" is stored in Bit 6 of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) corresponding to the complete signal, and the update of the timer that manages the output time of the complete signal is stopped. As a method of suspending the update of the timer, the timer update process may be skipped or interrupt processing may be prohibited. This configuration can prevent a situation in which the power supply to the rental unit is turned OFF immediately after the complete signal is output, and the power supply to the rental unit is turned ON after 30 seconds has passed, causing the rental unit to be unable to receive the complete signal. In other words, even if the power supply of the rental unit is turned OFF immediately after the output of the complete signal, the output of the complete signal is maintained even 30 seconds after the start of the output of the complete signal because the updating of the timer for managing the output time of the complete signal is stopped, and the updating of the timer for managing the output time of the complete signal resumes after the power supply of the rental unit is turned ON, so it is possible to output the complete signal for 30 seconds while connected to the rental unit. Note that the timer for managing the output time of the complete signal may be reset to 30 seconds when the power supply of the rental unit is turned ON after the power supply of the rental unit is turned OFF while the complete signal is being output.

In addition, if a VL abnormality occurs while the complete signal is being output, the output of the complete signal is interrupted, but if another specified abnormality occurs while the complete signal is being output, the output of the complete signal continues. The other specified abnormalities are any or all of the following: settlement request communication error, game media count control reception abnormality, main control reception abnormality, total score upper limit abnormality, rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6. In these abnormalities, since communication with the rental unit is possible and the rental unit is able to receive the complete signal, it is considered that the output of the complete signal will continue without interruption, allowing for stable output of the complete signal. In addition, for rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6, communication with the rental unit is possible, but since there is some abnormality in the communication, the output of the complete signal may be interrupted.

In the above embodiment, if the power supply to the rental unit is cut off while the complete signal is being output, the gaming machine determines that there is a VL abnormality and halts the output of the complete signal. However, this is not limited to the above, and the gaming machine may continue to output the complete signal even if it determines that there is a VL abnormality while the complete signal is being output. In this case, the processing capacity related to the output of the complete signal can be reduced. Also, if the gaming machine determines that there is a VL abnormality while the complete signal is being output, the output of the complete signal may be terminated. In this case, there is a possibility that the rental unit will not be able to receive the complete signal, but it becomes possible to stably execute processing related to the VL abnormality.

In addition, if the output of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 ends 3 seconds after the fraud is released, the complete function is activated and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing, and then if fraud is detected at the second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, any of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 and the complete signal are output, and if the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is during fraud detection or after the fraud is released and before 3 seconds have passed since the fraud is released, the output of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is maintained, but the output of the complete signal ends. In addition, if the complete function is activated and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing, and then if fraud is detected at the second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, any of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 and the complete signal are output, and if the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is after the fraud is released and after 3 seconds have passed since the fraud is released, the output of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 has ended and the output of the complete signal also ends. This configuration makes it less likely that the output of the complete signal will overlap with the output of fraud detection signals 1 to 3 (the output time of the complete signal alone will be 27 seconds or longer), making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load of the lending unit is high.

In addition, if the output of fraud detection signals 1 to 3 ends 3 seconds after the fraud is released and the count of the output of the complete signal (timer update) effectively stops when the complete function is activated (if the complete signal is always output while the complete function is activated and the complete signal is output for 30 seconds after the complete function is deactivated), the complete function is activated and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing, then the output of the complete signal is maintained at the second timing when the complete function is activated even if 30 seconds have passed since the first timing, then one of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 and the complete signal are output at the third timing after the fraud is detected, then the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 and the complete signal are output at the fourth timing before 3 seconds have passed after the fraud is released, and then at the fifth timing after the fourth timing and 3 seconds have passed after the fraud is released, the output of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 has ended and the complete signal is output. Then, at the sixth timing, which is after the fifth timing and 30 seconds have elapsed since the initialization process associated with the setting change mode was executed, the output of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 has ended, and the output of the complete signal has also ended. With this configuration, the complete signal can be made to end output after the fraud detection signals 1 to 3, so that the output period of the complete signal alone can be guaranteed, and the complete signal can be easily received even when the processing load of the rental unit is high.

In addition, since the output of the setting change signal ends 3 seconds after the setting change mode ends, the complete function is activated and starts outputting the complete signal at a first timing, then the gaming machine is powered off at a second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to turn on the gaming machine, the setting change mode is started and the setting change signal and complete signal are output, and if the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is during the setting change mode or after the setting change mode ends but before 3 seconds have passed since the setting change mode ends, the output of the setting change signal is maintained but the output of the complete signal ends. Note that the time (30 seconds) for which the complete signal is output may or may not include the time when the gaming machine is powered off. In the case of a configuration in which the output of the setting change signal ends when one game ends after the setting change, the complete function is activated and the output of the complete signal begins at a first timing, and then the gaming machine is turned off at a second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to turn on the gaming machine, the setting change mode is started, the setting change signal and the complete signal are output, and if the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is during the setting change mode or after the setting change mode ends and before one game is played, the output of the setting change signal is maintained, but the output of the complete signal ends. Note that the time (30 seconds) for outputting the complete signal may or may not include the time when the gaming machine is turned off.

In addition, the complete function is activated and starts outputting a complete signal at a first timing, then the gaming machine is powered off at a second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to power on the gaming machine, the setting change mode is activated and the setting change signal and the complete signal are output, and if the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is the end of the setting change mode and 3 seconds have passed since the end of the setting change mode, the output of the setting change signal has ended and the output of the complete signal has also ended. Note that the time (30 seconds) for outputting the complete signal may or may not include the time when the gaming machine is powered off. With this configuration, the timing of the output of the complete signal and the output of the setting change signal is less likely to overlap (the output time of the complete signal alone is 27 seconds or more), making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load of the lending unit is high.

In addition, if the count of the output of the complete signal (updating of the timer) essentially stops when the complete function is activated (if the complete signal is always output while the complete function is activated and the complete signal is output for 30 seconds after the complete function is no longer activated), the complete signal starts to be output at the first timing when the complete function is activated, and then the output of the complete signal is maintained at the second timing when the complete function is activated even if 30 seconds have passed since the first timing, and then the gaming machine is powered off, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to turn on the gaming machine and the setting change mode is activated at the third timing when the setting change mode is activated, and then the setting change signal and the complete signal are output at the fourth timing which is before 3 seconds have passed after the setting change mode is ended and the initialization process is executed, and then the setting change signal and the complete signal are output at the fifth timing which is after the fourth timing and 3 seconds have passed after the setting change mode is ended and the initialization process is executed, then the output of the setting change signal has ended and the complete signal is output. Then, at the sixth timing, which is after the fifth timing and 30 seconds have elapsed since the setting change mode ended and the initialization process was executed, the output of the setting change signal has ended and the output of the complete signal has also ended. With this configuration, the complete signal can be made to end output after the setting change signal, so that the output period of the complete signal alone can be guaranteed, and the complete signal can be easily received even when the processing load of the rental unit is high.

In addition, if the setting confirmation signal ends output 3 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends, the complete function is activated and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing, and then at the second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to start the setting confirmation mode, and the setting confirmation signal and the complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is during the setting confirmation mode, or after the setting confirmation mode ends and before 3 seconds have passed since the setting change ends, the output of the setting confirmation signal is maintained, but the output of the complete signal ends. In addition, if the complete function is activated and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing, and then at the second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to start the setting confirmation mode, and the setting confirmation signal and the complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is after the setting confirmation mode ends and after 3 seconds have passed since the setting confirmation mode ends, the output of the setting confirmation signal ends and the output of the complete signal also ends. This configuration makes it less likely that the output of the complete signal and the output of the setting confirmation signal will overlap (the output time of the complete signal alone will be 27 seconds or more), making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load of the lending unit is high.

In addition, if the setting confirmation signal ends output three seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends, and the count of the complete signal output (timer update) effectively stops when the complete function is activated (if the complete signal is always output while the complete function is activated and the complete signal is output for 30 seconds after the complete function ends), the complete function activates and begins outputting the complete signal at the first timing, then the complete signal is maintained at the second timing when the complete function is activated even if 30 seconds have passed since the first timing, and then the setting confirmation signal and complete signal are output at the third timing when the setting key switch is turned to the ON position and the setting confirmation mode is activated, and then the setting confirmation signal and complete signal are output at the fourth timing, which is before three seconds have passed after the setting confirmation mode ends, and then at the fifth timing, which is after the fourth timing and three seconds have passed after the setting confirmation mode ends, the output of the setting confirmation signal has ended and the complete signal is output. Then, at the sixth timing, which is after the fifth timing and 30 seconds have elapsed since the initialization process associated with the setting change mode was executed, the output of the setting confirmation signal has ended, and the output of the complete signal has also ended. With this configuration, the complete signal can be made to end output after the setting confirmation signal, so that the output period of the complete signal alone can be guaranteed, and the complete signal can be easily received even when the processing load of the rental unit is high.

In this way, even if other signals are output to the rental unit while the complete signal is being output, the output of the complete signal is maintained. The other signals include the door open signal, the setting door open signal, the setting change signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the fraud detection signals 1 to 3.

Next, Bit 7 is unused and is set to 0.

Here, we will focus on the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and security signal, and provide examples of the types of signals that are output. Note that fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 will not be mentioned here, but fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 also output "0" or "1." Also, the first game refers to the first game played after the setting change mode is performed.

(Case 1) For example, suppose that after a setting change, the setting change is completed (play is now possible). In this case, a "1" (on) is output as the setting change signal from a specific timing when the setting change mode is started, and a "0" (off) is output as the setting change signal three seconds after the setting change is completed. In this case, if the setting confirmation mode is not entered after the setting change is completed, a "0" (off) continues to be output as the setting confirmation signal. Also, even if "0" (off) is output as the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, or fraud detection signal 3, if "1" is output as the setting change signal, the security signal outputs "1" (on), and if "1" is not output as the fraud detection signal for any of the fraud detection signals 1, fraud detection signal 2, or fraud detection signal 3 at the timing when "0" is output as the setting change signal, a "0" is output as the security signal. In addition, if "1" is output as any of the fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3 at the same time that "0" is output as the setting change signal, "1" is output as the security signal.

(Case 2) For example, after making a setting change, the power switch is turned off (a power outage occurs) three seconds before the setting change is completed, and then the power switch is turned on (power is restored). Then, three seconds have passed since the setting change was completed. In this case, "1" (on) is output as the setting change signal from the specified timing when the setting change mode was started, and while the power is out, no output processing is performed, and "1" (on) is output as the setting change signal from a specific timing after the power is restored, and three seconds after the setting change is completed (not including the time when the power is out), "0" (off) is output as the setting change signal. In this case, if the setting confirmation mode is not entered after the setting change is completed, "0" (off) continues to be output as the setting confirmation signal. Also, even if "0" (off) is output as fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, "1" is output as the setting change signal, so the security signal outputs "1" (on). If "1" is not output as any of fraud detection signals 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, "0" is output as the security signal. Note that if "1" is output as any of fraud detection signals 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, "1" is output as the security signal.

(Case 3) For example, after a setting change is made, the setting confirmation mode is entered 3 seconds after the setting change is completed, and the setting confirmation mode is ended 3 seconds after the setting change is completed. In this case, "1" (on) is output as the setting change signal from the specified timing when the setting change mode is started, and even if the setting confirmation mode is in progress after the setting change is completed and before 3 seconds have passed since the setting change is completed, "1" (on) continues to be output as the setting change signal and "1" (on) is output as the setting confirmation signal, and after the setting confirmation mode ends after the setting change is completed and before 3 seconds have passed since the setting change is completed, "1" (on) continues to be output as the setting change signal and "0" (off) is output as the setting confirmation signal, and after 3 seconds have passed since the setting change is completed and the setting confirmation mode is not in progress, "0" (off) is output as the setting change signal and "0" (off) is output as the setting confirmation signal. Also, even if "0" (off) is output as fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, "1" is output as the setting change signal, so the security signal outputs "1" (on). If "1" is not output as any of fraud detection signals 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, "0" is output as the security signal. Note that if "1" is output as any of fraud detection signals 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, "1" is output as the security signal.

H) Gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or control of the number of gaming media)
Gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or gaming media number control) indicates information regarding the detection of fraud related to the main control board P15 or the gaming media number control board P16, and information regarding the state related to the main control board P15 or the gaming media number control board P16. The gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or gaming media number control) signal is treated as a hall computer signal. In other words, each gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) signal output from the gaming machine P is output to the hall computer via the lending unit.

The signals that make up gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or gaming media count control) are described below.

Bit 0 is assigned the setting door open signal. The setting door open signal is a signal that indicates whether the setting key switch cover member (also called the setting door) that covers the setting key switch for changing settings is open or not. When the setting key switch cover member is open, Bit 0 becomes 1, and information indicating that the setting key switch cover member is open is included in gaming machine fraud 2, and when the setting key switch cover member is closed, Bit 0 becomes 0, and information indicating that the setting key switch cover member is closed is included in gaming machine fraud 2. Note that in gaming machines P that are not provided with a setting key switch cover member or gaming machines P that do not have a function for detecting the opening of the setting key switch cover member, Bit 0 becomes 0.

Next, a door open signal (also called a door switch signal) is assigned to Bit 1. The door open signal is a signal that indicates whether the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is open or not. When the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is open, Bit 0 becomes 1, and information indicating that the front door P2 is open is included in gaming machine fraud 2, and when the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is closed, Bit 0 becomes 0, and information indicating that the front door P2 is closed is included in gaming machine fraud 2.

The door open signal is output and controlled according to the open/close state of the front door P2, depending on whether the door switch is ON or OFF, as detected by the input port reading process in the interrupt process described above.

If the input port reading process in the interrupt process determines that the front door P2 is open, a timer is set for 5 seconds (5001.93 ms to be exact) (the count value is set to "2239" because the interval between interrupt processes is 2.235 ms). Then, the timer is measured by the timer measurement process in the same interrupt process (the count value is subtracted by "1"). Then, if the gaming machine information management process in the same interrupt process determines that the output time of the door open signal has not passed 5 seconds (the count value is not 0 as a result of subtracting the count value (zero flag is not set)), the door open signal is set, and if the output time of the door open signal has passed 5 seconds (the count value is 0 as a result of subtracting the count value (zero flag is set)), the door open signal is not set and the set process for signals related to other gaming machine information is executed. Note that the output time of the door open signal is not limited to 5 seconds, and may be another time (for example, 3 seconds).

If the input port reading process in the next interrupt process determines that front door P2 is open, the 5-second timer is set again (because the interval between interrupt processes is 2.235 ms, the count value is set to "2239" again). In other words, if front door P2 is open, the 5-second timer will continue to be set repeatedly (the timer setting process will be executed multiple times).

In this way, when the front door P2 is open, the 5-second timer continues to be set for each interrupt process, so the zero flag will not be set even if the timer is decremented (the count value is decremented). In other words, the process of decrementing "1" from the count value "2239" is repeated each time the timer measurement process within the interrupt process is executed. With this configuration, the door open signal is always output when the front door P2 is open.

When the front door P2 is closed, the input port reading process in the interrupt process detects that the door switch is ON and determines that the front door P2 is closed. If it is determined that the front door P2 is closed, the 5-second timer is not reset. Then, the timer measurement process in the same interrupt process measures the timer (decrements the count value by "1"). Then, the gaming machine information management process in the same interrupt process determines whether the output time of the door open signal has exceeded 5 seconds. Here, since the 5-second timer is not reset when the front door P2 is closed, the timer (count value "2239") that was set when the front door P2 was open is decremented by repeated interrupt processes, and the timer (count value) approaches "0".

In this embodiment, the process of setting the timer and the process of decrementing the timer are executed within the same interrupt process, so if the initial value is set to "2238", which is 5001.93 ms (2238 times x 2.235 ms), the number of interrupts until it reaches "0" will be 2237, which is less than 5 seconds (4999.7 ms to be exact). Therefore, the initial value is set to "2238 + 1 (2239)". In other words, the count value will become "2238" due to the timer measurement process within the interrupt process in which the initial value "2239" is set, making it possible to set the number of interrupts to 2238.

When the count value becomes "0" by the timer measurement process, the zero flag is set, and the output of the door open signal can be stopped. In other words, after the front door P2 is closed, the door open signal is output for 5 seconds, and after 5 seconds have passed, the output of the door open signal is stopped. Note that after 5 seconds or more have passed since the door was closed and the output of the door open signal has ended, the timer is set to 0, and the result of subtracting the timer by the timer measurement process when the timer is 0 also becomes 0, and the zero flag is set, so after 5 seconds have passed since the door was closed, the door open signal is not set unless the door is opened again. In other words, for 5 seconds after the front door P2 is closed, Bit 1 is set to 1, and information indicating that the front door P2 is open is included in the gaming machine fraud 2, and after 5 seconds have passed, Bit 1 is set to 0, and information indicating that the front door P2 is closed is included in the gaming machine fraud 2. In a situation in which the front door P2 is closed, there are cases in which the gaming machine fraud 2 includes information indicating that the front door P2 is open, and cases in which the gaming machine fraud 2 includes information indicating that the front door P2 is closed.

With this configuration, the output period of the door open signal can be controlled by setting the timer, so that the output of the door open signal can be accurately controlled with a simple program. Note that the output period of the door open signal is an example, and the output period of the door open signal may be set to any period (e.g., 1 second, 3 seconds, or 10 seconds) so that the output of the door open signal is not stopped immediately after the door is closed, and the output of the door open signal may be stopped immediately after the door is closed.

In addition, in the sub-notification data output process within the interrupt process, a door switch signal is sent to the sub-control board P12 depending on whether the door switch is ON or OFF, and if the sub-control board P12 receives an OFF door switch signal, it determines that the door is open and controls the execution of door open notification effects such as a door opening sound or a door open message display.

The door open performance does not directly correspond to the output period of the door open signal. For example, immediately after the door is closed, the door open signal is output continuously for five seconds, but the door switch signal becomes an ON signal and is sent to the sub-control board P12. However, by configuring the sub-control board P12 to execute the door open performance for five seconds after detecting that the door switch signal has changed from OFF to ON, it is possible to make the output period of the door open signal similar to the execution period of the door open performance. This makes it possible to visually check the output period of the door open signal, making it easier for the administrator to grasp the signal output period.

In this embodiment, the output period of the door open signal and the execution period of the door open effect are made similar, but this is not limited thereto, and the execution period of the door open effect may be longer or shorter than the output period of the door open signal.

In this embodiment, the process of setting the timer is executed for each interrupt process, but it is not limited to this and the process of setting the timer may be executed for each predetermined number of interrupts (two or more). However, to prevent the timer value (count value) from becoming 0 between setting the timer and setting the next timer, the interrupt interval for executing the timer set process needs to be shorter than the time indicated by the timer (count value).

In addition, when the gaming machine outputs a set door open signal or a door open signal, the progress of the game is stopped. In addition, when the lending unit receives either a door open signal or a door open signal, lending or replay, inserting and returning a card through the card insertion slot, and depositing money through the bill insertion slot are not possible. In other words, when the lending unit receives either a door open signal or a door open signal, a card cannot be returned even if the card return switch is operated, and a new card cannot be inserted through the card insertion slot in the lending unit. In addition, lending or replay is not possible even if the lending switch or replay switch is operated in the lending unit, and bills cannot be inserted into the bill insertion slot. It is possible for the lending unit to receive counting notifications.

In addition, even if the game progress is stopped when the gaming machine is outputting a set door open signal or a door open signal, communication with the lending unit continues. Specifically, the lending unit transmits gaming machine information notifications every 300 ms, and when the gaming machine's counting switch is operated, a counting notification is sent to the lending unit with a counted medal number other than 0 (for example, 50).

In addition, when the gaming machine is outputting a set door open signal or a door open signal, even if the rental switch on the rental unit is operated, a rental notification is sent to the gaming machine with the number of rental medals set to 0. Also, since communication between the gaming machine and the rental unit is normal, the rental unit can normally send the rental serial number to the gaming machine.

In addition, if the output of the set door open signal ends 3 seconds after the set door is closed (after closure is detected), the complete function is activated and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing, and then when the set door is opened (opening is detected) at the second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the set door open signal and the complete signal are output, and if the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is when the set door is open or after the set door is closed and before 3 seconds have passed since the set door was closed, the output of the set door open signal is maintained, but the output of the complete signal ends. In addition, if the complete function is activated and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing, and then when the set door is opened at the second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the set door open signal and the complete signal are output, and if the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is after the set door is closed and after 3 seconds have passed since the set door was closed, the output of the set door open signal ends and the output of the complete signal also ends. This configuration makes it less likely that the output of the complete signal and the output of the set door open signal will overlap (the output time of the complete signal alone will be 27 seconds or more), making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load of the rental unit is high.

In addition, in the case where the output of the set door open signal ends three seconds after the set door is closed, and the count of the output of the complete signal (timer update) essentially stops when the complete function is activated (the complete signal is always output while the complete function is activated, and the complete signal is output for 30 seconds after the complete function is no longer activated), the complete function activates and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing, then the output of the complete signal is maintained at the second timing when the complete function is activated even if 30 seconds have elapsed since the first timing, then the set door open signal and the complete signal are output at the third timing after the set door is opened, then the set door open signal and the complete signal are output at the fourth timing before three seconds have elapsed after the set door is closed, and if it is the fifth timing after the fourth timing and three seconds have elapsed after the set door is closed, then the output of the set door open signal has ended and the complete signal is output. Then, at the sixth timing, which is after the fifth timing and 30 seconds have elapsed since the initialization process associated with the setting change mode was executed, the output of the set door open signal has ended, and the output of the complete signal has also ended. With this configuration, the complete signal can be made to end output after the set door open signal, so that the output period of the complete signal alone can be guaranteed, and the complete signal can be easily received even when the processing load of the rental unit is high.

In addition, if the door open signal ends 3 seconds after the front door P2 is closed (after closure detection), the complete function is activated and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing, and then when the front door P2 is opened (opening detection) at the second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the door open signal and the complete signal are output, and if the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is when the front door P2 is open or after the front door P2 is closed and before 3 seconds have passed since the front door P2 is closed, the output of the door open signal is maintained, but the output of the complete signal ends. In addition, if the complete function is activated and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing, and then when the front door P2 is opened at the second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the door open signal and the complete signal are output, and if the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is after the front door P2 is closed and after 3 seconds have passed since the front door P2 is closed, the output of the door open signal ends and the output of the complete signal also ends. This configuration makes it less likely that the output of the complete signal and the output of the door open signal will overlap (the output time of the complete signal alone will be 27 seconds or more), making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load of the rental unit is high.

In addition, in the case where the door open signal ends being output three seconds after the front door P2 is closed, and the count of the complete signal output (timer update) essentially stops when the complete function is activated (the complete signal is always output while the complete function is activated, and the complete signal is output for 30 seconds after the complete function is no longer activated), the complete function activates and starts outputting the complete signal at the first timing, then the output of the complete signal is maintained at the second timing when the complete function is activated even if 30 seconds have elapsed since the first timing, and then the door open signal and complete signal are output at the third timing after the front door P2 is opened, and then the door open signal and complete signal are output at the fourth timing before three seconds have elapsed after the front door P2 is closed, and if it is the fifth timing after the fourth timing and three seconds have elapsed after the front door P2 is closed, the output of the door open signal ends and the complete signal is output. Then, at the sixth timing, which is after the fifth timing and 30 seconds have elapsed since the initialization process associated with the setting change mode was executed, the output of the door open signal has ended, and the output of the complete signal has also ended. With this configuration, the complete signal can be made to end output after the door open signal, so that the output period of the complete signal alone can be guaranteed, and the complete signal can be easily received even when the processing load of the rental unit is high.

Here, we will explain the time chart for the complete signal with reference to Figure 57.

Figure 57 "Operation of the complete signal while the complete function is in operation" shows a time chart of an embodiment in which the complete signal turns OFF 30 seconds after gameplay stops due to the operation of the complete function, even while the above-mentioned complete function is in operation.

In FIG. 57, "Coordinated operation of the complete function, door switch, and setting change device" shows a time chart of an embodiment in which the front door P2 is opened after the complete function is activated and the power to the gaming machine is turned off, the complete function is deactivated by the initialization process accompanying the activation of the setting change device after the gaming machine is turned on, and then the front door P2 is closed after the setting change device is deactivated. "A" in the figure is the output time of the complete signal, which is the time from the start of the output of the complete signal to the power off of the gaming machine. "A'" in the figure is the output time of the complete signal, which is the time from the power on of the gaming machine to the end of the output of the complete signal. The output time of the complete signal is 30 seconds from the stop of play due to the activation of the complete function, so A+A'=30 seconds. Also, "B" in the figure is the output time of the door open signal, which is ON for 3 seconds after the door switch detects the closure, so B=3 seconds. Also, "C" in the figure is the output time of the setting change signal, which is ON for 3 seconds after the setting change device is deactivated, so C=3 seconds. However, this is not the case in other embodiments. For example, if the complete signal is reset when the power is turned on or the setting change device is activated, A' = 30 seconds. Also, for example, if the output of the complete signal is stopped by the initialization process associated with the activation of the setting change device, "A'" = 0 seconds. Also, for example, if the door open signal is set to 3 seconds after the door switch is detected as open, the door open signal will turn OFF 3 seconds after it turns ON. Also, for example, if the setting change signal is set to 3 seconds after the setting change device is activated, the setting change signal may turn OFF 3 seconds after the setting change device is activated.

Next, Bit 2 is unused and becomes 0.

Next, Bit3 is assigned to detect clearing of the number of game media. Clearing the number of game media refers to clearing the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 when the total score clear switch provided on the game media number control board P16 is operated. For example, when the bet score is "3" and the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 is "1000", the bet score becomes "3" and the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 becomes "0" when the total score clear switch is operated. In other words, the bet score is not cleared when the total score clear switch is operated. When the operation of the total score clear switch is detected, Bit3 becomes "1", and when the operation of the total score clear switch is not detected, Bit3 becomes "0". In the case of a gaming machine P that does not have a total score clear switch, Bit3 becomes "0". If the total score is initialized, set Bit 3 to "1" until 3 seconds have elapsed since the total score was initialized and play became possible, then set Bit 3 to "0".

The detection of the number of game media cleared is related to the total score clear status, and if the total score clear status is ON, Bit 3 corresponding to the detection of the number of game media cleared is set to "1", and if the total score clear status is OFF, Bit 3 corresponding to the detection of the number of game media cleared is set to "0". However, this is not limited to this, and Bit 3 corresponding to the detection of the number of game media cleared may be set to "0" three seconds after playing becomes possible after the total score is cleared, without being related to the total score clear status.

In addition, when the bet score is "3" and the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 is "1000", the total score bet can be set to "0" and the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 can be set to "0" by operating the total score clear switch. In other words, both the bet score and the total score are cleared by operating the total score clear switch. In this case, the administrator will not forget to clear the bet, making the clearing operation easier for the administrator.

Next, bits 4 to 7 are unused and are set to 0.

I) Gaming machine fraud 3 (main control or control of the number of gaming media)
Gaming machine fraud 3 indicates detection of fraud relating to the main control board P15 or the gaming media number control board P16 provided as a spare, and information relating to the status of the main control board P15 or the gaming media number control board P16.
In the gaming machine P of the present embodiment, these bits are unused. In other words, Bit 0 to Bit 7 are set to 0.

Note that bits 2, 4, and 5 of gaming machine fraud 2, and bits 0 and 1 of gaming machine fraud 3 are unused and are basically set to "0." However, if any of these bits becomes "1" and is sent to the lending unit and received by the SC board in the lending unit, the lending operation is prohibited (e.g., the lending switch is disabled even if it is operated).

This is to prevent unused portions from being used carelessly, because if an illegal program or illegal data is inserted into unused storage space, the lending operation will be prohibited if the unused portions are used.

It is also assumed that a common lending unit is used by a managed gaming machine (also called an enclosed gaming machine) that uses gaming balls and the medalless gaming machine in this embodiment, and Bit 2 of gaming machine illegality 2 in the managed gaming machine is used to detect illegal radio waves, Bit 4 of gaming machine illegality 2 is used to detect winning ball count abnormality 1, Bit 5 of gaming machine illegality 2 is used to detect winning ball count abnormality 2, Bit 0 of gaming machine illegality 3 is used to detect small balls, and Bit 1 of gaming machine illegality 3 is used to detect iron balls. When these illegalities are detected, each bit becomes "1", and the SC board operates to prohibit lending operations. This configuration reduces the burden on the hall regarding the introduction of managed gaming machines and medalless gaming machines. In addition, once the lending unit is prohibited from lending, it is set to a lending permitted state by receiving an error release signal, such as by operating a reset switch mounted on the gaming machine P.

The main control board P15 and/or the game media count control board P16 may be provided with a fraud detection means for detecting fraud. Below, we will provide an example of the behavior of the gaming machine P when, for example, a radio wave abnormality is detected by the fraud detection means.

As a first behavior, when the gaming machine P (main control board P15 or gaming media number control board P16) detects a radio wave abnormality, the game in the main control means is stopped (set to an error state). At this time, communication between the gaming media number control board P16 and the lending unit (outputting and receiving various telegrams) may continue, or communication between the gaming media number control board P16 and the lending unit may be stopped. Also, communication between the main control board P15 and the gaming media number control board P16 may continue, or communication between the main control board P15 and the gaming media number control board P16 may be stopped. Furthermore, communication between the main control board P15 and the performance control board may continue, or communication between the main control board P15 and the performance control board may be stopped. Note that an error notification may be performed using a lamp, image display, or amplifier (sound) under control of the performance control board.

As a second behavior, when the gaming machine P (main control board P15 or gaming media number control board P16) detects a radio wave abnormality, the main control means can play the game. At this time, communication between the gaming media number control board P16 and the lending unit (outputting and receiving various telegrams) may continue, or communication between the gaming media number control board P16 and the lending unit may be stopped. Also, communication between the main control board P15 and the gaming media number control board P16 may continue, or communication between the main control board P15 and the gaming media number control board P16 may be stopped. Furthermore, communication between the main control board P15 and the performance control board may continue, or communication between the main control board P15 and the performance control board may be stopped. Note that, although the game can be played under the control of the main control board P15, an error notification may be executed using a lamp, image display, or amplifier (sound) under the control of the performance control board.

Note that, although radio wave anomalies have been used as an example, the above-mentioned behavior is not limited to radio wave anomalies and can also be applied to other anomalies that can be detected by fraud detection means for detecting fraud, such as random number anomalies, setting value anomalies that are determined to be abnormal when the setting value data stored in the RWM of the main control board P15 is not within the normal range (0 to 5), and RWM anomalies that are determined to be abnormal when the data stored in the RWM of the main control board P15 is not normal when the power is restored.

Furthermore, in a case where the fraud detection means for detecting fraud is capable of detecting multiple anomalies, the means may be configured to behave differently depending on the type of anomaly, such as performing the first behavior described above for a first anomaly (e.g., a random number anomaly) and performing the second behavior described above for a second anomaly (e.g., a radio wave anomaly).

Next, we will explain the game information included in the hall control and fraud monitoring information described below, including J) game information number, K) type information 1, L) count information 1, S) type information 2, and C) count information 2.

Information consisting of type information 1 and count information 1 may be referred to as game information 1, and information consisting of type information 2 and count information 2 may be referred to as game information 2. This game information 1 or game information 2 is composed of a total of 2 bytes: type information (upper byte) and count information (lower byte).

The type information consists of a data type (upper 4 bits) and a data number (lower 4 bits). When the data type is "0001B", the information indicates the specified number (number of bets). When the data type is "0010B", the information indicates the number of points awarded. Note that data types "0" and "3" to "15" are unused. The data number is fixed at "0001B" when the data type is "0001B", indicating the specified number, and when the data type is "0010B", indicating the number of points awarded. In other words, data numbers "0" and "2" to "15" are unused.

The count information has different settings for each data type. When the data type is "0001B", which indicates a set number, the count information can take values from "00000001B" to "00000011B". In other words, bits 4 to 7 are unused, and bits 0 to 3 are used. When the data type is "0010B", which indicates the number of points awarded, the count information can take values from "00000001B" to "00001111B" (up to the maximum number of points awarded for each gaming machine). In other words, bits 4 to 7 are unused, and bits 0 to 3 are used.

When the number of pieces of game information is 0, the type information and count information are not transmitted. This game information is treated as a signal for the hall computer. In other words, the game information output from the gaming machine P is output to the hall computer via the rental unit.

J) Number of Game Information This is information indicating the number of pieces of game information consisting of type information and count information. For example, when the number of game information is 0, type information 1, count information 1, type information 2, and count information 2 are not output. For example, when the number of game information is 1, type information 1 and count information 1 are output. For example, when the number of game information is 2, type information 1 and count information 1 are output and type information 2 and count information 2 are output.

K) Type information 1, and S) Type information 2
The type information is information constituting the game information described above. When indicating the number of bets (inserted points) used in a game, the type information becomes "00010001B" as type information 1. When indicating the number of awarded points (awarded points) awarded as a result of a game, the type information becomes "00100001B" as type information 1 or type information 2.

C) Count information 1, and C) Count information 2
The count information is information constituting the game information described above. When the number of bets (input points) used in a game is output as count information 1, a value corresponding to the number of bets (input points) used in the game is set. When the number of awards (award points) awarded as a result of a game is output as count information 1 or count information 2, a value corresponding to the number of awards (award points) awarded in the game is set. Note that, when a replay role is won as the game result of the game and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, a value corresponding to the number of bets (input points) used in the game is set as the number of awards (award points) awarded as a result of the game.

For example, if three coins are bet and the start switch is operated, the game information count "00000001B" is output based on the reception of the start switch command, and the game information output is "0001000100000011B (1103h)," with the upper byte being type information indicating the number of bets (input points) used in the game, and the lower byte being count information, which is a value corresponding to the number of bets (input points) used in the game.

For example, if the internal lottery that determines the winning combination results in a lottery result that can award 10 points, and all the reels stop to display a symbol combination that awards 10 points, then at the end of the game (when the command to stop all reels is received), the game information number "00000001B" is output, with the upper byte being type information indicating the number of points awarded as a result of the game (awarded points), and the lower byte being count information that is a value corresponding to the number of points awarded in the game (awarded points), and "0010000100001010B (210Ah)" is output as the game information.

For example, if a start switch acceptance command is received when 3 points are used as the insertion points immediately after receiving a command to stop all reels when 10 points are awarded, the game information number is "00000010B", and game information 1 is "0001000100000011B (1103h)" in which the upper byte is type information indicating the number of bets (inserted points) used in the game and the lower byte is count information which is a value corresponding to the number of bets (inserted points) used in the game. Game information 2 is "0010000100001010B (210Ah)" in which the upper byte is type information indicating the number of awards (awarded points) awarded as a result of the game and the lower byte is count information which is a value corresponding to the number of awards (awarded points) awarded in the game.

The input points use the information stored in (_WK_MDL_IN) described above, and the grant points use the information stored in (_WK_MDL_OUT) described above. The memory area for the input points for outputting the input points for the gaming machine information of the hole control and fraud monitoring information is stored in a different memory area from the memory area for the input points for outputting the input points for the gaming information. Similarly, the memory area for the grant points for outputting the grant points for the gaming machine information of the hole control and fraud monitoring information is stored in a different memory area from the memory area for the grant points for outputting the grant points for the gaming information. The memory area (_WK_MDL_IN) that can store the input points for the gaming information and the memory area (_WK_MDL_OUT) that can store the grant points are initialized after transmission.

<Counting notification>
The above-mentioned counting notification (see Figure 20) is composed of a 7-byte message length, and is a signal transmitted from the gaming machine P to the rental unit based on the gaming machine P accepting the operation of the counting switch P7.

The information that makes up the counting notification consists of message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), counting serial number (1 byte), counting point (1 byte), counting cumulative point (2 bytes), and checksum (1 byte).

The message length indicates the length of the count notification message, and is 7 bytes, so it is set to "0x07".

The command is "0x02", which indicates a count notification.

The counting serial number is a serial number dedicated to counting, and is a dedicated serial number different from the serial numbers mentioned above and the loan serial number described below. The counting serial number ranges from "0x00" to "0xFF", and is incremented by gaming machine P every time it transmits a counting notification. Among the counting serial numbers, "0x00" is a counting serial number that is only transmitted when the power is turned on, and the next value after "0xFF" is "0x01".

The counting points are the points related to the counting sent in one gaming machine information notification out of the gaming machine information notifications sent by the gaming machine P every 300 ms. The counting points range from "0x00" to "0x32", so a maximum of 50 points is sent to the rental unit in one gaming machine information notification. Also, if the total score stored in the gaming media number control board P16 is 50 points or more, data "0x32" indicating 50 points is sent, but if the total score stored in the gaming media number control board P16 is less than 50 points, data corresponding to the current total score stored in the gaming media number control board P16 is sent (for example, if the total score stored in the gaming media number control board P16 is 30 points, data "0x1E" indicating 30 points is sent).

The above-mentioned example of counting points is an example of counting 50 points when the counting switch P7 is operated only once (hereinafter, may be referred to as a short press operation), but it is also possible to count 1 point as the counting point when the counting switch P7 is operated only once, and to count 50 points as the counting point when the counting switch P7 is operated for a long time.

In this case, a short press of the counting switch P7 is accepted when the period during which the game media count control board P16 has level data indicating ON regarding the acceptance of the operation of the counting switch P7 (the period during which the operation acceptance of the counting switch P7 has a value indicating ON in the interrupt process) is less than a predetermined period (e.g., less than 500 ms). In other words, when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted during a first period that is less than the predetermined period, a short press of the counting switch P7 is accepted and one point is counted.

In addition, a long press of the counting switch P7 can be accepted when the game media count control board P16 has a period during which the level data regarding the operation acceptance of the counting switch P7 is a value indicating ON (the period during which the operation acceptance of the counting switch P7 is a value indicating ON in the interrupt processing) that is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 500 ms or more). In other words, when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted over a second period that is longer than a predetermined period, the long press of the counting switch P7 is accepted and 50 points are counted. Note that if the counting switch P7 is still being pressed and held at the timing of sending the counting notification after sending the counting point "50" to the lending unit as a counting notification, the counting point "50" is sent to the lending unit as a counting notification. In other words, once it is determined that the count switch P7 has been pressed and held, the count point "50" will continue to be sent to the rental unit as a count notification until the count switch P7 is no longer operated (until the level data related to the operation reception of the count switch P7 becomes a value indicating OFF) (however, if the total score is a value less than 50, that value will be counted). In this case, no counting will be performed until it is determined that the count switch P7 has been pressed and held (for example, for 500 ms).

After accepting the operation of the counting switch P7, the game media count control board P16 increments the value of the counting switch timer for each interrupt process (every 1 ms) to measure the pressing time of the counting switch P7 (initial value is "0"). Then, when the value of the counting switch timer reaches 500 (when the counting switch P7 is pressed for 50 ms), the increment process is not executed in the next interrupt process. In other words, even if the actual time that the counting switch P7 is pressed exceeds 500 ms, such as 1000 ms, the value of the counting switch timer remains at 500.

This is to prevent the count point from becoming "1" if the count switch timer value continues to be incremented, the count switch timer value exceeds the upper memory limit, the count switch timer value starts counting from 0 again, and the count switch timer value is between 0 and 499 for the second week and count switch P7 is released.

For this reason, when the counting switch timer value is incremented, it is determined whether the counting switch timer value is 500 or not, and if the counting switch timer value is not 500, the increment process is executed, and if the counting switch timer value is 500, the next process is executed without executing the increment process.

When the counting switch P7 is released while the counting switch timer value is being counted, the counting switch timer value is initialized to 0, so that when the counting switch P7 is pressed again, the counting switch timer value can be counted from 0.

In addition, although the count of the counting switch timer has been described as being incremented, it may also be decremented. In this case, the counting switch timer value is set to 501 when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted, and the counting switch timer value is set to 1 without executing the decrement process, thereby making it possible to obtain the same effect as the increment mode.

The cumulative count point is the accumulated value of the count points since the gaming machine P was powered on. The cumulative count point ranges from "0x0000" to "0xFFFF", and the count point is added each time counting is performed. If the cumulative count point exceeds "0xFFFF", the next value after "0xFFFF" becomes "0x0000". In addition, when the gaming machine P is powered on, the cumulative count point is cleared to 0.

The checksum is the sum of the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), counting serial number (1 byte), counting point (1 byte), and counting cumulative point (2 bytes). The checksum is used to determine whether the counting notification received by the lending unit is correct in relation to the counting notification sent from the gaming machine P.

<Lending notification>
The lending notification has a message length of 5 bytes, and is a signal that is sent from the lending unit to the gaming machine P based on the lending unit accepting the operation of the lending switch. When the lending unit receives a counting notification from the gaming machine P, it sends a lending notification to the gaming machine P. However, if the gaming machine information notification has not been received, if the gaming machine information type of the gaming machine information notification is notified as other than "0x02" (if information other than hall control/fraud monitoring information is notified), or if the counting point of the counting notification is notified as being in the range of 1 to 50 (a value other than 0), the lending point is notified to the gaming machine P as 0.

The information that makes up the loan notification consists of message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), loan serial number (1 byte), number of loaned gaming media (1 byte), and checksum (1 byte).

The message length indicates the length of the loan notification message, and is 5 bytes, so is set to "0x05".

The command is "0x13", which indicates a loan notification.

The loan serial number is a number used exclusively for loaning, and is a special number related to loaning that differs from the above-mentioned serial numbers and counting serial numbers. The loan serial number ranges from "0x00" to "0xFF", and is incremented each time a loan receipt result response, which will be described later, is sent from gaming machine P. Among the loan serial numbers, "0x00" is a loan serial number that is sent only when communication with gaming machine P begins, and the value following "0xFF" is "0x01".

The lending points are the lending points sent to the gaming machine P when the lending switch on the lending unit is operated. The lending points range from "0x00" to "0x32", so a maximum of 50 points is sent to the gaming machine P in one gaming machine information notification. Also, if the lendable points stored in the storage medium (membership card, visitor card, etc.) inserted in the lending unit are 50 points or more, the data "0x32" indicating 50 points is sent to the gaming machine P, but if the lendable points stored in the storage medium are less than 50 points, data corresponding to the current lendable points stored in the storage medium is sent (for example, if the lendable points stored in the storage medium are 20 points, the data "0x14" indicating 20 points is sent).

The checksum is the sum of the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), rental serial number (1 byte), and rental point (1 byte). The checksum is used by gaming machine P to determine whether the rental notification sent from the rental unit to gaming machine P is correct or not.

<Loan acceptance result response>
The loan receipt result response is composed of a message length of 5 bytes, and is a signal sent from the gaming machine P to the loan unit based on the gaming machine P receiving the loan notification. When the gaming machine P receives the loan notification from the loan unit, it sends a loan receipt result response to the loan unit. However, if the loan serial numbers notified from the loan unit are not consecutive, if the gaming machine P side is in a state where loaning is not possible due to a RAM error or the like of the main control board P15 or the game media number control board P16, if the sum of the total score and the loan points stored in the game media number control board P16 exceeds the upper limit of the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 (for example, the above-mentioned 16383), or if the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 is a value equal to or greater than a threshold value (15000 or more), a value indicating an abnormality is responded as the loan point receipt result. The information constituting the loan receipt result response is composed of message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), loan serial number (1 byte), loan point receipt result (1 byte), and checksum (1 byte).

The message length indicates the length of the loan notification message, and is 5 bytes, so is set to "0x05".

The command is "0x03", which indicates a loan acceptance response.

The lending serial number is the same as the lending serial number stored in the lending notification received from the lending unit. For example, if the lending serial number in the lending notification is 0x01, the lending serial number in the lending receipt result response sent to the lending unit is 0x01. However, if the lending point receipt result is not normal (abnormal), the lending serial number received from the lending unit when the lending point receipt result was normal is used as the lending serial number. In other words, the gaming machine P stores the lending notification sent from the lending unit (for example, all or part of the message length, command, lending serial number, number of lending game media, and checksum) and is equipped to respond with the lending point receipt result when the lending point receipt result is normal when the lending point receipt result is abnormal. In addition, the lending notification to be stored may be only the most recent one, and by not storing a new one when the lending point receipt result is abnormal, the latest lending notification when normal can be sent to the lending unit. In addition, the lending notification to be stored may be more than just the most recent one. The rental serial number is cleared to 0 when the gaming machine P is powered on.

If the loan point receipt result is normal, it will be "0x00", and if it is abnormal, it will be "0x01". Abnormal values are when the loan serial numbers notified by the loan unit are not consecutive, when the gaming machine P is in a state where loaning is not possible due to a RAM error on the gaming media count control board P16 or the like, when the sum of the total points stored on the gaming media count control board P16 and the loan points exceeds the upper limit of the total points stored on the gaming media count control board P16, or when the total points stored on the gaming media count control board P16 is equal to or greater than the threshold value (15,000 or more). The loan unit also determines that there is an abnormality when the value becomes anything other than "0x00" or "0x01" due to other factors.

The checksum is the sum of the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), loan serial number (1 byte), and loan point receipt result (1 byte). The checksum is used to determine whether the loan receipt result response received by the loan unit is correct in response to the loan receipt result response sent to the loan unit.

When sending a command from the game media count control board P16 to the lending unit, a lending control command set process (also called a message set process) is executed. In the lending control command set process, the message length set in the A register, the command set in the A register, the lending serial number set in the A register, the lending point receipt result set in the A register, the checksum set in the A register, etc. are set in the transmission data register.

In addition, when multiple commands are sent consecutively from the game media number control board P16 to the lending unit, a lending control command consecutive set process (also called a message consecutive set process) is executed. In the lending control command consecutive set process, after executing the lending control command consecutive set process, the address is updated and the lending control command consecutive set process is executed again. The number of times the lending control command consecutive set process is executed is based on the value set in the B register. In other words, before executing the lending control command consecutive set process, the number of commands is set in the B register and executed.

When sending a command with a value of 0 as information to be sent to the lending unit, the lending control command zero set process is executed. In the lending control command zero set process, a command with a value of 0 is set in the A register and the lending control command set process is executed a predetermined number of times.

The lending control command zero set process is used to align the game media count control chip ID to 9 bytes when sending it to the lending unit. For example, if the game media count control chip ID number of the game media count control board P16 is 21876543, the lending control command set process within the lending control command zero set process is executed four times to set the upper four bytes to 0, sending 00h four times, then the lending control command set process within the lending control command continuous set process is executed four times to send 21h, 87h, 65h, and 43h, and finally the identification code 41h is sent in the lending control command set process.

In addition, since the main control chip ID number is transmitted in advance as 9-byte data from the main control board P15 and stored in the game media count control board P16, the lending control command zero set process is not used. In other words, the game media count control board P16 transmits the main control chip ID number of the 9-byte data transmitted from the main control board P15 to the lending unit as is.

In addition, to send 0 data for reserve, reservation 1, and reservation 2 in the gaming machine performance information, a command that sets the value to 0 is sent to the rental unit using the rental control command zero set process.

The basic communication sequence between the gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained with reference to Figure 20.

<Basic communication sequence>
The gaming machine P transmits gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control and fraud monitoring information as the gaming machine information notification described above to the rental unit.

The gaming machine installation information is sent to the rental unit every 60 seconds (60,000 ms) from the time the startup of the gaming machine P is completed. The gaming machine performance information is sent to the rental unit every 180 seconds (180,000 ms) from the time the startup of the gaming machine P is completed. The hall control and fraud monitoring information is sent to the rental unit every 300 ms from the time the startup of the gaming machine P is completed.

The gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information may be sent to the rental unit at the same time. For example, after 60 s has elapsed since the start-up of gaming machine P is complete, the gaming machine installation information and hall control/fraud monitoring information may be sent at the same time. In this case, the gaming machine installation information is sent first, and then the hall control/fraud monitoring information is sent after 300 ms has elapsed.

For example, after 180 s has elapsed since the start-up of gaming machine P is complete, the gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information may be transmitted at the same time. In this case, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted first, and then after 300 ms the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, and after 300 ms the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted.

In this way, in terms of the priority of information transmission, gaming machine installation information has the highest priority, followed by gaming machine performance information, and finally hall control and fraud monitoring information. For this reason, the timing of transmission of hall control and fraud monitoring information will be delayed by up to 600 ms.

However, if any of the main control status 1 and main control status 2 information among the hall control and fraud monitoring information shown in FIG. 19 is updated (if it is determined that the main control status has been updated (if "Main control status change?" in FIG. 30 is judged as YES)), or if there is game information (if "Insert information ≠ 0 or payout information ≠ 0?" in FIG. 30 is judged as YES), the transmission priority of the hall control and fraud monitoring information will be the highest.

Specifically, it is determined that the main control state has been updated when any of the following bits, Bit 0 indicating RB in main control state 1, Bit 1 indicating BB, Bit 2 indicating AT, Bit 3 indicating gaming machine state signal 1, Bit 4 indicating gaming machine state signal 2, Bit 5 indicating gaming machine state signal 3, and Bit 6 indicating gaming machine state signal 4, is updated from "0" to "1" (corresponding to a transition of the gaming state to the gaming state corresponding to each bit). In this way, when it is determined that the main control state has been updated, it becomes possible to transmit the hall control and fraud monitoring information to the rental unit with the first priority.

In addition, when any of the following bits in main control state 1, Bit 0 indicating RB, Bit 1 indicating BB, Bit 2 indicating AT, Bit 3 indicating gaming machine state signal 1, Bit 4 indicating gaming machine state signal 2, Bit 5 indicating gaming machine state signal 3, and Bit 6 indicating gaming machine state signal 4, is updated from "1" to "0" (corresponding to the end of the gaming state corresponding to each bit), it is determined that the main control state has been updated. In this way, when it is determined that the main control state has been updated, it is possible to transmit the hall control and fraud monitoring information to the rental unit with the first priority.

Although Bit 7 in main control status 1 is unused, if Bit 7 is updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", it is determined that the main control status has not been updated. By configuring it in this way, even if the unused Bit 7 is updated due to noise or the like, the transmission priority of the hole control and fraud monitoring information does not change, so normal communication with the rental unit can be achieved.

However, this is not the only possible embodiment, and if the unused bit 7 is updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", it may be determined that the main control state has been updated. In this case, there is no need to check for updates for each bit (check whether the RAM value of main control state 1 has changed), and it is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the update confirmation process and speed up the program. It is also possible to determine whether the RAM value is greater than "40h (01000000B)" or "7Fh (01111111B)" and branch so that the transmission priority is not changed if it is greater. With this configuration, normal communication with the rental unit can be achieved by not changing the transmission priority even if the unused bit changes from "0" to "1" while checking the RAM value.

Next, when any of Bit 0 indicating game machine state signal 5 in main control state 2, Bit 1 indicating game machine state signal 6, and Bit 2 indicating game machine state signal 7 is updated from "0" to "1" (corresponding to a transition of the game state to the game state corresponding to each bit), it is determined that the main control state has been updated.

In addition, when any of Bit 0 indicating game machine state signal 5 in main control state 2, Bit 1 indicating game machine state signal 6, and Bit 2 indicating game machine state signal 7 is updated from "1" to "0" (corresponding to the end of the game state corresponding to each Bit), it is determined that the main control state has been updated.

Bits 3 to 7 in main control status 2 are unused, but if any of bits 3 to 7 are updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", it is determined that the main control status has not been updated. By configuring it in this way, even if the unused bits 3 to 7 are updated due to noise, etc., the transmission priority of the hole control and fraud monitoring information does not change, so normal communication with the rental unit can be achieved.

However, this is not the only possible mode, and if the unused bits 3 to 7 are updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", it may be determined that the main control state has been updated. In this case, there is no need to check for updates for each bit (check whether the RAM value of main control state 2 has changed), and it is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the update confirmation process and speed up the program. It is also possible to determine whether the RAM value is greater than "04h (00000100B)" or "07h (00000111B)" and branch so that the transmission priority is not changed if it is greater. With this configuration, normal communication with the rental unit can be achieved by not changing the transmission priority even if the unused bits change from "0" to "1" while checking the RAM value.

Then, the state in which it is determined that there is game information is determined based on whether the information stored in the input point memory area (_WK_MDL_IN) and the awarded point memory area (_WK_MDL_OUT), which are stored to output game information among the information constituting the hole control and fraud monitoring information, is "0".

The input point information stored in the input point memory area is stored when the start switch acceptance command sent from the main control board P15 is received. The award point information stored in the award point memory area is stored when the all reels stop command sent from the main control board P15 is received. This command reception process is executed as an interrupt process, and within the interrupt process, the command reception process is executed first, followed by the gaming machine information management process (gaming media number control).

The gaming machine information management process (gaming media number control) executes a process to send hall control and fraud monitoring information to the lending unit, and when sending the hall control and fraud monitoring information, it determines whether the input point information stored in the input point memory area and the awarded point information stored in the awarded point memory area are both "0" or not, and if the input points or awarded points are not 0, it becomes possible to immediately send the hall control and fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with first priority. In other words, it becomes possible to send the hall control and fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with first priority within the interrupt process that stores the input points or awarded points.

If it is determined that the input point information stored in the input point memory area and the awarded point information stored in the awarded point memory area are both "0" and that there has been no update to the main control state, the information to be output is selected based on the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag. In other words, the priority of gaming machine installation information is the first priority, the priority of gaming machine performance information is the second priority, and the priority of hall control and fraud monitoring information is the third priority.

In addition, the manner in which it is determined that there is game information may be a manner in which it is determined whether the number of game information is "0". When the input point information stored in the input point memory area is not "0", or when the awarded number information stored in the awarded number memory area is not "0", the game information number memory area (_WK_INF_GAM) can be "1" or "2". Then, before transmitting the hole control/fraud monitoring information in the gaming machine information management (gaming media number control) of the interrupt process, the game information number is generated from the information in the input point memory area and the awarded number memory area (the game information number is stored in the game information number memory area), and if the game information number is "1" or "2", it becomes possible to transmit the hole control/fraud monitoring information to the rental unit with the first priority.

In this way, by changing the priority of hall control and fraud monitoring information depending on the situation, when a gaming machine information notification is sent, if the gaming state is transitioning (the start or end of a gaming state) and the input points or payout points are not 0, the hall control and fraud monitoring information can be sent with priority even if gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information is being sent, making it possible for the hall computer managed by the gaming facility to accurately manage which gaming state the input points and payout points are in.

In addition, to associate the gaming machine status signal of the hall control/fraud monitoring information with the gaming information of the hall control/fraud monitoring information (inserted points or awarded points), a freeze is performed when the gaming state transitions (when the gaming state starts or ends).

For example, when a game is started with 3 coins as the Nth game number during the normal state (the start lever is operated), a BB is won, the BB symbol combination is stopped by the stop operation, and the BB state signal is turned ON, in order to ensure that the time from the start of the game to the BB state signal turning ON exceeds 300 ms, a freeze is executed for a predetermined period X after the BB symbol combination is stopped and before the BB state signal is turned ON.

Figure 35 shows an undesirable example in which the input number signal and the BB status signal are sent simultaneously in the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification. Figure 36 shows a favorable example in which the input number signal and the BB status signal are sent accurately in the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification.

The "number of inserts information" is information for transmitting an insert number signal for game information type information 1 or 2 in FIG. 19, and is information stored in a certain area of the RAM of the number of game media control board P16. A "0" in the number of inserts information means that 0 is stored in the number of inserts information, and a "n" in the number of inserts information means that any of 1 to 3 is stored in the number of inserts information. The number of inserts information is stored by the number of game media control board P16 as the specified number for that game when the main control board P15 sends a command indicating the number of inserts to the number of game media control board P16 upon reception of the start lever, and the number of game media control board P16 stores "0" in the number of inserts information after sending a hall control/fraud monitoring information notification including the insert number signal.

"BB status information" is information for transmitting a BB status signal of main control status 1 of the gaming machine information in FIG. 19, and is information stored in a certain area of the RAM of the main control board P15. A "0" in the BB status information means that a 0 is stored in the BB status information, and a "1" in the BB status information means that a 1 is stored in the BB status information. The BB status information is stored as "1" in the operation status set process within the operation status management process when the BB pattern combination stops after all reels have stopped, and as "0" in the operation status set process within the operation status management process when the BB gaming state ends after all reels have stopped. In other words, the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification including the BB status signal is transmitted from the start of BB to the end of BB. Furthermore, if "1" is stored in the BB state information, a main control state command is sent to the game media count control board P16 by the interrupt process of the main control board P15, and the game media count control board P16 acquires the received main control state command, and if the main control state is the BB state, stores the BB signal information in a specified area of the RAM of the game media count control board P16 that stores the main control state for sending a hall control fraud monitoring information notification.

"Freeze information" is information indicating that a freeze is being executed, and is stored in a certain area of the RAM of the main control board P15. Note that instead of information indicating that a freeze is being executed, it may be timer information related to the execution of a freeze, and whether or not a freeze is being executed may be determined by determining whether or not the timer information related to the execution of a freeze is 0.

Figure 35 shows a case where the operation of the start lever is accepted immediately after the transmission of the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification, and "n (n is a number)" is stored in the number of insertions information, and all stop switch operations and BB symbol combinations are stopped within 300 ms after the transmission of the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification, and "1" is stored in the BB status information. In this case, at the timing of transmitting the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification after the BB symbol combination is stopped, the number of insertions signal and the BB status signal may be ON and transmitted to the lending unit.

In Figure 35, the input number signal and the BB state signal are sent at the same time. The input number signal here is sent as incorrect information (input number information during the BB gaming state) because the correct information is the normal gaming state before the BB gaming state is entered.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, a freeze is executed for a predetermined period X ("X" in FIG. 36) when the BB symbol combination is displayed, and "1" is stored in the BB status information after the freeze ends. The value of X can be (300 ms) - (the shortest time Y from the acceptance of the start lever operation (start of the game) to the storage of 1 in the BB status information), and if Y = 200 ms is designed, the value of X will exceed 100 ms. In addition, since the time related to the game varies depending on the skill of the player, X = 300 ms may be used to ensure reliable transmission. Since the interval for the notification of the hole control and fraud monitoring information is 300 ms, if the freeze is executed for 300 ms or more, it is possible to transmit an accurate input number signal reliably under any circumstances.

The timing for executing the freeze can be any time between the BB symbol combination stopping and the storing of "1" in the BB status information. For example, the operation status setting process in the operation status management process can store "X" in RAM as the freeze timer value (count value), and after it is determined that X has become 0, store "1" in the RAM for the BB status information.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to align the number of coins inserted for each game with the main control status information, so accurate information can be sent to the rental unit.

For example, in the Nth game during the BB state, a game is started with 3 coins (the start lever is operated), a small win is won, the small win symbol combination is stopped by the stop operation, a predetermined number of coins are paid out, the BB state ends, and the BB state signal turns OFF. In order to ensure that the time from the start of the payout to the BB state signal turning OFF exceeds (300 ms) + (payout time), a freeze is executed for a predetermined period X after the BB state ends and before the BB state signal is turned OFF.

Figure 37 shows an undesirable example in which the payout number signal and the BB status signal are not sent simultaneously in the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification. Figure 38 shows a favorable example in which the payout number signal and the BB status signal are sent accurately in the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification.

The "payout number information" is information for sending a payout number signal for game information type information 1 or 2 in FIG. 19, and is information stored in a certain area of the RAM of the game media number control board P16. A "0" in the payout number information means that 0 is stored in the payout number information, and an "m" in the payout number information means that any of 1 to 15 is stored in the payout number information. When the main control board P15 sends a command indicating the payout number to the game media number control board P16 when all reels are stopped, the game media number control board P16 stores any of the payout number information "1" to "15" as the payout number for that game, and after sending a hall control/fraud monitoring information notification including the payout number signal, the game media number control board P16 stores "0" in the payout number information.

The other information is the same as that explained in Figures 35 and 36.

Figure 37 shows a case where all reels are stopped after the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification is sent, "m (m is a numerical value)" is stored in the payout number information, and the BB gaming state ends within 300 ms after the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification is sent, storing "0" in the BB status information. In this case, at the timing of sending the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification after the BB gaming state ends, the payout number signal may be ON and the BB status signal may be OFF, and these may be sent to the rental unit.

In Figure 37, the payout number signal and the BB state signal are not sent at the same time. The payout number signal here is sent as incorrect information (payout number information during normal gaming state) because the correct information is the BB gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, a freeze is executed for a predetermined period X ("X" in FIG. 38) at the end of the payout process, and "0" is stored in the BB status information after the freeze is finished. The value of X can be (300 ms) - (the shortest time Z from the end of the payout process until 0 is stored in the BB status information), and if Z = 250 ms, the value will exceed X = 50 ms. In addition, since the time related to the payout process differs depending on the setting of the maximum payout number for each gaming machine, X = 300 ms may be used to ensure reliable transmission. Since the interval for the hall control and fraud monitoring information notification is 300 ms, if the freeze is executed for 300 ms or more, it is possible to reliably transmit an accurate payout number signal under any circumstances.

The timing for executing the freeze can be any time between the end of the payout process and the storing of "0" in the BB status information. For example, the operation status set process within the operation status management process can store "X" in RAM as the freeze timer value (count value), and after it is determined that X has become 0, store "0" in the RAM for the BB status information.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to align the payout amount information for each game with the main control status information, so accurate information can be sent to the rental unit.

The relationship between the number of coins inserted and the BB state signal, and between the number of coins paid out and the BB state signal has been described above, but the BB state signal can be replaced with other state signals. For example, there is an RB state signal for determining whether or not the state is RB, an AT state signal for determining whether or not the state is AT, and a specific main game state signal for determining whether or not the state is a specific main game state.

In the above embodiment, the freeze is performed for a predetermined period X until the BB status information stores "1" or "0", but the predetermined period X may be set to a period that is assumed to be until the information reaches the hall computer. For example, if the reaction time of each device, such as the SC board, for the input number information or payout number information transmitted by the gaming machine P to reach the hall computer is 1000 ms, the output time of one pulse received by the hall computer is 100 ms, and the maximum number of pulses received by the hall computer is 15 (because the maximum payout number of a reel type gaming machine is 15), then 1000 ms + 100 ms x 15 = 2500 ms, and it is desirable to set the value of the predetermined period X to 2500 ms or more.

The gaming machine P transmits a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit at a cycle of 300 ms, and then transmits a counting notification 100 ms later. The rental unit then transmits a rental notification to the gaming machine P within 170 ms after receiving the counting notification. The gaming machine P then transmits a rental receipt result response within 10 ms after receiving the rental notification. After that, the gaming machine P transmits the next gaming machine information notification 300 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification, so there is a time period of 20 ms or more between transmitting the rental receipt result response and transmitting the next gaming machine information notification.

The startup sequence of the gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained with reference to Figure 21.

<Startup sequence>
A case where the gaming machine P is started up before the rental unit is started up will be described.

When the power supply to the gaming machine P and the rental unit is OFF, the VL signal and PSI signal of the gaming machine P and the rental unit are OFF. The VL signal is a power supply shared by the I/F signal and is supplied from the rental unit, so it will be OFF until the rental unit starts up. Also, the PSI signal is a connection signal between the gaming machine P and the rental unit, so it will be OFF until the rental unit starts up.

Next, in a situation where the gaming machine P has completed booting but the rental unit has not yet completed booting, it sends a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit when the gaming machine P has completed booting, and then sends a counting notification. However, because the rental unit has not yet started, it cannot receive the sent gaming machine information notification and counting notification. Furthermore, even if the gaming machine P sends a counting notification, the rental unit does not receive the counting notification, so no rental notification is sent from the rental unit, and the gaming machine P does not send a rental receipt result response.

The serial number of the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number of the counting notification that are sent first after the gaming machine P has finished booting up are "0x00". Also, since the serial number and counting serial number are updated regardless of whether the gaming machine P and the rental unit are connected or not, the serial number and counting serial number are sent as "0x01" at the next transmission timing (the timing of transmission 300 ms after the gaming machine information notification that was sent first after the gaming machine P has finished booting up).

In other words, regardless of whether gaming machine P is connected to the rental unit or not, it sends messages and updates the serial number.

Next, when the startup of the lending unit is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal turn ON, and the operation of the bet switch P5 and the counting switch P7 of the gaming machine P becomes valid. In addition, the lending unit becomes able to receive information transmitted from the gaming machine P.

As described above, the gaming machine P sends gaming machine information notifications and counting notifications regardless of whether the rental unit is running or not, so the rental unit is managed using the serial number of the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number of the counting notification sent from the gaming machine P after the rental unit has completed starting up. By configuring in this way, the gaming machine P can send information without determining the status of the rental unit, so the program capacity for determining the status of the rental unit can be reduced.

The startup sequence of the gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained with reference to Figure 22.

This section explains what happens when the rental unit starts up before the gaming machine P.

If the rental unit starts up before the gaming machine P, it will wait until the gaming machine P starts up. Here, the VL signal and PSI signal of the gaming machine P are OFF until the gaming machine P starts up, but when the rental unit has completed its startup, the VL signal and PSI signal of the rental unit will be ON. In this state, the rental unit will wait until the gaming machine P has completed its startup.

Next, when the startup of gaming machine P is complete, the VL signal and PSI signal of gaming machine P and the rental unit are turned ON, and gaming machine P sends a gaming machine information notification with serial number "0x00" and a counting notification with counting serial number "0x00". At this point, since the rental unit has already started up, it receives the gaming machine information notification with serial number "0x00" and the counting notification with counting serial number "0x00" and begins management. By configuring in this way, gaming machine P can send information without determining the status of the rental unit, so the program capacity for determining the status of the rental unit can be reduced.

<Alternative startup sequence>
Another aspect in which the gaming machine P is started before the lending unit is started will be described.

When the power supply to the gaming machine P and the rental unit is OFF, the VL signal and PSI signal of the gaming machine P and the rental unit are OFF. The VL signal is a power supply shared by the I/F signal and is supplied from the rental unit, so it will be OFF until the rental unit starts up. Also, the PSI signal is a connection signal between the gaming machine P and the rental unit, so it will be OFF until the rental unit starts up.

Next, when the startup of the gaming machine P is complete but the startup of the rental unit is not yet complete, the VL signal is OFF, so even if the startup of the gaming machine P is complete, the gaming machine information notification is not sent to the rental unit until 100 ms have elapsed since the VL signal turned ON (until the rental unit starts up). In other words, even if the startup of the gaming machine is complete, communication does not start if the VL signal is OFF. In this way, in this embodiment, the gaming machine information notification is sent 100 ms after the VL signal turns ON.

Then, 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON, the gaming machine P sends a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit. The serial number of the gaming machine information notification sent at this time is 0. Note that since the rental unit cannot receive a gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine P until 100 ms has elapsed after the VL signal is turned ON, if the rental unit receives a message from the gaming machine within 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON, it discards the message.

The gaming machine information notification sent by gaming machine P 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON can be in two forms: hall control/fraud monitoring information, and gaming machine installation information.

<<First Transmission of Hole Control/Fraud Monitoring Information>>
In the case where the gaming machine information notification sent by the gaming machine P 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON is hall control/fraud monitoring information, information regarding the number of gaming medals and information regarding fraud can be communicated after communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit has started, which has the effect of making the device more resistant to fraudulent activity.

<<Mode of transmitting gaming machine installation information first>>
In the case where the gaming machine information notification sent by the gaming machine P 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON is gaming machine installation information, the main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, gaming medal count control chip ID number, gaming medal count control chip manufacturer code, and gaming medal count control chip product code can be communicated after communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit begins. Therefore, even if the gaming machine is replaced, the gaming machine installation information is sent when the power is turned on, so that the gaming machine information center can first be notified via the rental unit of which manufacturer's product it is communicating with, thereby achieving the effect of allowing subsequent gaming machine information notifications to be managed appropriately.

In such a case, the notification priority order for gaming machine information notifications is as follows: priority 1 (highest priority) is hall control/fraud monitoring information with updated main control status or gaming information, priority 2 is gaming machine installation information, priority 3 is gaming machine performance information, and priority 4 is hall control/fraud monitoring information with no update of main control status and no gaming information.

In addition, as the notification conditions for gaming machine information notification, hall control/fraud monitoring information is notified 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON, 300 ms after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, and then every 300 ms. Gaming machine installation information is notified 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON, and then every 60 s. Gaming machine performance information is notified 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON, 180 s after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, and then every 180 s.

In other words, regardless of the notification priority order, gaming machine P will first notify gaming machine installation information 100 ms after the VL signal turns ON after power is turned on, and then notify hall control and fraud monitoring information 300 ms later. After that, it will notify hall control and fraud monitoring information at 300 ms intervals, notifying gaming machine information 60 s after the first transmission of gaming machine installation information, and then notifying hall control and fraud monitoring information 300 ms later.

In other words, in the case of the <<mode in which gaming machine installation information is transmitted for the first time>>, the notification conditions are the same as those of the <<mode in which hall control and fraud monitoring information is transmitted for the first time>>, except that the gaming machine installation information is notified 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON.

The same applies when the timing of transmission of hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine installation information coincides, or when the timing of transmission of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides, and the gaming machine information notification with the highest priority is notified according to the notification priority order described above.

The above-mentioned "mode of transmitting hall control and fraud monitoring information first" and "mode of transmitting gaming machine installation information first" can be selected appropriately depending on the gaming machine, and other specifications are the same regardless of which mode is selected.

Also, the process for the gaming machine to count 100 ms after the VL signal turns ON will be described. In the input port reading process in the interrupt process, the VL signal is checked, and if the VL signal is OFF, the value of the rental unit connection timer is initialized (0 is stored). Then, a special addition command is executed. When the special addition command is executed, it is determined whether the value of the rental unit connection timer after incrementing the value of the rental unit connection timer is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, "100") or not, and if it is determined that it is not the predetermined value, the input port reading process is terminated and a gaming machine information notification is not sent to the rental unit, and if it is determined that it is the predetermined value, a gaming machine information management process is executed and a gaming machine information notification is sent to the rental unit. Also, the VL signal is checked, and if the VL signal is ON (if the VL signal is not OFF), the special addition command is executed without executing the process of initializing the value of the rental unit connection timer (storing 0). In this case, the special addition command executes with the rental unit connection timer value at a predetermined value (because the initialization process for the rental unit connection timer value has not been executed), so the gaming machine information management process is executed and the gaming machine information notification is sent to the rental unit. Therefore, the gaming machine information notification is not sent until the rental unit connection timer value reaches 100 (until the interrupt process is executed 100 times), so it is possible to send the gaming machine information notification 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON.

In this way, by setting the memory area referenced when the special addition command is executed to the memory area in which the value of the lending unit connection timer is stored and holding the value of the lending unit connection timer, after waiting 100 ms from when the VL signal turns ON, the gaming machine information notification can be sent to the lending unit in the next interrupt processing without waiting 100 ms. In other words, the first time the VL signal turns ON, there is a wait of 100 ms to send the gaming machine information notification, but thereafter, as long as the VL signal remains ON, the gaming machine information notification can be sent without waiting 100 ms.

By using a special addition instruction that performs addition and comparison with a predetermined value in this way, it is possible to compress the program size, improve processing speed, and increase the readability of the program code.

The counting notification sequence between the gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained with reference to Figure 23.

<Counting notification sequence>
A case where the gaming machine P transmits a counting notification to the lending unit will be described. In this description, the situation before the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted is that the total points managed by the gaming media count control board P16 are "200" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit are "20".

When the start-up of the gaming machine P and the rental unit is complete and communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit is possible, the timing of sending a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit immediately after accepting the operation of the counting switch P7 provided on the gaming machine P is that the serial number "n (n is a numerical value)" and the total score "200" are sent as the gaming machine information notification, and the counting serial number "m (m is a numerical value)" and the total score are 200 as the counting notification, and since the total score stored in the gaming media number control board P16 is 50 points or more, the counting score "50" is sent as described above. Also, if the process related to the counting is the first process related to the counting since the start-up of the gaming machine P is complete, the counting cumulative score "50" is sent as the counting notification. Note that the gaming machine P subtracts the counting points from the total score stored in the total score memory area before executing the process of sending the counting notification.

Next, when the lending unit receives the counting notification, it updates the lendable points to "70" and sends the lending serial number "k (k is a number)" and lending points "0" as a lending notification to the gaming machine P (because the lending button has not been operated). In addition, when the gaming machine P receives a lending notification from the lending unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated in the lending notification and the information indicated in the previous lending notification.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k" and the rental point receipt result "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response (if the result of checking the consistency between the information indicated in the rental notification and the information indicated in the previous rental notification is normal).

Next, when the gaming machine P next sends a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit, if it has not yet accepted operation of the counting switch P7 (if the counting switch P7 has been released), it sends the serial number "n+1" and the total score "150" as a gaming machine information notification. It also sends the counting serial number "m+1", counting points "0", and cumulative counting points "50" as a counting notification. It also sends the rental serial number "k+1" and rental points "0" as a rental notification from the rental unit to the gaming machine P. It also sends the rental serial number "k+1" and rental point receipt result "normal" as a rental receipt result response from the gaming machine P to the rental unit.

In addition, if the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted at the timing of sending the second gaming machine information notification after accepting the operation of the counting switch P7 (if the counting switch P7 is pressed and held), the serial number "n+1" and the total score "150" are sent as the gaming machine information notification. In addition, the counting serial number "m+1", the counting points "50", and the cumulative counting points "100" are sent as the counting notification. In addition, the lending serial number "k+1" and the lending points "0" are sent to the gaming machine P as a lending notification from the lending unit. In addition, the gaming machine P sends the lending serial number "k+1" and the lending point receipt result "normal" as a lending receipt result response to the lending unit.

In this way, from the time when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted until the operation of the counting switch P7 is no longer accepted (while the counting switch P7 is being pressed and held), the gaming machine P continues to send a counting notification to the rental unit every 300 ms. By configuring it in this way, a fixed amount of counting points (50) can be sent to the rental unit every 300 ms without requiring complicated operations (just a long press), thereby reducing the burden of counting operations on the user.

Incidentally, since the counting switch P7 is connected to the game media number control board P16, the input port is checked for each interrupt process of the game media number control board P16, and if information indicating ON is input to the input port representing the counting switch P7, it is determined that the operation of the counting switch P7 has been accepted, and if information indicating OFF is subsequently input to the input port representing the counting switch P7, it is determined that the operation of the counting switch P7 has not been accepted.

The lending notification sequence between the gaming machine P and the lending unit is explained with reference to Figure 24.

<Lending notification sequence>
A case will be described where the lending unit sends a lending notification to the gaming machine P. In this explanation, the situation before the operation of the lending button is accepted is that the total score managed by the gaming media number control board P16 is "10" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit are "100." Since the total score stored in the gaming media number control board P16 is less than "50," it can also be said that when the counting switch P7 is operated, "10" is counted.

When the gaming machine P and the rental unit have finished starting up and are able to communicate with the rental unit, and the rental button on the rental unit is operated, the gaming machine P sends a serial number "n (n is a number)" and a total score of "10" as a gaming machine information notification, and sends a counting serial number "m (m is a number)" and counting points "0" as a counting notification. Then, when the counting points included in the counting notification are "0", at the time when a rental notification is sent to the gaming machine P, the rental serial number "k" and rental points "50" are sent as the rental notification.

Then, when the lending unit sends the lending notification, it updates the lendable points to "50". Note that the lending unit may update the lendable points when it receives the lending acceptance result response.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k" and the rental point receipt result "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response (if the result of checking the consistency between the information indicated in the rental notification and the information indicated in the previous rental notification is normal).

Next, gaming machine P updates the total score to "60" between receiving the loan notification and sending the loan acceptance result response.

Next, if operation of the rental button provided on the rental unit continues to be accepted, the next time gaming machine P sends a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit, it will send the serial number "n+1" and the total score "60" as the gaming machine information notification.

Next, gaming machine P sends a counting notification with a counting serial number "m+1", counting points "0", and accumulated counting points "0", and then the lending unit sends a lending serial number "k+1" and lending points "50" to gaming machine P as a lending notification to gaming machine P, updating the lendable points to "0". Furthermore, gaming machine P sends a lending serial number "k+1" and lending point receipt result "normal" as a lending receipt result response to the lending unit.

In the above example, the lending unit determines the operation level when the lending button is continuously operated and accepts the operation of the lending button, but it may also determine the rising edge of the lending button and accept the operation of the lending button. In this case, even if the lending button is continuously operated, the lending operation will only be accepted at the timing of the first operation, so even if the lending button is continuously operated, the lending points will be sent as "0" when sending the second or subsequent lending notifications.

In addition, if the counting point in the counting notification sent from the gaming machine P when the lending button is accepted is 1 or more, the lending point in the next lending notification sent to the gaming machine P is sent as "0". The lending button accepted at this time may be invalidated, or the lending unit may store an operation reception flag for the lending button and transmit the lending point as "50" in the lending notification sent after the counting point in the counting notification becomes "0". In addition, when the lending unit stores the operation reception flag for the lending button, if the lending button is operated again while the flag related to the operation reception of the lending button is stored, the flag may be rewritten to a flag that has been operated twice, or operations from the second time onwards may be invalidated.

In addition, the lending unit transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine P, and when the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, it stores all information in the lending notification in a lending notification information storage area provided in the gaming machine P. This allows the gaming machine P to determine whether the information on the lending point receipt result is "normal" or "abnormal" when it transmits a lending receipt result response.

Specifically, "k" is stored as the rental serial number information in the rental notification information storage area of gaming machine P, and when the rental serial number of the rental notification sent from the rental unit is "k+1", the stored "k" is incremented to generate "k+1" and then compared with the received rental serial number "k+1", and since the generated rental serial number and the received rental serial number match, the received rental serial number "k+1" is stored in the rental notification information storage area of gaming machine P.

In addition, "k" is stored as the rental serial number information in the rental notification information storage area of gaming machine P, and when the rental serial number of the rental notification sent from the rental unit is "k+2", the stored "k" is incremented to generate "k+1" and then compared with the received rental serial number "k+2". Since the generated rental serial number does not match the received rental serial number, the received rental serial number "k+2" is not stored (the rental serial number in the rental notification information storage area of gaming machine P becomes "k").

In addition, because the upper limit of the rental serial number is 255, if the rental serial number is incremented when it is 255, the rental serial number will become 0. However, because rental serial number 0 can only be sent to the gaming machine immediately after the rental unit is started, it is incremented again to become rental serial number 1. In other words, when the gaming machine updates the rental serial number when the rental serial number is 255, it increments it twice, making the next rental serial number 1.

In the above example, the comparison method involves incrementing the rental serial number stored in the gaming machine P and then judging whether it matches the rental serial number received from the rental unit, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to use a method in which the rental serial number received from the rental unit is decremented and then compared to see whether it matches the rental serial number stored in the gaming machine P, or a method in which the rental serial number stored in the gaming machine P is subtracted from the rental serial number received from the rental unit and the result is judged to be "1".

The loan notification information storage area of gaming machine P is composed of loan notification receiving buffer 1, loan notification receiving buffer 2, loan notification receiving buffer 3, loan notification receiving buffer 4, and loan notification receiving buffer 5.

Lending notification receiving buffer 1 stores the message length, lending notification receiving buffer 2 stores the command, lending notification receiving buffer 3 stores the lending serial number, lending notification receiving buffer 4 stores the lending point, and lending notification receiving buffer 5 stores the checksum.

For example, if the loan notification received by gaming machine P has a message length of "0x05", a command of "0x13", a loan serial number of "0x01", a loan point of "0x32", and a checksum of "0x4B", it stores it in the corresponding loan notification receiving buffer. Gaming machine P subtracts the loan point "0x32" stored in loan notification receiving buffer 4 from the checksum "0x4B" stored in loan notification receiving buffer 5 to calculate "0x19", subtracts the loan serial number "0x01" stored in loan notification receiving buffer 3 from "0x19" to calculate "0x18", subtracts the command "0x13" stored in loan notification receiving buffer 2 from "0x18" to calculate "0x05", and subtracts the message length "0x05" stored in loan notification receiving buffer 1 from "0x05" to calculate "0x00".

Next, it is determined whether the calculation result is "0x00", and if it is "0x00" as described above, it is determined that the checksum is normal. If the calculation result is not "0x00", it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, and all storage areas of loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 are cleared (for example, rewritten to "0x00"), and a loan receipt result response is sent with message length "0x05", command "0x03", loan serial number "0x00", loan point receipt result "0x01 (abnormal)", and checksum "0x09". Communication abnormalities during loan will be discussed later.

Next, if it is determined that the checksum is normal, it is determined whether the command information stored in the loan notification receiving buffer 2 is "0x13". If the command information stored in the loan notification receiving buffer 2 is "0x13", it is determined to be normal. If the command information stored in the loan notification receiving buffer 2 is not "0x13", it is determined to be abnormal, and all storage areas of the loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 are cleared (for example, rewritten to "0x00"), and a loan receipt result response is sent with a message length of "0x05", command "0x03", loan serial number "0x00", loan point receipt result of "0x01 (abnormal)", and checksum "0x09".

Next, if it is determined that the command is normal, it is determined whether the message length information stored in loan notification receiving buffer 1 is "0x05". If the message length information stored in loan notification receiving buffer 1 is "0x05", it is determined to be normal. If the message length information stored in loan notification receiving buffer 1 is not "0x05", it is determined to be abnormal, and all storage areas of loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 are cleared (for example, rewritten to "0x00"), and a loan receipt result response is sent with the message length "0x05", command "0x03", loan serial number "0x00", loan point receipt result "0x01 (abnormal)", and checksum "0x09".

The message length information stored in loan notification receiving buffer 1 and the command information stored in loan notification receiving buffer 2 are fixed values and will not change if they are normal. Also, by their very nature, checksums can sometimes match normal values even if they are abnormal values, so by comparing message length information and command information, which are fixed values in addition to the checksum, it is possible to bring the probability of determining that an abnormal value is a normal value as close to zero as possible.

To determine whether the information in the loan notification is normal or not, the checksum, command, and message length are checked in this order, but the order of the checks is not limited to this and may be any combination. In addition, if an abnormality is determined at any point during the process of checking the normality of the checksum, command, or message length, all storage areas of the loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 are cleared and no further judgment processing is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and even if an abnormality is determined during the process of checking the checksum, command, or message length, all storage areas of the loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 are not cleared, and the system may be configured to clear all storage areas of the loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 if any of the judgment results are determined to be abnormal after all judgments have been completed.

When detecting errors using only the checksum, the reliability is (1-(1/256)) x 100 = 99.609375000% because the checksum is 1 byte of data. However, if one fixed value (1 byte of data) is included, the reliability is (1-((1/256) x (1/256))) x 100 = 99.998474121%, and if two fixed values (1 byte of data) are included, the reliability is (1-((1/256) x (1/256) x (1/256))) x 100 = 99.999999977%. For this reason, if the 1 byte of data is a fixed value, the reliability will be nearly 100% if two fixed values are determined in addition to the checksum, making it easier to detect fraud or abnormalities.

The recovery sequence when the dedicated interface between the gaming machine P and the rental unit is disconnected is explained with reference to Figure 25.

<Recovery sequence when dedicated interface is disconnected>
The flow of various notification information when communication is restored after communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit is disabled due to a disconnection will be described. In this explanation, it is assumed that the total score managed by the gaming media count control board P16 is "100".

When the startup of the gaming machine P and the rental unit is complete and communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit is possible, at the timing of sending a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit, the gaming machine information notification sends the serial number "n (n is a numerical value)" and the total score "100", and the counting notification sends the counting serial number "m (m is a numerical value)" and the counting score "0". In addition, if the counting process is the first counting process since the startup of the gaming machine P is complete, the counting cumulative score "0" is sent as the counting notification. Note that the gaming machine P subtracts the counting points from the total score stored in the total score memory area before executing the process of sending the counting notification.

Next, when the lending unit receives the counting notification, it sends the lending serial number "k (k is a number)" and the lending points "0" as a lending notification to the gaming machine P. In addition, when the gaming machine P receives a lending notification from the lending unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated in the lending notification and the information indicated in the previous lending notification.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k" and the rental point receipt result "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response.

Next, if the gaming machine P transmits the serial number "n+1" and total score "100" as a gaming machine information notification and then immediately thereafter there is a disconnection (the VL signal on the gaming machine P side is OFF, the VL signal and PSI signal on the rental unit side are both OFF, and the power supply of the gaming machine P and the rental unit is ON), the gaming machine P transmits the counting serial number "m+1", counting points "0", and counting cumulative points "0" as a counting notification. Note that even if the operation of the counting switch P7 was accepted before the disconnection, the counting process is stopped when the VL signal on the gaming machine P side turns OFF, as the acceptance of the counting switch P7 is invalidated, and therefore the counting notification after the disconnection transmits the counting points as "0". Also, if the VL signal on the gaming machine P side turns OFF, the acceptance of bet operations is also invalidated.

After that, since the rental unit has not received the counting notification, it will not send a rental notification, and the gaming machine P will not send a rental receipt result response. Then, the next gaming machine information notification will be sent 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, but if communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit has not yet been restored, the gaming machine P will send the serial number "n+2" and total score "100" as the gaming machine information notification, and the counting serial number "m+2", counting points "0", and counting cumulative points "0" as the counting notification.

In other words, when communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit is disconnected, the gaming machine P side continues to send only the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification. At this time, the serial number and counting serial number are updated and sent.

Next, when communication between gaming machine P and the rental unit is restored immediately before gaming machine P next transmits a gaming machine information notification, it transmits the serial number "n+3" and total score "100" as a gaming machine information notification, and transmits the counting serial number "m+3", counting score "0", and counting cumulative score "0" as a counting notification.

Then, the rental unit that receives the counting notification transmits the rental serial number "0" and rental point "0" as a rental notification to the gaming machine P. As a result, when the connection is restored after a disconnection, the rental serial number "0" is transmitted, so the gaming machine P can determine whether or not this is the first rental notification since the connection was restored after a disconnection.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the loan notification, it sends the loan serial number "k" as a loan receipt result response and a loan point receipt result response of "abnormal" to the loan unit. Here, the loan serial number sent is the loan serial number "k" that was received successfully last time, and the loan point receipt result response is determined to be "abnormal" because the loan serial number "0" sent from the loan unit is different from the loan serial number "k" that was received successfully last time and is "k+1", which is an increment of the loan serial number. Furthermore, when the loan unit receives the loan serial number "k", it stores "k" in the loan serial number storage area of the loan unit. Note that other methods mentioned above may be used to determine an abnormality in the loan serial number.

Next, when 300 ms have passed since the previous gaming machine information notification, the serial number "n+4" and total score "100" are sent as a gaming machine information notification, and the counting serial number "m+4", counting score "0", and cumulative counting score "0" are sent as a counting notification.

Next, the rental unit that receives the counting notification sends the rental serial number "k+1" and rental points "0" as a rental notification to the gaming machine P. As a result, when the gaming machine P receives the rental notification, the rental point receipt result becomes "normal".

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k+1" and the rental point receipt result response "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response. At this point, recovery from the disconnection is complete, and subsequent communications proceed according to the normal sequence.

In the above example, when the rental unit transmits the rental serial number "0", the rental point in the rental notification is transmitted as "0" even if the rental button operation is accepted. In other words, even if the rental button operation is accepted between the time when the rental unit's VL signal and PSI signal are both turned ON and the time when the first rental notification is sent, the rental point for a rental serial number of "0" is configured to transmit "0", but this is not limited to this, and if the rental button operation is accepted when the rental serial number is "0", the rental point "50" may be transmitted even if the rental serial number is "0".

In addition, in the above example, if the dedicated interface is disconnected and then recovered from the disconnection immediately after the gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification and the rental unit does not receive the gaming machine information notification, the rental unit may transmit a rental notification due to receiving the counting notification transmitted from the gaming machine P, or the rental unit may not transmit a rental notification after the counting notification transmitted from the gaming machine P because it has not received the gaming machine information notification, and may transmit a rental notification after receiving the counting notification following the reception of the next gaming machine information notification.

The communication error during counting between gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained with reference to Figure 26.

<Communication error during counting>
A case where the game machine P transmits a counting notification to the lending unit and the lending unit does not receive the counting notification transmitted thereto will be described. In this description, the situation before the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted is that the total points managed by the game media count control board P16 is "200" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit are "20".

When the gaming machine P and the rental unit have finished booting up and are able to communicate with each other, immediately after the gaming machine P accepts the operation of the counting switch P7, the gaming machine P sends the serial number "n" and the total score "200" as the gaming machine information notification to the rental unit, and sends the counting serial number "m" and the counting points "50" as the counting notification. In addition, if the counting process is the first counting process since the gaming machine P has finished booting up, the gaming machine P sends the counting cumulative points "50" as the counting notification. Note that the gaming machine P subtracts the counting points from the total score stored in the total score memory area before executing the process of sending the counting notification.

Next, when the lending unit receives the counting notification, it updates the lendable points to "70" and sends the lending serial number "k" and lending points "0" as a lending notification to the gaming machine P (because the lending button has not been operated). In addition, when the gaming machine P receives a lending notification from the lending unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated in the lending notification and the information indicated in the previous lending notification.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k" and the rental point receipt result "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response (if the result of checking the consistency between the information indicated in the rental notification and the information indicated in the previous rental notification is normal).

Next, if the gaming machine P transmits the serial number "n+1" and the total score "150" as a gaming machine information notification, and then transmits the counting serial number "m+1", counting score "50", and counting cumulative score "100" as a counting notification, but the lending unit fails to receive the counting notification, the lending unit will not transmit a lending notification. If the lending unit does not receive the counting notification 300 ms after receiving the gaming machine information notification, it turns off the VL signal and the PSI signal. In this case, the lending unit determines that an error has occurred in communication with the gaming machine P, and performs the same operation as the recovery sequence described above. Note that when recovering from a disconnected state, it is considered that the hall staff operates the error release switch on the lending unit or operates the initialization switch on the lending unit.

In addition, even after the lending unit determines that an error has occurred in communication with the gaming machine P and the lending unit turns OFF the VL signal and PSI signal, the gaming machine P continues to send gaming machine information notifications and counting notifications. In this case, the serial number as the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number as the counting notification are updated and then sent to the lending unit (the lending unit cannot receive them). Note that if the counting switch P7 continues to be pressed even after the lending unit turns OFF the VL signal and PSI signal, the gaming machine P also invalidates the operation of the counting switch P7 due to the VL signal being OFF based on the lending unit turning OFF the VL signal and PSI signal, so the counting point as the counting notification is sent as 0.

<Operation of gaming machine P after VL signal turns ON>
The operation of the gaming machine P after the VL signal is turned ON will be described.

After the power supply to the gaming machine P and the rental unit is turned on and the VL signal is turned ON, the gaming machine P can be operated. In other words, after the VL signal is turned ON, if the number of bets that can be placed is stored in the total score storage means, operation of the bet switch P5 of the gaming machine P is valid (if "1" is stored in the total score storage means, operation of the 1 bet switch is valid, and if "3" is stored in the total score storage means, operation of the 1 bet switch or the MAX bet switch is valid). In addition, after the VL signal is turned ON, if the number of bets that can be placed is stored in the total score storage means, the lamp mounted on the bet switch P5 of the gaming machine P is lit (it is lit in a lighting mode indicating that betting is possible).

In addition, after the VL signal is turned ON, operation of the counting switch P7 of the gaming machine P is valid when a predetermined number of gaming medals is stored in the total score storage means (when a gaming medal number of "1" or more is stored in the total score storage means, operation of the counting switch P7 enables the number of gaming medals (counted medal number) to be sent to the rental unit after a gaming machine information notification is sent).

In addition, after the VL signal is turned ON, operation of the settlement switch P6 of the gaming machine P is valid when a predetermined number of bets is stored in the bet number storage means (when a bet number of "1" or more is stored in the bet number storage means, operation of the settlement switch P6 allows the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means to be subtracted, and the number of gaming medals equal to the number of bets to be added to the total score stored in the total score storage means).

In addition, after the VL signal is turned ON, operation of the stop switch of gaming machine P is valid while the reels are spinning (the reels can be stopped when the stop switch is operated).

In addition, after the VL signal is turned ON, operation of the lending switch of the lending unit is valid when the number of lending medals is stored in the lending unit (when the lending switch is operated when the number of lending medals stored in the lending unit is "1" or more, the number of lending medals can be added to the total score).

<Another mode of operation of the gaming machine P after the VL signal is turned ON>
Another mode of operation of the gaming machine P after the VL signal is turned ON will be described.

In the above-mentioned <Operation of gaming machine P after VL signal is turned ON>, an example in which operation of the bet switch P5 of the gaming machine P is valid is shown, but this is not limiting. After the VL signal is turned ON, if the number of bets that can be placed is stored in the total score storage means, operation of the bet switch P5 of the gaming machine P may be invalid (when "1" is stored in the total score storage means, operation of the 1 bet switch is invalid, and when "3" is stored in the total score storage means, operation of the 1 bet switch or the MAX bet switch is invalid). Also, at this time, even if the number of bets that can be placed is stored in the total score storage means after the VL signal is turned ON, the lamp mounted on the bet switch P5 of the gaming machine P is turned off (it is turned on, indicating that bets cannot be placed).

This can be achieved by making sure that the main control means is not yet up and running immediately after the VL signal is turned ON.

In addition, if the main control means is not activated immediately after the VL signal is turned ON, the operation of the settlement switch P6 and the stop switch, like the bet switch P5, is invalid immediately after the VL signal is turned ON.

However, even if the main control means is not started up immediately after the VL signal is turned ON, the number of counted medals can be transmitted to the lending unit by operating the counting switch.

This is because the game medal count control means is started up immediately after the VL signal is turned ON.

In other words, <another mode of operation of gaming machine P after the VL signal turns ON>, when the VL signal turns ON, the main control means is not activated, but the gaming medal count control means is activated. As a result, immediately after the VL signal turns ON, the operation of the counting switch of gaming machine P and the operation of the lending switch of the lending unit are enabled.

The following explains a communication error that occurs between gaming machine P and the rental unit during rental with reference to Figure 27.

<Communication error during rental>
A case will be described where the lending unit transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine P. In this explanation, the situation before accepting the operation of the lending button is that the total points managed by the game media number control board P16 are "10" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit are "100".

When the gaming machine P and the rental unit have completed startup and are able to communicate with each other, and the rental unit receives an operation of the rental button provided on the rental unit, the gaming machine P will send a serial number "n" and a total score of "10" as a gaming machine information notification, and will send a counting serial number "m" and counting points "0" as a counting notification. Then, when the counting points included in the counting notification are "0", at the time when a rental notification is to be sent to the gaming machine P, the rental serial number "k" and rental points "50" will be sent as the rental notification.

Then, when the lending unit sends the lending notification, it updates the lendable points to "50". Note that the lending unit may update the lendable points when it receives the lending acceptance result response.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k" and the rental point receipt result "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response (if the result of checking the consistency between the information indicated in the rental notification and the information indicated in the previous rental notification is normal).

Next, gaming machine P updates the total score to "60" between receiving the loan notification and sending the loan acceptance result response.

Next, if the gaming machine P transmits a loan receipt result response but the loan unit fails to receive the loan receipt result response, and the loan unit does not receive the loan receipt result response more than 10 ms after transmitting the loan notification, it determines that the loan is incomplete and stores a value indicating that the loan is incomplete in the loan information storage area provided in the loan unit.

Next, gaming machine P sends the serial number "n+1" and total score "60" as a gaming machine information notification, and sends the counting serial number "m+1" and counting points "0" as a counting notification. Then, if the lending unit determines that the lending is incomplete in response to the previous lending notification, it sends the lending serial number "k" and lending points "50" as a lending notification at the time of sending the lending notification to gaming machine P. This lending notification contains the same information as the lending notification sent previously.

Next, when gaming machine P receives the rental notification, if it is normal, it should receive information "k+1" as the rental serial number. However, since the rental serial number received this time was "k", gaming machine P sends the rental serial number "k" and the rental point receipt result response "abnormal" to the rental unit as the rental receipt result response.

Next, since the rental serial number "k" of the rental notification sent by the rental unit when it received the rental receipt result response matches the rental serial number "k" of the received rental receipt result response, the rental unit determines that the rental notification has arrived at the gaming machine P normally, and stores a value indicating rental completion in the rental information storage area provided in the rental unit.

<Error type>
In this embodiment, errors and states of the gaming machine P that can be determined include an input request communication error, a settlement request communication error, a payout request communication error, gaming media number control reception abnormality, main control reception abnormality, total score upper limit abnormality, total score threshold reached state, lending device connection abnormality (VL abnormality), lending serial number abnormality, lending device communication abnormality 1, lending device communication abnormality 2, lending device communication abnormality 3, lending device communication abnormality 4, lending device communication abnormality 5, and lending device communication abnormality 6.

The input request communication error is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15. When the input request command (a command to check whether the bet number can be added to the input points managed by the main control board P15 from the total points managed by the game media number control board P16 when the bet switch is operated) sent by the main control board P15 to the game media number control board P16 does not match the response command (input request acceptance command, or input request not accepted command) received by the main control board P15 from the game media number control board P16, or when a response command is not received from the game media number control board P16, an E1 error is generated and the corresponding "E1" is displayed on the awarded number display section. When an E1 error occurs, it can be canceled when the set/reset switch is operated. Note that since the input request when an E1 error occurs is canceled, the input request command is not resent even if the E1 error is canceled. If an E1 error occurs, the process for stopping the progress of the game is to invalidate the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel spin process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch. Note that it is sufficient to stop the progress of the game, so it is not necessary to invalidate the reel stop process by operating the stop switch. This is because invalidating the start of the game will prevent the reels from spinning, and therefore effectively invalidating the operation of the stop switch as well.

When an E1 error occurs, the main control board P15 sends an E1 error command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error via an image display device or a lamp. When the E1 error is cleared, the main control board P15 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error clear command, it ends the E1 error notification. Note that when the sub-control board P12 receives the error clear command, it may not immediately end the E1 error notification, but may end it after sending the notification for a predetermined period of time.

The settlement request communication error is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15. If the settlement request command sent by the main control board P15 to the game medium number control board P16 does not match the response command (settlement request acceptance command or settlement request unacceptable command) received by the main control board P15 from the game medium number control board P16, or if the response command is not received from the game medium number control board P16, it is regarded as an E2 error, and the number of awarded displays "E2". If an E2 error occurs, it can be canceled when the operation of the set/reset switch is accepted. Note that, since the settlement request when an E2 error occurs is canceled, the settlement request command is not resent even if the E2 error is canceled. If an E2 error occurs, the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel rotation process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch are disabled as processes for stopping the progress of the game. Note that as long as the progress of the game is stopped, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch does not need to be disabled. This is because disabling the start of play means the reels will not spin, which essentially disables the operation of the stop switch.

When an E2 error occurs, the main control board P15 sends an E2 error command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error via an image display device or a lamp. When the E2 error is cleared, the main control board P15 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error clear command, it ends the E2 error notification. Note that when the sub-control board P12 receives the error clear command, it may not immediately end the E2 error notification, but may end it after sending the notification for a predetermined period of time.

The payout request communication error is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15. If the payout request command sent by the main control board P15 to the game medium number control board P16 does not match the response command (payout request acceptance command or payout request unacceptable command) received by the main control board P15 from the game medium number control board P16, or if the response command is not received from the game medium number control board P16, an E3 error is detected and the number of awarded units display corresponding to "E3". If an E3 error occurs, it can be canceled when the operation of the set/reset switch is accepted. Note that, since the payout request when an E3 error occurs is not canceled but continues, the payout request command is resent when the E3 error is canceled. If an E3 error occurs, the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel rotation process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch are disabled as processes for stopping the progress of the game. Note that the reel stop process by operating the stop switch does not need to be disabled as long as the progress of the game is stopped. This is because disabling the start of play means the reels will not spin, essentially disabling the operation of the stop switch.

When an E3 error occurs, the main control board P15 sends an E3 error command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error via an image display device or a lamp. When the E3 error is cleared, the main control board P15 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error clear command, it ends the E3 error notification. Note that when the sub-control board P12 receives the error clear command, it may not immediately end the E3 error notification, but may end it after sending the notification for a predetermined period of time.

In the above example, when an input request communication error, a settlement request communication error, or a payout request communication error occurs, the game media count control board P16 outputs an input request unacceptable command, a settlement request unacceptable command, or a payout request unacceptable command to the main control board P15, respectively. However, the input request unacceptable command, settlement request unacceptable command, and payout request unacceptable command may all be the same command. For example, in the case of an input request communication error, a settlement request communication error, or a payout request communication error, the game media count control board P16 outputs the same unacceptable command.

A gaming media number control reception abnormality is an abnormality detected by the gaming media number control board P16, and is determined to be a gaming media number control reception abnormality if the command received when receiving an insertion request, settlement request, or payout request sent from the main control board P15 to the gaming media number control board P16 is not a correct command. A gaming media number control reception abnormality does not cause an error display on the awarded number display unit. No operation is required to reset the gaming media number control reception abnormality, as it can be automatically reset. Furthermore, if a gaming media number control reception abnormality occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped.

In addition, when a game media number control reception abnormality occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits information about the game media number control reception abnormality to the main control board P15, the main control board P15 receives the information about the game media number control reception abnormality transmitted from the game media number control board P16, the main control board P15 sets the game media number control reception abnormality as an error state, and the main control board P15 transmits a game media number control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or lamp. Even after the game media number control reception abnormality is automatically released, the notification of the game media number control reception abnormality is not ended immediately, but is ended after a predetermined period of time.

The gaming media count control notification command is a command that the main control board P15 sends to the sub-control board P12 at each interrupt, and depending on the bit position, it is a command that notifies the sub-control board P12 of various abnormalities such as counting, total score upper limit abnormality, gaming media count control reception abnormality, and main control reception abnormality, as well as the status of the gaming machine. In addition, various abnormalities and the status of the gaming machine may be notified to the sub-control board P12 using a no-operation command.

A main control reception abnormality is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15, and is considered to be a main control reception abnormality when the main control board P15 receives a command from the game media count control board P16 other than when the main control board P15 has sent an input request, settlement request, or payout request to the game media count control board P16. A main control reception abnormality does not cause an error display on the awarded number display section. No operation is required to clear the main control reception abnormality, as it can be cleared automatically. Furthermore, if a main control reception abnormality occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped.

In addition, when a main control reception abnormality occurs, the main control board P15 sends a game media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error via an image display device or lamp. Even after the main control reception abnormality is automatically released, the notification of the main control reception abnormality is not ended immediately, but is ended after a predetermined period of time.

A total score upper limit abnormality is an abnormality detected by the gaming medium number control board P16, and is deemed to be a total score upper limit abnormality when the total score managed by the gaming medium number control board P16 reaches the upper limit caution value (any value between 16,369 and 16,383). No error is displayed on the total score upper limit display unit when a total score upper limit abnormality occurs. To release the total score upper limit abnormality, the counting switch P7 provided on the gaming machine P is operated to perform a counting process, and the abnormality can be released when the total score falls below the upper limit caution value of 16,368. When a total score upper limit abnormality occurs, the start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 are not accepted, or the process to invalidate the process based on the start switch P3, the process to invalidate the process based on the bet switch P5, and the process to invalidate the process based on the settlement switch P6 is performed to make the game impossible to play. In other words, when the total score managed by the game media number control board P16 reaches the upper limit caution value, the next game cannot be played unless the total score managed by the game media number control board P16 falls below the upper limit caution value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the total score managed by the game media number control board P16 from exceeding the upper limit. Note that if the upper limit of the total score is reached without detecting a total score upper limit abnormality, the points exceeding the upper limit will not be stored, and the number stored will not exceed 16,383.

In addition, in the case of an abnormality in the total score upper limit, no error is displayed on the number of awarded points display unit, but an error may be displayed on the number of game media display unit P9. For example, in the case of an abnormality in the total score upper limit, "HF□□□" may be displayed on the number of game media display unit P9. If an error is displayed on the number of game media display unit P9, the error display is not displayed on the number of game media display unit P9 when the error is cleared. In this case, the notification executed by the sub-control board P12 may end at approximately the same time as the error is cleared, or may be displayed for a certain period of time after the error is cleared. Note that by not displaying an error on the number of awarded points display unit and the number of game media display unit P9 in the case of the total score threshold being reached, it is less likely that the player will mistakenly believe that the gaming machine P has broken down when the total score threshold is reached.

Next, we will explain how to prevent the game media count control board P16 from storing more than the upper limit of the total score, using the score awarding process (also called the payout process) on the main control board P15 shown in Figure 29.

The score awarding process is executed after judging the symbol combination that has stopped on the winning line and determining the number of points to be awarded based on the result of the judgment. For example, it is executed after judging that a specific symbol combination that can award 8 points has stopped on the winning line and then storing the number 8 in the award point memory area described below.

In "Score Awarded?", the main control board P15 determines whether there are points to award (whether a pattern combination that can award points has stopped and been displayed), and if it determines that there are no points to award, the answer is NO. Specifically, it determines whether the value in the award point memory area, which is a memory area in the RWM area of the main control board P15 that can store award points, is "0". If it determines that the value in the award point memory area is "0", the answer is NO for "Score Awarded?" and the score awarding process ends. On the other hand, if it determines that the value in the award point memory area is not "0", the answer is YES for "Score Awarded?".

In "Score awarding time elapsed?", it is determined whether the value stored in the score awarding timer area described below is "0". If the value stored in the score awarding timer area is "0", the answer is YES, and if the value stored in the score awarding timer area is not "0", the answer is NO. In other words, this determination process loops until the value stored in the score awarding timer area becomes "0" (in other words, it delays the "award request command set" described below). Note that the score awarding timer area stores an initial value ("27" in this embodiment) by "save score awarding time" described below.

In "score awarding time storage", "27" is stored in the score awarding timer area provided in the RWM area of the main control board P15. The value stored in the score awarding timer area is configured to be updated in response to the execution of a timer interrupt on the main control board P15 side (for example, it is configured to subtract 1 each time a timer interrupt process is executed). Note that the timer interrupt on the main control board P15 side is configured to be executed at a cycle of approximately 2.235 ms. Therefore, storing "27" in the score awarding timer area is synonymous with saving a time corresponding to approximately 60 ms. Also, even if a timer interrupt process is executed when "0" is stored in the score awarding timer area, the value of the score awarding timer area will remain "0".

In this way, by setting the processing order to "Has score awarding time elapsed?" → "Save score awarding time", when multiple points are awarded, the "Award request command set" processing described below is executed at a predetermined interval. For example, when the number of points to be awarded is "8", the (first) "Award request command set" corresponding to the first point is executed in a situation where "0" is stored in the score awarding timer area, because this is before "27" is stored in the score awarding timer area. Therefore, the standby processing based on the score awarding timer is not executed. Therefore, the main control board P15 can cause the game medium number control board P16 to quickly execute the processing to add the first point to the total score.

Meanwhile, the "award request command set" corresponding to the second to eighth points can be executed after "27" is stored in the score award timer area by "save score award time" and "score award time elapsed?" becomes "0". In other words, the "award request command set" corresponding to the second to eighth points can be executed at a rate of about once every 60 ms. In other words, the total score on the game medium number control board P16 based on the "award request command set" can be updated about every 60 ms, and the display update of the game medium number display unit P9 that can display the total score can also be updated about every 60 ms. By configuring it in this way, the player can visually see how the total score displayed on the game medium number display unit P9 is updated by "1".

Unlike the embodiment described above, the order may be "score awarding time saved" → "score awarding time elapsed?". In this case, even for the first point when multiple points are awarded, the main control board P15 executes a standby process for a time corresponding to the score awarding time (score awarding timer), and then the game media number control board P16 adds one point to the total score. Also, in this embodiment, "27" is stored in the score awarding timer area as "score awarding time saved", but any number (for example, a number in the range of "10" to "200") that allows the player to visually see the total score displayed on the game media number display unit P9 being updated by "1" at a time may be stored.

In the "award request command set", a command for sending an award request command indicating that one point is to be awarded from the main control board P15 to the game medium number control board P16 is stored in the command buffer of the main control board P15. The command stored in the command buffer of the main control board P15 is configured to be sent to the game medium number control board P16 by timer interrupt processing on the main control board P15 side. Therefore, the "award request command set" is synonymous with sending an award request command indicating that one point is to be awarded from the main control board P15 to the game medium number control board P16.

For example, when a symbol combination capable of awarding 8 points is displayed, the total points are updated by sending an award request command indicating that 1 point is to be awarded 8 times to the game media count control board P16. By updating the total points one point at a time in this manner, even if the payout process stops due to an abnormality during the payout process, the payout process can be executed again after the abnormality is resolved.

"Command reception" refers to receiving a response command from the game medium count control board P16 after the main control board P15 sends a grant request command indicating that one game medium should be granted.

In this embodiment, the game media number control board P16 has at least the following two response commands.
A) Grant permission command: This refers to a command indicating that one point is to be added.
Specifically, after the game media number control board P16 receives an award request command indicating that one point should be awarded, if the game media number control board P16 determines that the total point before the addition does not exceed the upper limit value when adding one point to the total point, it sends an award permission command to the main control board P15 indicating that one point should be added to the total point.
a) Rejection command: This refers to a command indicating that 1 point will not be added.
Specifically, after the game media number control board P16 receives an award request command indicating that one point should be awarded, if the game media number control board P16 determines that the total point before the addition is the upper limit when adding one point to the total point, it sends an award refusal command to the main control board P15 indicating that one point cannot be added to the total point.

In "Not Grantable?", it is determined whether the command received from the game media count control board P16 was a grant refusal command, and if it was a grant refusal command, the answer is YES. It is also possible to determine whether the command received from the game media count control board P16 was a grant permission command, and if it was not a grant permission command, the answer is NO.

By configuring in this way, even if the game media count control board P16 receives an award request command indicating that one point is to be awarded under a situation in which an abnormality occurs during the score awarding process, the game media count control board P16 can prevent the game media count control board P16 from updating the total score. In addition, when the main control board P15 judges "No award (YES)" in "No award?", it loops "Score award time elapsed?", "Score award time saved", "Award request command set", "Command received", and "No award?" until the counting process is performed by the game media count control board P16 (until some or all of the total points are counted), making it impossible to perform bet processing to start the next game. Note that even if such a loop situation occurs, if the reset switch is operated and the abnormality is released, the judgment of "No award?" will become "NO" even in the loop situation, and it will be possible to proceed to the processing of "Score award data -1".

The loop status described above is not limited to this. For example, if the main control board P15 determines that "grant not allowed (YES)," it may loop "grant request command set," "command received," and "grant not allowed?".

In "score award data -1", the value in the award point storage area is subtracted by 1. For example, if the value stored in the award point storage area is "8", this process will cause the value in the award point storage area to become "7". Also, if the value stored in the award point storage area is "1", this process will cause the value in the award point storage area to become "0".

In "Score awarding completed?", it is determined whether the value in the award point storage area is "0". If the value in the award point storage area is not "0", the process returns to "Score awarding time elapsed?" and repeats the same process as described above. Then, if the value in the award point storage area is "0", the process ends.

By executing this type of score awarding process, it is possible to control the game media count control board P16 so that it does not store more than the upper limit of the total score.

In addition, if the process of awarding points one by one is performed at a time too quickly, the player will not be able to recognize that each point has been awarded. For this reason, the score awarding timer is set for 60.35 ms (27 interrupt processes) after awarding one point, and the timer is updated (the count value is subtracted by "1") each time one point is awarded, and one point is awarded again after 60.35 ms has elapsed. This configuration allows the player to recognize that each point has been paid out, making the game more interesting.

In the above embodiment, the main control board P15 awards one point to the game medium count control board P16, but this is not limited to this and the points may be awarded all at once.

For example, if the main control board P15 awards 8 points as a score, it requests the game media number control board P16 as an award request command whether 8 points can be added to the total score. The game media number control board P16 determines whether adding 8 points to the total score will exceed the upper limit (determines whether "total score + awarded points > 16383" is YES), and if it exceeds the upper limit (determines YES), it sends a command to the main control board P15 indicating that 8 points cannot be added to the total score (corresponding to an award refusal command), and when the main control board P15 receives a command indicating that 8 points cannot be added to the total score, it again requests the game media number control board P16 as an award request command whether 8 points can be added to the total score, and since there is no change in the total score if the counting process has not been performed, it again sends a command indicating that 8 points cannot be added to the total score, resulting in a loop of score awarding processes between the main control board P15 and the game media number control board P16. In other words, it is configured to loop until 8 points are added. By configuring it in this way, the points awarded will not be discarded, preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

In the scoring process, since it is normally assumed that the total score will not exceed the upper limit, it is possible to have a configuration in which it is not determined whether the total score exceeds the upper limit.

For example, if the main control board P15 awards 8 points as a score, it sends a grant request command to the game media count control board P16 requesting whether 8 points can be added to the total score. The game media count control board P16 determines whether adding 8 points to the total score will exceed the upper limit (determines whether "total score + awarded points > 16383" is YES), and if it does not exceed the upper limit (determines NO), it sends a command to the main control board P15 indicating that 8 points can be added to the total score (corresponding to an award permission command), and the game media count control board P16 adds 8 points to the total score and ends the score awarding process.

In the scoring process, since it is normally assumed that the total score will not exceed the upper limit, it may be possible to perform a configuration in which it is not determined whether the total score exceeds the upper limit.

When the total score upper limit is abnormal, the game media number control board P16 transmits information indicating the total score upper limit abnormality to the main control board P15, the main control board P15 receives the information indicating the total score upper limit abnormality transmitted from the game media number control board P16, the main control board P15 sets the total score upper limit abnormality as an error state, and the main control board P15 transmits a game media number control notification command to the sub-control board P12 to notify the error using an image display device or a lamp. Then, when the total score upper limit abnormality is released by operating the counting switch P7, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the total score upper limit abnormality in the game media number control notification command to a normal value (for example, "0") and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to end the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the total score upper limit abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately stopping the notification.

Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit after the score awarding process, the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it, and the lamp indicating that a gaming medium can be inserted are turned off (not lit). The timing at which the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it, and the lamp indicating that a gaming medium can be inserted are turned off is when the gaming medium number control board P16 detects an abnormality in the total score upper limit, and the main control board P16 and the sub-control board P12 each execute processing based on the abnormality in the total score upper limit. Furthermore, the timing at which the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it, and the lamp indicating that a gaming medium can be inserted are turned on is when the counting switch P7 is operated and the total score becomes a value of 16,368 or less.

An example will be given in which the counting switch P7 is operated when the score awarding process results in an abnormal total score upper limit of 16371. If the counting switch is pressed and held when the total score is "16371", "50" will be counted. The gaming media number control board P16 stores the result of subtracting the count points from the total score during the counting process by calculating "16371-50" in a register, and when "16321" is stored as the total score, the gaming media number control board P16 detects that the abnormal total score upper limit has been lifted and sends information to the main control board P15 that the abnormal total score upper limit has been lifted. When the main control board P15 receives the information that the abnormal total score upper limit has been lifted, the bet switch is enabled and the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it, as well as the gaming media insertion possible lamp, are turned on. In addition, when the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M or the lamps around it and the game medium insertion possible lamp are controlled by the sub-control board P12, the main control board P15 transmits information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been cleared to the sub-control board P12 after receiving the information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been cleared, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been cleared, the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M or the lamps around it and the game medium insertion possible lamp are turned on. In addition, when the counting switch P7 is pressed briefly and the counting points are counted by "1", the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M or the lamps around it and the game medium insertion possible lamp are turned on when the total score reaches "16368".

Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit after the settlement process, the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it, and the lamp indicating that a gaming medium can be inserted will be turned off (not lit). The timing at which the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it, and the lamp indicating that a gaming medium can be inserted are turned off is when the gaming medium number control board P16 detects an abnormality in the total score upper limit, and the main control board P16 and the sub-control board P12 each execute processing based on the abnormality in the total score upper limit. Furthermore, the timing at which the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it, and the lamp indicating that a gaming medium can be inserted will be turned on is when the counting switch P7 is operated and the total score becomes a value of 16,368 or less.

An example will be given in which the counting switch P7 is operated when the total score upper limit becomes abnormal and the total score becomes 16371 during the settlement process. If the counting switch is pressed and held when the total score is "16371", "50" will be counted. The gaming media number control board P16 stores the result of subtracting the count points from the total score during the counting process by calculating "16371-50" in a register, and when "16321" is stored as the total score, the gaming media number control board P16 detects that the total score upper limit abnormality has been lifted and sends information to the main control board P15 that the total score upper limit abnormality has been lifted. When the main control board P15 receives the information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been lifted, the bet switch is enabled and the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it, as well as the gaming media insertion possible lamp, are turned on. In addition, when the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M or the lamps around it and the game medium insertion possible lamp are controlled by the sub-control board P12, the main control board P15 transmits information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been cleared to the sub-control board P12 after receiving the information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been cleared, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been cleared, the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M or the lamps around it and the game medium insertion possible lamp are turned on. In addition, when the counting switch P7 is pressed briefly and the counting points are counted by "1", the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M or the lamps around it and the game medium insertion possible lamp are turned on when the total score reaches "16368".

In addition, if the operation part of the start switch P3 or the lamps around it and the game execution possible lamp are lit and an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit, the operation part of the start switch P3 or the lamps around it and the game execution possible lamp may be turned off, and may be turned on when the abnormality in the total score upper limit is cleared.

The total score threshold reached state is a state detected by the game media number control board P16, and is deemed to be in the total score threshold reached state when the total score managed by the game media number control board P16 reaches a threshold value before the upper limit (16383). The threshold can be, for example, 15000, and any value can be set as long as it is less than the total score upper limit (16383) - the count value for one time (50) (less than 16333). The total score threshold reached state is not displayed on the awarded number display unit. To release the total score threshold reached state, the counting switch P7 provided on the gaming machine P is operated to perform the counting process, and the state can be released when the total score falls below the threshold of 15000. In other words, the total score threshold reached state is an abnormal state that is set when the total score is between 15000 and 16368.

When the total score reaches or exceeds the threshold value of 15,000, the game media number control board P16 turns the overflow signal ON (the overflow signal rises). The overflow signal remains ON until the total score falls below 15,000, at which point the game media number control board P16 turns the overflow signal OFF (the overflow signal falls). The game media number control board P16 transmits the overflow signal to the main control board P15, and when the main control board P15 determines that the overflow signal is ON, it performs processing to output an overflow test signal to the test IF board.

When the overflow test signal is ON and is being output to the test IF board, the counting switch P7 connected to the test IF board is in an operated state, so when the overflow test signal is being output ON, the counting switch signal is also being output ON (counting switch P7 is in an operated state), and the counting process is executed.

As a process for outputting the overflow test signal, the main control board P15 turns on the overflow test signal output to the test IF board and stores the overflow test signal timer value (count value) in a specified memory area. The overflow test signal timer value is for managing the time for turning on the overflow test signal, and the overflow test signal maintains its ON state until it is determined that the overflow test signal timer value is 0. In addition, the main control board P15 stores the overflow test signal timer value when turning on the overflow test signal. Then, when the game media number control board P16 executes the counting process, the overflow signal turns OFF, and the main control board P15 determines that the overflow signal has turned OFF (when it detects the falling edge of the overflow signal), the main control board P15 starts subtracting the stored overflow test signal timer value. In other words, the overflow test signal maintains its ON state until the overflow test signal timer value becomes 0 even after the overflow signal turns OFF, and when the overflow test signal timer value becomes 0, the overflow test signal turns OFF. In addition, the overflow test signal timer value is stored by the main control board P15 when the overflow signal is turned ON, so even when the overflow signal is ON, the overflow test signal timer value is determined to be not 0, and the overflow test signal is turned ON. In other words, the overflow test signal will not be turned OFF when the overflow signal is ON.

The main control board P15 also determines whether the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0 or not, and when it determines that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is not 0, it turns the overflow test signal ON, and when it determines that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0, it turns the overflow test signal OFF. The main control board P15 sets the overflow test signal timer value when the overflow test signal turns ON (or when it determines that the overflow signal has turned ON), and does not subtract the timer value while the overflow signal is being output, so that the counting switch signal does not turn OFF while the overflow signal is being output during the gaming machine test.

In the above example, an embodiment was described in which the main control board P15 determines whether the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0 or not, and turns the overflow test signal ON when it determines that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is not 0, but this is not limited to this, and the main control board P15 may determine whether the overflow test signal timer value after subtraction is 0 or not, and turn the overflow test signal ON when it determines that the overflow test signal timer value after subtraction is not 0.

The main control board P15 may store an overflow test signal timer value of, for example, 1209 (2702.115 ms) when the overflow test signal is turned ON. This is because the interrupt processing interval of the main control board P15 is 2.235 ms, so 2702.115 ms elapses when the interrupt processing is executed 1209 times. Also, 2702.115 ms is the time required to send nine gaming machine information notifications, since the transmission interval for gaming machine information notifications sent by the gaming media count control board P16 to the lending unit is 300 ms. In other words, when the game media number control board P16 turns the overflow signal ON and the main control board P15 turns the overflow test signal ON, the counting switch signal turns ON and 50 is counted as the counting points, and then, as a result of the counting process being executed by the game media number control board P16, the total score falls below the threshold value of 15,000 and the overflow test signal remains ON for 1,209 interrupt processes of the main control board P15 even after the game media number control board P16 turns the overflow signal OFF, so the counting switch P7 can be kept ON for 2,702.115 ms, and 450 points are counted as the counting points for 9 game machine information notifications. Therefore, when the test IF board and the main control board P15 are connected (when a gaming machine test is being performed), when the gaming media number control board P16 turns the overflow signal ON once, the counting switch signal also turns ON, and in addition to the one counting process (counting points of 50 points) that is performed when the overflow signal turns ON, the counting process can be performed nine times after the overflow signal turns OFF, so that 500 points are counted as the counting points. This allows the counting points of 500 points to be subtracted from the total score after the total score reaches 15,000 points during the gaming machine test, so it is possible to prevent the overflow signal from turning ON immediately after the overflow signal turns OFF, and even if the gaming machine being tested is in an advantageous state such as an AT, the frequency of performing the counting process due to the total score reaching 15,000 points or more is reduced, so that it is possible to reduce the malfunction of the gaming machine P and the frequency of output of error sounds during the gaming machine test.

The overflow test signal timer value is not limited to the above-mentioned value, and may be any value longer than the time required to send one gaming machine information notification (300 ms or more). In other words, if the overflow test signal timer value is updated (subtracted) at each interrupt, any value greater than or equal to 135 may be stored as the overflow test signal timer value.

In the above example, an embodiment was described in which the main control board P15 updates the overflow test signal timer value for every interrupt, but this is not limited to this, and the overflow test signal timer value may be updated once every two interrupts or once every three interrupts. In this embodiment, the overflow test signal timer value can be reduced. For example, if the main control board P15 updates the overflow test signal timer value once every five interrupts, an example is to store 242 as the overflow test signal timer value. In this case, the overflow test signal timer value can be kept within one byte, while the time for turning the overflow test signal ON can be set to 2704.35 ms.

In addition, since gaming machine P can continue playing (betting, internal lottery processing based on operation of start switch P3, stop control processing based on operation of stop switch P4, etc.) even during counting processing, gaming machine testing is not interrupted even if the total score threshold is reached during gaming machine testing and counting processing is performed. This allows gaming machine testing to be carried out smoothly.

When the total score threshold reached state occurs, the game media count control board P16 transmits information indicating that the total score threshold has been reached to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12 to notify the state using an image display device or lamp. When the total score threshold reached state is released by the counting operation, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the total score threshold reached state in the game media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, thereby terminating the state notification of the sub-control board P12. Note that if the bit corresponding to the total score threshold reached state has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the game media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately stopping the notification.

In the above embodiment, the bit positions of the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state in the game media count control notification command sent by the main control board P15 to the sub-control board P12 are different, but they may be managed in the same bit position. In this case, the sub-control board P12 cannot change the presentation based on the received game media count control notification command whether the total score upper limit is abnormal or the total score threshold reached state (the same presentation is executed). However, when it comes to performing a presentation that prompts the operation of the counting switch P7 whether the total score upper limit is abnormal or the total score threshold reached state, this can be executed without the sub-control board P12 distinguishing between the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state. In addition, the amount of information sent by the main control board P15 is reduced, making it possible to reduce the program capacity.

The notification manner by the sub-control board P12 for the above-mentioned total score upper limit abnormality and total score threshold reached state may be the same (specifically, the bit positions of the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state in the game media number control notification command may be the same, or even if they are different bit positions, the same notification may be made depending on the judgment of the sub-control board P12), or may be different (specifically, the bit positions of the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state in the game media number control notification command may be different bit positions and different notification may be made depending on the judgment of the sub-control board P12, or in the case of a total score upper limit abnormality, game media number control notification command 1 may be sent, and in the case of the total score threshold reached state, game media number control notification command 2 may be sent).

When the notification mode is the same, for example, "Please operate the counting switch" may be displayed on the image display device, and when the notification mode is different, for example, when there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit, "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the counting switch" may be displayed on the image display device, and when the total score threshold has been reached, "The upper limit will be reached with XX points. Please operate the counting switch" may be displayed on the image display device. When displaying the number of points up to the total score upper limit when the total score threshold has been reached, the main control board P15 or the number of game media control board P16 may calculate the total score upper limit value - the current total score and send it to the sub-control board P12, or the sub-control board P12 may calculate the total score upper limit value - the current total score using the current total score information received.

The display mode of the image display device that prompts the user to operate the counting switch is sometimes referred to as the counting switch prompting display. The counting switch prompting display is a concept that includes the display when there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit, the display when the total score threshold has been reached, and the display when there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit and when the total score threshold has been reached. Furthermore, the counting switch prompting display is terminated when the total score upper limit abnormality or the total score threshold reached state is released.

In addition, if the notification mode by the sub-control board P12 for the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state is the same, the notification mode is the same from when the total score reaches the threshold (15,000) to when the upper limit is reached (16,383), and the notification is given in advance from when the total score reaches the threshold to when it reaches the upper limit, so the notification mode does not suddenly change or a notification is given when the upper limit is reached. As a result, since the player is notified in advance and the notification mode does not change even after the upper limit is reached, even if points are awarded that exceed the upper limit as a result of winning, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the excess has been lost (it is possible to make it appear that there is no urgency).

When the total score threshold is reached, gameplay can continue, but when the total score upper limit is abnormal, gameplay cannot continue (start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 cannot be accepted).

In addition, when the total score is between the threshold value (15,000) and the upper limit (16,383), the loan receipt result response sent to the loan unit is sent as an abnormality.

A lending device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) is an abnormality detected by the game media number control board P16, and when the VL signal between the game media number control board P16 and the lending unit is OFF (when the gaming machine and the lending unit are not connected, or when the gaming machine is powered ON but the lending unit is powered OFF), it is considered to be a lending device connection abnormality. A lending device connection abnormality does not display an error on the number of awards display unit. In order to cancel the lending device connection abnormality, it can be canceled when communication with the lending unit becomes normal and the VL signal is turned ON. Then, when a lending device connection abnormality occurs, the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel rotation process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch are disabled as processes to stop the progress of the game. Note that it is sufficient to stop the progress of the game, and it is not necessary to disable the reel stop process by operating the stop switch. This is because if the start of the game is disabled, the reel does not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is essentially disabled. However, since communication with the rental unit is not possible, counting is not possible for the gaming machine P (the counting process based on the operation of the counting switch is disabled (the number of counted medals in the counting notification is set to 0), or the operation of the counting switch itself is disabled). Note that counting may be enabled, but since it cannot be transmitted to the rental unit, it is desirable to repeat the same counting process.

When a rental device connection abnormality occurs, the game media count control board P16 sends information about the rental device connection abnormality to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends a game media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12 to notify the error using an image display device or lamp. When the rental device connection abnormality is resolved by the VL signal being turned ON, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality in the game media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and sends it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to end the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the game media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately stopping the notification.

A loan serial number abnormality is an abnormality detected by the game media count control board P16, and is deemed to be a loan serial number abnormality if the loan serial number received from the loan unit is not the previously received loan serial number +1. No error is displayed on the number of granted display unit when there is a loan serial number abnormality. The loan serial number abnormality can be cleared by receiving a normal loan notification from the loan unit. Furthermore, although the game progress is not stopped when a loan serial number abnormality occurs, the game progress may be stopped if a loan serial number abnormality is detected a predetermined number of times (including once) or more. When the game progress is stopped, some or all of the following are performed: bets are invalidated, operation of the start switch P3 is invalidated, operation of the stop switch P4 is invalidated, and settlement is invalidated.

When an abnormality in the lending serial number occurs, the game media count control board P16 transmits information indicating an abnormality in the lending serial number to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12 to notify the error using an image display device or lamp. When the loaning serial number abnormality is cleared due to a normal loan notification being transmitted from the loaning unit, the main control board P15 changes the bit in the game media count control notification command corresponding to the loaning device communication abnormality to a normal value (e.g., "0") and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to end the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the loaning device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the game media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately stopping the notification.

The rental device communication abnormality 1 is an abnormality detected by the game media number control board P16, and when the number of times that a rental notification has been received since the previous game machine information notification transmission is not one (when the value of the rental notification reception counter is not "1"), it is determined to be a rental device communication abnormality 1. The rental device communication abnormality 1 does not display an error on the number of awarded balls display section. In order to cancel the rental device communication abnormality 1, it can be automatically canceled when the number of times that a rental notification has been received since the previous game machine information notification transmission becomes one when the game machine information notification is transmitted. In addition, when the rental device communication abnormality 1 occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped, but the progress of the game may be stopped if the rental device communication abnormality 1 is detected a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more. When the progress of the game is stopped, the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel rotation process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch are disabled as processes for stopping the progress of the game. Note that as long as the game progress is stopped, there is no need to disable the reel stopping process caused by the operation of the stop switch. This is because if the start of the game is disabled, the reels will not spin, and the operation of the stop switch will essentially be disabled as well.

When a lending device communication abnormality 1 occurs, the game media count control board P16 transmits information indicating that a lending device communication abnormality 1 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the lending device communication abnormality 1 is resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality in the game media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the game media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately stopping the notification.

The rental device communication abnormality 2 is an abnormality detected by the game media number control board P16, and if the number of times the rental notification has been received from the gaming machine information notification transmission is not one at the time of receiving the rental notification, it is determined to be a rental device communication abnormality 2. The rental device communication abnormality 2 does not display an error on the number of awarded games display section. In order to cancel the rental device communication abnormality 2, it can be automatically canceled when the number of times the rental notification has been received from the gaming machine information notification transmission becomes one at the time of receiving the rental notification. In addition, if the rental device communication abnormality 2 occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped, but if the rental device communication abnormality 2 is detected a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more, the progress of the game may be stopped. When the progress of the game is stopped, the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel rotation process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch are disabled as processes for stopping the progress of the game. Note that the reel stop process by operating the stop switch does not need to be disabled as long as the progress of the game is stopped. This is because disabling the start of play means the reels will not spin, essentially disabling the operation of the stop switch.

When a lending device communication abnormality 2 occurs, the game media count control board P16 transmits information indicating that a lending device communication abnormality 2 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the lending device communication abnormality 2 is resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality in the game media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the game media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately stopping the notification.

Rental device communication error 3 is an error detected by the game media number control board P16, and is regarded as rental device communication error 3 if, at the time of receiving the rental notification, it is less than 100 ms or more than 270 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent (if gaming machine information notification timer A < 100 ms, or gaming machine information notification timer A > 270 ms). Rental device communication error 3 does not display an error on the number of awarded points display section. In order to cancel rental device communication error 3, it can be automatically canceled when, at the time of receiving the rental notification, it is more than 100 ms or less than 270 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent. And, when rental device communication error 3 occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped, but if rental device communication error 3 is detected a predetermined number of times (including once) or more, the progress of the game may be stopped. When the progress of a game is stopped, the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel spin process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch are disabled as processes for stopping the progress of the game. Note that it is not necessary to disable the reel stop process by operating the stop switch as long as the progress of the game is stopped. This is because disabling the start of the game effectively disables the operation of the stop switch as the reels do not spin.

When a lending device communication abnormality 3 occurs, the game media count control board P16 transmits information indicating that a lending device communication abnormality 3 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the lending device communication abnormality 3 has been resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality in the game media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the game media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately stopping the notification.

The lending device communication error 4 is an error detected by the game media number control board P16, and if the number of lending medals exceeds 50 when the lending notification is received, it is regarded as a lending device communication error 4. The lending device communication error 4 does not display an error on the awarded number display section. In order to cancel the lending device communication error 4, it can be automatically canceled when the number of lending medals becomes 50 or less when the lending notification is received. In addition, when the lending device communication error 4 occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped, but if the lending device communication error 4 is detected a predetermined number of times (including once) or more, the progress of the game may be stopped. When the progress of the game is stopped, the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel rotation process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch are disabled as processes for stopping the progress of the game. Note that it is not necessary to disable the reel stop process by operating the stop switch as long as the progress of the game is stopped. This is because if the start of the game is disabled, the reel does not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is essentially disabled.

When a lending device communication abnormality 4 occurs, the game media count control board P16 transmits information indicating that a lending device communication abnormality 4 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the lending device communication abnormality 4 is resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality in the game media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the game media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately stopping the notification.

The lending device communication error 5 is an error detected by the game media number control board P16. When the number of lending medals is not 0 at the time of receiving the lending notification, and the lending notification is received other than after the transmission of the hall control and fraud monitoring information, it is regarded as a lending device communication error 5. The lending device communication error 5 does not display an error on the awarded number display section. In order to cancel the lending device communication error 5, it is possible to automatically cancel it by receiving the lending notification after the number of lending medals is not 0 at the time of receiving the lending notification and after the transmission of the hall control and fraud monitoring information. When the lending device communication error 5 occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped, but the progress of the game may be stopped if the lending device communication error 5 is detected a predetermined number of times (including once). When the progress of the game is stopped, the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel rotation process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch are disabled as processes for stopping the progress of the game. Note that the reel stop process by operating the stop switch does not need to be disabled as long as the progress of the game is stopped. This is because disabling the start of play means the reels will not spin, which essentially disables the operation of the stop switch.

When a lending device communication abnormality 5 occurs, the game media count control board P16 transmits information indicating that a lending device communication abnormality 5 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the lending device communication abnormality 5 is resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality in the game media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the game media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately stopping the notification.

The lending device communication error 6 is an error detected by the game media count control board P16, and if the number of lending medals is not 0 and the number of counted medals is not 0 when the lending notification is received, it is determined to be a lending device communication error 6. The lending device communication error 6 does not display an error on the awarded number display unit. To cancel the lending device communication error 6, the lending device communication error 6 can be canceled by the number of lending medals being not 0 and the number of counted medals being 0 when the lending notification is received, or the number of lending medals being 0 and the number of counted medals being not 0 when the lending notification is received, or the number of lending medals being 0 and the number of counted medals being 0 when the lending notification is received. In addition, if a lending device communication error 6 occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped, but if a lending device communication error 6 is detected a predetermined number of times (including once) or more, the progress of the game may be stopped. When the progress of a game is stopped, the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel spin process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch are disabled as processes for stopping the progress of the game. Note that it is not necessary to disable the reel stop process by operating the stop switch as long as the progress of the game is stopped. This is because disabling the start of the game effectively disables the operation of the stop switch as the reels do not spin.

When a lending device communication abnormality 6 occurs, the game media count control board P16 transmits information that a lending device communication abnormality 6 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the lending device communication abnormality 6 is resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality in the game media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to end the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the game media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately stopping the notification.

In this embodiment, for the above-mentioned rental device connection abnormality, rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6, information that an abnormality has occurred in the sub-control board P12 is sent, but information that can identify the type of abnormality is not sent. Also, for rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6, there is only one type of lighting mode for the status indicator lamp, and it is configured such that the type of rental device communication abnormality cannot be determined based on the lighting mode of the status indicator lamp.

By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to determine under what conditions the following fraudulent causes: rental device connection abnormality, rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6.

In addition, for rental device connection abnormalities, rental device serial number abnormalities, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6, information that can identify the type of abnormality may be sent to the sub-control board P12. With this configuration, it becomes possible to manage error history on the sub-control board P12.

In addition, in addition to the abnormalities described above, the gaming machine P may detect other abnormalities such as radio wave abnormalities (for example, an abnormality when the gaming machine P determines that there is an abnormality in the radio waves it is receiving), random number abnormalities (for example, an abnormality when the gaming machine P determines that there is an abnormality in the random numbers used in the internal lottery or AT lottery), or setting value abnormalities (for example, an abnormality when the gaming machine P determines that there is an abnormality in the setting values used in the internal lottery or AT lottery).

Among the errors that can be detected by the main control board P15, there are unrecoverable errors that cannot be recovered from even by operating the reset switch (they can be recovered from by performing initialization processing such as changing settings). Unrecoverable errors occur when "power recovery cannot be performed normally", "there is an abnormality in the symbol combination display when all reels have stopped", "the setting value is out of range", "an abnormality is detected in the frequency of the clock input to the RCK terminal used to update the random numbers", and "an abnormality is detected in the update status of the built-in random numbers".

In addition, an example has been described in which, when an abnormality is detected in the game media count control board P16, a command is sent to the sub-control board P12 via the main control board P15, but this is not limited to the above. The game media count control board P16 and the sub-control board P12 may be directly connected with a communication cable (harness, etc.), and a command may be sent from the game media count control board P16 to the sub-control board P12 without going through the main control board P15.

In addition, although an error notification is provided by the awarded number display unit, an error notification may also be provided by the gaming media number display unit P9.

In addition, when the sub-control board P12 receives an error command sent from the main control board P15 due to an error occurring in the main control board P15 or the game medium count control board P16, the sub-control board P12 may be configured to store the time of reception, the error content, and the game status in association with each other in a specified memory area.

When storing the time, the sub-control board P12 is equipped with an RTC (real-time clock), and the time is stored in a specified memory area based on information from the RTC. The specified memory area is backed up by a backup power supply, and is configured so that it will not be initialized when the power is turned off or turned on. It is also configured so that it will not be initialized by changing settings.

When storing the game status, the contents based on commands from the main control board P15 related to the main game status (CZ, AT, etc.), and the fact that a game is in progress based on a start command or an end game command are stored in a specified memory area. The specified memory area is backed up by a backup power source, and is configured so that it will not be initialized when the power is turned off or on. It is also configured so that it will not be initialized by changing the settings.

The "received time", "error content", and "game status" stored in this way are configured to be viewable by the game center manager. For example, pressing the reset button (reset switch) once while changing or checking settings can display the manager menu screen, and the "error history" item can be selected from among the multiple items on the manager menu screen to view the information. The error history items can display multiple accumulated error contents. In addition, when there are many error histories, the manager can select a date range or type of error, etc., so that the manager can easily check the desired error history, narrowing the viewing range for checking. Furthermore, when there are many error histories, the system can be configured to display one of the most recent error histories based on the current time, or multiple error histories from the most recent error histories based on the current time.

The method of displaying the administrator menu screen is not limited to pressing the reset button once while changing or checking settings, but may also be, for example, operating a specified switch inside the gaming machine P while it is on standby to play. In other words, it is sufficient that the system is configured so that the player is unable (or has difficulty) displaying the administrator menu screen, but the administrator is able to display the administrator menu screen.

By configuring it in this way, for example, it becomes possible to store information such as "At xx year, xx month, xx day, xx hour, xx minute, xx second, an input request communication error occurred while waiting to play" on the sub-control board P12, and the administrator can check the desired error history by selecting an error history item. Note that the display may also be in the form of milliseconds.

The sub-control board P12 may also store information relating to the total score stored by the game media number control board P16 in association with the error contents described above. For example, when an error occurs related to the loan notification, such as loan device connection abnormality, loan serial number abnormality, loan device communication abnormality 1, loan device communication abnormality 2, loan device communication abnormality 3, loan device communication abnormality 4, loan device communication abnormality 5, or loan device communication abnormality 6, it is possible to send a command relating to the total score to the main control board P15 and then send it from the main control board P15 to the sub-control board P12, thereby storing the error related to the loan notification and the total score information in association with each other.

By configuring it in this way, the increase or decrease in the total score at the time of the loan notification is stored, so even if a loan notification is made fraudulently, it is possible to store the history in the sub-control board P12. Note that the errors that are stored in association with the total score are not limited to the above errors, and information regarding the total score may be associated with all errors.

The sub-control board P12 may also be configured to store history information not only when an error occurs, but also when a counting process is performed. In this case, too, it is conceivable to store the counting information and the total score information in association with each other. For example, when the counting switch P7 is pressed and the counting process is performed, the count points and the total score are stored in association with each other. Also, when the counting switch P7 is pressed and held down to continuously count every 300 ms, all of the counting information for every 300 ms is stored.

By configuring it in this way, the entire history of the counting process can be stored, so if an abnormal number is counted, it becomes possible to provide evidence to determine whether it is fraudulent or not.

The sub-control board P12 may also be configured to store history information not only when an error occurs, but also when a loan notification is received. In this case, too, it is conceivable to associate and store the loan information with the total score information. For example, when a loan notification is received, the loan points and the total score may be associated and stored. In other words, even if loan notifications are received continuously every 300 ms, all of the loan notification information for every 300 ms may be stored.

The sub-control board P12 may also be configured to store history information periodically, not just when an error occurs. In this case, it is also conceivable that the loan information and the total score information are stored in association with each other. For example, the game media number control board P16 periodically (e.g., every 60 seconds, every 180 seconds, etc.) transmits total score information to the main control board P15, the main control board P15 transmits the received total score information to the sub-control board P12, and the sub-control board P12 stores the received total score information in association with time information.

By configuring it in this way, even if there is no event that triggers the storage of history information, such as when an error occurs, the sub-control board P12 can periodically associate and store total score information, time information, etc., making it possible to store history information for fraud that does not use the counting switch P7 or the loan switch, and this history information can be used to determine whether or not fraud has occurred.

The sub-control board P12 may also make its own error judgment even if it does not receive an error command. For example, it may judge that an error has occurred if a command related to a loan notification or a command related to a counting notification is received twice within 300 ms. This is because the communication between the game media count control board P16 and the loan unit is configured to receive or transmit a loan notification or counting notification once every 300 ms, and if it is received or transmitted twice within 300 ms, it can be said that the communication is not normal.

In this case, when the sub-control board P12 receives a command related to a loan notification or a command related to a count notification from the main control board P15, the sub-control board P12 sets a timer equivalent to 300 ms, and if it determines that the next time it receives a command related to a loan notification or a command related to a count notification is within 300 ms, it issues a notification indicating an error (for example, displaying "Please check the total score" on the LCD, turning on a lamp in a lighting pattern corresponding to an abnormality, or outputting an audio message saying "An abnormality has been detected"). This abnormality determination method can be a method in which a timer equivalent to 300 ms is set for each command received (if the interval between interrupt processing of the sub-control board P12 is 1 ms, a count value of "299" is set as a timer equivalent to 300 ms), and the timer is periodically (for example, for each interrupt) decremented to determine whether the timer is 0 when a command is received, and if it is determined that the timer is 0, it is determined that the operation is normal, and if it is determined that the timer is not 0, it is determined that the operation is abnormal. However, this is not limited to this embodiment, and a method in which the timer is initialized to 0 and the timer is incremented may also be used.

By configuring it in this way, for example, it becomes possible for the sub-control board P12 to store information such as "At xx year, xx month, xx day, xx hour, xx minute, xx second, a counting notification abnormality occurred while waiting to play, the counting points at that time were 50, and the total points were 2000." Even if the game media count control board P16 is unable to send an error command due to fraud, the sub-control board P12 can determine the error, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is able to prevent fraud.

The sub-control board P12 may also determine that an abnormality has occurred if it receives multiple (e.g., 10) consecutive loan notifications every 300 ms. If an abnormality has been determined, it will issue a warning indicating the abnormality (e.g., displaying "Please check your total score" on the LCD, lighting the lamps in a lighting pattern corresponding to the abnormality, or outputting an audio message saying "An abnormality has been detected"). By configuring in this way, even if the main control board P15 or the game media count control board P16 does not determine that an abnormality has occurred, if there is a possibility that a loan notification has been sent to the gaming machine P in an unauthorized manner, the sub-control board P12 can determine that an abnormality has occurred, making it possible to prevent fraud and provide a safer gaming machine.

The above-mentioned unrecoverable error, input request communication error, settlement request communication error, and payout request communication error are errors that can be detected by the main control means, and the progress of the game is stopped by invalidating the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel rotation process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch. Also, when an unrecoverable error, input request communication error, settlement request communication error, or payout request communication error occurs in a situation where it is possible to switch to the setting confirmation mode, and the unrecoverable error, input request communication error, settlement request communication error, or payout request communication error has not been cleared, the setting confirmation mode will not be switched to even if the setting key switch is turned to the ON position.

This allows for the possibility of an abnormality occurring due to fraud, and by not switching to setting confirmation mode, which displays useful setting value information during an error, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent acquisition of useful information.

In addition, although a rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) and a total score upper limit abnormality are errors that can be detected by the game media count control means, when a rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) or a total score upper limit abnormality occurs, the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel rotation process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch are disabled in order to stop the progress of the game.

Although rental device connection abnormalities (VL abnormalities) and total score upper limit abnormalities can occur due to fraud, they can also occur due to equipment failure, faulty facilities, or during normal power-on procedures. Therefore, although game progress stops, it is possible to switch to setting confirmation mode by turning the setting key switch to the ON position. In other words, if a rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) or total score upper limit abnormality occurs in a situation where it is possible to switch to setting confirmation mode, and the rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) or total score upper limit abnormality has not been resolved, it is possible to switch to setting confirmation mode by turning the setting key switch to the ON position.

This makes it possible to quickly switch to setting confirmation mode and check the setting values even if a rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) or total score upper limit abnormality occurs during normal operation.

In addition to the errors mentioned above, counting may be impossible due to an error on the rental unit side. For example, if the rental unit is unable to properly receive messages sent from the gaming machine for a specified period of time after the gaming machine and rental unit start communicating, the rental unit will be unable to rent, replay, or receive counting. In this case, even if the counting switch on the gaming machine is operated, the rental unit will be unable to count, and counting information will not be stored on the card.

Since the information that the gaming machine receives from the rental unit includes a rental notification, if there is no VL abnormality, it can determine that there is a communication abnormality with the rental unit because the rental notification cannot be received. Therefore, when the gaming machine detects a state in which it cannot receive a rental notification (when rental device communication abnormality 1 is set), it can disable the function of the counting switch by determining that it has not received the rental notification a predetermined number of times (including once), and it can prevent the counting notification from being sent to the rental unit. This makes it possible to prevent the gaming machine from sending a counting notification with a counted medal number other than 0 when the rental unit cannot receive the counting notification.

<Counting process>
Next, the counting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The counting control start process in FIG. 28 (synonymous with the counting control process described above) is a process that mainly outputs a counting notification from the gaming machine to the rental unit. Specifically, it is one of the processes executed by the timer interrupt process of the gaming media number control board P16. The cycle of the timer interrupt process of the gaming media number control board P16 is 1 ms.

"Count button check" is a process that sets the count button state. The count button check process is explained with reference to Figure 52.

The count button check process is a process for not counting 50 as a count point even if the count notification timing comes after the count button is released in a situation where multiple long presses have been determined in the count process, and is a process that is executed in place of the count execution flag process described above. In other words, processes such as saving the count button state associated with the count button check process are not necessary when using counting process using the count execution flag. Also, if you want to execute a process for not counting 50 as a count point even if the count notification timing comes after the count button is released in a situation where multiple long presses have been determined in the count process, execute processes such as saving the count button state associated with the count button check process, and do not execute processes related to the count execution flag.

"Get count button state" gets the value corresponding to the count button state stored in the count button state memory area (stores in A register). The values corresponding to the count button state stored in the count button state memory area are "0", which indicates that the count button is not pressed, "1", which indicates that the count button is pressed briefly, "2", which indicates that the count button is pressed and held (first time), and "3", which indicates that the count button is pressed and held (second time or later).

"Count button state = 1?" determines whether the count button state = 1 or not, and if the count button state = 1, executes the "Clear count button timer" process.

"Count button state = 2?" determines whether the count button state = 2 or not, and if the count button state = 2, executes the "Clear count button timer" process.

"Count button signal on?" determines whether the count button is pressed or not, and if the count button is not pressed, executes the "Count button state = 0 set" process.

"Count button state ≠ 0?" determines whether the count button state ≠ 0, and if the count button state is not 0 (normally, the count button state is 3), executes the "Clear count button timer" process.

"Counting execution timer +1" executes a process to add 1 to the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area. In addition, in "Counting execution timer +1", if the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area exceeds 500, the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area is corrected to 500, and if the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area is less than 500, the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area is added by 1.

"Count button timer < 500?" determines whether the value stored in the count execution timer memory area, which is incremented by "Count execution timer + 1", is less than 500, and if it is less than 500, the count button check process ends. When the count button timer is less than 500, it means that 500 ms have not yet elapsed since the count button was pressed, and it is the situation before it is determined that the count button was pressed and held down.

"Count button state = 2 set" executes a process to store "2" in the A register if the value stored in the count execution timer memory area added by "Count execution timer + 1" is 500 or more.

"Save count button state" executes a process to store the value of the A register in the count button state storage area. A value corresponding to the count button state is stored in the A register, and in the count button check process, count button state = 0, count button state = 1, count button state = 2 can be set.

"Count button timer clear" executes a process to initialize (set to 0) the value of the count execution timer memory area.

"Set count button state = 0" is a process that is executed when the count button is not pressed in "Count button signal on?", and executes the process of storing "0" in the A register.

"Counting button timer = 0?" is a process that determines whether the value of the counting execution timer memory area is 0 or not. If the value of the counting execution timer memory area is 0, the "save counting button state" process sets the counting button state to 0, and if the value of the counting execution timer memory area is not 0, "counting button state = 1 set" is executed.

"Count button state = 1 set" executes a process to store "1" in the A register. This process can be executed when the count button is pressed with count button state = 0, the count execution timer is counting, and the count button is released before the count value of the count execution timer reaches 500. In other words, this process can be executed when the count button is pressed briefly.

When "Clear count button timer" is executed, "Count button check" ends and the process returns to the count control start process, where "Count notification timing?" is executed.

"Count notification timing?" determines whether it is the timing to output a count notification to the rental unit. Specifically, it makes the determination based on the value of a memory area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A, which will be described later. If the value stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is "200" (in other words, when 100 ms have elapsed since the gaming machine information notification was output), it is determined to be the timing to output a count notification to the rental unit (YES); if the value stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is not "200", it is determined to be NO.

"Clear count medal count" clears (to 0) the count point memory area (_CT_CAL_VAL) capable of storing the count points to be counted, which is the RWM area of the game media count control board P16. Note that the data stored in the count cumulative point memory area (_CT_CAL_ALL) capable of storing the count cumulative points is not cleared at this timing.

"Clear counting flag" clears (to 0) the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE), which indicates whether or not counting is in progress and is located in the RWM area of the game media count control board P16.

"VL abnormality flag ≠ 0?" determines whether the connection between the gaming machine and the rental unit is normal. Specifically, if the VL abnormality flag (_FL_VL_ABN), which is the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16, is a value indicating normal (e.g., "0"), it is determined as NO, and if the VL abnormality flag is a value indicating abnormality (e.g., "FFh"), it is determined as YES. The VL abnormality flag is a flag that is updated by the execution of the timer interrupt process of the gaming media count control board P16. If there is input data for the VL signal from the rental unit (if the gaming machine and the rental unit are electrically connected), a value indicating normality is stored in the VL abnormality flag, and if there is no input data for the VL signal from the rental unit (if the gaming machine and the rental unit are not electrically connected), a value indicating abnormality is stored in the VL abnormality flag.

"Total score = 0?" determines whether the total score (total points) is 0 or not based on the total score memory area (_NB_MEDAL), which is the RWM area of the game media count control board P16 and can store the total score. If the total score is 0, the result is YES. If the total score is not 0, the result is NO. Note that if it is determined that a value indicating an abnormality is stored in the VL abnormality flag, a counting notification is output without determining the total score.

"Counting execution flag = 1?" determines whether the counting execution flag is "1". As described above, the counting execution flag is a flag that manages whether a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7, or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. For example, a counting execution flag memory area (_FL_CAL_ACT) that manages the counting execution flag is provided in the RWM area of the game media number control board P16, and when the value stored in the counting execution flag memory area is "0" (when the counting execution flag is 0), it indicates a situation in which it has not yet been determined whether a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7, or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. When the value stored in the counting execution flag memory area is "1" (when the counting execution flag is 1), it indicates a situation in which it has been determined that a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. When the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area is "2" (when the counting execution flag is 2), it indicates a situation in which it has been determined that a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. Therefore, when "Counting execution flag = 1?" returns YES, it means that the counting execution flag storage area is "1" (when it has stored that a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7). Specifically, to determine whether the counting execution flag is "1", the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area is stored in the A register, and the value of the A register is compared with "1". If they are the same value, the result is YES. Note that a detailed method for generating the counting execution flag will be explained in "Counting execution flag setting" below.

"Counting execution flag = 0?" determines whether the counting execution flag is "0." Specifically, if the counting execution flag storage area is "0" (it has not been determined whether a short press operation or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7), it is determined as YES.

When the count button check process is adopted as described above, "Count execution flag = 1?" is replaced with "Count button state = 1?" and "Count execution flag = 0?" is replaced with "Count button state = 0?". As with the count execution flag, "Count points = 50 sets" is executed when "Count button state = 1" and not "Count button state = 0".

"Set count point = 50" sets the count point to 50 (specifically stores 50 in the A register).

"Total score >= Count score?" executes a calculation (subtraction calculation) that compares the total score with 50 (the value stored in the A register).

"Get total score" stores the total score in the A register. In other words, it is a process that updates the value of the A register from "50" to "total score". This process is executed when "Total score >= Count points?" returns NO, in other words, when it is determined that 50 is greater than the total score (when the total score is less than 50).

"Counting points storage" is a process for storing counting points in a counting point storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) that is an RWM area of the game media count control board P16 and that can store counting points that are the subject of counting. Specifically, it is a process for storing the value of the A register in the counting point storage area. For example, if "Counting execution flag = 1?" is YES, the value of the A register is "1", so "1" is stored in the counting point storage area. Also, if "Total points ≧ counting points?" is YES, the value of the A register is "50", so "50" is stored in the counting point storage area. Furthermore, if "Total points ≧ counting points?" is NO, the value of the A register is "total points", so "total points" is stored in the counting point storage area. In this way, when a short press operation is received as the operation of the counting switch P7, the counting point can be derived using the value in the counting execution flag storage area, simplifying the process (no need to set the counting point to "1"). Note that when a short press operation is received as the operation of the counting switch P7, a process of setting the counting point to "1" may be executed without using the value in the counting execution flag storage area.

As described above, when a short press operation is received as the operation of counting switch P7, the count point is "1", when a long press operation is received as the operation of counting switch P7 and the total score is 50 or more, the count point is "50", and when a long press operation is received as the operation of counting switch P7 and the total score is less than 50, the count point is "total score". In other words, the maximum number of count points that can be counted in one go (one count notification) is 50.

In addition, in the counting process, it may be configured to first determine whether the counting switch P7 has been operated (whether the counting execution flag is other than 0), and if the counting switch P7 has been operated (if the counting execution flag is other than 0), determine whether the total score is 0 or not, and not determine whether the total score is 0 or not if the counting switch P7 has not been operated.

In this configuration, the probability of the total score being 0 is higher (the time it occurs is longer) than the probability of the counting switch P7 being operated, so by first determining whether the counting switch P7 is operated, the processing time is shorter than by first determining whether the total score is 0.

"Update total score" stores the value obtained by subtracting the count points from the total score in the total score storage area. In other words, the total score is updated according to the count points before the count notification is output.

"Update counting cumulative points" adds the counting points to the counting cumulative points memory area (_CT_CAL_ALL) that can store the counting cumulative points, which is the RWM area of the game medium count control board P16, and updates the counting cumulative points memory area (_CT_CAL_ALL) that can store the counting cumulative points.

"Set counting flag" sets the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) (stores "FF") since it is determined that the counting point will be "1" or more. In other words, if the counting point is "0", the counting flag is not set.

"Count notification output" outputs a count notification to the lending unit. Specifically, it outputs 0x07 as the message length, outputs 0x02 as the command, outputs the count serial number stored in the count serial number storage area (_NB_CAL_NUM) that stores the count serial number, which is the RWM area of the game medium count control board P16, outputs the count point stored in the count point storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) that can store the count point, outputs the count cumulative point stored in the count cumulative point storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL) that can store the count cumulative point, and outputs the checksum value (1 byte) of the various data output.

"Counting serial number update" executes the process of updating the counting serial number (increasing by +1). Note that when the counting serial number is 255, the result of adding +1 is 0, so if it becomes 0 (if it is determined to be 0), the process of updating the counting serial number (increasing by +1) is executed again. In other words, when the counting serial number is 255, the process of updating the counting serial number is executed twice to update the counting serial number to 1. Also, when the counting serial number is a value less than 255 (for example, 10), the result of executing the process of updating the counting serial number (increasing by +1) does not become 0, so the process of updating the counting serial number can be executed only once to update the counting serial number (for example, to 11).

"Counting execution flag clear" is a process that clears (e.g., to 0) the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area. By configuring it in this way, the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area can be reset to an initial value (e.g., 0) each time the counting control start process is executed (every 300 ms period). In other words, even if "0" is output as the count point of the counting notification when the VL abnormality flag is not 0 (when the VL abnormality flag is ON) or when the total score is 0, the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area can be reset to an initial value (e.g., 0). Note that the counting control start process does not clear the value of the timer area (counting execution timer storage area (_TM_CAL_ACT) described later) that measures the time that the counting switch P7 is operated.

As described above, if the count button check process is adopted, "Count execution flag clear" is not executed, but "Count button status < 2?" is executed. Conversely, if the count execution flag process is adopted, "Count button status < 2?" is not executed.

"Counting button state < 2?" is a process that determines whether the counting button state stored in the counting button state storage area is less than 2.

If it determines that the count button state is less than 2 (count button state = 0, or count button state = 1), it clears the value stored in the count button state memory area (sets count button state = 0), and if it determines that the count button state is not less than 2 (count button state = 2, or count button state = 3), it saves 3 in the count button state memory area (sets count button state = 3).

As described above, when processing related to the counting button state is executed, if the counting button is released after the counting process related to a long press has been performed one or more times (after counting 50 one or more times as the count point and before the next count notification timing), the counting button check process sets the counting button state to 0, so the counting control start process does not set the count point to 50, but rather sets the count point to 0 and sends a count notification. In other words, since no counting occurs after the counting process related to a long press has been performed one or more times and then the counting button is released, processing can be executed based on the player's operation, eliminating dissatisfaction with the game specifications.

In addition, if the count button is pressed for 500 ms or more and a count point of 50 has not yet been sent as a count notification, the count button state becomes 2, so the count control start process sets the count point to 50 and sends a count notification. In other words, since a player who presses the count button for 500 ms or more is a player who wants to count 50, even if the count button is released after being pressed for 500 ms or more but before the count notification is sent, a count point of 50 can be sent as a count notification, so processing can be executed based on the player's operation, and dissatisfaction with the game specifications can be eliminated.

In the above description, each memory area is provided in the RWM of the game media count control board P16, but in the case of a gaming machine P that does not have a game media count control board P16, the memory areas may be provided in the RWM of the main control board P15.

In addition, information based on the counting in progress flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) is sent to the main control board P15. This allows the main control board P15 to understand that counting is in progress. Also, for example, by sending information indicating that counting is in progress from the main control board P15 to the performance control board, the performance control board can perform a performance that corresponds to the time when counting is in progress.

Here, the state of the count points depending on the pressing and releasing timing of count switch P7 will be explained using Figures 40 to 43. Note that T1, T2, T3, T4, and T5 in Figures 40 to 43 all indicate count notification timing, and count notifications are sent to the rental unit every 300 ms. Also, Figures 40 to 43 show the count value for a long press as "50", but if the total score is less than 50 points, the total score value becomes the count value (for example, if the total score is 30 points, the count value becomes "30").

Figure 40 is a diagram explaining the counting process that is executed when the timing at which the counting switch P7 is released from a state in which the counting switch P7 is pressed and held by the player precedes the timing of the count notification.

In Figure 40, counting switch P7 is pressed at timing S1, and released at timing S2, when 500 ms or more (700 ms) have elapsed since the long press determination is made. The counting execution flag becomes 2 at timing F1, 500 ms after S1, and becomes 0 at timing F2 (T4), which is the count notification timing after timing S2.

In FIG. 40, the counting switch P7, which has been pressed for 500 ms or more, is released at the timing of S2, which is before the timing of T4. However, by maintaining the counting execution flag at 2, the counting process due to the long press (counting process using the count value "50") can be executed at the timing of T4, so the player's operation can be reflected without wasting the pressing time from T3 to S2.

Figure 41 is a diagram explaining the counting process that is executed when the player presses and holds the counting switch P7, then releases it, and then presses and releases it again before the next count notification timing.

In FIG. 41, the counting switch P7 is pressed at the timing of S1, and is released at the timing of S2 when 500 ms or more (700 ms) have elapsed since the long press determination is made, and the counting switch P7 is pressed again at the timing of S3 before the next count notification timing of T4, and is released at the timing of S4 before T4. The counting execution flag becomes 2 at the timing of F1 when 500 ms have elapsed since S1, and becomes 0 at the timing of F2 (T4), which is the count notification timing after the timing of S2.

In FIG. 41, counting switch P7 is pressed for a short time between the time S2 when counting switch P7 is released after being pressed for 500 ms or more and the time T4 when the next count notification occurs (counting switch P7 is pressed at S3 and released 50 ms later at S4), but the counting execution flag does not become 1 even at times S3 and S4, but remains 2, and the count value at time T4 is "50". In this way, even if there is a short press after a long press, counting processing due to the long press can be performed, so it is possible to send the count value due to the long press to the rental unit at the count notification timing even if there is an erroneous operation or noise after the long press.

At the timing of T3 in FIG. 41, the count execution flag is set to 2 due to the long press of count switch P7, so the count value is "50". Then, because count switch P7 continues to be pressed, the count value "50" is output to the rental unit at the timing of T3, after which the count execution flag becomes 0. In the next interrupt process, the count execution timer is "500", so the count execution flag becomes 2 again.

Figure 42 is a diagram explaining the counting process that is executed when the player presses and holds down the counting switch P7, then releases it, and then presses and releases it again before the next count notification timing.

In FIG. 42, the counting switch P7 is pressed at the timing of S1, and is released at the timing of S2 when 500 ms or more (700 ms) have elapsed since the long press determination is made. The counting switch P7 is pressed again at the timing of S3 before the next count notification timing of T4, and is released at the timing of S4 before crossing over T4 and reaching T5. The counting execution flag becomes 2 at the timing of F1 when 500 ms have elapsed since S1, and becomes 0 at the timing of F2 (T4) which is the count notification timing after the timing of S2. The counting execution flag becomes 1 at the timing of S4 when the counting switch P7 is released before 500 ms have elapsed since the timing of S3, and becomes 0 at the timing of F4 (T5) which is the count notification timing after the timing of S4.

In Figure 42, the counting switch P7 is pressed for a short time from the timing S2 when the counting switch P7, which has been pressed for 500 ms or more, is released until the timing T4, which is the next count notification timing (the counting switch P7 is pressed at the timing S3 and released 200 ms later at the timing S4), but the counting execution flag remains 2 even at the timing S3, and the count value at the timing T4 is "50". Also, when the counting switch P7 is released at the timing S4 between the timing T4 and the timing T5, which is before 500 ms has elapsed since S3, the requirement for a short press of the counting switch P7 pressed at the timing S3 is met, so the counting execution flag becomes 1 at the timing S4 (F3), and the count value at the timing T5, which is the count notification timing, is "1". In this way, even if a long press is followed by a short press, the counting process for the long press can be performed, and if the time during which the short press is performed crosses over the count notification timing, the counting process for the short press can be performed. Therefore, even if the player performs a short press after a long press, the counting process for the long press and the short press can be performed, and control can be performed in line with the player's operational intentions.

At the timing of T3 in FIG. 42, the count execution flag is set to 2 due to the long press of count switch P7, so the count value is "50". Then, because count switch P7 continues to be pressed, the count value "50" is output to the rental unit at the timing of T3, after which the count execution flag becomes 0. In the next interrupt process, the count execution timer is "500", so the count execution flag becomes 2 again.

Figure 43 is a diagram explaining the counting process that is executed when the player releases the counting switch P7 at the timing of a short press and then presses the counting switch P7 again before the next count notification timing.

In Figure 43, the counting switch P7 is pressed at the timing of S1, and is released at the timing of S2 50 ms later, and is pressed again at the timing of S3 before the next count notification timing of T4, and is released at the timing of S4 before T5 across T3 and T4. The counting execution flag becomes 1 at the timing of F1 50 ms after S1 (the timing of S2 when the counting switch P7 is released 50 ms after being pressed at the timing of S1), and remains 1 at the timing of S3 before the timing of T3 which is the count notification timing after the timing of S2, and becomes 0 at the timing of T3 (F2). Furthermore, at the timing of T4, which is 300 ms after T3, 500 ms have not yet passed since the timing of S3 when the counting switch P7 was pressed again, and the counting switch P7 remains pressed, so the counting execution flag is 0. Furthermore, at the timing of F3, which is 500 ms after the timing of S3 when the counting switch P7 was pressed again, the counting execution flag is 2, and since the counting switch P7 is released between T4 and T5, the counting execution flag is 0 at the timing of F4 (T5).

In FIG. 43, if the counting switch P7 pressed at S1 is released at S2, which is the timing of a short press, and then pressed again at S3, which is before the next count notification timing T3, the counting process for the short press count value "1" is executed at T3. However, since the counting execution timer has been counting since S3, before T3, the counting process for the count value "50" can be executed at T5, even if the counting switch P7 is released at S4. In this way, even if a long press occurs after a short press, counting processing can be performed for both short presses and long presses, and the counting execution timer for determining a long press counts from the timing of pressing counting switch P7, which is a long press, so even if a player performs a long press after a short press, counting processing for a long press and a short press can be performed, and the counting execution timer for determining a long press can start counting at timing S3 when counting switch P7 is pressed, which is before timing F2 when the short press counting processing is performed, so control can be performed in line with the player's operational intentions.

Next, I will explain the effects that occur during counting.

As described above, when the counting switch P7 is operated and counting is in progress (when counting), information based on the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) is sent to the main control board P15, making it possible for the performance control board to provide a performance that corresponds to the time when counting is in progress. Examples of performances that correspond to the time when counting are performances that use sound and/or images.

In addition, as a corresponding effect during counting, the length of the effect output can be varied according to the number of count points (referred to as one count point) counted by one operation (including a long press operation, etc.) of the counting switch P7. When configured in this way, the length of the effect differs according to the amount of count points based on the operation of the counting switch P7, making it possible to add joy to the act of accumulating and counting the total points.

As mentioned above, the maximum number of points that can be counted in one count notification (one cycle) is "50", and the cycle for outputting the count notification is approximately 0.3 seconds.

The following is an example of the length of the effect depending on the number of count points counted by one operation of counting switch P7 (including a long press operation, etc.).

Example 1) When the count point is "25" for one time Since the count point is greater than "0" and less than "50", a uniform effect of about 0.3 seconds (0.3 seconds x 1) is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x 1) indicates the number of count notifications to count all the count points. The same applies below.

Example 2) When the counting point for one time is "50" Because the counting point is "50", a performance of approximately 0.3 seconds (0.3 seconds x 1) is executed.

Example 3) When the count point is "130" in one time Since the count point is greater than "100" and less than "150", a performance of about 0.9 seconds is executed, which is 0.3 seconds x 3. Note that the coefficient (here, x 3) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points.

Example 4) When the count point is "1480" Because the count point is greater than "1450" and less than or equal to "1500", a performance of about 9 seconds is executed, which is 0.3 seconds x 30. The coefficient (here, x 30) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points.

In addition, as a corresponding effect during counting, the type of effect output can be varied according to the number of points (total points) that can be counted with one operation of the counting switch P7. When configured in this way, the type and/or length of the effect varies according to the amount of count points based on the operation of the counting switch P7, making it possible to add joy to the act of accumulating and counting the total points. When configured in this way, for example, it is conceivable that information from the total points memory area (_NB_MEDAL) in which the total points can be stored can be sent to the main control means so that the main control board P15 and/or the effect control board can grasp the number of points (total points) that can be counted with one operation of the counting switch P7.

For example, when the counting switch P7 is operated to count when the total score is less than "500", effect A can be executed as the corresponding effect during counting, when the counting switch P7 is operated to count when the total score is between "500" and "1000", effect B can be executed as the corresponding effect during counting, and when the counting switch P7 is operated to count when the total score is "1000" or more, effect C can be executed as the corresponding effect during counting.

Below are examples of the difference in the number of points counted per operation of counting switch P7 (including a long press operation, etc.), and the effects that result from the difference in the total score.

Example 1) When the total score is "25" and the count points for one time are "25" Since the total score is less than "500" and the count points are greater than "0" and less than "50", a uniform performance A of about 0.3 seconds (0.3 seconds x 1) is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x 1) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points.

Example 2) When the total score is "300" and the count points for one time are "50" Since the total score is less than "500" and the count points are "50", the performance A is executed for about 0.3 seconds, which is 0.3 seconds x 1. The coefficient (here, x 1) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points.

Example 3) When the total score is "300" and the count points for one time are "150" Since the total score is less than "500" and the count points are greater than "100" and less than or equal to "150", the performance A is executed for about 0.9 seconds, which is 0.3 seconds x 3. The coefficient (here, x 3) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points.

Example 4) When the total score is "700" and the count points per time are "150" Since the total score is between "500" and "1000" and the count points are between "100" and "150", the performance B is executed for about 0.9 seconds (0.3 seconds x 3). Note that the coefficient (here, x 3) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points.

Example 5) When the total score is "700" and the count points for one time are "700" Since the total score is between "500" and "1000" and the count points are between "650" and "700", the performance B is executed for about 4.2 seconds, which is 0.3 seconds x 14. The coefficient (here, x 14) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points.

Example 6) When the total score is "2000" and the count points for one time are "700" Since the total score is "1000" or more and the count points are greater than "650" and less than or equal to "700", the performance C is executed for about 4.2 seconds, which is 0.3 seconds x 14. The coefficient (here, x 14) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points.

Example 7) When the total score is "2000" and the count points for one time are "2000" Since the total score is "1000" or more and the count points are greater than "1950" and less than "2000", the performance C is executed for about 12.0 seconds, which is 0.3 seconds x 40. The coefficient (here, x 40) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points.

In this way, even if the counting points are the same, the total points are different as in example 5) and example 6), so the presentation that is output can be controlled to be different. Also, even if the total points are the same, if the counting points for one time are different, the length of the presentation that is output can be controlled to be different even if the presentation is the same as in example 6) and example 7).

If the player stops operating the counting switch P7 while the total points are being counted (partway through), one round of counting may end without counting all of the total points, as in Example 6). In other words, after enjoying the presentation during the counting up to a certain point, the player can stop operating the counting switch P7, and then operate the counting switch P7 again, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the presentation during the counting once more.

In this embodiment, one counting switch P7 is provided, and the maximum counting point by counting notification is set to "50", but a separate counting switch P7 may be provided to count the total points all at once.

In addition, in this embodiment, the counting is performed when the counting switch P7 is operated, but it is also possible to count all stored total points on the condition that the counting switch P7 is operated for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the counting is performed when the counting switch P7 is operated, but for example, if the counting switch P7 is operated for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) and the counting switch P7 is still operated thereafter, the counting may be performed in predetermined units (e.g., "50"). Note that although 50 is used as the predetermined unit, this is only one example. For example, if the remaining total points are 38 points and the counting switch P7 is operated, "38" will be counted.

In this embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is possible even during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. However, if the counting switch P7 is operated under circumstances in which points can be bet, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may be executed, and if the counting switch P7 is operated during the setting change mode and/or the setting confirmation mode, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that when the counting switch P7 is operated during the setting change mode and/or the setting confirmation mode, it is highly likely that a hall attendant is counting (and not a player).

In other words, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during the setting change mode and/or during the setting confirmation mode, the necessary information can be provided to the hall staff by continuing to display a dedicated screen for the setting change mode and/or during the setting confirmation mode on the image display device and continuing to output audio. Note that a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, "Counting in progress" may be displayed on the screen) may be given while displaying the dedicated screen for the setting change mode and/or during the setting confirmation mode. This notification is configured to be different from the presentation during counting described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is possible even during an error (which may be a predetermined (predetermined) portion of the error, or all errors). However, if the counting switch P7 is operated in a situation where points can be bet on, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may be executed, and if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, there is a high possibility that cheating is occurring.

In other words, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, the necessary information can be provided to the hall staff by continuing to display the dedicated error screen on the image display device and continuing to output audio. Note that a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, "Counting in progress" may be displayed on the screen) may be made while the dedicated error screen is displayed. This notification is configured to be different from the presentation during counting described above. Note that the system may be configured so that the number of bets cannot be settled using the settlement switch P6 at this time.

The types of errors include recoverable errors that can be recovered from by operating the reset switch (such as the above-mentioned "deposit request communication error," "settlement request communication error," and "payout request communication error"), and unrecoverable errors that cannot be recovered from even by operating the reset switch (they can be recovered from by initialization processing such as changing settings). The counting process may be enabled by operating the counting switch P7 during a recoverable error, and the counting process may be disabled by operating the counting switch P7 during an unrecoverable error. With this configuration, counting process is enabled for recoverable errors that may occur during normal operation, and counting process is disabled for unrecoverable errors that are more suspicious of fraud than recoverable errors, resulting in fairer play.

In addition, in this embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is possible even during play (for example, while the reels are spinning). However, if the counting switch P7 is operated under conditions in which points can be bet, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may be executed, and if the counting switch P7 is operated during play, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that if the counting switch P7 is operated during play, there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity is occurring.

In other words, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, the necessary information can be provided to the hall staff by continuing to display the dedicated error screen on the image display device and continuing to output audio. Note that while displaying the dedicated error screen, a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, "Counting in progress" may be displayed on the screen) may also be given. This notification is configured to be different from the presentation during counting described above.

Note that the situations in which counting processing can be performed and gameplay is possible include waiting for gameplay to start, playing, and during an error that allows gameplay to proceed, while the situations in which counting processing is optional and gameplay is not possible include during initial setup after power-on, during settings change, during settings confirmation, and during an error that prevents gameplay from proceeding. However, if counting processing were to be made executable in a situation in which the gaming machine is powered on but the rental unit is not powered on, it is possible that the number of counted medals will not be stored in the rental unit, and therefore counting processing cannot be performed in these situations.

During game standby (when a game is not being played), the volume of the effect sound during play may be selected from multiple levels by operating a switch (e.g., a sub switch). For example, the volume may be selected from five levels from volume 1 to volume 5, with volume 1 being the lowest sound output of the effect sound and volume 5 being the highest sound output of the effect sound. In this configuration, a specific effect sound (e.g., the voice of the dialogue effect, background music during normal play, background music during AT, background music during BB, ready-to-win sound, etc.) is output at a volume corresponding to the selected effect sound, but it is preferable that the effect sound output during counting is output at the same volume regardless of which of volumes 1 to 5 is selected. Specifically, after selecting volume 1, even if a player is counting in an illegal manner, by preventing the effect sound output during counting from being output at a low volume, it is possible to restrain a player who is counting in an illegal manner. Furthermore, even for regular players, the time when counting is a blissful moment, so even when the volume is set to 1, by outputting the sound at the same volume as when the volume is set to another volume, the player other than the one counting will also be drawn to the attention of other players, which can increase the player's interest in counting.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine P transmits a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit every 300 ms, but this is not limited to this and the notification may be sent at any timing within the range of 300 ms to 310 ms. However, the notification is not sent with a random value each time it is sent, but with a predetermined value.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine P transmits the counting notification to the rental unit 100 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification, but this is not limited to this and the notification may be transmitted at any timing within the range of 90 ms to 100 ms. However, the value is not random each time it is transmitted, but is a predetermined value.

Next, gaming machine information management will be described with reference to FIG.
The gaming machine information management is a control for transmitting a gaming machine information notification from the gaming machine P to the rental unit, and Fig. 30 is one subroutine in the timer interrupt processing controlled by the gaming media number control board P16. In other words, the gaming machine information management is executed every time the timer interrupt processing is executed (at a period of 1 ms).

First, let us explain the various terms used in Figure 30.

Gaming machine information notification timer A is a timer for measuring 300 ms. Two bytes of the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16 are used as the memory area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A. The memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is initialized to store an initial value ("0") when the power is turned on (ON).

Gaming machine information notification timer B is a timer for measuring 60 seconds. One byte is used in the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16 as the memory area (_TM_INF_CTL_B) for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B. The memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B is initialized to store an initial value ("0") when the power is turned on (ON).

The gaming machine information notification timer C is a timer for measuring 180 seconds. One byte is used in the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16 as the memory area (_TM_INF_CTL_C) for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C. The memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C is initialized to store an initial value ("0") when the power is turned on (ON).

The gaming machine performance information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the period for transmitting gaming machine performance information in the gaming machine information notification arrives. The memory area for storing the gaming machine performance information notification request flag uses the D0th bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL), which is a 1-byte memory area in the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16.

The gaming machine installation information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the period for transmitting gaming machine installation information among the gaming machine information notifications arrives. The memory area for storing the gaming machine installation information notification request flag uses the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL), which is a 1-byte memory area in the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16.

The gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is initialized when the power is turned on, and the initial value ("0") is stored (each bit becomes "0").

Next, the control process at each step will be explained using Figure 30.

"Gaming machine information notification timer A -1" is a calculation process that subtracts 1 from the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A. If the calculation process results in a carryover (if a calculation process that subtracts is executed while gaming machine information notification timer A is at "0" (also referred to as when it becomes less than "0")), the count value can be stored in gaming machine information notification timer A by storing "300" in gaming machine information notification timer A.

As described above, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt period of the gaming media number control board P16 is 1 ms, so by storing "300" as the count value in the gaming machine information notification timer A, it is possible to count 300 ms. However, this is not limited to this. If the timer interrupt period of the gaming media number control board P16 is 2 ms, the gaming machine information notification timer A can store "150" as the count value, and if the timer interrupt period of the gaming media number control board P16 is 2.235 ms, the gaming machine information notification timer A can store any value between "135" and "138" as the count value. In this way, if it is not divisible, any value between 300 ms and 310 ms can be set as the timing for sending the gaming machine information notification.

Here, "gaming machine information notification timer A-1" may cause the zero flag and carry flag of the flag register (also called the F register) of the CPU to become "1". The zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the result of the calculation process is "0". On the other hand, the carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the result of the calculation process is less than "0".

Below, we will explain the zero flag and carry flag using specific numerical examples.

Example 1) In the gaming machine information management executed when "10" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A, 1 is subtracted to make it "9." At this time, the zero flag and the carry flag do not change (they become "0").
Example 2) In the gaming machine information management executed when "1" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A, 1 is subtracted to make it "0". At this time, the zero flag becomes "1". On the other hand, the carry flag does not change (it becomes "0").
Example 3) When "0" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A, subtracting 1 makes it "300". At this time, the zero flag does not change (it becomes "0"). On the other hand, the carry flag becomes "1".

The DCPWLD instruction is an example of an operation instruction for the above-mentioned "gaming machine information notification timer A -1". The DCPWLD instruction is an instruction to store a predetermined value when the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtracting 1. In the above-mentioned embodiment, the predetermined value is "300".

Next, "Timer value before update = 0?" determines whether the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming machine information notification timer A -1" was "0". For example, when the carry flag after executing "Gaming machine information notification timer A -1" is "1", it can be determined that the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming machine information notification timer A -1" was "0" (the result of the determination of "Timer value before update = 0?" is YES). On the other hand, when the carry flag after executing "Gaming machine information notification timer A -1" is "0", it can be determined that the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming machine information notification timer A -1" was not "0" (the result of the determination of "Timer value before update = 0?" is NO).

If the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" was "0" (if the result of the judgment of "Timer value before update = 0?" is YES), "Send Hall Control/Fraud Monitoring Information" is executed. Note that the case where the result is YES in this step is when gaming machine information management is executed in the first interrupt processing after the power is turned ON in a situation where the power is OFF. As described above, this is because the initialization processing when the power is turned ON initializes the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A and stores "0". Also, if the value before the update was "0", the carry flag is "1", so by using the DCPWLD command, which is the subtraction command described above, it is possible to simultaneously store "300" as the count value in the gaming machine information notification timer A.

Furthermore, since "Hall control/fraud monitoring information transmission" can be executed immediately after power is restored without executing the process of updating gaming machine information notification timer B or gaming machine information notification timer C, it has the effect of shortening processing time and reducing program capacity. The reason why gaming machine information notification timer B or gaming machine information notification timer C is not updated when the power is turned ON will be explained later.

Next, if the result of the check "Timer value before update = 0?" is NO, the check "Timer value before update = 1?" is performed.

"Timer value before update = 1?" determines whether the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "gaming machine information notification timer A -1" was "1".

For example, when the zero flag is "1" after executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1", it can be determined that the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" was "1" (the result of the determination of "Timer value before update = 1?" is YES). If the result of the determination of "Timer value before update = 1?" is YES, "Save gaming machine information notification timer A count value" is executed.

On the other hand, if the zero flag is "0" after executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1", it can be determined that the value of the memory area for measuring Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" was not "1" (the result of the determination of "Timer value before update = 1?" is NO).

If the value in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "gaming machine information notification timer A -1" was not "1" (if the result of the determination of "Timer value before update = 1?" is NO), gaming machine information management is terminated. Note that a situation in which the value in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "gaming machine information notification timer A -1" is "1" corresponds to a situation in which 300 interrupt processes have been executed (300 ms have passed) as a result of the measurement of gaming machine information notification timer A.

In addition, a situation in which the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "gaming machine information notification timer A -1" is not "1" means a situation in which the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is between "2" and "300", which corresponds to a situation in which gaming machine information notification timer A is currently measuring. Note that a situation in which the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "gaming machine information notification timer A -1" is not "1" also includes "0", but if it is "0", this has been determined in the previous process, so the process does not proceed to this determination process.

Next, "Saving Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A Count Value" is a process for storing "300" in a storage area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A. This process allows the "0" stored in gaming machine information notification timer A to be updated to "300". As described above, in this embodiment, "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" is executed using the DCPWLD command, so when the carry flag becomes "1", "300" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer A. However, "Saving Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A Count Value" stores "300" before gaming machine information notification timer A becomes "0" (when it becomes "1") except immediately after power-on. Therefore, except immediately after power-on, gaming machine information notification timer A will not become "0" (except in the case of an abnormality), so the count value is stored in this process.

Next, "clear response permission flag" is a process that clears the value of the response permission flag storage area to 0. The response permission flag will be explained later.

Next, "clear communication error 1 flag" is a process that clears the value of the communication error 1 flag storage area to 0. Communication error 1 means rental device communication error 1.

Next, "If loan notification reception counter ≠ 1, set communication error 1 flag" refers to a process that sets the value of the communication error 1 flag storage area to 1 when the value of the loan notification reception counter storage area is not 1 (also referred to as a process related to communication error 1). The loan notification reception counter will be described later.

Next, "Clear loan notification reception counter" is a process that clears the value in the loan notification reception counter storage area to 0. In other words, after the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to -1, the value of the loan notification reception counter is initialized and 0 is stored as the initial value.

Next, "gaming machine information notification timer B +1" is a calculation process that uses a special addition command to add 1 to the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B. This calculation process adds 1 to the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B when a value less than "199" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B, and stores "0" as the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B when a value less than "199" is not stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B (i.e., when a value of "199" is stored under normal operating conditions). A specific example is described below.

Example 1) When "0" is stored in the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B, when an arithmetic process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "1."
Example 2) When "100" is stored in the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B, when an arithmetic process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "101."
Example 3) When "199" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B, when an arithmetic process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B will become "0" instead of "200".

In this way, in "gaming machine information notification timer B +1", when "199" is stored in the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B, a calculation process using a special addition instruction that adds 1 is performed, and by executing an addition process that stores "0", it is possible to cycle between "0" and "199" as the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B. Also, the situation in which "1" is added when "199" is stored in the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B corresponds to the situation in which the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A has become "0" 200 times. In other words, gaming machine information notification timer B is incremented by 1 every time the interrupt process is executed 300 times, so this is a situation in which 300 times x 200 times (= 60,000 times) of interrupt process have been executed (300 ms x 200 times (= 60,000 ms (60 s)) have elapsed). Normally, a 3-byte memory area would be required to measure whether 60,000 interrupt processes have been executed, but by using gaming machine information notification timer A, the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer B can be reduced to 1 byte, reducing the storage capacity of the RWM.

The ICPLD instruction is an example of the calculation instruction for the special addition instruction mentioned above, "game machine information notification timer B +1."

In this embodiment, an addition command such as "gaming machine information notification timer B +1" is used, but a subtraction command may also be used. In the case of a subtraction command, the count value "200" may be stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and the command may then be executed when the count value becomes "0." Alternatively, the count value "199" may be stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and the command may then be executed when the carry flag becomes "1."

In addition, in this embodiment, an addition command is used, such as "gaming machine information notification timer B +1", so compared to a subtraction command, the process of setting an initial value can be omitted (the initial value becomes "0" due to the initialization process when the power is turned on), which has the effect of improving processing speed and reducing program capacity.

Next, "Has time passed on gaming machine information notification timer B?" is judged as YES when the count on gaming machine information notification timer B reaches 200 by "gaming machine information notification timer B +1". For example, it can be judged as YES when the value in the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "0" by "gaming machine information notification timer B +1" (when the increment command has been executed 200 times from the initial value "0"). On the other hand, it can be judged as NO when the value in the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer B does not become "0" by "gaming machine information notification timer B +1" (when the increment command has not been executed 200 times from the initial value "0").

If the result of the determination of "Gaming machine information notification timer B time elapsed?" is NO, execute "Gaming machine installation information notification request?".

If the result of the determination of "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B Time Elapsed?" is YES, execute "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C +1".

Next, "gaming machine information notification timer C +1" is a calculation process that uses a special addition instruction to add 1 to the value in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C. This calculation process adds 1 to the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C when a value less than "2" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C, and stores "0" in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C when a value less than "2" is not stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B (i.e., when a value of "3" is stored under normal operating conditions). A specific example is described below.

Example 1) When "0" is stored in the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, when an arithmetic process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "1."
Example 2) When a "1" is stored in a memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, when an arithmetic process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "2".
Example 3) When "2" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C, when an arithmetic process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "0" instead of "3".

In this way, in "gaming machine information notification timer C + 1", when "2" is stored in the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C, an addition process is executed to store "0", thereby cycling between "0" and "2" as the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C. Also, the situation in which "1" is added when "2" is stored in the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C corresponds to a situation in which the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B has become "0" three times. In other words, gaming machine information notification timer B is incremented by 1 every 300 interrupt processes are executed, and the process of adding 1 to gaming machine information notification timer B has occurred three times, so 300 times x 200 times x 3 times (= 180,000 times) of interrupt processes have been executed (300 ms x 200 times x 3 times (= 180,000 ms (180 s)) has elapsed). Normally, a 3-byte memory area would be required to measure whether 180,000 interrupt processes have been executed, but by using gaming machine information notification timer A and gaming machine information notification timer B, the memory area for gaming machine information notification timer C can be reduced to 1 byte, reducing the storage capacity of the RWM.

The calculation instruction for the special addition instruction mentioned above, "gaming machine information notification timer C +1", is the ICPLD instruction, which is the same as the calculation instruction for "gaming machine information notification timer B +1".

In this embodiment, an addition command is used, such as "gaming machine information notification timer C +1", but a subtraction command may also be used. In the case of a subtraction command, a count value of "3" may be stored in a memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and the count value may then become "0", or a count value of "2" may be stored in a memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and the count value may then become "1".

In addition, in this embodiment, an addition command is used, such as "game machine information notification timer C +1", so compared to a subtraction command, the process of setting an initial value can be omitted (the initial value becomes "0" due to the initialization process when the power is turned on), which has the effect of improving processing speed and reducing program capacity.

Next, "Has time passed for gaming machine information notification timer C?" is judged as YES when the count number of gaming machine information notification timer C reaches 3 by "gaming machine information notification timer C +1". For example, it can be judged as YES when the value of the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "0" by "gaming machine information notification timer C +1" (when an increment command has been executed three times from the initial value "0"). On the other hand, it can be judged as NO when the value of the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer C does not become "0" by "gaming machine information notification timer C +1" (when an increment command has not been executed three times from the initial value "0").

If the result of the determination of "Gaming machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" is NO, execute "Gaming machine installation information notification request flag set".

If the result of the determination of "Gaming machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" is YES, execute "Gaming machine performance information notification request flag set".

Next, "Set gaming machine performance information notification request flag" refers to a control that stores "1" in bit D0 of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL). Note that, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 30, "Set gaming machine performance information notification request flag" is executed when "Has gaming machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" becomes YES. In other words, "Set gaming machine performance information notification request flag" is executed when the 180 second cycle arrives.

Next, the "gaming machine installation information notification request flag set" is a control that stores "1" in the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL). As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, the "gaming machine installation information notification request flag set" is executed when "gaming machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" is NO, and when "gaming machine performance information notification request flag set" is executed (when "gaming machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" is YES). In other words, the "gaming machine installation information notification request flag set" is executed when a 60 s period has arrived. Therefore, at the time of a period of 180 s, which is three times the period of 60 s, both the "gaming machine performance information notification request flag set" and the "gaming machine installation information notification request flag set" are executed.

In this way, the timing of sending the gaming machine installation information to the rental unit and the timing of sending the gaming machine performance information to the rental unit are managed by flags, so the process of sending the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information to the rental unit can be simplified (by linking timers corresponding to various information, it is possible to send to the rental unit without managing them individually). Furthermore, by not updating gaming machine information notification timer B and gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, the measurement start timing of the timers for sending the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information does not shift, so accurate transmission is possible. In other words, by updating only gaming machine information notification timer A when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the timing of sending the linked gaming machine information notification timer B and gaming machine information notification timer C to the rental unit from shifting without complex processing.

Next, "Main control state change?" is a process that compares the current main control state with the main control state after the hall control fraud monitoring information is sent to determine whether there has been a change in the main control state. This process is used to determine the priority of the hall control and fraud monitoring information mentioned above.

Next, "Is deposit information ≠ 0 or payout information ≠ 0?" is a process that determines whether an deposit point or a payout point is stored in the memory area that stores the deposit point or the payout point.

Next, "Amusement machine installation information notification request?" is a control that determines whether the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set. For example, if the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "1", it is determined as YES, and if the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "0", it is determined as NO.

If the result of the determination of "Request for notification of gaming machine installation information?" is NO, execute "Request for notification of gaming machine performance information?".

If the result of the determination of "Amusement machine installation information notification request?" is YES, execute "Send gaming machine installation information."

Next, "Gaming machine performance information notification request?" is a control that determines whether the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. For example, if the D0th bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "1", it is determined as YES, and if the D0th bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "0", it is determined as NO.

If the result of the determination of "Request for notification of gaming machine performance information?" is NO, execute "Send hall control and fraud monitoring information."

If the result of the determination of "Request for notification of gaming machine performance information?" is YES, execute "Send gaming machine performance information."

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, the processing sequence is to determine a "gaming machine installation information notification request?" and then a "gaming machine performance information notification request?". By using such a processing sequence, in a situation where both the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag are set (for example, a situation where a 180 s period has arrived), the "gaming machine installation information notification request?" is determined first, so that the transmission control of the gaming machine installation information can be executed before the transmission control of the gaming machine performance information. Also, by simply determining the gaming machine installation information notification request before determining the gaming machine performance information notification request, communication according to priority is possible without using complex processing.

Next, "send hall control/fraud monitoring information" corresponds to a control process that sends the above-mentioned "hall control/fraud monitoring information" to the rental unit. The content sent to the rental unit at this time is the information stored in the memory area of the RWM acquired at the time of sending. For example, the total score included in the "hall control/fraud monitoring information" is the information stored in the total score memory area (_NB_MEDAL) at the time of sending. In other words, if the original timing of sending the hall control/fraud monitoring information, which is every 300 ms, coincides with the timing of sending the gaming machine installation information, since the gaming machine installation information has a higher priority, the hall control/fraud monitoring information is not sent at that timing of 300 ms, and the hall control/fraud monitoring information is sent after the next 300 ms. Regarding this "hall control/fraud monitoring information to be sent in the next 300 ms," instead of sending the hall control/fraud monitoring information at a time that coincides with the timing of sending the gaming machine installation information, by sending the hall control/fraud monitoring information obtained at the "timing of sending the hall control/fraud monitoring information in the next 300 ms," it is possible to send the latest information even if the sending timing is off.

After the process of sending the "hall control/fraud monitoring information" to the rental unit is completed, the serial number is updated (+1). As with the counting serial number, the serial number is updated so that "0" is sent as the serial number when sending immediately after the power is restored, and thereafter any of "1" to "255" can be sent (so that it cycles through "1" to "255"). This serial number is updated when any of the three pieces of information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, is sent. In other words, since the same serial number is used for the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, the serial number is configured to be updated every 300 ms when the power is on.

When "Hall control/fraud monitoring information transmission" is completed, gaming machine information management is terminated.

Next, "send gaming machine installation information" corresponds to a control process that sends the above-mentioned "gaming machine installation information" to the rental unit. Note that the content sent at this time is the information stored in the memory area of the RWM obtained at the time of sending.

In addition, after the process for sending the "gaming machine installation information" to the rental unit is completed, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is set to "0." In addition, after the process for sending the "gaming machine installation information" to the rental unit is completed, the serial number is updated (+1).

When "sending gaming machine installation information" is complete, gaming machine information management is terminated.

Next, "transmission of gaming machine performance information" corresponds to a control process for transmitting the above-mentioned "gaming machine performance information" to the rental unit. The content transmitted at this time is the information stored in the storage area of the RWM acquired at the timing of transmission. In other words, if the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information at the transmission timing every 180 s, the gaming machine performance information is not transmitted at the timing of 180 s, and the gaming machine performance information is transmitted after the next 300 ms, since the gaming machine installation information has a higher priority. Regarding this "gaming machine performance information to be transmitted after the next 300 ms", instead of transmitting the gaming machine performance information at the time when it coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, by transmitting the gaming machine performance information acquired at the "timing to transmit gaming machine performance information after the next 300 ms", it is possible to transmit the latest information even if the transmission timing is shifted.

In addition, after the process for sending the "gaming machine performance information" to the rental unit is completed, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is set to "0." In addition, after the process for sending the "gaming machine performance information" to the rental unit is completed, the serial number is updated (+1).

When "sending gaming machine performance information" is complete, gaming machine information management is terminated.

As described above, the gaming machine information notification is configured to be able to be sent to the lending unit every 300 ms. In addition, the blinking switching timing of the winning ratio monitor is also switched every 300 ms. However, while the timer update process that measures 300 ms for sending the gaming machine information notification is sent to the lending unit using the carry flag and zero flag, the timer update process that measures 300 ms for switching the winning ratio monitor on and off is switched using only the carry flag.

This is because gaming machine information notifications can cause greater damage if they are fraudulently transmitted, so two types of flags are used to manage the information sent in order to increase its accuracy.

Next, the timing of sending gaming machine information notification (any of the following information: hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, or gaming machine performance information) after the gaming machine P is powered on will be explained with reference to FIG. 31.

Figure 31 shows the timing of sending a gaming machine information notification from the gaming media count control board P16 to the rental unit after the gaming machine P is powered on, where "Timer A" in the figure indicates "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A," "Timer B" indicates "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B," "Timer C" indicates "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C," "After startup" indicates "the first interrupt processing in the gaming media count control board P16," and "1 ms later" indicates "the next interrupt processing." Also, "Timer A = 0" indicates that the value (timer value) of gaming machine information notification timer A is 0. Also, the timer value indicates the timer value at the time of interrupt processing startup, and is a value that has not been updated. In other words, it is the value updated in the previous interrupt processing.

As mentioned above, when the device is first started, gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, and gaming machine information notification timer C are initialized, and each timer value is set to "0". Since the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "0" (the timer value before subtraction is 0), the hall control and fraud monitoring information is sent as the first gaming machine information notification. The timer values of the gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information are also "0", but since the zero flag is "0" in this case, the gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information are not sent.

Next, the timing of the second transmission of hole control and fraud monitoring information will be explained with reference to FIG. 32. Note that the wording that appears in FIG. 32 is the same as that in FIG. 31, so the explanation will be omitted.

The second time the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted, it occurs when the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "1". When the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "1" (timer value before subtraction is 1), the subtraction process causes it to become "0", causing the zero flag to become "1", the hall control/fraud monitoring information to be transmitted, and "300" to be stored in the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A. In addition, when the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0", the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "1".

Next, the timing of sending the gaming machine information notification when the timing of sending the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the gaming machine installation information coincides will be explained with reference to FIG. 33. Note that the wording that appears in FIG. 33 is the same as in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, so the explanation will be omitted.

The timing for sending hall control and fraud monitoring information is when the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored, but if the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer B changes from "199" to "0" at the same time, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag becomes "1". Therefore, in the interrupt process when the timing for sending hall control and fraud monitoring information and gaming machine installation information occurs at the same time, the gaming machine installation information is sent based on the gaming machine installation information notification request flag being "1", and the hall control and fraud monitoring information is not sent. Then, in the next interrupt process, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is "0", but because the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", the zero flag is "0", and the hall control and fraud monitoring information is not sent.

In other words, when the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the gaming machine installation information coincides, the hall control/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted because the transmission of the gaming machine installation information has a higher priority, and the hall control/fraud monitoring information will not be transmitted until the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A next time changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored (until the next 300 ms has elapsed). Also, when the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0", the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer B changes from "199" to "0", and the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer C changes from "0" to "1".

In addition, because the timing of transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine installation information coincides, even if the transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information is delayed by 300 ms, the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A continues to be updated, so even if one piece of hall control/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted, the timing of transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information will not be shifted.

In addition, if the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the gaming machine installation information coincides, and the transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information is delayed by 300 ms, the hall control/fraud monitoring information to be transmitted next 300 ms later will be acquired at the time of transmission, so information from 300 ms ago will not be transmitted. This means that old information will not be transmitted even if the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information is off.

Next, the timing of sending a gaming machine information notification when the timing of sending the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides will be explained with reference to FIG. 34. Note that the wording that appears in FIG. 34 is the same as that in FIG. 31 to FIG. 33, so the explanation will be omitted.

The timing for sending hall control and fraud monitoring information is when the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored, but if at the same time the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer B changes from "199" to "0" and the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer C changes from "2" to "0", the gaming machine installation information notification request flag becomes "1" and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes "1". Therefore, in the interrupt process when the timing for sending hall control and fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information occurs at the same time, the gaming machine installation information is sent based on the gaming machine installation information notification request flag being "1", and hall control and fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information are not sent. Then, in the next interrupt process, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is "0" and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is "1", but because the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", the zero flag is "0" and no hall control or fraud monitoring information is sent. In this case, gaming machine information management ends, and no gaming machine performance information is sent. However, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is stored as "1".

In other words, when the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides, the transmission of the gaming machine installation information has a higher priority, so the hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information are not transmitted, and the next time the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored, the gaming machine performance information is transmitted in priority over the hall control/fraud monitoring information based on the gaming machine performance information notification request flag being "1". After the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes "0", so the next time the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored (the next time 300 ms has elapsed), the hall control/fraud monitoring information will be transmitted.

In addition, because the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides, even if the gaming machine performance information is transmitted 300 ms later and the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted 600 ms later, the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A continues to be updated, so even if the hall control/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted twice, the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information will not be shifted.

In addition, if the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides, and the gaming machine installation information is transmitted at that timing, and then the gaming machine performance information is transmitted 300 ms later, and the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted 600 ms later, the gaming machine performance information transmitted 300 ms after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted is obtained at the timing of transmission, so information from 300 ms ago (the timing when the gaming machine installation information was transmitted) is not transmitted. In addition, the hall control/fraud monitoring information transmitted 300 ms after the gaming machine performance information is transmitted is obtained at the timing of transmission, so information from 600 ms ago (the timing when the gaming machine installation information was transmitted) is not transmitted. As a result, old information is not transmitted even if the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the gaming machine performance information differs.

In the above embodiment, the gaming machine performance information transmitted every 180 seconds always has the request flag set to 1 at the same timing as the gaming machine installation information transmitted every 60 seconds. In other words, when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set to 1, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is always set to 1. For this reason, the gaming machine performance information cannot be transmitted at the timing when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set to 1, and is transmitted the next 300 ms later. However, even in this case, the timing when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set to 1 is 180 seconds after the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set to 1, so it is possible to transmit the gaming machine performance information periodically.

The memory areas that store gaming machine information notification timers A, B, and C managed by the gaming medium count control board P16 are configured to be initialized when the power is turned off (initialized by the power-on process), but the timer that measures the wait time (4.1 seconds, also called the minimum gaming time) managed by the main control board P15 is saved when the power is turned off and is not initialized when the power is turned on, so that it resumes measuring from where it left off after the power is turned on. With this configuration, the various gaming machine information notification timers for sending gaming machine information notifications to the lending unit can be reset after the power is turned on, making regular communication possible.

In addition, the memory areas that store gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, and gaming machine information notification timer C managed by the gaming medium number control board P16 are configured to be initialized when the power is turned off (initialized by the power-on process), but the timer that measures the freeze time (also called the reel performance time) managed by the main control board P15 is saved even when the power is turned off and is not initialized when the power is turned on, so that the freeze time continues to be measured after the power is turned on. With this configuration, the various gaming machine information notification timers for sending gaming machine information notifications to the lending unit can be reset after the power is turned on, making regular communication possible.

<Description of Operation Check Mode Applicable in This Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the gaming machine is prohibited from playing unless it communicates with the rental unit, so when it is desired to check the operation of the gaming machine alone, it is necessary to attach a dummy unit instead of the rental unit. Since the dummy unit can communicate with the gaming machine in the same way as the rental unit, if the dummy unit is illegally distributed, there is a possibility that the communication between the gaming machine and the rental unit will be analyzed, so the management of the dummy unit must be very strict. Therefore, in order for a second-hand dealer to check the operation of a second-hand gaming machine, he or she must borrow a dummy unit from the gaming machine manufacturer, which takes time to check the operation.

Therefore, in order to perform an operation check of the gaming machine by itself, the gaming machine is equipped with an operation check mode that allows it to operate without being connected to a rental unit or dummy unit. Since this operation check mode is a mode for checking whether the gaming machine is operating normally, it is configured not to insert or dispense gaming media.

It is desirable to configure the operation check mode so that it cannot be easily executed by the player. For this reason, the input port for a specified switch is read during the power-on process, and the operation check mode is started when it is determined that the operation of the specified switch has been detected during the power-on process. The specified switch may be any one of the following: 1 bet switch, MAX bet switch, start switch, left stop switch, middle stop switch, right stop switch, settlement switch P6, reset switch, counting switch P7, and setting key switch, or a combination of two or more of these. As an example of a combination of two or more, it is possible to turn on the power while turning on the power by turning on the setting key switch while pressing the counting switch P7 while the power is off. Alternatively, a dedicated switch that cannot be operated unless the front door is opened may be provided, and the operation check mode may be started by turning on the power while operating the dedicated switch.

The operation check mode is a mode that allows the gaming machine to be played on its own, but it is also possible to start the operation check mode even if it is connected to a rental unit. For this reason, since it is assumed that the rental unit and gaming machine P may or may not be connected during operation check mode, communication with the rental unit during operation check mode is performed in the same way as normal operation. For example, it receives rental notifications and sends rental receipt result responses, etc.

When the operation check mode is activated, the five segment display section of the game medium count display section P9 displays "----". Furthermore, in the operation check mode, three points are automatically inserted for each game, and operation of the start switch becomes valid. To make it easier to recognize that the operation check mode is active, the message "In operation check mode" may be displayed on part of the image. The message "In operation check mode" is displayed at the same size at all times, even if the presentation changes due to a presentation lottery or transition to a demo screen.

When the start switch is operated in the operation check mode, the game machine is operated using the same game progress program as the normal game operation, such as lottery processing (for example, programs executed on the main control board P15, the number of game media control board P16, and the sub-control board P12, such as internal lottery processing, reel control processing, performance lottery processing, and command transmission processing), making it possible to check whether the game machine is normal or not. However, the payout process is not executed, and only the number of awards is displayed on the award number display unit, and the display on the number of game media display unit P9 is not updated. In addition, in the case of a game machine that does not have an award number display unit, the award number is displayed on the LCD, so the award number is displayed on the LCD display during the operation check mode. In addition, since the minimum play time is measured even during the operation check mode, if the start switch is operated before the minimum play time has elapsed, the reel rotation is put on hold until the minimum play time has elapsed.

In addition, in the operation check mode, the communication processing performed between the gaming machine and the rental unit may be configured not to be executed. By configuring in this way, the abnormality determination processing based on the communication processing performed between the gaming machine and the rental unit will not be executed.

In addition, in the operation check mode, the gaming machine may be configured to operate at a preset setting value related to the player's advantage (for example, "1" which results in the lowest ball payout rate, or "6" which results in the highest ball payout rate), or may be configured to operate after an arbitrary setting value is set. Furthermore, in the operation check mode, the setting value may be displayed on the setting value display by operating the setting key switch, or the setting value may be displayed on the setting value display regardless of whether the setting key switch is operated, or the setting value may not be displayed on the setting value display even if the setting key switch is operated.

In addition, in the operation check mode, the effects of the display device such as the liquid crystal display, the lighting state of the frame lamp, the sound output from the speaker, etc. are executed as normal. For this reason, if the operation check mode is played for a long time, effects with a low appearance rate (so-called premium effects) can be easily confirmed in the operation check mode, and the confirmed premium effects are uploaded to the web as videos or images, which may reduce the interest of the game. Therefore, when a predetermined number of games are played in the operation check mode, the operation check mode is automatically terminated (in other words, a predetermined number of times is set as the upper limit number of games that can be played in the operation check mode, and after the predetermined number of games is reached, play in the operation check mode cannot be performed). This predetermined number of times can be, for example, 1 time, 10 times, 20 times, etc. When a predetermined number of games are played in the operation check mode, the operation check mode is terminated and normal play thereafter may be prohibited. In order to change from a state in which normal play is prohibited to a state in which normal play can be played, the power can be turned on again or an operation to switch to the setting change mode (power switch ON with the setting key switch ON) can be performed. Furthermore, if the conditions for starting the operation check mode are met when normal play is prohibited, the operation check mode will start again.

When terminating the operation check mode at will, it is desirable to terminate the mode by normal operation, such as by cutting off the power during the operation check mode (executing the operation check mode termination process during the power off process) or by cutting off the power during the operation check mode and turning it on (executing the operation check mode termination process during the power on process). This is because the operation check mode is required only in limited situations, such as moving used vehicles, so even if the operation check mode is accidentally started due to a setting change operation at the game center, the operation check mode can be immediately terminated by normal operation such as cutting off the power, thereby reducing the possibility of entering the operation check mode during business hours. Note that the method of terminating the operation check mode at will is not limited to cutting off the power during the operation check mode, and the operation check mode may be terminated by the initialization process associated with the setting change process executed by the operation to switch to the setting change mode (power switch ON with the setting key switch ON).

In addition, if there is a power outage during operation check mode while the reels are spinning, the operation check mode may end without the reels being respinned when the power is turned on, or the reels may be respinned when the power is turned on and the operation check mode may end after the game has finished. Note that although the explanation was given for when the reels are spinning, the same behavior occurs if a power outage occurs between the operation of the start switch and the end of the game.

When the operation mode is ended, a process is performed to initialize the RWM used in the operation mode. This makes it possible to prevent play in the operation mode from being carried over to normal play. However, the RWM required for signal output to the lending unit is not initialized. Note that, if the specifications require an operation to switch to the setting change mode (power switch ON with the setting key switch ON) when ending the operation mode and starting normal play, and the process to initialize the RWM used in the operation mode is performed by starting the setting change mode, then it is not necessary to perform the process to initialize the RWM used in the operation mode when the operation mode is ended.

In addition, while the above describes an example in which the effects of the display device such as a liquid crystal display, the lighting state of the frame lamps, and the sound output from the speaker are executed as normal during the operation check mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects of the display device such as a liquid crystal display are not executed (the message "Operation check mode in progress" is continuously displayed on a black background), the lighting state of the frame lamps is turned off or in a special lighting state, and no sound is output from the speaker, or special background music or sound is output. Since the operation check only requires determining whether the operation of the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 is normal or not, by configuring in this manner, when it is not necessary to check the operation of the sub-control board, it is possible to prevent situations such as accidentally playing in the operation check mode during business hours or a premium effect appearing during the operation check mode.

The game results played during the operation check mode are configured not to affect the normal game mode after the operation check mode is terminated. For example, even if the player wins the AT lottery during a game played during the operation check mode and is entitled to the AT when the operation check mode is terminated, the game is configured to start in the normal game mode after the operation check mode is terminated without the right to the AT.

In addition, during the operation check mode, a test pattern is configured to be displayed on the role ratio monitor. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation check mode is in progress based on the display on the role ratio monitor. Note that during the operation check mode, a test pattern may be displayed for 5 seconds after the power is turned on, and after 5 seconds have elapsed, various ratios may be displayed on the role ratio monitor as in normal operation, or during the operation check mode, various ratios may be displayed on the role ratio monitor without displaying a test pattern when the power is turned on.

The game results played during the operation check mode are configured not to affect the ratios of the various items displayed on the role ratio monitor. For example, the various memory areas (accumulated number of plays, cumulative number of awards, etc.) used to calculate the ratios of the various items displayed on the role ratio monitor are not updated based on the games played during the operation check mode. By configuring in this way, various ratios that show the behavior in the actual market can be displayed on the role ratio monitor.

<Order of abnormality determination>
An explanation will be given regarding abnormality judgment in command communication between the main control board P15 and the game media number control board P16.

Commands that can be sent to the game media count control board P16 from the main control board P15 include an input request command, a settlement request command, and a payout request command.

As described above, if the insertion points received when the gaming media count control board P16 receives an insertion request command are a value other than 1 to 3, a medal count control reception abnormality command is sent to the main control board P15 and then a check is made to see if there is a VL abnormality (VL signal OFF). This is to prioritize processing related to the total score, which is the most important information in the gaming machine described in this embodiment. If the order were to determine a VL abnormality first and then a command abnormality, then even if there was an abnormality in the command communication between the main control board P15 and the gaming media count control board P16 when there was a VL abnormality, it would not be possible to make a judgment. This is because when a VL abnormality is determined, betting processing to invalidate betting operations is not executed.

The reason why the game media count control board P16 is configured to check the data of the second control command when it receives a settlement request command or a payout request command and then check for a VL abnormality is the same as for the input request command.

To prevent this from happening, we check whether there are any abnormalities in receiving commands from the main control board P15 before determining whether there is a VL abnormality.

In addition, not limited to the above example, when all commands sent from the main control board P15 are received, it is determined whether the command content is normal before determining whether there is a VL abnormality.

<Timer measurement of basic communication sequence>
As shown in FIG. 20, the gaming machine information notification is output from the gaming machine to the lending unit every 300 ms. The counting notification is output from the gaming machine to the lending unit 100 ms after the gaming information notification is output. The lending notification is output from the lending unit to the gaming machine within 170 ms after the counting notification is output. The lending receipt result response is output from the gaming machine to the lending unit within 10 ms after the lending notification is received. In this way, it is necessary to output information and receive information at a specified timing. For this reason, it is possible to provide multiple timers to measure the timing of sending and receiving information, but in order to reduce the capacity of the RWM, a method of measuring the timing of sending and receiving information using one timer can be adopted. Below, an example using a memory area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A (a timer for measuring 300 ms) will be described.

<Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A>
As described above, the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is subtracted by 1 for each timer interrupt process of the gaming media number control board P16. For example, when the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", it is set to "299", and when the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "1", it is set to "300" (when it becomes 0, "300" is stored). In other words, except immediately after power-on, it is configured to cycle between 300 and 1 (immediately after power-on, it is 0). Also, when the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", a process for outputting a gaming machine information notification is executed.

<Counting notification>
When the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200", a process for outputting a count notification is executed. In other words, when the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200", this is the timing when 100 ms has elapsed since the gaming machine information notification was notified.

<Lending notification>
When the lending notification is received, if the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is greater than "200" or if the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is less than "30", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. In other words, if the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is greater than "200", it is a timing before 100 ms has elapsed since the gaming machine information notification was notified. In other words, it means a timing before the process for outputting the counting notification is executed. Also, if the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is less than "30", it is a timing after 270 ms has elapsed since the gaming machine information notification was notified. In other words, it means a timing after 170 ms has elapsed since the process for outputting the counting notification is executed. In addition, if an abnormality is determined based on the value of the memory area for storing gaming machine information notification timer A, the process of determining whether the checksum is normal or not based on the received loan notification, the process of determining whether the loan serial number is normal or not based on the received loan notification, the process of adding the loan points to the total points based on the received loan notification, and the process of outputting the basic loan receipt result response corresponding to the received loan notification are not executed.

<Loan acceptance result response>
When the rental notification is received, if the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200" or less and "30" or more (when the rental notification is received and an abnormality is not determined based on the value of the memory area for storing the gaming machine information notification timer A), a process for outputting a rental receipt response is performed in the interrupt process that received the rental notification. As described above, when an abnormality is determined based on the value of the memory area for storing the gaming machine information notification timer A, the process for determining whether the checksum is normal or not based on the received rental notification, the process for determining whether the rental serial number is normal or not based on the received rental notification, the process for adding the rental points to the total points based on the received rental notification, and the process for outputting a rental receipt result response corresponding to the received rental notification are not executed. In other words, a response indicating an abnormality is not performed as a rental receipt result response. In other words, when the gaming machine receives a rental notification at a timing other than that based on the basic communication sequence, the received rental notification may be an illegal rental notification, so the rental receipt result response is not output from the gaming machine to the rental unit.

<Lighting control of each LED>
Dynamic lighting control is performed for the status display lamps 1 to 5, each segment display of the game medium count display section P9, and each segment display of the role ratio monitor.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the LED display counter can take five different values (01h, 02h, 04h, 08h, 10h), and is configured to light up every five interrupts. When the LED display counter value is 01h, it corresponds to LED digit A, when the LED display counter value is 02h, it corresponds to LED digit B, when the LED display counter value is 04h, it corresponds to LED digit C, when the LED display counter value is 08h, it corresponds to LED digit D, and when the LED display counter value is 10h, it corresponds to LED digit E.

The LEDs controlled by LED digit A are the first digit LED of the game media number display unit P9, the LED of status indicator lamp 1, and the fourth digit LED of the role ratio monitor, the LEDs controlled by LED digit B are the second digit LED of the game media number display unit P9, the LED of status indicator lamp 2, and the third digit LED of the role ratio monitor, the LEDs controlled by LED digit C are the third digit LED of the game media number display unit P9, the LED of status indicator lamp 3, and the second digit LED of the role ratio monitor, the LEDs controlled by LED digit D are the fourth digit LED of the game media number display unit P9, the LED of status indicator lamp 4, and the first digit LED of the role ratio monitor, and the LEDs controlled by LED digit E are the fifth digit LED of the game media number display unit P9 and the LED of status indicator lamp 5.

<Currently available for loan>
When the rental button on the rental unit is operated and the gaming machine P receives a rental notification containing a predetermined number (any number other than 0, such as 47 points) as rental points, if the reception is normal or the total points after the addition does not exceed 15,000 points, the total points are updated by adding the rental points, and then the gaming machine P sends a rental receipt result response to the rental unit.

When the lending process is executed in this way and lending points are added to the total score, the gaming machine P is configured to output a special sound (sometimes called a lending sound) for a predetermined period of time. Examples of lending sounds include sound effects such as "beep beep..." and voice messages such as "Lending has been completed."

Specifically, this will be explained based on the flowchart for the lending process in Figure 49.

<Get received data>
The data of the loan notification sent by operating the loan button of the loan unit is acquired. The acquired received data is stored in the loan notification receiving buffer (five memory areas: loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5). Since the loan notification has a message length of 5 bytes, the received data acquisition process and the loan notification receiving buffer saving process are executed five times to acquire all the data of the loan notification.

<Lending notification received successfully?>
It is determined whether the data indicating the message length of the received loan notification is "0x05" and the data indicating the command is "0x13". If this determination process finds that the data indicating the message length is not "0x05" or that the data indicating the command is not "0x13", it is determined that the loan notification was not received normally, and the loan notification reception buffers (five storage areas of loan notification reception buffers 1 to 5) are cleared.

<Check communication errors 2 to 6>
This is a process of checking communication anomalies 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 and saving a communication anomaly flag. The communication anomaly flag is 1 byte, and if the D0 bit is 1, it indicates communication anomaly 1, if the D1 bit is 1, it indicates communication anomaly 2, if the D2 bit is 1, it indicates communication anomaly 3, if the D3 bit is 1, it indicates communication anomaly 4, if the D4 bit is 1, it indicates communication anomaly 5, and if the D5 bit is 1, it indicates communication anomaly 6. This will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

<<Setting the initial value of the communication error flag>>
A process is executed to store 0 in the A register as the initial value of the communication abnormality flag.

<< Loan notification reception counter +1 (maximum value 2) >>
A process is executed to increment the value of the loan notification reception counter by 1. If the result of incrementing the value by 1 using a special addition command (one command) exceeds 2, the counter is corrected to 2. This makes it possible to prevent the value of the loan notification reception counter from becoming 1 when a process is executed to increment the value of the loan notification reception counter by 1 when the value of the loan notification reception counter exceeds 255 due to fraud and is reset to 0 again.

<<Lending notification reception counter ≠ 1? >><<Communication error 2 flag set>>
It is determined whether the value of the loan notification reception counter is not 1, and if the value of the loan notification reception counter is not 1, the communication error 2 flag is set (the D1 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 2).

Here, the loan notification reception counter is initialized to 0 when a gaming machine information notification is sent (when hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, or gaming machine performance information is sent), and is incremented by +1 when a loan notification is received from the loan unit. In other words, gaming machine information notifications are sent every 300 ms, and loan notifications are received every 300 ms. Therefore, if the system is normal, the loan notification reception counter is 0 from the time the gaming machine information notification is sent until the loan notification is received, and is incremented by +1 by the loan notification reception counter +1 process in the loan notification reception process, so when the loan notification reception counter ≠ 1 determination process is executed, the loan notification reception counter = 1. Therefore, if the loan notification reception counter is other than 1, it is possible that the loan notification has been received multiple times or the RAM value has been rewritten due to fraud between the time the gaming machine information notification is sent and the time the loan notification is received, and the communication abnormality 2 flag is set.

In addition, by judging the loan notification reception counter at multiple times (when the gaming machine information notification is sent and when the loan notification is received), multiple abnormalities (communication abnormality 1 and communication abnormality 2) can be detected with one counter, reducing program capacity and making processing more lightweight.

<<Reception range abnormal? >><<Communication error 3 flag set>>
It is determined whether the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is less than 100 ms or exceeds 270 ms, and if the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is less than 100 ms or exceeds 270 ms, the communication error 3 flag is set (the D2 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 3).

The time to receive a rental notification from the rental unit is set to 100 ms or more after the gaming machine information notification is sent, but no later than 270 ms. If the time exceeds this reception range, there is a possibility that the rental notification has been received fraudulently, so the communication error 3 flag will be set.

<<Number of medals loaned> 50? >><<Communication error 4 flag set>>
It is determined whether the number of loaned medals contained in the received loan notification exceeds 50, and if the number of loaned medals exceeds 50, the communication error 4 flag is set (the D3 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 4).

<<Number of medals loaned = 0?>>
It is determined whether the number of loaned medals included in the received loan notification is 0, and if the number of loaned medals is 0, a communication abnormality flag update process is executed. Since communication abnormality flag 5 and communication abnormality flag 6 are abnormalities that may be set when the number of loaned medals is not 0, if the number of loaned medals is 0, the process of determining communication abnormality flag 5 and communication abnormality flag 6 is not executed, making it possible to speed up the execution speed of the program.

<<Response permission flag = 0? >><<Communication error 5 flag set>>
It is determined whether the response permission flag is 0, and if the response permission flag is 0, the communication error 5 flag is set (the D4 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 5). If the response permission flag is 0, the receipt of the loan notification is not permitted (a situation in which the hall control/fraud monitoring information has not been sent), so if the number of loan medals is not 0 and the response permission flag is 0, the loan notification has been received even though the receipt of the loan notification is not permitted, and it is possible to determine the possibility that a loan notification sent fraudulently has been received.

In addition, a process for determining whether a loan notification was received correctly is executed before the process for checking communication anomalies 2 to 6. The process determines whether the data indicating the message length of the received loan notification is "0x05" and whether the data indicating the command is "0x13" and determines whether the notification has been received correctly. By doing so, the response permission flag is also determined, thereby making it possible to realize a gaming machine that is more resistant to fraud.

<<Number of counted medals ≠ 0? ? >><<Communication error 6 flag set>>
It is determined whether the counted medal number is not 0, and if the counted medal number is not 0, the communication error 6 flag is set (the D5 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 6). Since the loan process and counting process are not performed simultaneously, if the loaned medal number is not 0 when the counted medal number is not 0, it is possible to determine the possibility that a fraudulently sent loan notification has been received, or that a fraudulent count notification has been sent.

<<Update communication error flag>>
The communication abnormality flag is updated based on each communication abnormality set in each of the judgment processes for communication abnormalities 2 to 6.

<Normal reception range?>
It is determined whether the timing of receiving the received lending notification is within the normal range. Specifically, since the normal reception range of the lending notification is within 170 ms from the counting notification transmission timing, which is 100 ms after the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification, 30 (200-170) is subtracted from the value of gaming machine information notification timer A when the lending notification is received, and if the value obtained by subtracting 30 from the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is smaller than 171 (170+1), it is determined to be normal, and if it is larger, it is determined to be abnormal. If it is determined to be abnormal, the lending notification reception buffer (five storage areas of lending notification reception buffers 1 to 5) is cleared.

<Checksum abnormal?>
Whether or not the checksum is abnormal is determined based on the sum of various data stored in the loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 4 excluding the loan notification receiving buffer 5 in which the checksum is stored and the checksum value stored in the loan notification receiving buffer 5. Specifically, the sum of the data of the message length data, command data, loan serial number data, and loan point data stored in the loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 4 is compared with the checksum value stored in the loan notification receiving buffer 5, and if the values are the same, it is determined to be normal, and if the values are different, it is determined to be abnormal. If the checksum is determined to be abnormal, a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") is saved in the loan point receiving result, and the loan receiving result response is set. In other words, if the checksum is abnormal, the loan notification is discarded (for example, the loan points are not added to the total points).

<Get loan serial number, loan serial number + 1, loan serial number = 0?>
The rental serial number stored in the game media count control board P16 is obtained, and the rental serial number is updated (incremented by 1). If it is determined that the updated (incremented by 1) rental serial number is 0, the rental serial number is updated again (incremented by 1), and if it is determined that the updated (incremented by 1) rental serial number is not 0, it is determined whether the rental serial number is normal or not. Note that since the rental serial number = 0 is only used when starting communication with the gaming machine, if the rental serial number is updated (incremented by 1) to 0, it must be updated again (incremented by 1) to make it 1.

<Is the rental serial number normal? Clear the serial number error flag>
It is determined whether the rental serial number stored in the rental notification receiving buffer is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the rental serial number after the update of the rental serial number stored in the game media number control board P16 is the same as the rental serial number stored in the rental notification receiving buffer 3. If it is determined that the rental serial number is normal (the rental serial number after the update of the rental serial number stored in the game media number control board P16 is the same as the rental serial number stored in the rental notification receiving buffer 3), the serial number abnormality flag is cleared, and if it is determined that the rental serial number is not normal (the rental serial number after the update of the rental serial number stored in the game media number control board P16 is not the same as the rental serial number stored in the rental notification receiving buffer 3), the serial number abnormality flag is set, a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") is saved in the rental point receiving result, and the rental receiving result response is set. In other words, if the rental serial number is abnormal (if the rental serial number sent from the rental unit is not consecutive), the rental notification is discarded (for example, the rental points are not added to the total points).

<Lending point = 0?>
It is determined whether the rental points stored in the rental notification receiving buffer 4 are 0. For example, if the rental points stored in the rental notification receiving buffer 4 are 0, this is a rental notification sent when the rental button on the rental unit was not operated, so thereafter, the process of adding the rental points to the total points is not executed, the updated rental serial number is saved in the game media number control board P16, a value indicating normality ("0x00") is saved in the rental point receipt result, and a rental receipt result response is set.

<Response permission flag = 0?>
It is determined whether the response permission flag is 0. If the response permission flag is 0, the reception of the loan notification is not permitted (not after the transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information), so a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") is stored in the loan point reception result, and the loan reception result response is set. In other words, if the response permission flag is 0, the loan notification is discarded (for example, the loan points are not added to the total score). Note that the response permission flag is set to 1 after the transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, and the response permission flag is cleared after the gaming machine information notification timer A count value storage process of the gaming machine information management process (before the gaming machine information notification timer B+1 process).

The response permission flag is set to 1 after the hall control and fraud monitoring information is transmitted, but is not set to 1 after the gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information is transmitted (the response permission flag remains 0). This is because information regarding the total score is not transmitted in the gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information, so if the response permission flag is set to 1 after the gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information is transmitted (if lending is permitted), the lending unit will not be able to determine whether the total score has increased due to the addition of lending points or due to other factors (fraud, etc.). For this reason, by configuring the response permission flag to store 1 after transmitting hall control and fraud monitoring information that transmits total score information, the lending unit can grasp the factors behind the increase or decrease in the total score, making it more resistant to fraud.

In addition, even if the rental serial number is normal, if the response permission flag = 0, it is considered to be an abnormality. In this way, even if fraudulent activity is being performed by sending the correct rental serial number, if the rental notification is not received at the correct timing (when the response permission flag = 1), it can be determined to be an abnormality, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud.

<Counting point ≠ 0?>
It is determined whether the counting points in the counting notification are 0. If counting and lending are performed simultaneously, counting takes priority, so if the counting points are notified as "1" or higher, a value indicating an abnormality in the lending point receipt result ("0x01") is saved and the lending receipt result response is set. In other words, if the counting points in the counting notification are 0, the lending notification is discarded (for example, the lending points are not added to the total points).

＜Lending point ≧ 51?＞
It is determined whether the loan points in the loan notice exceed the specified value of 50 (51 or more). If the loan points exceed the specified value of 50, a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") is stored in the loan point receipt result, and the loan receipt result response is set. In other words, if the loan points in the loan notice are a value exceeding 50, the loan notice is discarded (for example, the loan points are not added to the total points).

＜Total score obtained, total score ≧ 15000?＞
The total score stored in the game media count control board P16 is obtained, and it is determined whether the total score exceeds 15,000. If the total score is 15,000 or more, the total score threshold has been reached and it is approaching a value that indicates an abnormality in the upper limit of the total score, so the loan points are not added to the total score, a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") is saved in the loan point receipt result, and a loan receipt result response is set. In other words, if the total score is a value of 15,000 or more, the loan notification is discarded (for example, the loan points are not added to the total score).

<Total score addition, total score saving>
If the total score is less than 15,000, the loan points are added to the total score, and the total score after the addition is stored in a total score storage area.

<Lending-related control status signal set>
After the lending points are added to the total score and the total score is updated, a control status signal regarding lending is set. The control status signal regarding lending is configured to be output for 200 ms.

The control status signal for lending is provided to output a lending sound from the gaming machine P when the lending button of the lending unit is operated. When the number of game media control board P16 sets the control status signal for lending, the control status signal for lending is output to the main control board P15, and when the main control board P15 receives the control status signal for lending, it is configured to output a presentation command for the lending sound to the sub-control board P12. The reason why the number of game media control board P16 outputs the control status signal for lending for 200 ms is because the main control board P15 transmits the presentation command for the lending sound to the sub-control board P12 as part of the no-operation command. The no-operation command is a command that is transmitted when there is no command that the main control board P15 transmits to the sub-control board P12, so if there is a command that the main control board P15 transmits to the sub-control board P12, the no-operation command is not transmitted. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the transmission time when the main control board P15 sends the most commands to the sub-control board P12 is designed to be 100 ms, so when the game media count control board P16 sends a control status signal related to lending for at least 100 ms, the main control means P15 can send a no-operation command to the sub-control board P12. In addition, since communication errors occur between boards, the game media count control board P16 is configured to output a control status signal related to lending for 200 ms, which is double 100 ms, so that the main control board P15 can reliably send a no-operation command to the sub-control board P12. When the sub-control board P12 receives a performance command related to the lending sound from the main control board P15, it outputs a predetermined lending sound, so that the lending sound can be output for a predetermined time even if the game media count control board P16 has finished outputting the control status signal related to lending.

As mentioned above, the rental sound is output after the rental points are added to the total score, so it is not output when the rental points are 0. In other words, the rental sound is output only when the rental points in the rental notification received every 300 ms are not 0, so it is possible to prevent the rental sound from being output when the rental button is not operated.

The rental sound output by the sub-control board P12 is set to a channel different from the effect sound during play, and is configured to be output even during play. By configuring in this way, the rental sound is output regardless of the state during play (waiting for play, reel spinning, payout processing, specified error (excluding total score threshold reached state, total score upper limit abnormality, VL abnormality), etc.), so it is possible to prevent the rental button from being pressed twice due to the rental sound not being output. Note that, since there is a possibility that the rental button will be pressed twice if the rental sound cannot be heard with the effect sound during play, the volume of the rental sound is configured not to be changeable by the player's settings, and is configured to be louder than the normal effect sound. Also, since there is a possibility that the rental sound will not be heard if the output period of the rental sound is short, it is desirable that the rental sound be output for 200 ms or more. Also, since there is a possibility that the effect sound during play will not be heard by the player if the rental sound is output for a long period of time, it is desirable that the rental sound be output for shorter than the minimum play time (4.1 seconds).

In addition, the rental sound output by the sub-control board P12 may be set to the same channel as the in-game sound effects, so that the in-game sound is given priority over the rental sound. This configuration prevents the rental sound from interfering with the in-game sound, making the game more interesting. As a specification for prioritizing the in-game sound, if the rental sound and the in-game sound effects are set to different channels, the volume of the rental sound may be set to 0 and output when the rental button is operated during play.

The volume of the rental sound may also be altered according to the player's volume setting. In this case, the volume of the rental sound is altered according to the volume setting set by the player, but by configuring the rental sound to be relatively louder than other performance sounds, it is easier to prevent the rental sound from being missed. For example, since the rental button is likely to be operated towards the end of a game, it is set to be louder than the stopping sound of the third reel (the last reel to stop) and the sound of the game medium being dispensed.

In addition, when the sub-control board P12 receives a performance command related to a lending sound from the main control board P15, the notification may be made not only with the lending sound, but also with a frame lamp, LCD, etc. In this case, if it is a frame lamp, it will light up with a dedicated lighting pattern, and if it is an LCD, a notification performance related to the lending (such as a text display of "Lending" or an icon display indicating lending) will be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the UI display. When a lending notification is made with a frame lamp or LCD, the lending sound may be output, or the lending may be notified only with the lending sound, frame lamp, or LCD.

<Serial number saved, loan point receipt result = saved normally>
The updated lending serial number is stored in the game media count control board P16, and a value indicating normal as the lending point receipt result is stored in the game media count control board P16. This process is performed when the lending notification is received normally, and is also executed when the lending points are 0 and the notification is received normally, as described above.

<Lending receipt result response set, lending control command set>
Various data is set in the loan receipt result response and the loan control command set process (message set process) is executed to send the message length, loan receipt response, loan serial number, loan quantity receipt result, and checksum to the loan unit.

As described above, when the lending process is executed to add lending points to the total score, the gaming machine P outputs a lending sound, and when the lending process is executed to not add lending points to the total score, the gaming machine P does not output a lending sound. However, even when the lending process is executed to not add lending points to the total score, the gaming machine P may be configured to notify the player that lending was not possible (that lending points could not be added to the total score) under certain circumstances. For example, when the lending button of the lending unit is operated and the gaming machine receives a lending notification including information of 50 as the lending points, if the total score is 15,000 or more and therefore the lending points are not added to the total score, the gaming machine P may output a sound such as "Rental is not possible." By notifying the player that lending was not possible (that lending points could not be added to the total score) in this way, even if the total score does not increase when the player operates the lending button of the lending unit, an appropriate notification can be given to the player. The notification that the loan was not possible (loan points could not be added to the total score) may be made not only by voice, but also by sound effects, lamps, image displays, etc. Also, a notification that the loan was not possible (loan points could not be added to the total score) may be made if there is an abnormality in the checksum, an abnormality in the loan serial number, or the counting points are other than 0. On the other hand, a notification that the loan was not possible (loan points could not be added to the total score) does not have to be made if there is an abnormality in the checksum, an abnormality in the loan serial number, or the counting points are other than 0.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine and the lending unit communicate via the gaming media number control board P16 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board, but this is not limited to this, and the gaming machine and the lending unit may communicate via the main control board P15 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board. In this case, production costs are reduced by not mounting the gaming media number control board P16. In addition, all processing controlled by the gaming media number control board P16 is performed by the main control board P15. In addition, when the functions of the main control board P15 and the gaming media number control board P16 are realized on the same board, it is possible to realize it by providing the main control chip and the gaming media number control chip on the same board and performing the same transmission and reception processing between the main control chip and the gaming media number control chip as in the above-mentioned embodiment. In addition, it is possible to realize it even with one chip and one board by storing the processing of the above-mentioned gaming media number control chip in an area other than the main control area of the main control chip, which is composed only of the main control chip.

<Power interruption recovery process when VL abnormality and total score clear status are ON>
When the gaming machine P and the rental unit are not connected (when the gaming machine P is powered on but the rental unit is not powered on, or when a communication abnormality occurs between the gaming machine P and the rental unit, etc.), the gaming machine P sets a VL abnormality.

Here, if only gaming machine P is started (the rental unit is not started) and the total score clear switch is pressed, the total score is initialized during the power-on processing when gaming machine P is started, total score clear timer 1 is set, and the total score clear status is turned ON. After that, an interrupt process is started, and if a VL abnormality is detected during the input port check within the interrupt process, the VL abnormality flag is turned ON (FFh is stored in the VL abnormality flag memory area).

In this way, if a power outage occurs when the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON, the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized when the gaming machine P is powered on again, so that the total score clear status can be restored to ON and the VL abnormality flag can be restored to ON.

With this configuration, the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized when the power is turned off and then back on, so the total score clear status or the VL abnormality flag will be turned ON due to fraudulent behavior, and even if the power is turned off and then back on due to fraudulent behavior, the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag will not be initialized, making it possible to prevent fraudulent behavior.

In addition, with this configuration, the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized when the power is turned off and then back on. Therefore, if a power outage occurs when the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON, and the gaming machine P is turned on again when the rental unit is still powered on, the VL abnormality flag will be turned OFF, and the gaming machine P will be able to send information to the rental unit that the total score clear status is ON.

In addition, if a power outage occurs when the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON, and the gaming machine P is powered on again and the setting key switch is ON, the initialization process associated with starting the setting change mode is executed, but the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized, so that the total score clear status can be restored to ON and the VL abnormality flag can be restored to ON. Note that in this case, the setting change in progress status is also ON, so the total score clear status is ON, the VL abnormality flag is ON, and the setting change in progress status is ON.

With this configuration, the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized when the power is turned off and then back on, or when the setting change mode is started, so that the total score clear status or the VL abnormality flag will be turned ON due to fraudulent behavior, and even if the power is turned off and then back on, or when the setting change mode is started, the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag will not be initialized, making it possible to prevent fraudulent behavior.

In addition, with this configuration, the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized when the power is turned off and back on, or when the setting change mode is started. Therefore, when a power outage occurs while the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON, if the gaming machine P is turned on again after the power is turned off and the setting key switch is ON and the rental unit is powered on, the VL abnormality flag will be OFF (the VL abnormality flag is "0"), and the gaming machine P will be able to send information that the total score clear status is ON and information that the setting change in progress status is ON to the rental unit.

<About the difference counter that records the difference from when the power was turned on>
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a value (difference) obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted (sometimes called the number of medals inserted, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of medals bet, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of points inserted, the bet points, or the number of INs) from the number of medals paid out after the power is turned on (sometimes called the number of medals paid out, the number of medals given, the number of medals given, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals paid out, the number of medals given, the number of medals acquired ...

Note that when the difference counter value exceeds a predetermined value and a stop process is executed, this is sometimes referred to as "the safety device being activated" or "the complete function being activated."

The limit monitoring process is executed in both advantageous and normal zones. It is executed regardless of the specified number for starting a game. It is executed regardless of the RT state. In other words, it is executed in all games. Note that in a game in which a replay role is won and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops, there is no change in the value of the difference counter, so the limit monitoring process may or may not be executed.

For example, it is possible to execute a stoppage process in a game in which the number of payouts since the highest number of inserts while the gaming machine is turned on reaches 19,000 or more (a game in which MY reaches 19,000).

For example, in a certain game in which the total number of medals paid out since the power was turned on is 50,001 and the total number of medals inserted since the power was turned on is 31,000, the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, so it may be possible to execute a stop process for that certain game.

The stop-play process may be any or all of the following processes: not adding the number of bets or credits when medals are inserted, turning off the blocker so that the number of bets or credits is not added even when medals are inserted, not executing bet processing even if the operation of the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch is accepted, not accepting the operation of the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch, not executing reel spin start processing even if the operation of the start switch is accepted, not accepting the operation of the start switch, not executing reel stop processing even if the operation of the stop switch is accepted, or not accepting the operation of the stop switch. In other words, once the stop-play process is executed, it is not possible to start playing.

Even if the game progress is stopped, the operation acceptance of the settlement switch P6 and the counting switch P7 is valid, and the processing based on the operation acceptance of each switch can be executed.

The stop processing may also be referred to as a stop processing including an automatic settlement processing in addition to a processing for stopping the progress of a game. The automatic settlement processing is a processing for automatically executing a settlement processing based on the operation of the settlement switch P6 after the stop processing. The stop processing may also be referred to as a stop processing including an automatic counting processing. The automatic counting processing is a processing for automatically executing a counting processing based on the operation of the counting switch P7 after the stop processing. The stop processing may also be referred to as a stop processing including an automatic settlement processing and an automatic counting processing.

When game progress is stopped by the stop processing, it cannot be released even by turning the power on. The stopped game progress (stopped state) can be released by turning the power on, which involves changing the settings and executing the RWM initialization process. In other words, if a gaming machine is put into a stopped state during the opening hours of the gaming center, that gaming machine cannot be operated during the opening hours of that day.

In addition, as a condition for executing the RWM initialization process other than power-on with a setting change, the RWM initialization process may be executed by power-on with operation of the RAM clear switch, making it possible to release the stopped game progress (stopped state). In addition, as a condition for executing the RWM initialization process other than power-on with a setting change, the RWM initialization process may be executed by power-on with operation of the total score clear switch, making it possible to release the stopped game progress (stopped state), or the total score initialization process may be executed by power-on with operation of the total score clear switch, but the stopped game progress (stopped state) cannot be released.

In this way, if the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, it may cause the player to become overly gambling-minded. Therefore, by stopping the game when the value of the difference counter exceeds the predetermined value, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game.

The difference counter may also be referred to as a difference number counter, difference number storage means, difference number storage means, difference number storage area, difference number storage area, power-on MY counter, power-on MY storage means, power-on MY storage area, limit difference counter, limit difference number counter, limit MY counter, limit MY storage means, or limit MY storage area.

The value stored in the difference counter is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the initial value of the difference counter is 0 and increments from the initial value, so initialization when the power is turned on means setting the value of the difference counter to 0. However, if the initial value of the difference counter is 19000 and the counter is a subtractive counter, initialization when the power is turned on means setting the value of the difference counter to 19000. Note that power-on includes normal power-on, power-on with a setting change, and power-on with an RWM abnormality. Also, the value stored in the difference counter is not initialized by the RWM initialization process that is executed when the end condition of the favorable zone (for example, MY during the favorable zone exceeds 2400, the difference number during the favorable zone exceeds 2400, the number of games during the favorable zone reaches a predetermined number, etc.) is met.

Although an embodiment has been described in which the value stored in the difference counter is initialized when the gaming machine is turned on, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value stored in the difference counter may be configured to be initialized when the gaming machine is turned off.

In addition, since the difference counter is easily initialized by fraud or momentary interruption when initialized only by powering on, the value of the difference counter may be configured to be initialized (cleared) by turning on the power while pressing a specified switch that cannot be operated by the player, such as a setting change switch, reset switch, RAM clear switch, or total score clear switch, in a situation where no power is being supplied. In other words, the value of the difference counter may not be initialized by simply turning on the power in the normal manner.

In addition, since there may be cases where the value of the difference counter should not be initialized when an error is cleared during operation, the machine may be configured not to initialize the value of the difference counter even when the machine is turned on while a specific switch is pressed. The specific switches are the start switch P3, stop switch P4, settlement switch P6, counting switch P7, bet switch P5, setting change switch, reset switch, RAM clear switch, total score clear switch, etc.

In addition, if the device is configured to initialize the value of the difference counter when the power is turned on with the pressing of a specified switch, and is configured not to initialize the value of the difference counter when the power is turned on with the pressing of a specific switch, the specified switch and the specific switch are configured to be different switches.

The difference counter value may also be configured not to be initialized when the power is turned on by pressing a dedicated switch that is different from the various switches described above.

When configured to initialize the value of the difference counter when the power is turned on with the pressing of a specific switch, the value of the difference counter is configured not to be initialized when the power is turned on in a situation where switches other than the specific switch are pressed at the same time. This is because, when initializing the value of the difference counter for fraudulent purposes, it is possible that the switch may be affected by radio waves, etc., but it is difficult to direct the radio waves only at the specific switch, and there is a high possibility that other switches will also be hit by the radio waves at the same time. This configuration has the effect of making it easier to prevent the initialization of the value of the difference counter for fraudulent purposes.

However, this is not a limitation, and for convenience's sake, the device may be configured to initialize the value of the difference counter when the power is turned on while a switch other than the specified switch is being pressed at the same time.

When configured not to initialize the value of the difference counter when power is turned on with the pressing of a specific switch, the value of the difference counter is configured to be initialized when power is turned on in a situation where switches other than the specific switch are pressed at the same time. This is because, when preventing the value of the difference counter from being initialized for fraudulent purposes, it is possible to affect the switch with radio waves, etc., but it is difficult to direct radio waves only at a specific switch, and there is a high possibility that other switches will also be hit by radio waves at the same time. This configuration has the effect of making it easier to prevent the value of the difference counter from being maintained for fraudulent purposes.

However, this is not a limitation, and for convenience's sake, the device may be configured not to initialize the value of the difference counter when the power is turned on in a situation where switches other than the specific switch are pressed at the same time.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value and game progress is halted, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch in the OFF position and the machine starts up normally (normal power on), the value of the difference counter is initialized, but game progress remains halted. This is because a stop process is executed when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, and this stop process is configured to repeat the same process indefinitely using jump commands, etc., so even if a power outage occurs during the stop process and the power is turned on again, the stop process will start. Note that when the stop process is executed, an interrupt process is executed, and the interrupt process is executed as normal, but the stop process will not return to the normal main loop process from the interrupt process, but will loop through the stop process.

In addition, since interrupt processing is executed normally while the termination processing is being performed, the above-mentioned power cut-off processing can be executed normally even if an event that cuts off the power during the termination processing (for example, turning off the power switch) occurs.

This configuration can prevent unauthorized power-off and power-on that would allow gameplay to continue after gameplay has been halted by the game-stopping process.

The difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out for each game, and a specific example of updating the value of the difference counter is described below. The process of updating the value of the difference counter is executed at a predetermined timing between when all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (betting for the next game can be made). Because the process of updating the value of the difference counter is executed when one game ends, the predetermined timing is sometimes referred to as when one game ends. The difference counter is described as 2-byte data. The "/" indicating 2-byte data indicates the separator between each byte, and the number in parentheses after the binary value indicates the binary value in decimal.

<When the difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter in the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 00000000/01101011b (107).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter in the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 00000000/01100001b (97).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter in the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 00000000/00000111b (7).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter in the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771).

The result of the calculation explained above in <When Difference Counter = 00000000b (0), Number of Medals Paid Out = 00000000b (0), Number of Medals Inserted = 00000011b (3)> is -00000011b (-3), but the value stored in the Difference Counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771) because the most significant bit is configured to indicate a positive value when it is 0 and a negative value when it is 1. With a 2-byte counter, values up to 01111111/11111111 (32767) of the difference counter can be stored correctly without using the most significant bit. In other words, if the difference counter value is 11111111/11111111b, it can indicate -32767, so in the above example, -3 would be 10000000/00000011b.

Note that some parts of the above calculation examples are omitted, and in more detail, the current difference counter value is obtained, and it is determined whether the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 0 or not, and if the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 0, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, the subtracted value is added to the obtained difference counter value, and the added value is updated as the value of the difference counter. Also, if the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 1, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, and a value obtained by subtracting 10000000/00000000b (32768) as a fixed value from the obtained difference counter value is subtracted from the subtracted value, and the subtracted value is updated as the value of the difference counter.

In addition, if the result of calculating the value to be updated as the difference counter value is a negative value, the most significant bit of the absolute value of the result of calculating the value to be updated as the difference counter value is set to 1 and the difference counter value is updated.

In addition, in each of the above calculation examples, the result of subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out on the register was added to the obtained value of the difference counter, but the order of calculations may be such that first the number of medals paid out is added to the obtained value of the difference counter, and then the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the result of that addition, or first the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the obtained value of the difference counter, and then the number of medals paid out is added to the result of that subtraction.

When the number of medals paid out is not 0, it means that a small role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the small role has stopped. When a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals paid out may be 3 or 0. If the number of medals paid out is 3 when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals inserted is 3, and if the number of medals paid out is 0 when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals inserted is 0.

When a replay role is won, a difference counter update process may be executed, or the difference counter update process may not be executed. When a replay role is won, a difference counter determination process may be executed, or the difference counter determination process may not be executed.

The difference counter does not have to be 2 bytes, but may be 3 bytes or 4 bytes. When the difference counter is 3 bytes, the fixed value is 10000000/00000000/00000000b (8388608), and when the difference counter is 4 bytes, the fixed value is 10000000/00000000/00000000/00000000b (2147483648). Note that the difference counter is initialized when the power is turned on, so even if the number of medals paid out is 0 in 10,000 games, which corresponds to about a whole day during the opening hours of the game arcade, only up to -30,000 (10,000 (number of games that can be played in a day) x 3 (number of medals inserted)) is stored, so a difference counter of 2 bytes is sufficient storage capacity.

<Another aspect regarding update of difference counter>
The gaming machine may be equipped with a payout medal count memory area that stores the total number of payout medals since the gaming machine was powered on, a medal count memory area that stores the total number of medals inserted since the gaming machine was powered on, and a difference counter that stores the difference number since the gaming machine was powered on, wherein the payout medal count memory area, the medal count memory area, and the difference counter are configured to be initialized when the power is turned on, and when updating the difference counter in a difference counter update process that is executed after one game is completed, if the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is a positive value, the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is stored in the difference counter, and if the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is a negative value, 0 is stored in the difference counter.

In this configuration, it is desirable that the payout medal count storage area, the inserted medal count storage area, and the difference counter are each a 2-byte storage area, but the payout medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, the inserted medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, and the difference counter may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more.

The medal payout count storage area, medal insertion count storage area, and difference counter are initialized when the power is turned on, and the initialization process involves storing 0 in each storage area. As with the above, the power-on process includes setting changes and RWM abnormalities.

The number of medals paid out storage area is a storage area that accumulates and stores the number of medals paid out for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number of medals paid out storage area update process). For example, when 100 is stored in the number of medals paid out storage area, if the Nth game is played and 10 medals are paid out, 110 will be stored in the number of medals paid out storage area after the Nth game is completed, and if the N+1th game is played and 0 medals are paid out (no medals were paid out), 110 will be stored in the number of medals paid out storage area after the N+1th game is completed.

The number of medals inserted memory area is a memory area that accumulates and stores the number of medals inserted for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number of medals inserted memory area update process). For example, when 50 is stored in the number of medals inserted memory area, if the Nth game is played and three medals are inserted, 53 will be stored in the number of medals inserted memory area after the Nth game is completed, and if the N+1th game is played and two medals are inserted, 55 will be stored in the number of medals paid out memory area after the N+1th game is completed.

The difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game. Here, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a positive value, the difference counter is updated to the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game. However, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the difference counter is updated to 0. For this reason, the value of the difference counter is not necessarily the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid medals for each game, but this is not a problem because the difference counter is a counter for determining whether the difference counter has exceeded 19,000.

In addition, the embodiment has been described in which 0 is stored in the difference counter when the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is a negative value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the difference counter may not be updated, a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 may be stored in the difference counter, a fixed value of 19,000 or more may be stored in the difference counter, or the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game may be stored as is.

In the case of a mode in which the difference counter is not updated when the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game is subtracted from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game, and the value is a negative value, or in the case of a mode in which a fixed value exceeding 0 and less than 19,000 is stored in the difference counter, the progress of the game is not stopped because the value of the difference counter will not exceed 19,000 even if the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 is executed every game, and the correct value is stored in the difference counter when the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is subtracted from the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game becomes a positive value, so there is no problem. Also, in the case where the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is subtracted from the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game, and the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 may not be executed.

In the case of a mode in which a fixed value of 19,000 or more is stored in the difference counter when the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is negative, or the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is stored as is, if the process of determining whether the difference counter value exceeds 19,000 is executed every game, it may be determined that the value exceeds 19,000. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game is negative, there is no problem in not executing the process of determining whether the difference counter value exceeds 19,000.

The difference counter update process is similar to the above-mentioned process, and is executed at a predetermined timing between when all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (bet for the next game can be placed). The difference counter update process may include a payout medal count memory area update process and an inserted medal count memory area update process.

<Difference counter judgment process when the reel continuous operation device or the first type special reel is in operation>
Before executing the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000 as the difference counter judgment process, it may be possible to judge whether the reel continuous operation device is operating, whether the first type special reel is operating, or whether the reel continuous operation device or the first type special reel is operating, and if it is determined that they are operating in either case, the difference counter judgment process may not be executed.

This is because if the game stops while the continuous role operation device or the first type special role is operating (so-called during a bonus), it is highly likely that the player's motivation to play will be significantly diminished. Therefore, by allowing the game to proceed during the bonus even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, and stopping the game progress after the bonus ends, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment without diminishing their motivation to play. It is also possible to increase the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls won during the bonus.

Even in this type of configuration, the difference counter update process is performed even when the continuous reel operation device is operating or the first type special reel is operating. Therefore, it is preferable that the program processing order is configured as follows: "difference counter update process" → "processing to determine whether the continuous reel operation device is operating, whether the first type special reel is operating, and whether the continuous reel operation device or the first type special reel is operating" → "difference counter determination process."

Also, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, and the value of the difference counter falls below 19,000 when the bonus ends, the game may be stopped after the bonus ends.

In this case, even during a bonus, it is determined whether the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000, and if it is determined that the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1", "255", etc.) is stored in the stop flag (stop flag storage area), and when the bonus ends it is determined whether the value of the stop flag is the predetermined value, and if it is, the progress of the game is stopped. Note that when it is determined that the value of the stop flag is the predetermined value when the bonus ends and it is determined that it is not the predetermined value, the progress of the game is not stopped. Also, if the configuration stores a predetermined value in the stop flag even when it is determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 when not in a bonus, it can be configured to determine whether the stop flag is a predetermined value or not after each game ends, whether in a bonus or not, and to stop the game progress depending on the value of the stop flag. If the configuration does not store a predetermined value in the stop flag when it is determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 when not in a bonus, it can be configured to stop the game progress depending on whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, without determining whether the stop flag is a predetermined value or not after each game ends when not in a bonus.

The limit flag is not initialized by the initialization of the RWM when the power is turned on, but is configured to be cleared by the initialization of the RWM when the power is turned on and a setting change is made. The initialization conditions for the limit flag may include the initialization process of the RWM when the power is turned on in conjunction with the operation of the reset switch, RAM clear switch, or total score clear switch.

In the above embodiment, an example was described in which game progress is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured in such a way that game progress is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during an AT. However, as described above, since it is possible to extend the end condition of the AT (changing the number of AT executables by adding the number of games, etc.), game progress is not stopped only for ATs whose end condition is not extended.

When there are multiple prescribed numbers for starting a game, there are cases where the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one prescribed number, and when the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one prescribed number, it cannot be said that the end condition has changed, so the game is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000. Specifically, when three coins and two coins are possible as the prescribed numbers for starting a game, the end condition of the AT can be updated with three coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference number can be updated), but the end condition of the AT cannot be updated with two coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference number cannot be updated), and when the difference counter reaches 19,000 during the AT, the game is not stopped until the end condition of the AT is met.

This makes it possible to ensure that the player's interest in the game does not decrease, since the AT operates in the same way as a bonus, even if the gameplay makes the AT appear to be a bonus. It also increases the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls won during the bonus.

In addition, if the progress of the game is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus or AT, lotteries that are advantageous to the player, such as AT lotteries or CZ lotteries, will not be executed during the bonus or during play during the AT after the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000.

This will help to prevent players from becoming overly gambling-minded when it is certain that the game will stop.

It has been described that during a bonus, a determination is made as to whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, and if it is determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (e.g., any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in a stop flag (stop flag storage area), and when the bonus ends, a determination is made as to whether the value of the stop flag is the predetermined value, and if so, the progress of the game is stopped; however, a stop flag need not be provided.

Specifically, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the value of the difference counter may not be updated during subsequent play during the bonus, and a stoppage process may be executed based on the difference counter judgment process after the bonus ends. For example, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus (e.g., 19001), the difference counter may not be updated during subsequent play after the bonus ends, and the value of the difference counter at the end of the bonus may be set to exceed 19,000.

<Initializing the difference counter>
In the above-described embodiment, when the value of the difference counter is initialized at power-on, the initial value is set to 0 if the counter is an additive type, and 19,000 if the counter is a subtractive type. However, this is not limited to this, and any value may be set as the initial value.

For example, if the difference counter is a 2-byte counter, it can count from 0 to 65535. If the game is to be stopped when the difference from when the power was turned on exceeds 19,000, the difference counter must be able to count up to 19,000, so the initial value is set to 46,535 (65,535-19,000). In this case, the game is stopped when the difference counter exceeds 65,535, so it is easy to determine whether the difference from when the power was turned on has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag stores 1 or 0. The carry flag stores 1 even when it falls below 0, but as mentioned above, the theoretical maximum number of medals inserted in a day is around 30,000, so there is a sufficient margin of 16,535 (46,535-30,000). In reality, the number of medals is unlikely to decrease by 30,000 in a day because small prizes and replay prizes are won, so the probability of it falling below 0 is extremely low.

By configuring it in this way, the process of updating the difference counter can be simplified and the program size can be reduced.

For example, as described above, if the difference number exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the progress of the game may be stopped at the end of the bonus. In this case, if the difference number counter can only count up to 19,000, the increase during the bonus cannot be counted, so the initial value of the difference number counter when it is a 2-byte counter may be set to a value smaller than 46,535. For example, a value smaller than 46,535 may be 40,000. In this case, since there is a margin for winning up to a maximum of 6,535 coins after the difference number exceeds 19,000 coins, the difference number can be counted until the bonus ends even if the difference number exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus. Also, even if the difference number exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the AT can only win up to a maximum of 2,414 coins due to the relationship with the advantageous zone, so even if the difference number exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the difference number can be counted until the AT ends. When determining whether the difference number exceeds 19,000 when the initial value of the difference number counter is 40,000, it can be determined whether the value of the difference number counter exceeds 59,000. In addition, if the difference counter value exceeds 59,000, it will determine whether the game is in a bonus state, and if so, the game will continue to progress until the bonus ends.

Although an example has been given in which the initial value of the difference counter is a value smaller than 46535, it is preferable to set the initial value to a value (32767 or greater) greater than half the maximum value (65535) that can be counted with two bytes. This is because when the setting value of a gaming machine is a value that indicates the smallest ball payout rate (for example, setting value 1), the ball payout rate is often designed to be below 100%, making it more likely that the difference number will decrease rather than increase. For this reason, by setting the initial value of the difference counter to a value greater than half the maximum value that can be counted, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the value of the difference counter will become 0, making it easier to achieve normal operation in the market.

It is also possible that the difference counter does not count the difference correctly when it exceeds 19,000. In this case, even if the initial value of the difference counter is set to 46,535, the game will not be stopped even if the difference exceeds 19,000 during the bonus. In this case, if the difference counter exceeds 65,535 (if it is determined that it has exceeded 65,535, or if it is determined that 1 has been stored in the carry flag), a predetermined value is stored in the stop flag, and whether or not to stop the game progress is determined depending on whether the stop flag for each game is at a predetermined value. In this way, if the difference exceeds 19,000 during the bonus, the difference counter will exceed 65,535 and count from 0, but since whether or not to stop the game progress is determined depending on the stop flag, it is possible to achieve normal operation overall, even though the value of the difference counter is not normal.

Although the difference counter has been described as subtracting the number of medals inserted and adding the number of medals paid out, it may also be configured to do the opposite, adding the number of medals inserted and subtracting the number of medals paid out. In this case, the initial value of the difference counter may be set to 19,000, or a value between 19,000 and 32,766 inclusive.

Although the difference counter has been explained as a 2-byte counter, it can also be a 3-byte or 4-byte counter. If the difference counter is a 3-byte counter, the initial value can be set to 16758215 so that the carry flag will store 1 when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins. By making it 3 bytes or more, even if there are gaming parlors that do not turn off the power to gaming machines, and the set value is always below 100% and 10,000 games are played every day, the difference counter will not fall below 0 for several years, further reducing the possibility of malfunctions in the market.

<Regarding external signal output based on the value of the difference counter>
When the value of the difference counter is updated in the stop monitoring process and reaches a specific value (18,900 in this embodiment) just before the specified value (19,000 in this embodiment) at which the stop process is executed, a process is executed to output a test interrupt request signal to the test IF board.

This allows the gaming machine test to be interrupted before the gaming machine reaches a dead end and game progress stops during testing, and when testing is interrupted, the tester can initialize the value of the difference counter by turning the power off and then back on to the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine test to continue until the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 again. In other words, by turning the power off and back on when the difference counter value is 18,900, it is possible to prevent game progress from stopping until the value of the difference counter effectively exceeds 37,900, and to achieve stable testing.

Note that the specific value just before the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed (19,000 in this embodiment) is set to 18,900, but this is not limited to this, and any value between 9,500, which is half the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed, and 18,985, which is the value at which the stop processing is not executed even if it is the maximum payout number, may be set to the specific value (for example, 18,500).

In addition, in this embodiment, a process is executed to output a test interruption request signal to interrupt the test, but any signal may be output as long as it is transmitted to the tester. As a result, the signal output to the test IF board when a specific value is reached before the predetermined value at which the cut-off process is executed may be referred to as a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal), and the process for outputting to the test IF board may be referred to as a process for outputting a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal).

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the value of the difference counter>
The main control means is configured to be able to transmit information based on the value of the difference counter to the sub-control means, thereby making it possible to notify the player before the progress of the game stops.

For example, when the remaining difference of 100 coins exceeds 19,000 coins, the LCD display may display "100 coins remaining", play an ending effect, or play a sound. Then, each time the remaining difference is updated and the remaining difference decreases, the remaining difference display is updated to "90 coins remaining", "85 coins remaining", etc. When the remaining difference exceeds 19,000 coins, the player can be given a sense of accomplishment by displaying a congratulatory message such as "Complete" or "Congratulations", or playing a sound. A state in which such a sub-control means displays the remaining difference until the end of the game, plays an ending effect, or plays a sound, or a state in which the remaining difference until the end of the game is not displayed but an ending effect or sound related to the end of the game is played is referred to as an operation advance notice state (related to the end of the game). Note that the operation advance notice state is a state related to the sub-control means.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, which increases the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference exceeds 19,000 sheets with a difference of 100 sheets remaining, and the LCD display shows the remaining difference as "100 sheets remaining," if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100 sheets, the remaining difference display can be erased (made non-display). When the remaining difference again becomes 100 sheets, the LCD display will show the remaining difference as "100 sheets remaining."

This prevents the difference from dropping and causing the remaining difference display to not disappear, which can discourage players from playing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and the game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Also, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment will not be hindered by the disappearance of the celebration display, and a decrease in interest in the game will be prevented.

The ending performance or sound may be a continuous performance with a storyline, or may be a still image. Even in this case, the ending performance or sound can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below a threshold that triggers the execution of the ending performance or sound, so that the ending performance or sound is not executed more than necessary.

In addition, when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, if a congratulatory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops, there is a possibility that players who are unaware of the existence of the limiting process may lose their motivation to play. Therefore, a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Performance in the operation advance notice state>
The display mode on the display device in the operation notice state may be as shown in Fig. 54. In Fig. 54, as the effect images in the normal state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means) which is neither the operation notice state nor the end state, the lion and girl character display, the heart effect display, the dialogue display "Today was fun," and the total number of acquisition display "TOTAL: 18,000 coins" are performed. In addition to the effect images displayed in the normal state, the remaining difference display "The complete function will be activated soon. 100 coins remaining until activation" is performed as the effect images in the operation notice state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means). In addition, as the presentation image in the limit notification state (state where the game progress has stopped), the presentation image displayed in the normal state and the operation notice notification state is not displayed, and instead, a black background and a limit display (notification regarding the limit processing, limit notification) of "Complete function has been activated" are displayed. Note that the total number of wins display in the normal state does not need to be displayed all the time, but is displayed when the total number of wins reaches or exceeds a predetermined threshold (for example, 18000 shown in FIG. 54, or 18900 which is the value for sending a test interruption request signal to the test IF board).

In the operation preview notification state, the remaining difference display prevents the player from seeing all of the total wins display, part of the girl character display, and all of the effect display. However, the display area of the remaining difference display is smaller than 50% of the full screen display area, so the player can generally see the performance image being executed. Note that in Figure 54, the transparency (transparency) of the remaining difference display is set to 0%, so the display of layers behind the remaining difference display cannot be seen, but the transparency of the remaining difference display can be set to any value between 10% and 90%. This makes it possible to see both the remaining difference display and the performance image.

In addition, while the remaining difference display in the operation advance notification state is displayed at the top of the display area of the display device, this is not limited to the above, and the remaining difference display may be displayed at the bottom or center of the display area of the display device. However, if displayed at the bottom or center, there is a possibility that it may overlap with the display area of various information displays (not shown, display of number of game medals, display of number awarded, or display of number of bets) and most of the presentation images. Therefore, by setting the transparency of the remaining difference display to any value between 20% and 90%, the player can be allowed to see the various information displays and presentation images.

In addition, when any of the AT end conditions (for example, the number of AT play times, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigation times) are met during the activation notice state, the addiction prevention display is displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. This allows the player to see the addiction prevention display rather than the remaining difference display, effectively preventing addiction to the game.

Also, contrary to the above-mentioned embodiment, when any of the AT end conditions (for example, the number of AT play times, the difference during the AT, or the number of AT navigation times) is met in the operation advance notification state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the addiction prevention display. This allows the player to quickly visually confirm the remaining difference until the play is stopped.

In addition, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution plays, the difference during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) is met in the activation notice state, the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display may be displayed in different display areas. This allows the player to view both pieces of information. Note that in this case, if the display area of the anti-addiction display and the remaining difference display are configured to be displayed in a display area that would normally overlap, the display area of the anti-addiction display may be changed, or the display area of the remaining difference display may be changed. Also, the display areas of the anti-addiction display and the remaining difference display may be predetermined to be display areas that do not overlap even when displayed simultaneously.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit, a notification is issued to encourage counting (counting switch prompting display), so when the total score threshold is reached or an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit during the operation advance notification state, both the remaining difference display and the counting switch prompting display are displayed. This allows the player to be aware of both the remaining difference display and the need to operate the counting switch.

In addition, when the total score threshold has been reached or an abnormality has occurred in the total score upper limit during the activation notification state, the counting switch prompting display may be displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. In this case, when the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompting display is being displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment), the remaining difference display is displayed. This allows the total score threshold reaching state to be cancelled by operating the counting switch promptly, and then allows the player to become aware of the remaining difference display.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the activation notice state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the count switch prompt display. This provides a sense of satisfaction when the player wants to prioritize recognition of the remaining difference.

<Performance in the end notification state>
In the limit notification state, the lion and girl character displays, the effect display, the dialogue display, and the total number of wins display are all invisible. Also, the limit display is displayed instead of the remaining difference display. In Fig. 54, the limit display is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device, but the performance image is not displayed (the transparency of the limit display is 0%), so it may be displayed anywhere, including the top or bottom of the display area.

The limit display in the limit notification state may be 50% or more of the display area of the entire screen. However, when other information is displayed (such as a display indicating that the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub-switch or a warning display), it is desirable for the limit display in the limit notification state to be any value between 50% and 90% of the display area of the entire screen.

In the game limit notification state in FIG. 54, no congratulatory display is displayed, but a congratulatory display using a character may be displayed instead of a black background image. However, even when the congratulatory display is displayed, the in-game presentation image is not displayed.

In addition, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT end conditions (e.g., the number of AT play times, the difference in the number of AT play times, or the number of AT navigation times) are not met but the limit conditions are met), and the limit display is displayed, an anti-addiction display may be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the anti-addiction display that would normally be displayed on the AT end screen from not being displayed. The anti-addiction display at this time may be in the same display form and for the same display time as when it is displayed on the AT end screen, or in a different display form and for a different display time than when it is displayed on the AT end screen. In addition, the display area of the anti-addiction display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display area of the limit display, but if the anti-addiction display is configured to be hidden (not visible) for a predetermined time, the display area of the anti-addiction display and the display area of the limit display may overlap.

Also, contrary to the above-mentioned embodiment, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT end conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is executed, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit condition is met), the addiction prevention display does not need to be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the limit state has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the limit display.

In addition, even if a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT's ending conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is executed, the difference in the number of times during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit conditions are met), and the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the limit display is displayed, if any of the AT's ending conditions are met and the limit conditions are met (when any of the AT's ending conditions and the limit conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the AT has ended even when the limit state is reached, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT's ending conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is executed, the difference in the number of times during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit conditions are met), the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the limit display is displayed, and even when any of the AT's ending conditions are met and the limit conditions are met (when any of the AT's ending conditions and the limit conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may not be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the limit state has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the limit display.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or when there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit, a notification (counting switch prompting display) is issued to encourage counting, so when the stop condition is met in the total score threshold reached state or when there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit, both the counting switch prompting display and the stop display are displayed. This allows the player to recognize both that the game has stopped and that the counting switch should be operated.

In addition, when the limiting condition is met in the total score threshold reached state or in the total score upper limit abnormality, the counting switch prompting display may be displayed in priority over the limiting display. In this case, when the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompting display is displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment), the limiting display is displayed. This allows the total score threshold reached state to be released by quickly operating the counting switch, and the player can then recognize that they are in a limiting state.

In addition, when the stop condition is met in the total score threshold reached state or in the total score upper limit abnormality, if the counting switch prompting display is displayed in priority to the stop display, the counting switch prompting display may be continued to be displayed even after the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompting display is displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment). For example, the counting switch prompting display may be continued to be displayed until the counting switch is operated and the total score becomes 0. Then, after the total score becomes 0, the stop display is displayed. This makes it possible to notify the player that the counting switch must be operated (to count all the total score), and to make the player recognize that the game is then stopped. Note that, when the counting switch is operated and the total score falls below the threshold, and the counting process is stopped by releasing the counting switch before the total score becomes 0, the display of the counting switch prompting display may be terminated and the stop display may be displayed, or the counting switch prompting display may be continued to be displayed.

In addition, when the stop condition is met in the total score threshold reached state or total score upper limit abnormality, the stop display may be displayed in priority over the counting switch prompt display. Since the stop display displays the counting switch prompt display as a warning display (described later), the counting switch prompt display related to the stop display is displayed even if the counting switch prompt display related to the total score threshold reached state or total score upper limit abnormality is not displayed, so it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the same information being displayed twice.

<Regarding the processing of the main control means or the sub-control means during the termination processing>
When the main control means executes the stop processing, the sub-control means notifies the player that the progress of the game has stopped (stop notification).

As a limit notification, in addition to the congratulatory display described above, a limit display or sound such as "The complete function has been activated", "The limit state has been reached", or "The game has ended" as shown in FIG. 54 may be executed. The limit display may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the limit display or sound may be executed after the congratulatory display is displayed and the congratulatory display is ended. In addition, a warning display (various switch prompting displays) such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch" or sound may also be executed together with the limit display.

To notify the end of the period, a stop process may be executed before the congratulatory display is executed and the congratulatory display may be displayed during the stop process, or a freeze may be executed for a predetermined period before the stop process is executed, the congratulatory display may be displayed during the predetermined period, and the stop display may be displayed when the stop process is executed after the predetermined period.

In addition, when a limit display is displayed after a blessing display, the warning display will not be displayed while the blessing display is being executed, but will be displayed when the limit display is executed.

This prevents players from forgetting to operate the settlement switch or counting switch, and does not hinder the sense of accomplishment that comes from executing the congratulatory display, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

During the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text sound such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning sound such as "Please press the settlement switch" and "Please press the counting switch" are not output, and the device is silent. During the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text sound such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning sound such as "Please press the settlement switch" and "Please press the counting switch" may be output at a volume lower than the volume during error notification.

By configuring it in this way, players are less likely to have a negative impression of the dead end state and are more likely to recognize it as something to aim for, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the functions of the sub-switches managed by the sub-control means are enabled during the limit notification. For this reason, even during the limit process (limit notification), the menu screen or the volume change screen can be opened by operating the sub-switches. Note that the volume that can be changed from the volume change screen does not include the volume related to the limit notification, so the volume cannot be changed during the limit notification.

In addition, by opening a menu screen during the limit-play process and displaying a two-dimensional code including the game history, a service (a so-called "game machine linked service") can be provided to the player in which the game history is read by a mobile device and saved on a server. Note that since the limit-play display is being displayed on the display device, the two-dimensional code is displayed in a specified area in the center of the display device's screen when displayed from the menu screen except when the limit-play notification is in progress. However, since the specified area overlaps with the limit-play notification when the limit-play notification is in progress, the display area of the two-dimensional code during the limit-play notification is displayed in an area that is different from the specified area and does not overlap with the limit-play notification.

As another way of displaying the limit indication and the two-dimensional code, even if the display areas of the limit indication and the two-dimensional code overlap, the limit indication and the two-dimensional code may be displayed alternately, making it possible to read the two-dimensional code while issuing a limit notification.

In addition, the stop notification will not end due to the passage of time during the stop process. In other words, the stop notification will continue until the stop state is released (until a setting change process or RWM abnormality process is performed).

During the termination process, even if an event occurs that could be one of the specified recoverable errors described above, the specified error may not be detected, or the specified error may be detected but the specified error processing may not be executed. In either case, the system is configured not to notify the user of the specified error.

As mentioned above, this is because the stop processing is looped during the stop processing, so even if a specific error is detected in the interrupt processing, the specific error processing in the main loop processing is not executed. Note that if interrupt processing is prohibited during the stop processing, the specific error will not be detected.

This makes it possible to prevent the trouble of having to clear an error when the game cannot continue by executing a stop process, reducing the workload of game parlor staff.

Note that if the system is configured to execute a specified error process within an interrupt process, the specified error process will be executed even during stop processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specified error process from being executed during stop processing by determining whether stop processing is in progress before executing the specified error process and not executing the specified error process if stop processing is in progress. This can also be achieved by prohibiting interrupt processing during stop processing.

In addition, considering that fraud can be detected quickly by executing a specified error process even during the stop process, the configuration may be such that a specified error process can be executed during the stop process.

In this case, interrupt processing is permitted even during the stop processing, and when a specified error is detected during the interrupt processing, a specified error processing is executed within the interrupt processing to notify the specified error, or when a specified error is detected during the stop processing, the specified error processing is executed, and the specified error notification processing is executed during the specified error processing in the loop processing of the stop processing after the specified error is detected during the interrupt processing.

By doing this, fraudulent processing can be carried out even during the termination process, preventing fraudulent activity.

Note that communication with the lending unit continues even while the stop process is being executed, and the lending unit is notified that the stop process is being executed by outputting a security signal for gaming machine fraud 1 in the hall control/fraud monitoring information, and a complete signal. The security signal is a signal that is output due to a setting change, setting confirmation, fraud detection, or stop process.

Specifically, the security signal is bit 5 of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) included in the hall control/fraud monitoring information in the gaming machine information notification, and when the stop-play process is executed, bit 6 of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control), which is the completion signal, becomes 1, and when bit 6 of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) becomes 1, bit 5 of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control), which is the security signal, becomes 1.

By doing this, the amusement center can be notified that the stop-play process has been executed, allowing the amusement center to take appropriate action.

The complete signal stops outputting 30 seconds after the game has stopped (complete signal OFF), but the output time of the complete signal is configured to be longer than the output interval of the hall control and fraud monitoring information x 2 (300 ms x 2 = 600 ms). This is because the complete signal is information included in the gaming machine fraud 1 of the hall control and fraud monitoring information, so if the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information overlap, the transmission timing of the hall control and fraud monitoring information will be delayed by up to 600 ms. If the output time of the complete signal is 300 ms, if the transmission timing of the hall control and fraud monitoring information overlaps with the gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information, the hall control and fraud monitoring information cannot be transmitted, and the complete signal may be OFF when it is time to transmit the hall control and fraud monitoring information next. To prevent such a situation, the output time of the complete signal is configured to be longer than the output interval of the hall control and fraud monitoring information x 2 (300 ms x 2 = 600 ms). Also, if the complete signal is turned ON immediately after the hall control/fraud monitoring information is sent, it may not be possible to send the complete signal to the rental unit even if it is turned ON for nearly 1200 ms (300 ms x 4 times), so it is preferable for the output time of the complete signal to be 1200 ms or more. Note that the output time of the complete signal is shorter than the output interval of the gaming machine performance information (180 seconds) and the output interval of the gaming machine installation information (60 seconds).

The output time of the complete signal is set to be longer than the time from when the rental unit is powered on until the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine can be received. In other words, it is within 30 seconds from when the rental unit is powered on until the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine can be received. This is to enable the complete signal to be output to the rental unit even if the start of the complete signal output and the rental unit are powered on at the same time. Note that if the gaming machine detects a VL abnormality and interrupts the output of the complete signal because the rental unit is powered off, there is no problem if the output time of the complete signal is shorter than the time from when the rental unit is powered on until the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine can be received.

<Other configurations related to the stop monitoring process or the stop process>
The end-of-use monitoring process and the end-of-use process may be configured to be executed outside the use area. Also, the end-of-use monitoring process may be configured to be executed outside the use area and the end-of-use process may be executed within the use area, or the end-of-use monitoring process and the end-of-use process may be configured to be executed within the use area.

The stoppage monitoring process and the stoppage process may also be executed outside the usage area of the main control board, or the stoppage monitoring process and the stoppage process may also be executed outside the usage area of the game medal count control board.

It is configured to continue executing the process to output an external signal during the termination process.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to notify the outside world that the game is being stopped, allowing the amusement center manager to quickly grasp the status of the gaming machine.

The limit notification may be given not only by the LCD display or sound output from the speaker, but also by the lighting of the LEDs on the frame lamp, lower panel lamp, number of coins acquired indicator, credit indicator, etc.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player that a game has stopped even on gaming machines that do not have a liquid crystal display.

<Processing for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media>
In the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine in which the advantageous zone ends when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 has been mainly described.

Here, to elaborate on the MY of the advantageous zone, the point where the number of balls dispensed is the lowest since the advantageous zone began is set as the base (0), and when the difference from that base exceeds "2400", the advantageous zone ends.

As a result, in one advantageous period, a player could only receive a maximum profit of the difference of "2414". Therefore, if a player spent a lot of gaming media while playing in an advantageous period, he or she could not get back the gaming media spent in that advantageous period, making the period less appealing to players.

For example, even if a game reaches a specified game state (such as an AT state) from a game in which the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone (the number of game media spent by the player) is -3000, the game ends if the MY of the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, so the maximum number of game media that could be acquired in one advantageous zone was only about 2400 (the game ended when the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone was about -600).

Therefore, rather than ending the advantageous zone when the MY of the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the system is configured so that the start of the advantageous zone is set as the starting point (0) and the advantageous zone ends when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2400).

Specifically, the total number of INs of gaming media in the favorable zone (also referred to as the total number of inserts or the total number of bets) and the total number of OUTs of gaming media in the favorable zone (also referred to as the total number of payouts or the total number of awards) are taken into consideration. In other words, the favorable zone is configured to end when the difference between the number of OUTs of gaming media in the favorable zone and the number of INs of gaming media in the favorable zone (hereinafter referred to as the difference in number of gaming media in the favorable zone) exceeds 2,400. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved playability compared to conventional machines while keeping gambling tendency within a certain range.

For example, if a certain game state (e.g., AT state) is reached from a certain game in which the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000, the advantageous zone can be ended when the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, starting from the start of the advantageous zone. Therefore, it becomes possible to obtain a maximum of approximately 5400 gaming media from a game in which the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000 (the difference in the gaming media in one advantageous zone becomes +2400, and the advantageous zone ends).

In addition, if the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2,400), it is acceptable to end the advantageous zone at a value less than this predetermined number. In other words, when the start of the advantageous zone is taken as the starting point (0), the maximum difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone becomes a predetermined number (more precisely, the predetermined number + α (α is the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game)).

In addition, even if the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous zone can also be ended if any end condition is met before the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds the predetermined number.

Below, we will use diagrams to explain the specific process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media.

<<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (addition version)>>
55 is a diagram showing an example of a process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of game media. This process corresponds to a modified example of the advantageous zone clear counter management process of FIG. 46, FIG. 47, or FIG. 48.

In Figure 55, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is not cleared by turning the power on or off. In addition, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by clearing the RWM when the favorable zone ends. In addition, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by clearing the RWM when the settings are changed. In addition, the value is not cleared if the limit counter (difference counter) has reached a limit state.

In the following explanation, the advantageous section difference counter is configured with 2 bytes, but the advantageous section difference counter may be configured with 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in "favorable zone clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is not below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

As mentioned above, the advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

In "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the answer is NO. Specifically, the answer is NO if the carry flag is not 1. In other words, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is NO, it means that a value of 1 or greater is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for the current game. In other words, this means that the current game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

When asking "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?", the determination is made according to the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, the transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores the information indicating the transition to the advantageous zone. Also, for example, if the specification is such that the transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (game in the normal zone) and the game state of the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores the game state of the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not according to information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the result is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the result is NO.

In "saving the initial value of the favorable zone clear counter", the initial value is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. This initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one favorable zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, but may be any value that is determined in advance. For example, a number of games that cannot be played in one day (for example, 65535) may be set. By configuring in this way, the program can be shared among gaming machines with a maximum number of games in the favorable zone of 1500, a maximum number of games in the favorable zone of 3000, and a maximum number of games in the favorable zone that is not substantially set (65535 is not the number of games that can be played in one day, so it is substantially unlimited).

In "Set initial value of favorable zone difference counter", the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 63135 (65535-2400) and stored in the HL register.

The initial value of 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400" corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone at which the favorable zone ends from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte storage area (corresponding to the size of the storage area of the favorable zone difference counter). Note that in this example, the condition for ending the favorable zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the favorable zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the favorable zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the favorable zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeds 4800, the initial value is set to 60735 (65535-4800).

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference number counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 16774815 (16777215-2400).

The effect of setting the initial value as "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone" will be described later.

"Before decrement of favorable zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the favorable zone clear counter was 1 before "favorable zone clear counter -1" was performed. For example, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the favorable zone clear counter has a value of 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before advantageous zone clear counter subtraction = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", a process is performed to store the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter in a specified register (e.g. HL register).

In "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a game based on a replay), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the answer is NO.
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the answer is NO.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the IN number minus the OUT number (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the result of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, then the A register will have a value of 249 and the carry flag will have a value of 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, the number of bets will be treated as the number of INs for the current game, even if it was the number of bets set by the automatic bet.

On the other hand, for the IN number and OUT number, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "IN number < OUT number?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the OUT number.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", we calculated the IN number - the OUT number, but we could also determine it by OUT number - IN number. In other words, it would be sufficient if we could use the IN number and the OUT number to calculate the difference in the number of game media for the current game.

In "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the value of the calculation result (IN number - OUT number) of "IN number < OUT number?" is subtracted from the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, HL register). Note that if a carry occurs due to "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register = 65535 and the carry flag = 1. Note that 2-3 = -1, but a register cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the HL register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.

When "favorable section difference number counter < 0", "favorable section difference number counter subtraction" is used to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. If a carry has occurred, it is judged as YES, and if a carry has not occurred, it is judged as NO. In the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, a) it is judged as YES if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0. Also, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, b) it is judged as NO if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 1. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, c) it is judged as NO if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 3.

When "favourable section difference counter < 0" returns YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Setting the lower limit of the favorable section difference counter", if a carryover occurs due to "Subtracting the favorable section difference counter", a predetermined lower limit (0) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). In the above example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 2, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, then "Subtracting the favorable section difference counter" causes the HL register to = 65535. In such a case, "Setting the lower limit of the favorable section difference counter" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, the lower limit value of 0 is stored in the HL register, making it possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Note that even if "Set advantageous zone difference counter lower limit value" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set advantageous zone difference counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 55 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that, although FIG. 55 includes the process of "Set lower limit of favorable section difference counter", the process of "Set lower limit of favorable section difference counter" may not be included. Specifically, when "Favorable section difference counter < 0" is judged as YES, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 2, and the IN number and OUT number of the game are a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter may be set to 2 (the same value as the value of the favorable section difference counter of the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values with digits dropped) from being stored in the "Favorable section difference counter". In addition, since the process corresponding to "Set lower limit of favorable section difference counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a downgrade occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction," the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated using the value at the time of the downgrade, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In "Favourable Zone Difference Counter Addition", the complement of the result of the calculation "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then added to the HL register.

The complement in "advantageous section difference counter addition" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by a single instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 2+7 is calculated, and 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2+7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), so the carry flag is 0.

In addition, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65530,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register = 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 65530 + 7 is calculated, and 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530 + 7 is 65537, but since it exceeds 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carry, the carry flag becomes 1.

In "save favorable zone difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if 63135 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 63135 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activation" is YES, the value of the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save favorable zone difference counter" stores the same value as the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if "Is favorable zone difference counter < 0?" returns NO, the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "save favorable zone difference counter" stores the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the gaming media for the current game from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit (0) is stored in the HL register, so the lower limit (0) is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, after "adding favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by adding the difference number of the media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) to the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by adding the difference number of the game media for the current game to the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the favorable zone difference number counter.

In "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?", it is determined whether the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it is determined as YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it is determined as NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition". On the other hand, if a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag becomes 1 once, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", it is possible to determine whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is directly compared to a constant (2400).

In this way, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", whether the carry flag is 1 determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 63135 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area of the favorable zone difference counter). In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone exceeds 2400, it will exceed 65535, and the carry flag will be set to 1.

In addition, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 63135, a situation in which the value of the favorable zone difference counter is 13135 means that, with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0), the difference is -50000.

As described above, by storing 63135 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone", the program capacity for determining whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2400 can be reduced. Also, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -63135 as the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. Note that although an example is given of storing 63135 as the initial value, values other than 63135 can be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

In "RWM initialization", all parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function are updated to 0, and the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated. Parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. Then, by updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be a game in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. In the game in the advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be a game in the advantageous zone (the advantageous zone does not end).

In other words, if an abnormal value is stored in the HL register due to a carryover, it is possible to calculate the difference number of the favorable zone as accurately as possible by storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register. Note that even if "Set favorable zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the favorable zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the favorable zone. In other words, even in play after "Set favorable zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 55 is executed as long as the favorable zone continues.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", the OUT number is subtracted from the IN number, but it may be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. In the case where the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number, when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as NO (when a borrow occurs in the A register), in "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the complement is calculated by a predetermined calculation and stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game), and then the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter). In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" is NO, it is sufficient to be configured to subtract the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game from the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

Similarly, if the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is configured, then when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES (when no carryover occurs in the A register), the "advantageous section difference number counter addition" can simply add the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming media in the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, it is sufficient to be configured to add the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game from the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter when "IN number < OUT number?" is NO.

<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (subtraction version)>
56 is a diagram showing an example of a process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of game media. This process corresponds to a modified example of the advantageous zone clear counter management process of FIG. 46, FIG. 47, or FIG. 48.

In FIG. 56, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is not cleared by turning the power on or off. In addition, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by clearing the RWM when the favorable zone ends. In addition, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by clearing the RWM when the settings are changed. In addition, the value is not cleared if the limit counter has reached a limit state.

In the following explanation, the advantageous section difference counter is configured with 2 bytes, but the advantageous section difference counter may be configured with 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in "favorable zone clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is not below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

As mentioned above, the advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

In "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the answer is NO. Specifically, the answer is NO if the carry flag is not 1. In other words, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is NO, it means that a value of 1 or greater is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for the current game. In other words, this means that the current game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

When asking "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?", the determination is made according to the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, the transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores the information indicating the transition to the advantageous zone. Also, for example, if the specification is such that the transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (game in the normal zone) and the game state of the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores the game state of the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not according to information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the result is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the result is NO.

In "saving the initial value of the favorable zone clear counter", an initial value is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. This initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one favorable zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, but may be any value that is determined in advance. For example, a number of games that cannot be played in one day (for example, 65535) may be set. By configuring in this way, the program can be shared among gaming machines with a maximum number of games in the favorable zone of 1500, a maximum number of games in the favorable zone of 3000, and a maximum number of games in the favorable zone that is not substantially set (65535 is not the number of games that can be played in one day, so it is substantially unlimited).

In "Set initial value of favorable section difference counter", the initial value to be stored in the favorable section difference counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 2400 and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 2400 is the value "2400" corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone. Note that in this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800, the initial value is set to 4800.

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference number counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 2400.

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that is set as the end condition of the advantageous zone" will be described later.

"Before decrement of favorable zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the favorable zone clear counter was 1 before "favorable zone clear counter -1" was performed. For example, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the favorable zone clear counter has a value of 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before advantageous zone clear counter subtraction = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", a process is performed to store the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter in a specified register (e.g. HL register).

In "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a game based on a replay), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the answer is NO.
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the answer is NO.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the IN number minus the OUT number (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the result of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, then the A register will have a value of 249 and the carry flag will have a value of 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, the number of bets will be treated as the number of INs for the current game, even if it was the number of bets set by the automatic bet.

On the other hand, for the IN number and OUT number, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "IN number < OUT number?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the OUT number.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", we calculated the IN number - the OUT number, but we could also determine it by OUT number - IN number. In other words, it would be sufficient if we could use the IN number and the OUT number to calculate the difference in the number of game media for the current game.

In "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the result of the calculation "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number) is added to the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, HL register). If a carry occurs due to "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register is 1 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and becomes 1.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 0.
c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the HL register value is 65534 and the carry flag value is 0.

In "Advantageous section difference number counter > upper limit value", "advantageous section difference number counter addition" determines whether a carry has occurred. If a carry has occurred, it is judged as YES, and if a carry has not occurred, it is judged as NO. In the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as YES if a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0. Also, in the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as YES if b) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 1. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as NO if c) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 3.

If "Favourable section difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Set favorable section difference counter upper limit value", if a carry occurs due to "Add favorable section difference counter", a predetermined upper limit value (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (HL register in this embodiment). In the above example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 65534, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, then "Subtract favorable section difference counter" causes the HL register to = 1. In such a case, "Set favorable section difference counter upper limit value" stores 65535 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, it is possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible by storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register. Note that even if "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference number counter" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference number counter" is executed, the processing in FIG. 56 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that, although FIG. 56 includes the process of "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter", the process of "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter" may not be included. Specifically, when the result of "Favorable section difference counter>upper limit value" is determined to be YES, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 65534 and the number of INs and the number of OUTs of the game are a) IN number=3 and OUT number=0, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter may be set to 65534 (the same value as the value of the favorable section difference counter of the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values with digits dropped) from being stored in the "favorable section difference counter". In addition, since the process corresponding to "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition," the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated using the value at the time of the carry, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In "Advantageous section difference counter subtraction," the complement of the result of the calculation "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register.

The complement in "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived by subtracting the value of the 0-A register, or by a single instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 2-7 is calculated, and 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2-7 is less than 0 (because there is a carry), the carry flag is 1.

In addition, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 10,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 10-7 is calculated, and 3 is stored in the HL register. Note that 10-7 does not fall below 0 (there is no borrow), so the carry flag is 0.

In "save favorable zone difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if 2400 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 2400 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activation" is YES, the value of the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save favorable zone difference counter" stores the same value as the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter > upper limit?" is NO, the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "save favorable zone difference counter" stores the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so the upper limit (65535) is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, after "subtracting favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by subtracting the difference number of gaming media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) from the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by subtracting the difference number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the favorable zone difference number counter.

In "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?", it is determined whether the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it is determined as YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it is determined as NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when there is a carry down due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction". On the other hand, if there is a carry up due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition", the carry flag becomes 1 once, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", it is possible to determine whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is directly compared to a constant (2400).

In this way, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", whether the carry flag is 1 determines whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 2400 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 2400 is the value "2400" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone exceeds 2400, it will fall below 0, so the carry flag will become 1.

In addition, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 2400, a situation in which the value of the favorable zone difference counter is 30000 means that with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0), the difference is -27600.

As described above, by storing 2400 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that is set as the end condition of the advantageous zone," it is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2400. Also, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -63135 as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. Note that although an example is given of storing 2400 as the initial value, any value other than 2400 can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

In "RWM initialization", all parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function are updated to 0, and the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated. Parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. Then, by updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be a game in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. In the game in the advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be a game in the advantageous zone (the advantageous zone does not end).

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", the OUT number is subtracted from the IN number, but it may be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. In the case where the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number, if "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as NO (if a borrow occurs in the A register), then in "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the complement is calculated by a predetermined calculation and stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium in the current game), and then the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter) is added to the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium in the current game). In other words, if "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES, the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium in the current game is added to the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

Similarly, if the configuration is such that the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with YES (when no carryover occurs in the A register), then in the "favourable section difference number counter subtraction", the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming media in the current game) can be subtracted from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter) without calculating the complement in the "favourable section difference number counter subtraction". In other words, if "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with NO, then the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game can be subtracted from the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter.

As described above, specific processing for ending the advantageous period with the difference in the number of gaming media has been explained using Figures 55 and 56, but the present invention is not limited to these. In other words, it is sufficient if the advantageous period can end with the difference in the number of gaming media.

In addition, in Figures 55 and 56, one of the conditions for ending the advantageous zone is that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone does not have to be that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number. In that case, it is not necessary to provide the advantageous zone clear counter in Figures 55 and 56.

If a favorable zone clear counter is not provided, the process corresponding to "favorable zone clear counter -1" in Figures 55 and 56, the process corresponding to "before favorable zone clear counter subtraction = 0?", and the process corresponding to "save favorable zone clear counter initial value" may not be provided.

<Display Mode of Number of Game Media Display Section P9>
The display state of the game media number display section P9 is updated by subtracting the counted medal number or adding the lent medal number. This will be described in detail below.

<<Display Mode of the Gaming Media Number Display Section P9 by Counting>>
As described above, when the counting switch is operated, the counted number of medals is transferred to the lending unit.

At this time, if the counting switch is pressed briefly, the medal count will be "1", and if the counting switch is pressed for a long time (pressing the counting switch for 500 ms), the medal count will be "50".

The information on the number of counted medals is included in the count notification among the messages exchanged between the gaming machine and the rental unit every 300 ms, and even if the count switch is not operated and there are no counted medals, the counted medal number "0" is sent to the rental unit. In other words, the count notification can be sent from the gaming machine to the rental unit every 300 ms.

When the total score stored in the total score memory area is "100" and "100" is displayed on the game media number display unit P9, if the counting switch is operated with a short press (counting execution flag = 1 or counting button state = 1), the counted medal number "1" is not subtracted from the total score when the counting switch is released, so the total score at that time is "100" and "100" is displayed on the game media number display unit P9. Then, when the counting notification is issued, the total score stored in the total score memory area becomes "99" and "99" is displayed on the game media number display unit P9.

In addition, if the total score stored in the total score memory area is "100" and "100" is displayed on the game media number display unit P9 when the counting switch is operated with a short press, the counted medal number "1" is subtracted from the total score when the counting switch is released, the total score stored in the total score memory area becomes "99", and "99" may be displayed on the game media number display unit P9. Even in this case, the counted medal number "1" is sent to the rental unit as a counting notification sent after the counting switch is released.

In this way, by briefly pressing the counting switch, the counted medal number "1" is subtracted from the total score "100" stored in the total score memory area, and when the total score stored in the total score memory area becomes "99", the number of game medals displayed on the game media number display unit P9 is updated from "100" to "99". Also, at this timing, a counting sound can be output in response to a short press. The counting sound in response to a short press is a "pop" sound, and is output for approximately 100 ms.

When the total score stored in the total score memory area is "100" and "100" is displayed on the game media number display unit P9, if the counting switch is pressed and held down (counting execution flag = 2, or counting button state = 2), the counted medal number "50" is not subtracted from the total score 500 ms after the counting switch is pressed, so the total score at that time is "100" and "100" is displayed on the game media number display unit P9. Then, at the time of the counting notification, the total score stored in the total score memory area becomes "50", and "50" is then displayed on the game media number display unit P9.

In addition, if the total score stored in the total score memory area is "100" and "100" is displayed on the game media number display unit P9, and the counting switch is pressed and held (counting execution flag = 2, or counting button state = 2), the counted medal number "50" is subtracted from the total score 500 ms after the counting switch is pressed, the total score stored in the total score memory area becomes "50", and then "50" is displayed on the game media number display unit P9. Even in this case, the counted medal number "50" is sent to the lending unit as a counting notification sent after the counting switch is released.

In this way, when the counting switch is pressed and held down, the counted medal number "50" is subtracted from the total score "100" stored in the total score storage area, and the total score stored in the total score storage area becomes "50", the number of game medals displayed on the game media number display unit P9 is updated by decrementing the display from "100" → "99" → "98" → "97" → ... → "52" → "51" → "50". This decrement display period is approximately within 300 ms (sometimes called "within about 300 ms" or "approximately 300 ms"), which is an approximation of the output interval of the message communicated between the gaming machine and the rental unit, and the interval between long presses of the counting switch (from the second time onwards). In addition, the decrement display is updated at the same interval. In other words, the update interval from "100" to "99" and the update interval from "51" to "50" are approximately the same time, and are updated at approximately 6 ms intervals.

By configuring it in this way, the display on the game medium count display unit P9 is updated as quickly as possible (one message output interval, one long press interval) in response to updates to the total score stored in the total score memory area, while the display on the game medium count display unit P9 is decremented, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the decrement display period is approximately 300 ms, the counting interval due to the long press of the counting switch (timing of the second or subsequent count notification) is 300 ms, so even if the counting switch is long pressed for, for example, 2000 ms and the counting process due to the long press is performed six times (first long press judgment 500 ms + second or subsequent long press judgment 300 ms x 5 times), the decrement display on the game medium number display section P9 will be updated smoothly without interruption.

Note that the decrement display period of approximately 300 ms means that it is acceptable for the period to be less than or greater than 300 ms depending on the timing of executing the interrupt process that updates the display on the game medium count display section P9, and indicates that the period is within 300 ms ±10% (within 270 ms to 330 ms).

In addition, the decrement display period of the game media number display unit P9 due to a long press of the counting switch when the total score stored in the total score memory area is a value less than "50" is shorter than the decrement display period of the game media number display unit P9 due to a long press of the counting switch when the total score stored in the total score memory area is a value of "50" or more. In other words, the decrement display interval of the game medium number display unit P9 due to a long press of the counting switch does not change according to the number of counted medals, so the update interval in which the game medium number display unit P9 changes the game medal number from "100" to "99" due to a long press of the counting switch when "100" is displayed on the game medium number display unit P9, and the update interval in which the game medal number changes from "38" to "37" due to a long press of the counting switch when "38" is displayed on the game medium number display unit P9, are approximately the same time, and when comparing the period in which the game medium number display unit P9 decrements from "100" to "50" with the period in which the game medium number display unit P9 decrements from "38" to "0", the period in which the game medium number display unit P9 decrements from "38" to "0" is shorter.

By configuring it this way, the update interval for the decrement display becomes constant, so the player does not feel uncomfortable with the counting process, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who wants to count until the total score reaches "0" releases the counting switch before the total score reaches "0," resulting in the player being left with a remaining total score.

In addition, the time taken for the display on the game medium number display unit P9 to be subtracted from "50" to "49" by a long press of the counting switch when the total score stored in the total score memory area is "50" may be approximately the same as the time taken for the display on the game medium number display unit P9 to be subtracted from "50" to "49" by a short press of the counting switch when the total score stored in the total score memory area is "50", or the time taken for the display on the game medium number display unit P9 to be subtracted from "50" to "49" by a short press of the counting switch when the total score stored in the total score memory area is "50" may be longer (approximately 10 ms).

By making the display update time of the game medium number display unit P9 approximately the same for short and long presses of the counting switch, it is possible to eliminate any sense of incongruity felt by the player in the counting process. In addition, by making the display update time of the game medium number display unit P9 longer for short presses than for short and long presses of the counting switch, it is possible that the update is not realized if the time is the same for short presses, since long presses update at high speed. By making the update time longer for short presses, it is possible to make it easier to understand that "1" has been counted. However, if the update time for short presses is longer than necessary, it will cause the player to feel distrustful that the count may not have been completed, so it is desirable to design it to a time shorter than 300 ms (approximately 10 ms) until the update is completed by long presses (for example, the update from "50" to "0" is completed when decrementing the display from "50" to "49" to "1" to "0").

Here, when the gaming machine receives the counting switch and is able to count the total score, the gaming machine is able to output a counting sound.

In addition, a counting sound caused by a long press can be output when the total score stored in the total score memory area becomes "50" from "100". The counting sound caused by a long press is a "beep beep beep..." sound, and can be output over one or more of the following periods: the period during which the number of game medals displayed on the game medium number display unit P9 is decremented from "100" to "50", the period until the counting switch is released by a long press, or the period until the number of game medals displayed on the game medium number display unit P9 becomes "0" by counting. In other words, the counting sound caused by a long press can be output for at least 300 ms, which is the period for one long press.

The counting end sound may be output at one or more of the following times: when counting is performed by pressing and holding the counting switch and the counting switch is released, when counting is performed by pressing and holding the counting switch and the counting switch is released and the update of the number of game medals displayed on the game medium number display unit P9 is completed, or when counting is performed by pressing and holding the counting switch and the number of game medals displayed on the game medium number display unit P9 becomes "0". The counting end sound is a "ringing" sound that can be output for approximately 200 ms.

The counting end sound is configured not to be output when the counting switch is pressed briefly. In other words, the counting end sound is not output at any of the following times: when the counting switch is released after a short press, when counting is performed by short pressing the counting switch and updating of the number of game medals displayed on the game medium number display unit P9 is completed, and when counting is performed by short pressing the counting switch and the number of game medals displayed on the game medium number display unit P9 becomes "0."

By configuring it in this way, when the counting switch is pressed and held to count to "50," the display on the game medium number display section P9 ends within approximately 300 ms, but it is possible for the counting sound to be output for a length of 300 ms + α. 300 ms + α means that the counting sound is output until the counting switch is released, that the counting end sound is output, or that the counting sound itself is output for longer than 300 ms.

And by having the counting sound last longer than 300 ms, it is possible to give the player a longer sense of the counting taking place, which can add to the excitement of the presentation and increase the interest of the game.

<<Display Mode of the Display Section P9 of the Number of Gaming Media Loaned>>
As described above, when the lending switch of the lending unit is operated, the number of medals to be lent is transferred to the gaming machine.

When the rental switch of the rental unit is pressed once, it transmits the number of medals to be rented out for one time to the gaming machine. For example, if the rental switch is pressed for more than 500 ms, the number of medals to be rented out for one time is also transmitted to the gaming machine. This is to prevent a decrease in motivation to play, since the gaming center may charge a fee for rental, and if a player who does not want to rent out more than one time presses the switch for a long time and ends up renting out two times, the player will lose out. A player who wants to rent two times can simply operate the rental switch twice. The number of medals to be rented out for one operation of the rental switch can be changed in the settings of the rental unit, and the number of medals to be rented out for one rental fee of 1,000 yen can be set to "50", "49", "48", "47", "46", etc. The following explanation is based on the case where the number of medals to be rented out for one operation of the rental switch is set to "50".

The information on the number of loaned medals is included in the loan notification, which is one of the messages exchanged between the gaming machine and the loan unit every 300 ms. Even if the loan switch is not operated and there are no loaned medals, the number of loaned medals "0" is sent to the gaming machine. In other words, the loan notification can be sent from the loan unit to the gaming machine every 300 ms.

If the total score stored in the total score memory area is "100" and "100" is displayed on the game media number display unit P9 when the loan switch of the loan unit is operated, the number of loaned medals "50" is added to the total score at the time the loan switch is pressed and the game machine receives the loan notification, the total score at that time becomes "150", and then "150" is displayed on the game media number display unit P9.

In this way, when the total score stored in the total score memory area is increased by the operation of the lending switch to "100", the number of lending medals "50" is added, and the total score stored in the total score memory area becomes "150". The number of game medals displayed on the game media number display unit P9 is updated in increments from "100" → "101" → "102" → "103" → ... → "148" → "149" → "150". This increment display period is generally within 300 ms (sometimes called "within about 300 ms" or "approximately 300 ms"), which is an approximation of the output interval of the message communicated between the gaming machine and the lending unit, and the long press interval of the counting switch (from the second time onwards). The increment display is updated at the same interval. In other words, the update interval from "100" to "101" and the update interval from "149" to "150" are approximately the same time, and are updated at approximately 6 ms intervals.

Incidentally, even if the rental unit's rental medal count is set to 49 for a rental fee of 1,000 yen (a setting that sets the rental medal count to less than 50), the increment display is updated at the same interval.

By configuring it in this way, the display on the game medium count display unit P9 is updated as quickly as possible (one message output interval, one long press interval) in response to updates to the total score stored in the total score memory area, while the display on the game medium count display unit P9 is incremented, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the increment display period is approximately 300 ms, the lending interval due to repeated taps (continuous operations) of the lending switch is 300 ms, so even if the lending switch is repeatedly tapped and the lending process is performed multiple times, the increment display of the game medium count display section P9 will be updated smoothly and without interruption.

Note that the increment display period of approximately 300 ms or less means that it is acceptable for the period to fall below or exceed 300 ms depending on the timing of executing the interrupt process that updates the display of the game medium count display section P9, and indicates that the period is within 300 ms ±10% (within 270 ms to 330 ms).

Here, when the operation of the lending switch provided in the lending unit is accepted and the number of lent medals is transmitted from the lending unit to the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is able to add the number of lent medals to the total score, the gaming machine is able to output a lending sound.

When the total score stored in the total score memory area is "100", a lending notification is received and the lending sound can be output when the total score stored in the total score memory area becomes "150". The lending sound is a "beep beep..." sound, and the lending sound can be output by pressing and holding the button for the period during which the number of game medals displayed on the game media number display section P9 increments from "100" to "150". In other words, the lending sound can be output for at least approximately 300 ms.

In addition, a lending completion sound may be output when lending is performed by operating the lending switch and the number of lent medals has finished incrementing on the gaming media number display section P9. The lending completion sound is a "ping" sound that can be output for approximately 50 ms.

By configuring it in this way, when "50" is loaned by operating the loan switch, the display of the game medium count display section P9 ends within approximately 300 ms, but it is possible to output the loan sound for a length of 300 ms + α. "300 ms + α" refers to the case where a loan end sound is output, or the loan sound itself is output for longer than 300 ms.

And by allowing the lending sound to last longer than 300 ms, it is possible to give the player a longer indication that a loan has been made, which can add to the excitement of the presentation and increase the interest of the game.

<< Combination with other configurations >>
The combination of the display mode of the game medium number display section P9 and other configurations will be described.

When the settlement switch P6 is operated in a situation where the number of bets is stored in the bet number storage area of the gaming machine (when 1 bet has been placed, 2 bets have been placed, or 3 bets have been placed), a settlement sound is output.

The settlement sound is output each time the number of bets stored in the bet number memory area is updated, and when settling one bet, a "da" sound is output, when settling two bets, a "da-da-da" sound is output, and when settling three bets, a "da-da-da-da" sound is output.

Therefore, when the number of bets stored in the bet number memory area is "3" and the total points stored in the total points memory area is "100", if the operation of the settlement switch is accepted, the number of bets stored in the bet number memory area becomes "0", the 3 bet lamp, the 2 bet lamp, and the 1 bet lamp go out in sequence or approximately simultaneously, a settlement sound for 3 bets is output, and the total points stored in the total points memory area becomes "103". In this case, the number of bets stored in the bet number memory area may either go from "3" to "0", or "3" → "2" → "1" → "0". Also, the total points stored in the total points memory area may either go from "100" → "103", or "100" → "101" → "102" → "103".

In other words, the settlement sound can be output in response to an update of the number of bets stored in the bet number memory area, but is not output in response to an update of the total points stored in the total points memory area.

The settlement sound is a "dah" sound that can be output for 10 ms, and can be output for up to 30 ms for three bets.

For this reason, the output time of the settlement sound is shorter than the counting sound and the lending sound that are generated by pressing and holding the button.

Also, the settlement sound can be silent.

In this way, the counting sound and the lending sound can be output for a longer period than the settlement sound, making the counting sound and the lending sound more noticeable, giving the player a new joy and making the game more interesting.

Although the counting sound, the lending sound, and the settlement sound are different sounds, the standard volume of the counting sound, the lending sound, and the settlement sound may be different. The counting sound, the lending sound, and the settlement sound may be changeable or unchangeable depending on the player's volume setting, but in either case, the volume relationship remains the same: counting sound (long press) > counting sound (short press) > lending sound > settlement sound. This is because, if the counting process is configured to be possible even during lending or betting, such a volume relationship allows the player to recognize that counting has been performed regardless of the timing at which the counting switch is operated. Note that even if the counting process is not possible during lending or betting, the counting sound (long press) > counting sound (short press) > lending sound > settlement sound can be used to notify those around you that the counting process is being performed, so that if the counting process is performed for a long time due to fraud, it will be easier for those around you to notice.

In addition, when the number of loaned medals is transmitted from the loaning unit and the gaming machine adds the number of loaned medals to the total score, the received number of loaned medals may be added to the total score, or the received number of loaned medals may be added to the total score quickly, one at a time (at an update interval of less than 6 ms). In either case, the total score addition display displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 is incremented at 6 ms intervals as described above, and the total score addition display is completed within approximately 300 ms.

In addition, when the counting switch of the gaming machine is pressed and held down and the gaming machine subtracts the number of counted medals from the total score, the gaming machine may subtract the number of counted medals from the total score, or may subtract one at a time from the total score quickly (at an update interval of less than 6 ms). In either case, the subtraction display of the total score displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 is displayed as a decrement at 6 ms intervals as described above, and the subtraction display of the total score is completed within approximately 300 ms.

In addition, if the number of loaned medals is transmitted from the loaning unit and the gaming machine adds the number of loaned medals to the total score, and if a power outage occurs while the gaming machine is displaying an increment on the gaming media number display unit P9, the increment display will be resumed when the gaming machine's power is restored, or the value after the addition has been completed will be displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9.

In addition, if the counting switch of the gaming machine is pressed and held down and the gaming machine subtracts the number of counted medals from the total score, and if a power outage occurs while the decrement is being displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9, the decrement will be resumed when the gaming machine's power is restored, or the value after the subtraction has been completed will be displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9.

If a power outage occurs in the rental unit while the game medium count display section P9 is displaying an increment or a decrement, the gaming machine will continue to display the increment or decrement.

The contents of the messages exchanged between the gaming machine and the rental unit every 300 ms are configured to be sent or received in the following order: gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, and rental receipt result response. The hole control and fraud monitoring information, which is part of the gaming machine information notification, contains information related to the total score.

As described above, the total score stored in the total score memory area can be updated when the counting notification is sent, so the total score stored in the total score memory area when the counting notification is sent in the same message as the information regarding the total score when the gaming machine information notification is sent may differ from the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming medium number display unit P9.

Figure 59 shows the display contents of the gaming media number display section P9, the transmitted contents of the gaming machine information notification, and the transition of the total score stored in the total score memory area when the counting switch is pressed and counting processing is performed by pressing and holding.

In FIG. 59, initially, "200" is stored as the total score in the total score memory area, "200" is notified to the lending unit as information regarding the total score in the hall control/fraud monitoring information of the gaming machine information notification, "200" is displayed as the number of gaming medals on the gaming media number display section P9, and a long press of the counting switch has been detected (500 ms has elapsed since the counting switch was operated).

In this situation, when the time comes to issue a count notification, "50" is sent to the lending unit as the number of counted medals in the count notification, the number of counted medals is subtracted from the total score stored in the total score memory area, "150" is stored as the total score, and the gaming media number display section P9 begins to decrement the number of gaming medals from "200" to "199."

When the next gaming machine information notification is sent, "150" is stored as the total score in the total score memory area, "150" is notified to the lending unit as information regarding the total score in the hall control/fraud monitoring information of the gaming machine information notification, the number of gaming medals is still decremented on the gaming media number display unit P9 (the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 has not yet reached "150"), and a long press of the counting switch has been detected. Note that at this timing in FIG. 59, the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 is between "153" and "152", but is not limited to this and can be any value between "199" and "151".

When the next count notification is issued, "50" is sent to the lending unit as the number of counted medals in the count notification, the number of counted medals is subtracted from the total score stored in the total score memory area, "100" is stored as the total score, and the number of game medals displayed on the game media number display unit P9 begins to decrement from "150" to "149". At this time, the number of game medals displayed on the game media number display unit P9 is configured to already display "150". In other words, the decrement display on the game media number display unit P9 (the decrement display of the number of counted medals of "50" due to a long press of the count switch) ends between the count notification at one timing and the count notification at the next timing.

When the next gaming machine information notification is sent, "100" is stored as the total score in the total score memory area, "100" is notified to the lending unit as the information regarding the total score in the hall control/fraud monitoring information of the gaming machine information notification, and the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming medium number display unit P9 continues to be decremented (the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming medium number display unit P9 has not yet reached "100"), and the long press of the counting switch has not been detected. Note that at this timing in FIG. 59, the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming medium number display unit P9 is between "103" and "102", but is not limited to this and can be any value between "149" and "101".

Then, when the next count notification is due, "0" is sent to the lending unit as the number of counted medals in the count notification, the total score stored in the total score memory area is maintained at "100", and "100" is displayed as the number of game medals on the game media number display section P9.

By configuring it in this manner, the information regarding the total score contained in a certain message's gaming machine information notification (hall control/fraud monitoring information) will differ from the total score stored in the total score memory area after the counting notification of that certain message has been sent; however, since the current total score (the total score after subtracting the number of counted medals) can be sent to the lending unit at the timing of the gaming machine information notification of the next message after that certain message, the time during which the information stored in the gaming machine differs from the information sent to the outside can be kept to around 200 ms, minimizing the time difference in the information communicated between the gaming machine and the lending unit. In addition, after the count notification of the certain message is sent, the decrement display of the number of game medals displayed on the game media number display unit P9 begins, but by the time the count notification of the next message is sent, the decrement display has already ended, so the time during which the total score stored in the total score memory area differs from the number of game medals displayed on the game media number display unit P9 can be kept to approximately 300 ms or less, minimizing the time during which the total score stored in the total score memory area differs from the number of game medals displayed on the game media number display unit P9.

As described above, the total score stored in the total score memory area can be updated when a loan notification is received, so the total score stored in the total score memory area when a loan notification is received in the same message as the information regarding the total score when a gaming machine information notification is sent may differ from the number of gaming medals displayed in the gaming media number display section P9.

Figure 60 shows the display contents of the gaming media number display section P9, the transmitted contents of the gaming machine information notification, and the transition of the total score stored in the total score memory area when the lending switch is operated and the lending process is executed.

In FIG. 60, initially, "200" is stored as the total score in the total score memory area, "200" is notified to the lending unit as information regarding the total score in the hall control/fraud monitoring information of the gaming machine information notification, "200" is displayed as the number of gaming medals in the gaming media number display section P9, and the lending switch has been operated.

In this situation, when the time comes to issue a loan notification, "50" is sent to the gaming machine as the number of loaned medals in the loan notification (received by the gaming machine), the number of loaned medals is added to the total score stored in the total score memory area, "250" is stored as the total score, and the gaming media number display section P9 starts to increment the number of gaming medals from "200" to "201."

When it is time to send the next gaming machine information notification, "250" is stored as the total score in the total score memory area, "250" has been notified to the lending unit as information regarding the total score in the hall control/fraud monitoring information of the gaming machine information notification, the number of gaming medals is still incrementing on the gaming media number display unit P9 (the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 has not yet reached "250"), and the lending switch has been operated again. Note that at this timing in FIG. 60, the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 is any value between "201" and "249".

When the next loan notification is sent, "50" is sent to the gaming machine as the number of loaned medals in the loan notification (received by the gaming machine), the number of loaned medals is added to the total score stored in the total score memory area, "300" is stored as the total score, and the gaming media number display unit P9 starts to increment the number of gaming medals from "250" to "251". At this timing, the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 is configured to already display "250". In other words, the increment display on the gaming media number display unit P9 (the increment display of the number of loaned medals of "50" due to the operation of the loan switch) ends between the loan notification at one timing and the loan notification at the next timing.

When it is time to send the next gaming machine information notification, "300" is stored as the total score in the total score memory area, "300" has been notified to the lending unit as information regarding the total score in the hall control/fraud monitoring information of the gaming machine information notification, and the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 continues to increment (the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 has not yet reached "300"), and the operation of the lending switch has not been detected. Note that at this timing in Figure 60, the number of gaming medals displayed on the gaming media number display unit P9 is any value between "251" and "299".

Then, when the next lending notification is due, "0" is sent to the lending unit as the number of lending medals in the lending notification, the total score stored in the total score memory area is maintained at "300", and "300" is displayed as the number of gaming medals in the gaming media number display section P9.

By configuring it in this manner, the information regarding the total score contained in a certain message's gaming machine information notification (hall control/fraud monitoring information) will differ from the total score stored in the total score memory area after the loan notification of that certain message has been sent; however, since the current total score (total score after adding the number of loaned medals) can be sent to the loan unit at the timing of the gaming machine information notification of the next message after that certain message, the time during which the information stored in the gaming machine differs from the information sent to the outside can be kept to around 30 ms, minimizing the time difference in the information communicated between the gaming machine and the loan unit. In addition, after the lending notification of the certain message is received, the increment display of the number of game medals displayed on the game media number display unit P9 begins, but by the time the lending notification of the next message is received, the increment display has already ended, so the time during which the total score stored in the total score memory area and the number of game medals displayed on the game media number display unit P9 differ can be kept to approximately 300 ms or less, minimizing the time during which the total score stored in the total score memory area and the number of game medals displayed on the game media number display unit P9 differ.

In FIG. 60, both consecutive messages allow lending using the lending switch, but this is not limited to the above, and operation of the next lending button may be disabled for 500 ms after the lending switch is operated. In this case, the number of loaned medals in the loan notification will not be "50" in both consecutive messages. In other words, after a loan notification notifies the user that the number of loaned medals is "50", the next loan notification will notify the user that the number of loaned medals is "0".

By configuring it in this way, if the number of loaned medals received is "50" consecutively when a loan notification is received, this may indicate fraud, so the gaming machine can notify the user or the administrator via the loan unit.

The above describes the configuration of a slot machine (a reel-type gaming machine) as an example of a gaming machine, but the above configuration can be applied to various gaming models such as pachinko gaming machines and casino machines.

P: Gaming machine P1: Cabinet P2: Front door P3: Start switch P4: Stop switch P4C: Middle stop switch P4L: Left stop switch P4R: Right stop switch P5: Bet switch P5M: MAX bet switch P5O: 1 bet switch P6: Settlement switch P7: Counting switch P8E: Performance decision switch P8W: Performance selection switch P9: Number of gaming media display unit P10: Display window P11M: Image display device P11S: Image display device P12: Sub-control board P13: Number of gaming media display board P14DL: Lower left speaker P14DR: Lower right speaker P14UR: Upper right speaker P15: Main control board P16: Number of gaming media control board P17: Reel device board P18C: Middle reel P18L: Left reel P18R: Right reel

Claims (1)

A total score indicator;
A total score storage area;
The gaming machine and the rental unit can communicate with each other at a predetermined cycle.
The total score display is capable of displaying the total score stored in the total score storage area;
When a rental switch provided in the rental unit is operated, a predetermined number of rental points can be added to the total points stored in the total points storage area;
a predetermined sound can be output when the lending switch is operated to add a predetermined number of lending points to the total score stored in the total score storage area;
When the lending switch is operated to add and display a predetermined number of lending points on the total score display, the total score display can display the lending points in increments, the time required for the total score display to add the predetermined number of lending points is approximately within a predetermined period, and the output period of the predetermined sound when the number of game medals displayed on the game medal number display device is displayed in increments exceeds 300 ms.
In this game machine, the output time of the predetermined sound that can be output when the lending switch is operated to add and display a predetermined number of lending points on a total score display exceeds a predetermined time.

Images